Policy & Terms of use

Back to Library
Show Menu
Hide Menu

|

Boatinfo requires FlashPlayer 9 or newer to display this document!

Get Adobe Flash player



SERVICE MANUAL With Serial Numbers OG590000 and Above MODELS 135 • 150 OPTIMAX DIRECT FUEL INJECTION With Serial Numbers Printed in U.S.A. W1999, Mercury Marine 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Notice Throughout this publication, “Dangers”, “Warnings” and “Cautions” (accompanied by the International HAZARD Symbol ) are used to alert the mechanic to special instructions concerning a particular service or operation that may be hazardous if performed incorrectly or carelessly. OBSERVE THEM CAREFULLY! These “Safety Alerts” alone cannot eliminate the hazards that they signal. Strict compliance to these special instructions when performing the service, plus “Common Sense” operation, are major accident prevention measures. DANGER DANGER - Immediate hazards which WILL result in severe personal injury or death. WARNING WARNING - Hazards or unsafe practices which COULD result in severe personal in- jury or death. CAUTION Hazards or unsafe practices which could result in minor personal injury or product or property damage. Notice to Users of This Manual This service manual has been written and published by the Service Department of Mercury Marine to aid our dealers’ mechanics and company service personnel when servicing the products described herein. It is assumed that these personnel are familiar with the servicing procedures of these products, or like or similar products manufactured and marketed by Mercury Marine, that they have been trained in the recommended servicing procedures of these products which includes the use of mechanics’ common hand tools and the special Mercury Marine or recommended tools from other suppliers. We could not possibly know of and advise the service trade of all conceivable procedures by which a service might be performed and of the possible hazards and/or results of each method. We have not undertaken any such wide evaluation. Therefore, anyone who uses a service procedure and/or tool, which is not recommended by the manufacturer, first must completely satisfy himself that neither his nor the products safety will be endangered by the service procedure selected. All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are based on the latest product information available at the time of publication. As required, revisions to this manual will be sent to all dealers contracted by us to sell and/or service these products. It should be kept in mind, while working on the product, that the electrical system and ignition system are capable of violent and damaging short circuits or severe electrical shocks. When performing any work where electrical terminals could possibly be grounded or touched by the mechanic, the battery cables should be disconnected at the battery. Any time the intake or exhaust openings are exposed during service they should be covered to protect against accidental entrance of foreign material which could enter the cylinders and cause extensive internal damage when the engine is started. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page i It is important to note, during any maintenance procedure replacement fasteners must have the same measurements and strength as those removed. Numbers on the heads of the metric bolts and on the surfaces of metric nuts indicate their strength. American bolts use radial lines for this purpose, while most American nuts do not have strength markings. Mismatched or incorrect fasteners can result in damage or malfunction, or possibly personal injury. Therefore, fasteners removed should be saved for reuse in the same locations whenever possible. Where the fasteners are not satisfactory for re-use, care should be taken to select a replacement that matches the original. Cleanliness and Care of Outboard Motor A marine power product is a combination of many machined, honed, polished and lapped surfaces with tolerances that are measured in the ten thousands of an inch/mm. When any product component is serviced, care and cleanliness are important. Throughout this manual, it should be understood that proper cleaning, and protection of machined surfaces and friction areas is a part of the repair procedure. This is considered standard shop practice even if not specifically stated. Whenever components are removed for service, they should be retained in order. At the time of installation, they should be installed in the same locations and with the same mating surfaces as when removed. Personnel should not work on or under an outboard which is suspended. Outboards should be attached to work stands, or lowered to ground as soon as possible. We reserve the right to make changes to this manual without prior notification. Refer to dealer service bulletins for other pertinent information concerning the products described in this manual. Page Numbering Two number groups appear at the bottom of each page. The example below is self-explanatory. EXAMPLE: 90-855347 R1 JANUARY 1999 Page - 6A-7 Revision No. 1 Month of Printing Year of Printing Section Number Part of Section Letter Page Number Page ii 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Service Manual Outline Section 1 - General Information & Specifications A - Specifications B - Maintenance C - General Information D - Outboard Installation Section 2 - Electrical A - Ignition B - Charging & Starting System C - Timing, Synchronizing & Adjusting D - Wiring Diagrams Section 3 - Fuel System A - Fuel Pump B - Direct Fuel Injection C - Oil Injection D - Emissions Section 4 - Powerhead A - Powerhead B - Cooling Section 5 - Mid-Section A - Clamp/Swivel Brackets & Drive Shaft Housing B - Power Trim Section 6 - Gear Housing A - Right Hand Non-Ratcheting B - Left Hand Non-Ratcheting Section 7 - Attachments/Control Linkage General Information & Specifications Ignition System Fuel System Powerhead Mid-Section Gear Housing Attachment/Control Linkage 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page iii SPECIFICATIONS IMPORTANT INFORMATION Section 1A - Specifications Table of Contents 1 A Master Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1A-1 Master Specifications Model 135/150 DFI HORSEPOWER (KW) Model 135 Model 150 Full Throttle RPM (135/150) Idle RPM (In Gear) (135/150) RPM Limiter 1998 Model 135/150 1999 Model 135 1999 Model 150 135 (100.7 kw) 150 (111.8 kw) 5000 - 5600 550 ± 25 5750 5750 5950 OUTBOARD WEIGHT Model 135/150 – 20 in. (50.8cm) Shaft – 25 in. (63.5cm) Shaft 440.0 lbs. (200.0 kg) 452.0 lbs. (206.0 kg) CYLINDER BLOCK Type Displacement V-6 Cylinder, Two Cycle, Direct Injected 153 cu. in. (2508 cc) 60° Vee STROKE Length (All Models) 2.65 in. (67.3 mm) CYLINDER BORE Diameter (Std) Diameter 0.015 in. Oversize Taper/Out of Round/Wear Maximum Bore Type 3.501 in. (88.925 mm) 3.516 in. (89.306 mm) 0.003 in. (0.076 mm) Cast Iron CRANKSHAFT Maximum Runout 0.006 in. (0.152 mm) PISTON Piston Type Diameter Standard Diameter 0.015 in. Oversize Aluminum 3.4925 in. ± .0005 in. (88.7095 mm ± 0.0127 mm) 3.5075 in. ± 0.0005 in. (89.0905 mm ± 0.0127 mm) PISTON DIAMETER Dimension “A” at Right Angle (90°) to Piston Pin .700 17.78mm 3.4925 in. ± .0005 in. (88.7095 mm ± .0127 mm) Using a micrometer, measure dimension “A” at location shown. Dimension “A” should be 3.4925 in. ± .0005 for a STANDARD size piston (new) Dimension “A” will be 0.001 – 0.0015 less if coating is worn off piston (used) REEDS Reed Stand 0pen (Max.) 0.020 in. (0.50 mm) 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1A-1 SPECIFICATIONS Model 135/150 DFI MID Power Trim (Total Tilt Range) 73° SECTION Power Trim (Tilt Range) 19° Steering Pivot Range 60° Tilt Pin Adjustment Positions 4 Allowable Transom Thickness 2-3/8 in. (6.03 cm) GEAR HOUSING Gear Ratio Standard Ratio – 135 Standard Ratio – 150 Optional High Altitude Ratio – 135 – 150 Gearcase Capacity Pinion Height Forward Gear Backlash – 1.87:1 – 2.00:1 – 2.30:1 Reverse Gear Backlash – Standard/Counter Rotation Water Pressure @ RPM 2.00:1 12/24 Teeth 1.87:1 15/28 Teeth 2.30:1 13/30 Teeth 2.00:1 12/24 Teeth 22.5 fl. oz. (665.4 ml) 0.025 in. (0.635 mm) . 0.017 in. – 0.028 in. (0.431 mm – 0.711 mm) 0.015 in. – 0.022 in. (0.381 mm – 0.558 mm) 0.018 in. – 0.023 in. (0.460 mm – 0.584 mm) 0.030 in. to 0.050 in. (0.076 mm to 0.127 mm) 12 PSI Minimum @ 5500 RPM DIRECT INJECTION Injectors – Quantity – Injectors are Crank Angle Driven by ECM – #2 Cylinder – #4 Cylinder – #6 Cylinder – #1 Cylinder – #3 Cylinder – #5 Cylinder Fuel Line Pressure @ Injectors Air Pressure High Pressure Electric Fuel Pump Amperage Draw Low Pressure Electric Fuel Pump Amperage Draw Low Pressure Electric Fuel Pump Output Fuel Injector Ohm Resistance Direct Injector Ohm Resistance Fuel/Air Differential 6 WHT/RED + RED/WHT Leads WHT/YEL + YEL/WHT Leads WHT/PPL + PPL/WHT Leads WHT/BRN + BRN/WHT Leads WHT/ORG + ORG/WHT Leads WHT/DRK BLU + DRK BLU/WHT Leads 89 ± 2 psi (613.5 ± 13.8 kPa) 79 ± 2 psi (544.0 ± 13.8 kPa) 5 – 9 Amperes 1 – 2 Amperes 6 – 9 psi (41.37 – 62.04 kPa) 1.8 ± 0.1 W 1.3 ± 0.3 W 10 psi (68.5 kPa) Page 1A-2 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 SPECIFICATIONS Master Specifications Model 135/150 DFI FUEL SYSTEM Fuel Recommended Gasoline Recommended Oil Gasoline/Oil Ratio – @ Idle – @ WOT Fuel Pressure Crankcase Pump – @ Idle – @ WOT Gasoline w/Oil Injection Unleaded 87 Octane Minimum Quicksilver TC-W3 Premium Plus 2 Cycle Outboard Oil 300 – 400:1 60:1 2 psi (13.8 kPa) 8 psi (55.2 kPa) STARTING SYSTEM Electric Start – All Models Starter Draw (Under Load) Starter Draw (No Load) Minimum Brush Length Battery Rating 165 Amperes 30 Amperes 0.25 in. (65.4 mm) 1000 (Minimum) Marine Cranking Amps (MCA) 750 (Minimum) Cold Cranking Amps (CCA) IGNITION SYSTEM Type Spark Plug Type Spark Plug Gap Maximum Timing Idle Timing Throttle Position Sensor 1 (Inner TPS) @ Idle @ W.O.T Throttle Position Sensor 2 (Outer TPS) @ Idle @ W.O.T Crank Position Sensor Air Gap Digital Inductive NGK PZFR5F-11 NGK ZFR5F-11 or Champion RC12MC4 0.040 in. (1.0 mm) Not Adjustable; Controlled by ECM Not Adjustable; Controlled by ECM 3.70 – 4.90 VDC 0.30 – 1.80 VDC 0.10 – 1.50 VDC 3.20 – 4.90 VDC 0.025 in. – 0.040 in. (0.635 mm – 1.01 mm) CHARGING SYSTEM Alternator Output (Regulated) Brush Length Voltage Output Regulator Current Draw 32 - 38 Amperes @ 2000 RPM @ Battery* 52 - 60 Amperes @ 2000 RPM @ Alternator Std Exposed Length: 0.413 in. (10.5 mm) Min. Exposed Length: 0.059 in. (1.5 mm) 13.5 to 15.1 Volts 0.15 mA (Ign. Switch Off) 30.0 mA (Ign. Switch On) *Amperage listed is when battery is in a discharged state. If battery is fully charged, amperage readings will be less. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1A-3 MAINTENANCE IMPORTANT INFORMATION Section 1B - Maintenance Table of Contents 1 B Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-1 Gear Case Lubricant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-1 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-2 Quicksilver Lubricant/Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-2 Inspection and Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . 1B-4 Before Each Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-4 After Each Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-4 Every 100 Hours of Use or Once yearly, Whichever occurs first . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-4 Flushing Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-5 Flushing Cooling System – Using Cowl Flush Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-5 Flushing Cooling System – Using Flushing Attachment 44357A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-5 Specifications Gear Case Lubricant Capacity Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-6 Fuel Line Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-6 Water Separating Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-6 Corrosion Control Anode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-7 Spark Plug Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-7 Battery Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-8 Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-8 Compressor Air intake Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-9 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-9 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-9 Lubrication Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-9 Checking Power Trim Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-11 Gear Case Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-12 Storage Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-13 Gear Case Ratio Capacity 1.87:1 22.5 fl. oz. (665ml) 2.00:1 22.5 fl. oz. (665ml) 2.30:1 22.5 fl. oz. (665ml) 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1B-1 MAINTENANCE Special Tools 1. Grease Gun 91-37299A1 2. Flushing Attachment 44357A2 Quicksilver Lubricant/Sealant 1. Gear Lubricant - Premium Blend 92-19007A24 Page 1B-2 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 MAINTENANCE 2. Anti-Corrosion Grease 92-78376A6 3. 2-4-C Marine Lubricant with Teflon 92-825407A12 4. SAE 30W Motor Oil (Obtain Locally) 5. Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid 91-90100A12) 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1B-3 MAINTENANCE Inspection and Maintenance Schedule Before Each Use 1. Check that lanyard stop switch stops the engine. 2. Visually inspect the fuel system for deterioration or leaks. 3. Check outboard for tightness on transom. 4. Check steering system for binding or loose components. 5. Visually check steering link rod fasteners for proper tightness. 6. Check propeller blades for damage. After Each Use 1. Flush out the outboard cooling system if operating in salt or polluted water. 2. Wash off all salt deposits and flush out the exhaust outlet of the propeller and gear case with fresh water if operating in salt water. Every 100 Hours of Use or Once yearly, Whichever occurs first 1. Lubricate all lubrication points. Lubricate more frequently when used in salt water. 2. Inspect and clean spark plugs. 3. Replace water separating fuel filter 4. Replace compressor air intake filter. 5. Check corrosion control anodes. Check more frequently when used in salt water. 6. Drain and replace gear case lubricant. 7. Lubricate splines on the drive shaft.* 8. Check power trim fluid. 9. Inspect battery. 10. Check control cable adjustments.* 11. Remove engine deposits with Quicksilver Power Tune Engine Cleaner. 12. Check tightness of bolts, nuts, and other fasteners. 13. Replace water pump impeller (more often if overheating occurs or reduced water pressure is noted).* * These items should be serviced by an authorized dealer. Page 1B-4 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 MAINTENANCE Flushing Engine Flushing Cooling System – Using Cowl Flush Plug Flush the internal water passages of the outboard with fresh water after each use in salt, polluted or muddy water. This will help prevent a buildup of deposits from clogging the internal water passages. NOTE: Engine can be stopped or running at idle speed when flushing the cooling system. Do not flush engine using a water system that exceeds 45 psi. 1. Remove the plug from fitting in the bottom cowl. 2. Attach a water hose to the fitting. Turn water on and flush for 3 to 5 minutes. Flushing Cooling System – Using Flushing Attachment 44357A2 WARNING When flushing, verify that area in vicinity of propeller is clear and that no person is standing nearby – to avoid possible injury. It is recommended to remove propeller as a precautionary measure. 1. Install Quicksilver Flushing Attachment 44357A2 (or equivalent tool) on the gear housing from the FRONT side, positioning the rubber cups over the water intake openings. 2. Connect hose [1/2 in. (12.7mm) I.D. or larger] between flushing attachment and water tap. IMPORTANT: To prevent water pump damage, do not start or run engine unless cooling water is flowing. 3. With the outboard in the normal operating position (vertical), partially open water tap (IT IS NOT NECESSARY to use full water pressure) and adjust water flow so that there is a significant water loss around the rubber cups. 4. Start engine and idle in NEUTRAL. Increase engine speed, not to exceed 2500 RPM. 5. Flush or service engine as required. Verify adequate cooling water is provided. a. Water must be discharged thru “tell tale.” IMPORTANT: Prevent engine overheating. If water flow is insufficient, stop engine and determine cause before continuing. b. Flush until discharge water is clear. In salt-water areas, run outboard 3 to 5 minutes. c. Stop engine before turning off water. 6. Stop engine, turn water off and remove flushing attachment from gear housing. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1B-5 MAINTENANCE IMPORTANT: While and after flushing, keep outboard in upright position until all water has drained from drive shaft housing to prevent water from entering the powerhead via drive shaft housing and exhaust ports. Fuel System WARNING Avoid serious injury or death from gasoline fire or explosion. Carefully follow all fuel system service instructions. Always stop the engine and DO NOT smoke or allow open flames or sparks in the area while servicing any part of the fuel system. Before servicing any part of the fuel system, stop engine and disconnect the battery. Drain the fuel system completely. Use an approved container to collect and store fuel. Wipe up any spillage immediately. Material used to contain spillage must be disposed of in an ap- proved receptacle. Any fuel system service must be performed in a well ventilated area. Inspect any completed service work for sign of fuel leakage. Fuel Line Inspection Visually inspect the fuel line and primer bulb for cracks, swelling, leaks, hardness, or other signs of deterioration or damage. If any of these conditions is found, the fuel line or primer bulb must be replaced. Water Separating Fuel Filter NOTE: The warning system will turn on when water in the fuel filter reaches the full level. 1. This filter removes moisture and also debris from the fuel. If the filter becomes filled with water, the water can be removed. If the filter becomes plugged with debris, the filter must be replaced with a new filter. Remove and replace filter as follows: a. Turn ignition key switch to OFF position. b. Disconnect wire at bottom of filter. c. Remove filter by turning the filter in the direction of the arrow (clockwise). Tip the filter to drain fluid in a suitable container. d. Lubricate the sealing ring on the filter with oil. Thread on the filter and tighten securely by hand. Reconnect the wire to the filter. IMPORTANT: Visually inspect for fuel leakage from the filter by squeezing the primer bulb until firm, forcing fuel into the filter. Page 1B-6 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 MAINTENANCE Corrosion Control Anode The gear case has two corrosion control anodes (a). Another anode (b) is installed on the bottom of the transom bracket assembly. An anode helps protect the outboard against galvanic corrosion by sacrificing its metal to be slowly eroded instead of the outboard metals. a b Each anode requires periodic inspection especially in salt water which will accelerate the erosion. To maintain this corrosion protection, always replace the anode before it is completely eroded. Never paint or apply a protective coating on the anode as this will reduce effectiveness of the anode. Spark Plug Inspection Inspect spark plugs at the recommended intervals. 1. Remove the spark plug leads by twisting the rubber boots slightly and pull off. Inspect spark plug boots and replace if cracked. 2. Remove the spark plugs to inspect and clean. Replace spark plug if electrode is worn or the insulator is rough, cracked, broken, blistered or fouled. 3. Set the spark plug gap. See Specification Chart in General Information Section. 4. Before reinstalling spark plugs, clean away dirt on the spark plug seats. Install plugs finger tight, and tighten 1/4 turn or torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 N·m). 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1B-7 MAINTENANCE Battery Inspection The battery should be inspected at periodic intervals to ensure proper engine starting capability. IMPORTANT: Read the safety and maintenance instructions which accompany your battery. 1. Turn off the engine before servicing the battery. 2. Add water as necessary to keep the battery full. 3. Make sure the battery is secure against movement. 4. Battery cable terminals should be clean, tight, and correctly installed. Positive to positive and negative to negative. 5. Make sure the battery is equipped with a nonconductive shield to prevent accidental shorting of battery terminals. Fuse Replacement IMPORTANT: Always carry spare SFE 20 AMP fuses. The electrical wiring circuits on the outboard are protected from overload by fuses in the wiring. If a fuse is blown, try to locate and correct the cause of the overload. If the cause is not found, the fuse may blow again. 1. Open the fuse holder and look at the silver colored band inside the fuse. If band is broken, replace the fuse. Replace fuse with a new fuse with the same rating. 2. The fuses and circuits are identified as follows: a. Electric Fuel Pump Circuit – SFE 20 AMP Fuse. b. Fuel/Air Injector Circuits – SFE 20 AMP Fuse. c. Starting Circuit – SFE 20 AMP Fuse. d. Ignition Coil/Oil Pump Circuit – SFE 20 AMP Fuse. a b c d Page 1B-8 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 MAINTENANCE Compressor Air intake Filter The filter should be changed every 100 hours of operation, or once a season. Never run the engine without the air filter. Removal 1. Remove flywheel cover from the engine. Snap out the retainer (a) and remove filter (b). a b Installation Install filter (b) into the cover. Secure filter into cover with retainer (a). Lubrication Points Lubricate Point 1 with Quicksilver Special Lubricant 101. 1. Trim Rod Ball Ends – Turn the ball ends to work the lubricant into the ball sockets. 1 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1B-9 MAINTENANCE Lubricate Point 2 with Quicksilver Anti-Corrosion Grease or 2-4-C Marine Lubricant with Teflon. 2. Propeller Shaft – Refer to Propeller Replacement for removal and installation of the propeller. Coat the entire propeller shaft with lubricant to prevent the propeller hub from corroding and seizing to the shaft. 2 Lubricate Points 3 thru 6 with Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine Lubricant with Teflon or Special Lubricate 101. 3. Swivel Bracket – Lubricate through fitting. 4. Tilt Support Lever – Lubricate through fitting. 3 4 5. Tilt Tube – Lubricate through fitting. 5 Page 1B-10 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 MAINTENANCE 6. Steering Cable Grease Fitting (If Equipped) – Rotate steering wheel to fully retract the steering cable end (a) into the outboard tilt tube. Lubricate through fitting (b). WARNING The end of the steering cable must be fully retracted into the outboard tilt tube before adding lubricant. Adding lubricant to steering cable when fully extended could cause steering cable to become hydraulically locked. An hydraulically locked steering cable will cause loss of steering control, possibly resulting in serious injury or death. Lubricate Points 7 With Light Weight Oil. 7. Steering Link Rod Pivot Points – Lubricate pivot points. 6-b 6-a 7 Checking Power Trim Fluid 8. Tilt outboard to the full up position and engage the tilt support lock. 8 9. Remove fill cap and check fluid level. The fluid level should be even with the bottom of the fill hole. Add Quicksilver Power Trim & Steering Fluid. If not available, use automotive (ATF) automatic transmission fluid. 9 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1B-11 MAINTENANCE Gear Case Lubrication When adding or changing gear case lubricant, visually check for the presence of water in the lubricant. If water is present, it may have settled to the bottom and will drain out prior to the lubricant, or it may be mixed with the lubricant, giving it a milky colored appearance. If water is noticed, have the gear case checked by your dealer.Water in the lubricant may result in premature bearing failure or, in freezing temperatures, will turn to ice and damage the gear case. Whenever you remove the fill/drain plug, examine the magnetic end for metal particles. A small amount of metal filings or fine metal particles indicates normal gear wear. An excessive amount of metal filings or larger particles (chips) may indicate abnormal gear wear and should be checked by an authorized dealer. DRAINING GEAR CASE NOTE: Some models may have the vent and fill/drain plugs on the opposite side. 1. Place outboard in a vertical operating position. 2. Place drain pan below outboard. 3. Remove vent plug and fill/drain plug and drain lubricant. 2 1 3 GEAR CASE LUBRICANT CAPACITY Gear case lubricant capacity is approximately 22.5 fl. oz. (666 ml). Page 1B-12 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 MAINTENANCE CHECKING GEAR CASE LUBRICANT LEVEL AND REFILLING GEAR CASE NOTE: Some models may have the vent and fill/drain plugs on the opposite side. 1. Place outboard in a vertical operating position. 2. Remove vent plug (a). 3. Place lubricant tube (b) into the fill hole and add lubricant until it appears at the vent hole (c). IMPORTANT: Replace sealing washers if damaged. 4. Stop adding lubricant. Install the vent plug and sealing washer (a) before removing the lubricant tube. 5. Remove lubricant tube and reinstall cleaned fill/drain plug and sealing washer (d). 1-5 a c d b STORAGE PREPARATION The major consideration in preparing your outboard for storage is to protect it from rust, corrosion, and damage caused by freezing of trapped water. The following storage procedures should be followed to prepare your outboard for out of season storage or prolonged storage (two months or longer). CAUTION Never start or run your outboard (even momentarily) without water circulating through all the cooling water intake holes in the gear case to prevent damage to the water pump (running dry) or overheating of the engine. FUEL SYSTEM IMPORTANT: Gasoline containing alcohol (ethanol or methanol) can cause a formation of acid during storage and can damage the fuel system. If the gasoline be- ing used contains alcohol, it is advisable to drain as much of the remaining gasoline as possible from the fuel tank, remote fuel line, and engine fuel system. Fill the fuel system (tank, hoses, fuel pumps, and fuel injection systems) with treated (stabilized) fuel to help prevent formation of varnish and gum. Proceed with following instructions. 1. Portable Fuel Tank – Pour the required amount of Quicksilver Gasoline Stabilizer (follow instructions on container) into fuel tank. Tip fuel tank back and forth to mix stabilizer with the fuel. 2. Permanently Installed Fuel Tank – Pour the required amount of Quicksilver Gasoline Stabilizer (follow instructions on container) into a separate container and mix with approximately one quart (one liter) of gasoline. Pour this mixture into fuel tank. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1B-13 MAINTENANCE 3. Place the outboard in water or connect flushing attachment for circulating cooling water. Run the engine at 2000 rpm for 25 minutes to allow treated fuel to fill the fuel system. PROTECTING INTERNAL ENGINE COMPONENTS NOTE: Make sure the fuel system has been prepared for storage. 1. Remove the spark plugs and add approximately one ounce (30ml) of engine oil into each spark plug hole. Rotate the flywheel manually several times to distribute the oil in the cylinders. Reinstall spark plugs. 2. Remove the water separating fuel filter and empty contents into a suitable container. Refer to Maintenance Section for removal and installation of filter. Replace fuel filter annually, or every 100 Hours of operation, or if large amount of fuel contamination is present. PROTECTING EXTERNAL OUTBOARD COMPONENTS 1. Lubricate all outboard components listed in the Inspection and Maintenance Schedule. 2. Touch up any paint nicks. See your dealer for touch-up paint. 3. Spray Quicksilver Corrosion Guard on external metal surfaces (except corrosion control anodes). GEAR CASE Drain and refill the gear case lubricant (refer to maintenance procedure). POSITIONING OUTBOARD FOR STORAGE Store outboard in an upright (vertical) position to allow water to drain out of outboard. CAUTION If outboard is stored tilted up in freezing temperature, trapped cooling water or rain water that may have entered the propeller exhaust outlet in the gear case could freeze and cause damage to the outboard. BATTERY STORAGE 1. Follow the battery manufacturers instructions for storage and recharging. 2. Remove the battery from the boat and check water level. Recharge if necessary. 3. Store the battery in a cool, dry place. 4. Periodically check the water level and recharge the battery during storage. Page 1B-14 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 GENERAL INFORMATION IMPORTANT INFORMATION Section 1C - General Information Table of Contents 1 C Serial Number Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-1 Conditions Affecting Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-2 Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-2 Boat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-3 Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-4 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-6 Engine Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-6 Following Complete Submersion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-7 Salt Water Submersion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-7 Submerged While Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-7 Model 135/150 DFI Powerhead Front View . . . . . . 1C-9 Model 135/150 DFI Powerhead Starboard View 1C-10 Model 135/150 DFI Powerhead Port View . . . . . . 1C-11 Model 135/150 DFI Powerhead Top View . . . . . . 1C-12 Model 135/150 DFI Powerhead Aft View . . . . . . 1C-13 Painting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-14 Cleaning & Painting Aluminum Propellers & Gear Housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-14 Decal Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-15 Decal Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-15 Instructions for “Wet” Application . . . . . . . . . . 1C-15 Serial Number Location The engine serial number is located on the lower starboard side of the engine block. A serial number is also located on the starboard side of the swivel bracket. a e a-Serial Number b-Model Year c-Model Description d-Year Manufactured e-Certified Europe Insignia 19XX OGXXXXXX XXXX c b XX d 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1C-1 GENERAL INFORMATION Conditions Affecting Performance Weather Weather conditions exert a profound effect on power output of internal combustion engines. Established horsepower ratings refer to the power that the engine will produce at its rated RPM under a specific combination of weather conditions. Corporations internationally have settled on adoption of I.S.O. (International Standards Organization) engine test standards, as set forth in I.S.O. 3046 standardizing the computation of horsepower from data obtained on the dynamometer, correcting all values to the power that the engine will produce at sea level, at 30% relative humidity at 77° F (25°C) temperature and a barometric pressure of 29.61 inches of mercury. Summer conditions of high temperature, low barometric pressure and high humidity all combine to reduce engine power. This is reflected in decreased boat speeds – as much as 2 or 3 mph. Nothing will regain this speed for the boater but the coming of cool, dry weather. In pointing out the consequences of weather effects, an engine – running on a hot, humid summer day – may lose as much as 14% of the horsepower it would produce on a dry, brisk spring or fall day. The horsepower that any internal combustion engine produces depends upon the density of the air that it consumes and this density is dependent upon the temperature of the air, its barometric pressure and water vapor (or humidity) content. Accompanying this weather-inspired loss of power is a second but more subtle loss. At rigging time in early spring, the engine was equipped with a propeller that allowed the engine to run within its recommended RPM range at full throttle. With the coming of the summer weather and the consequent drop in available horsepower, this propeller will, in effect, become too large. Consequently, the engine operates at less than its recommended RPM. Due to the horsepower/RPM characteristics of an engine, this will result in further loss of horsepower at the propeller with another decrease in boat speed. This secondary loss can be regained by switching to a smaller pitch propeller that allows the engine to run again at recommended RPM. Page 1C-2 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 GENERAL INFORMATION To obtain optimum engine performance under changing weather conditions, the engine MUST be propped to allow it to operate at or near the top end of the recommended maximum RPM range at wide-open-throttle with a normal boat load. This will allow the engine to develop full power while operating in an RPM range that discourages damaging detonation. Boat WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION 1. Proper positioning of the weight inside the boat (persons and gear) has a significant effect on the boat’s performance, for example: a. Shifting weight to the rear (stern) (1.) Generally increases top speed. (2.) If in excess, can cause the boat to porpoise. (3.) Can make the bow bounce excessively in choppy water. (4.) Will increase the danger of the following wave splashing into the boat when coming off plane. b. Shifting weight to the front (bow) (1.) Improves ease of planing off. (2.) Generally improves rough water ride. (3.) If excessive, can make the boat veer back-and-forth (bow steer). BOTTOM 1. Boat Bottom: For maximum speed, a boat bottom should be nearly a flat plane where it contacts the water and particularly straight and smooth in fore-and-aft direction. a. Hook: Exists when bottom is concave in fore-and -aft direction when viewed from the side. When boat is planing, “hook” causes more lift on bottom near transom and allows bow to drop, thus greatly increasing wetted surface and reducing boat speed. “Hook” frequently is caused by supporting boat too far ahead of transom while hauling on a trailer or during storage. b. Rocker: The reverse of hook and much less common. “Rocker” exists if bottom is convex in fore-and-aft direction when viewed from the side, and boat has strong tendency to porpoise. c. Surface Roughness: Moss, barnacles, etc., on boat or corrosion of motor’s gear housing increase skin friction and cause speed loss. Clean surfaces when necessary. d. Gear Housing: If unit is left in the water, marine vegetation may accumulate over a period of time. This growth MUST be removed from unit before operation, as it may clog the water inlet holes in the gear housing and cause the engine to overheat. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1C-3 GENERAL INFORMATION Trim TRIMMING OUTBOARD “OUT” (“UP”) WARNING Excessive trim “out” also may reduce the stability of some high speed hulls. To correct instability at high speed, reduce the power GRADUALLY and trim the outboard “in” slightly before resuming high speed operation. (Rapid reduction in power will cause a sudden change of steering torque and may cause additional momentary boat instability.) 1. Will lift bow of boat, generally increasing top speed. 2. Transfers steering torque harder to left on single outboard installations below 23 in. (584mm) transom height. 3. Increases clearance over submerged objects. 4. In excess, can cause porpoising and/or ventilation. 5. If trimmed out beyond the water pickup, reduced water supply can cause overheating resulting in engine damage. Page 1C-4 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 GENERAL INFORMATION TRIMMING OUTBOARD “IN” (“DOWN”) CHARACTERISTICS WARNING Excessive speed at minimum trim “in” may cause undesirable and/or unsafe steering conditions. Each boat should be tested for handling characteristics after any adjustment is made to the angle (trim adjustment bolt relocation.) 1. Will help planing off, particularly with a heavy load. 2. Usually improves ride in choppy water. 3. In excess, can cause boat to veer to the left or right (bow steer). 4. Transfers steering torque harder to right (or less to the left) on single outboard installations. 5. Improves planing speed acceleration (by moving trim adjustment bolt one hole closer to transom). WATER ABSORPTION It is imperative that all through hull fasteners be coated with a quality marine sealer at time of installation. Water intrusion into the transom core and/or inner hull will result in additional boat weight (reduced boat performance), hull decay and eventual structural failure. CAVITATION Cavitation is caused by water vapor bubbles forming either from a sharp edge or angle on the gear case or from an irregularity in the propeller blade itself. These vapor bubbles flow back and collapse when striking the surface of the propeller blade resulting in the erosion of the propeller blade surface. If allowed to continue, eventual blade failure (break- age) will occur. VENTILATION Ventilation occurs when air is drawn from the water’s surface (excessive trim out angle) or from the engine exhaust flow (wrong propeller/propeller hardware installed or gear case labyrinth seal worn) into the propeller blades. These air bubbles strike the propeller blade surface and cause erosion of the blade surface. If allowed to continue, eventual blade failure (breakage) will occur. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1C-5 GENERAL INFORMATION Engine DETONATION Detonation in a 2-cycle engine resembles the “pinging” heard in an automobile engine. It can be otherwise described as a tin-like “rattling” or “plinking” sound. Detonation is an explosion of an unburned portion of the fuel/air charge after the spark plug has fired. Detonation creates severe shock waves in the engine, and these shock waves often find or create a weakness: The dome of a piston, cylinder head/gasket, piston rings or piston ring lands, piston pin and roller bearings. A few of the most common causes of detonation in a marine 2-cycle application are as follows: • Over-advanced ignition timing. • Use of low octane gasoline. • Propeller pitch too high (engine RPM below recommended maximum range). • Lean fuel mixture at or near wide-open-throttle. • Spark plugs (heat range too hot – incorrect reach – cross-firing). • Inadequate engine cooling (deteriorated cooling system). Detonation usually can be prevented if: 1. The engine is correctly set up. 2. Diligent maintenance is applied to combat the detonation causes. 51115 Engine Compression Engine compression should be checked with engine block warm, throttle shutter wide open, all spark plugs removed and using a fully charged battery. Normal compression for all cylinders should be 110 to 130 psi (758.5 to 896.4 kPa). Cylinders should not vary more than 15 psi (103.4 kPa) between one another. A variance of more than 15 psi would indicate the need for a power head inspection/disassembly. Page 1C-6 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 GENERAL INFORMATION Following Complete Submersion Salt Water Submersion Due to the corrosive effect of salt water on internal engine components, complete disassembly is necessary before any attempt is made to start the engine. Submerged While Running When an engine is submerged while running, the possibility of internal engine damage is greatly increased. If, after engine is recovered and with spark plugs removed, engine fails to turn over freely when turning flywheel, the possibility of internal damage (bent connecting rod and/or bent crankshaft) exists. If this is the case, the powerhead must be disassembled. SUBMERGED ENGINE (FRESH WATER) IMPORTANT: Engine should be run within 2 hours after recovery, or serious internal damage may occur. If unable to start engine in this period, disassemble engine and clean all parts. Apply oil as soon as possible. NOTE: If sand has entered the air intake on the engine, do not attempt to the start the engine. Sand will cause internal engine damage. disassembly is required to clean all internal engine components of sand. 1. Recover engine from water as quickly as possible. 2. Remove cowling. 3. Clean the exterior of the outboard with fresh water. 4. Dry all wiring and electrical components using compressed air. 5. Drain water from fuel system as follows: a. Disconnect remote fuel hose from engine. b. Remove drain plug from vapor separator and drain fuel/water. Reinstall plug after draining. c. Remove the fuel hose from bottom of port side fuel rail and drain fuel/water. Reinstall hose. d. Remove the water separating fuel filter and empty contents. 6. Drain water from air compressor system as follows: a. Dry or replace the air filter for the compressor. b. Remove air outlet hose for the air compressor and drain water from compressor and hose. Reinstall hose. c. Remove the air hose from bottom of port side fuel rail and drain water. Reinstall hose. 7. Drain water from engine as follows: a. Remove air sensor from front of the air plenum. Tilt up the outboard and drain water out of the air plenum through the air sensor mounting hole. Reinstall Sensor. b. Remove spark plugs from engine. c. Rotate flywheel manually to blow out any water from the cylinders. d. Add approximately one ounce (30ml) of engine oil into each spark plug hole. Rotate the flywheel manually several times to distribute the oil in the cylinders. Reinstall spark plugs. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1C-7 GENERAL INFORMATION 8. Drain water from the oil injection system as follows: a. Remove remote oil hose (black without blue stripe) from pulse fitting on starboard side of engine. b. Drain any water from hose and reconnect. c. If water was present in hose, check for water in the remote oil tank. Drain tank if water is present. 9. Disassemble the engine starter motor and dry components. 10. Prime the oil injection pump as follows: a. Fill the engine fuel system with fuel. Connect fuel hose and squeeze primer bulb until it feels firm. b. Turn the ignition key switch to the “ON” position. c. Within the first 10 seconds after the key switch has been turned on, move the re- mote control handle from neutral into forward gear 3 to 5 times. This will automatically start the priming process. N F NOTE: Audible click from the oil pump will tell you the pump is priming. It may take a few minutes for the pump to complete the priming process. 11. Attempt to start engine, using a fresh fuel source.If engine starts, it should be run for at least one hour to eliminate any water in engine. 12. If engine fails to start, determine cause (fuel, electrical or mechanical). Page 1C-8 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 GENERAL INFORMATION 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1C-9 Model 135/150 DFI Powerhead Front View 57314 10 12 11 13 3 2 1 5 6 7 4 8 9 1 -High Pressure Electric Fuel Pump (Inside Vapor Separator) 2 -Vapor Separator 3 -Vapor Separator Drain Plug 4 -Air Temperature Sensor 5 -Fuel Hose Outlet from Low Pressure Electric Fuel Pump 6 -Fuel Return Hose from Fuel Cooler 7 -Electric Fuel Pump Harness Connection 8 -Electric Oil Pump (Hidden) 9 -Digital Diagnostic Terminal Harness Connection 10 - Crank Position Sensor Harness Connection 11 - Starter Motor 12 - Throttle Plate Assembly 13 - Fuel Hose Out to Fuel Rails (High Pressure) GENERAL INFORMATION Page 1C-10 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Model 135/150 DFI Powerhead Starboard View 57317 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 -Fuel Pressure Test Valve 2 -Air Compressor Oil Return Line 3 -Crank Position Sensor 4 -Throttle Plate/Air Plenum Assembly 5 -Digital Diagnostic Terminal Connector 6 -Oil Hose from Oil Reservoir to Oil Pump 7 -Oil Pump 8 -Main Power Relay(1998 Model)* 9 -Trim DOWN Relay 10 - Trim UP Relay (1998 Model)* 11 - Temperature Sensor 12 - Electronic Control Module 13 - Starter Motor 14 - Starter Solenoid 15 - Oil Pump Fuse 16 - Harness Fuse (20 Ampere) 17 - ECM Fuse (20 Ampere) 18 - Electric Fuel Pump Fuse (20 Ampere) 19 - Air Hose 20 - Starboard Fuel Rail 21 - Fuel Hose 22 - #5 Fuel Injector 23 - #3 Fuel Injector 24 - #1 Fuel Injector 25 - Air Hose from Air Compressor NOTE: *The location for 1999 Model Main Power Relay and Trim UP Relay are reversed. GENERAL INFORMATION 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1C-11 Model 135/150 DFI Powerhead Port View 57312 2 3 1 15 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 31 32 1 -High Pressure Electric Fuel Pump 2 -Fuel Out (90 psi) 3 -Crank Position Sensor 4 -Fuel Return from Fuel Cooler 5 -Water Out (tell-tale) from Air Compressor 6 -Air Restrictor/Air Inlet to Air Compressor 7 -Air Compressor 8 -Air Pressure Out from Air Compressor 9 -Temperature Sensor (Air Compressor) 10 - #2 Fuel Injector 11 - #4 Fuel Injector 12 - #6 Fuel Injector 13 - Excess Air to Adaptor Plate 14 -Water Inlet to Fuel Cooler from Adaptor Plate 15 - Port Fuel Rail 16 -Water Out to Poppet Valve 17 - Excess Fuel Return to Fuel Cooler 18 - Air Pressure Test Port 19 - 40 psi Check Valve 20 - Fuel Cooler 21 - Oil Reservoir 22 - Neutral Shift Interrupt Switch 23 - 60 Ampere Alternator 24 - Throttle Position Sensor (2 each) 25 - Low Pressure Electric Fuel Pump 26 - Fuel/Water Separator 27 - Fuel/Water Sensor 28 - Low Pressure Fuel Pump Inlet Hose 29 - Vapor Separator 30 - Vapor Separator Drain Plug 31 - Vent Canister 32 - Idle Stop Screw GENERAL INFORMATION Page 1C-12 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Model 135/150 DFI Powerhead Top View 57313 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 4 1 -Air Compressor Inlet Nozzle 2 -Water Outlet (Tell-Tale) Hose 3 -Thermostat Outlet Hose to Adaptor Plate 4 -Fuel (90 PSI) to Fuel Rails 5 -40 psi Check Valve 6 -Fuel Return to Vapor Separator 7 -Belt Tensioner 8 -60 Ampere Alternator 9 -Electric Fuel Pump 10 - Throttle Plate Assembly 11 - Crank Position Sensor 12 - MAP Sensor Hose 13 - Oil Return Hose from Air Compressor 14 - Starter Motor 15 - Oil Hose from Oil Pump to Air Compressor 16 - Serial Number Plug 17 - Fuel Pressure Test Valve 18 - Air Hose (80 PSI) to Fuel Rail 19 - Check Valve 20 - Air Compressor 21 - Starboard to Port Thermostat Hose 22 - Vent Canister 23 - Throttle Plate Adjustment Screw GENERAL INFORMATION 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1C-13 Model 135/150 DFI Powerhead Aft View 57315 17 25 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 2 14 13 15 16 18 19 21 20 23 22 24 26 27 28 1 -Air Compressor Restrictor/Air Inlet 2 -Water Out (tell-tale) from Air Compressor 3 -Air Compressor Oil Inlet from Oil Pump 4 -Air Compressor 5 -Air Pressure Out (80 psi) 6 -Fuel Pressure Test Valve 7 -Check Valve 8 -Excess Oil Return from Air Compressor 9 -#1 Fuel Injector 10 - Starboard Fuel Rail 11 - #3 Fuel Injector 12 - #5 Fuel Injector 13 - Tell-Tale Outlet 14 - Flush Plug 15 - #5 Ignition Coil 16 - #3 Ignition Coil 17 - #1 Ignition Coil 18 -Water Inlet to Air Compressor 19 - #2 Ignition Coil 20 - MAP Sensor 21 - #4 Ignition Coil 22 - #6 Ignition Coil 23 - #6 Fuel Injector 24 - Air Regulator 25 - Port Fuel Rail 26 - #4 Fuel Injector 27 - Fuel Regulator 28 - #2 Fuel Injector GENERAL INFORMATION Painting Procedures Cleaning & Painting Aluminum Propellers & Gear Housings WARNING Avoid serious injury from flying debris. Avoid serious injury from airborne particles. Use eye and breathing protection with proper ventilation. PROPELLERS 1. Sand the entire area to be painted with 3M 120 Regalite Polycut or coarse Scotch- Brite, disc or belts. 2. Feather edges of all broken paint edges. Try not to sand through the primer. 3. Clean the surface to be painted using PPG Industries DX330 Wax and Grease Remover or equivalent (Xylene or M.E.K.). 4. If bare metal has been exposed, use Quicksilver’s Light Gray Primer. 5. Allow a minimum of 1 hour dry time and no more than 1 week before applying the finish coat. 6. Apply the finish coat using Quicksilver’s EDP Propeller Black. GEAR HOUSINGS The following procedures should be used in refinishing gear housings. This procedure will provide the most durable paint system available in the field. The materials recommended are of high quality and approximate marine requirements. The following procedure will provide a repaint job that compares with a properly applied factory paint finish. It is recommended that the listed materials be purchased from a local Ditzler Automotive Finish Supply Outlet. The minimum package quantity of each material shown following is sufficient to refinish several gear housings. Procedure: 1. Wash gear housing with a muriatic acid base cleaner to remove any type of marine growth, and rinse with water, if necessary. 2. Wash gear housing with soap and water, then rinse. 3. Sand blistered area with 3M 180 grit sandpaper or P180 Gold Film Disc to remove paint blisters only. Feather edge all broken paint edges. 4. Clean gear housing thoroughly with (DX-330) wax and grease remover. 5. Spot repair surfaces where bare metal is exposed with (DX-503) alodine treatment. IMPORTANT: Do not use any type of aerosol spray paints as the paint will not properly adhere to the surface nor will the coating be sufficiently thick to resist future paint blistering. 6. Mix epoxy chromate primer (DP-40) with equal part catalyst (DP-401) per manufacturers instructions, allowing proper induction period for permeation of the epoxy primer and catalyst. 7. Allow a minimum of one hour drying time and no more than one week before top coating assemblies. 8. Use Ditzler Urethane DU9000 for Mercury Black, DU34334 for Mariner Grey, and DU35466 for Force Charcoal, and DU33414M for Sea Ray White. Catalyze all four colors with Ditzler DU5 catalyst mixed 1:1 ratio. Reduce with solvents per Ditzler label. Page 1C-14 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 GENERAL INFORMATION CAUTION Be sure to comply with instructions on the label for ventilation and respirators. Using a spray gun, apply one half to one mil even film thickness. Let dry, flash off for five minutes and apply another even coat of one half to one mil film thickness. This urethane paint will dry to the touch in a matter of hours, but will remain sensitive to scratches and abrasions for a few days. 9. The type of spray gun used will determine the proper reduction ratio of the paint. IMPORTANT: Do not paint sacrificial zinc trim tab or zinc anode. 10. Cut out a cardboard “plug” for trim tab pocket to keep paint off of mating surface to maintain good continuity circuitry between trim tab and gear housing. Decal Application Decal Removal 1. Mark decal location before removal to assure proper alignment of new decal. 2. Carefully soften decal and decal adhesive with a heat gun or heat blower while removing old decal. 3. Clean decal contact area with a 1:1 mixture of isopropyl alcohol and water. 4. Thoroughly dry decal contact area and check for a completely cleaned surface. Instructions for “Wet” Application NOTE: The following decal installation instructions are provided for a “Wet” installation. All decals should be applied wet. TOOLS REQUIRED 1. Plastic Squeegee* 2. Stick Pin 3. Dish Washing Liquid/Detergent without ammonia** “Joy” and “Drift” are known to be compatible for this process. * Automotive Body Filler Squeegee ** Do not use a soap that contains petroleum based solvents. SERVICE TIP: Placement of decals using the “Wet” application will allow time to position decal. Read entire installation instructions on this technique before proceeding. TEMPERATURE IMPORTANT: Installation of vinyl decals should not be attempted while in direct sunlight. Air and surface temperature should be between 60°F (15°C) and 100°F (38°C) for best application. SURFACE PREPARATION IMPORTANT: Do not use a soap or any petroleum based solvents to clean application surface. Clean entire application surface with mild dish washing liquid and water. Rinse surface thoroughly with clean water. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1C-15 GENERAL INFORMATION DECAL APPLICATION 1. Mix 1/2 ounce (16 ml) of dish washing liquid in one gallon (4 l) of cool water to use as wetting solution. NOTE: Leave protective masking, if present, on the face of decal until final steps of decal installation. This will ensure that the vinyl decal keeps it’s shape during installation. 2. Place the decal face down on a clean work surface and remove the paper backing from “adhesive side” of decal. 3. Using a spray bottle, flood the entire “adhesive side” of the decal with the pre-mixed wetting solution. 4. Flood area where the decal will be positioned with wetting solution. 5. Position pre-wetted decal on wetted surface and slide into position. 6. Starting at the center of the decal, “lightly” squeegee out the air bubbles and wetting solution with overlapping strokes to the outer edge of the decal. Continue going over the decal surface until all wrinkles are gone and adhesive bonds to the cowl surface. 7. Wipe decal surface with soft paper towel or cloth. 8. Wait 10 - 15 minutes. 9. Starting at one corner, “carefully and slowly” pull the masking off the decal surface at a 180° angle. NOTE: To remove any remaining bubbles, pierce the decal at one end of the bubble with stick pin and press out the entrapped air or wetting solution with your thumb (moving toward the puncture). Page 1C-16 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION IMPORTANT INFORMATION Section 1D - Outboard Motor Installation Table of Contents 1 D Installation Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-1 Lifting Outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-1 Installing Outboard to Boat Transom . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-2 Determining Recommended Outboard Mounting Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-2 Installing Outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-3 Drilling Outboard Mounting Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-3 Securing Outboard To Boat Transom . . . . . . . . . 1D-4 Steering Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-4 Steering Link Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-5 Electrical, Hoses and Control Cables . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-6 Installation Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-6 Remote Wiring Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-6 Warning Gauge Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-7 Battery Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-8 Single Outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-8 Installation Specifications Dual Outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-8 Shift Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-9 Counter Rotation Outboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-9 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-10 Throttle Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-12 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-12 Front Clamp Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-13 Filling Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-14 Oil Injection Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-14 Filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-14 Priming the Oil Injection Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-15 Purging Air From the Engine Oil Tank . . . . . . 1D-16 Trim “In” Angle Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-16 Trim Tab Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-17 Models Without Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-17 Models With Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-17 a ba a a – Transom Opening – Minimum Single Engine – 33-3/8 in. (848 mm) Dual Engines – 59-3/4 in. (1518 mm) b – Engine Center Line For Dual Engine 26 in. (660mm) Minimum Lifting Outboard Electric Start Models – Remove plastic cap from flywheel hub. Thread lifting ring into flywheel a minimum of 5 turns. Replace plastic cap after installation. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1D-1 OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION Installing Outboard to Boat Transom Determining Recommended Outboard Mounting Height 26 in. (660mm) 21 in. (533mm) 20 in. (508mm) 19 in. (482mm) 10 2030 4050 6070 80 Maximum Boat Speed Anticipated NOTICE TO INSTALLER: 22 in. 23 in. 24 in. 25 in. NOTE: Add 5 in. (127mm) for XL mod- els and 10 in. (254mm) for XXL models to listed outboard mounting height. (635mm) (609mm) (584mm) (560mm) e e a c d b b Outboard Mounting Height (See NOTE Below) 1. The outboard should be mounted high enough on the transom so that the exhaust relief hole will stay at least 1 in. (25.4 mm) above the water line when the engine is running at idle speed. This will prevent exhaust restriction. 2. The mounting height (e) of the outboard must not exceed 25 in. (635 mm) for L models, 30 in. (762 mm) for XL models and 35 in. (889 mm) for XXL models. Mounting the outboard higher may cause damage to the gear case components. a. This solid line is recommended to determine the outboard mounting height. Increasing the height of outboard generally will provide the following: 1) Less steering torque, 2) more top speed, 3) greater boat stability, but, 4) will cause more prop “break loose” which may be particularly noticeable when planing off or with heavy load. b. These broken lines represent the extremes of known successful outboard mounting height dimensions. c. This line may be preferred to determine outboard mounting height dimension, if maximum speed is the only objective. d. This line may be preferred to determine outboard mounting height dimension for dual outboard installation. e. Outboard mounting height (height of outboard transom brackets from bottom of boat transom). For heights over 22 in. (560mm), a propeller, that is designed for surfacing operation is usually preferred. Page 1D-2 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION Installing Outboard Drilling Outboard Mounting Holes 1. Attach (tape) engine mounting template (located with the installation manual) to boat transom. IMPORTANT: If using “Transom Drilling Fixture” (part number 91-98234A2), use drill guide holes marked “A” when drilling outboard mounting holes. b a a-Centerline of Transom b-Transom Drilling Fixture (91-98234A2) 2. Mark and drill four 17/32 in. (13.5mm) mounting holes. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1D-3 OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION Securing Outboard To Boat Transom 1. Refer to “Determining Recommended Outboard Motor Mounting Height”, preceding and Install outboard to the nearest recommended mounting height. 2. Fasten outboard with provided mounting hardware shown. d c b a b c a a-1/2 In. Diameter Bolts (4) b-Flat Washers (4) c-Locknuts (4) d-Marine Sealer - Apply to Shanks of Bolts, Not Threads Steering Cable STARBOARD SIDE ROUTED CABLE 1. Lubricate O-ring seal and entire cable end. 95 95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12) Page 1D-4 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION 2. Insert steering cable into tilt tube. 3. Torque nut to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 N·m). Steering Link Rod 1. Install steering link rod per illustration. a d c b a-Special Bolt (10-90041) Torque to 20 lb-ft (27 N·m) b-Nylon Insert Locknut (11-34863) Torque to 20 lb-ft (27 N·m) c-Flat Washer (2) d-Nylon Insert Locknut (11-34863) Tighten Locknut Until it Seats, Then Back Nut Off 1/4 Turn IMPORTANT: The steering link rod that connects the steering cable to the engine must be fastened using special washer head bolt (“a” – Part Number 10-14000) and self locking nuts (“b” & “c” – Part Number 11-34863). These locknuts must never be replaced with common nuts (non locking) as they will work loose and vibrate off freeing the link rod to disengage. WARNING Disengagement of a steering link rod can result in the boat taking a full, sudden, sharp turn. This potentially violent action can cause occupants to be thrown overboard exposing them to serious injury or death. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1D-5 OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION Page 1D-6 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Electrical, Hoses and Control Cables IMPORTANT: Warning Horn Requirement – The remote control or key switch assembly must be wired with a warning horn. This warning horn is used with the engine warning system. Installation Note Open the front clamp assembly. Remote Wiring Harness 1. Connect wiring. Place harness into the holder. GRN/WHT BLU/WHT BRN/WHT TAN BLU/WHT GRN/WHT a a - Power Trim Connections OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1D-7 Warning Gauge Harness Connect the harness extension to gauge and engine. 1 2 3 4 5 6 a c b d f e a c b d a - TAN/BLACK b - TAN/WHITE c - PINK/LT. BLUE to PINK/LT. BLUE d - ORANGE e - Connect PURPLE to 12 Volt Source or Adjacent Gauge f - Sta-Straps – Fasten Wiring to Prevent Catching on Cowl OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION Page 1D-8 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Battery Cables Single Outboard (+) (–) a b c a - RED Sleeve (Positive) b - BLACK Sleeve (Negative) c - Starting Battery Dual Outboard Connect a common ground cable (wire size same as engine battery cables) between NEGATIVE (–) terminals on starting batteries. (–) (–) d d - Common Ground Cable OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION Shift Cable Install cables into the remote control following the instructions provided with the remote control. NOTE: Install the shift cable to the engine first. The shift cable is the first cable to move when the remote control handle is moved out of neutral. COUNTER ROTATION OUTBOARDS Counter rotating (left hand) gear cases can be identified by a “L” stamped into the end of the propeller shaft. The Quicksilver Dual Engine Console Mount Control, P/N 88688A22 or 88688A52, is required to shift the counter rotation outboard. The installation instructions shipped with the control explain the procedure required to connect this control to a counter rotation outboard. IMPORTANT: If the counter rotation outboard is rigged similar to a standard rotation outboard OR if a standard rotation outboard is rigged similar to a counter rotation outboard, the reverse gear and bearing in the gear case must function as forward gear. THE REVERSE GEAR/BEARING ARE NOT DESIGNED TO CARRY THE SUSTAINED LOADS THAT ARE GENERATED WHEN RUNNING UNDER CONSTANT HIGH RPM AND THRUST CONDITIONS. OUTBOARD SHIFTING DIRECTION On counter rotation outboards, the shift linkage moves in the opposite direction compared to a standard rotation outboard. STANDARD ROTATION GEAR OUTBOARDS Forward Gear Reverse Gear COUNTER ROTATION OUTBOARDS Forward GearReverse Gear 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1D-9 OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION Installation IMPORTANT: Step 1 must be followed for proper adjustment of the shift cable. 1. Locate the center point of the slack or lost motion that exists in the shift cable as follows: a. Move the remote control handle from neutral into forward and advance the handle to full speed position. Slowly return the handle back to the neutral. Place a mark (a) on the cable against the cable end guide. b. Move the remote control handle from neutral into reverse and advance the handle to full speed position. Slowly return the handle back to the neutral. Place a mark (b) on the cable against the cable end guide. c. Make a center mark (c), midway between marks (“a” and “b”). Align the cable end guide against this center mark when installing cable to the engine. STANDARD ROTATION OUTBOARDS a b c COUNTER ROTATION OUTBOARDS b a c Page 1D-10 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION 2. Position remote control and outboard into neutral. N 3. Slide the shift cable retainer forward until resistance is felt, then slide cable anchor toward rear until resistance is felt. Center the anchor pin between resistance points. b a a-Shift Cable Retainer b-Anchor Pin 4. Align the shift cable end guide with the center mark as instructed in Step 1. 5. Place shift cable on anchor pin. Adjust cable barrel so it slips freely into the barrel holder. 6. Secure shift cable with shift cable retainer. b a a-Cable Barrel b-Shift Cable Retainer 7. Check shift cable adjustments as follows: a. With remote control in forward, the propshaft should lock solidly in gear. If it does not, adjust cable barrel closer to cable end guide. b. Shift remote control into neutral. The propshaft should turn freely without drag. If not, adjust barrel away from cable end guide. Repeat steps a and b. c. Shift remote control into reverse while turning propeller. The propshaft should lock solidly in gear. If not, adjust barrel away from cable end guide. Repeat steps a thru c. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1D-11 OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION d. Return remote control handle to neutral. The propeller should turn freely without drag. If not, adjust barrel closer to cable end guide. Repeat steps a thru d. Throttle Cable INSTALLATION 1. Position remote control into neutral. N 2. Attach throttle cable to the throttle lever. Secure with latch. a a-Latch 3. Adjust the cable barrel so that the installed throttle cable will hold the idle stop screw against the stop. a b a-Cable Barrel – Adjust To Hold Idle Stop Screw Against Stop b-Idle Stop Screw 4. Check throttle cable adjustment as follows: a. Shift outboard into gear a few times to activate the throttle linkage. Make sure to rotate the propeller shaft while shifting into reverse. N FR Page 1D-12 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1D-13 b. Return remote control to neutral. Place a thin piece of paper between idle adjustment screw and idle stop. Adjustment is correct when the paper can be removed without tearing, but has some drag on it. Readjust cable barrel if necessary. IMPORTANT: The idle stop screw must be touching the stop. a b a - Idle Stop Screw b - Idle Stop 5. Lock the barrel holder in place with the cable latch. Front Clamp Reassembly IMPORTANT: Sufficient slack must exist in engine wiring harness, battery cables, fuel hose, and oil hoses routed between clamp and engine attachment point, to relieve stress and prevent hoses from being kinked or pinched. 1. Place the clamp over the wiring, hoses, and control cables as shown. ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ ÇÉÇÉÇ ÉÉ ÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇ b c d a g f e a - Battery Cables b - Remote Wiring Harness c - Warning Gauge Wiring Harness d - Control Cables e - Oil Hose with Blue Stripe f - Fuel Hose g - Oil Hose OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION 2. Fasten clamp together with two screws. a a-Screws Filling Fuel System NOTE: For initial start of a new engine or for an engine that ran out of fuel, or was drained of fuel, the fuel system should to be filled as follows: • Squeeze the fuel line primer bulb until it feels firm. • Turn the ignition key switch to the ON position for three seconds. This operates the electric fuel pump. • Turn the ignition key switch back to the OFF position, and squeeze the primer bulb again until it feels firm. Turn the ignition key switch to the “ON” position again for three seconds. Continue this procedure until the fuel line primer bulb stays firm. Oil Injection Set-Up Filling 1. Fill remote oil tank with the recommended oil listed in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Tighten fill cap. a a-Fill Cap Page 1D-14 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1D-15 2. Remove cap and fill engine oil tank with oil. Reinstall the fill cap. a b a - Engine Oil Tank b - Fill Cap Priming the Oil Injection Pump Before starting engine for the first time, prime the oil injection pump. Priming will remove any air that may be in the pump, oil supply hose, or internal passages. a b a - Oil Injection Pump b - Oil Supply Hose CAUTION To prevent damage to the fuel pumps, fill the engine fuel system with fuel. Otherwise the fuel pumps will run without fuel during the priming process. Prime the oil injection pump as follows: 1. Fill the engine fuel system with fuel. Connect fuel hose and squeeze primer bulb until it fells firm. 2. Turn the ignition key switch to the “ON” position. 3. Within the first 10 seconds after the key switch has been turned on, move the remote control handle from neutral into forward gear 3 to 5 times. This will automatically start the priming process. N F OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION NOTE: It may take a few minutes for the pump to complete the priming process. Purging Air From the Engine Oil Tank 1. Loosen the fill cap on the engine oil tank. 2. Start the engine. Run the engine until the all the air has been vented out of the tank and oil starts to flow out of the tank. Re-tighten fill cap. a a-Fill Cap Trim “In” Angle Adjustment Some outboard boats, particularly some bass boats, are built with a greater than normal transom angle which will allow the outboard to be trimmed further “in” or “under”. This greater trim “under” capability is desirable to improve acceleration, reduce the angle and time spend in a bow high boat attitude during planing off, and in some cases, may be necessary to plane off a boat with aft live wells, given the variety of available propellers and height range of engine installations. However, once on plane, the engine should be trimmed to a more intermediate position to a avoid a bow-down planing condition called “plowing”. Plowing can cause “bow steering” or “over steering” and inefficiently consumes horsepower. In this condition, if attempting a turn or encountering a diagonal, moderate wake, a more abrupt turn than intended may result. In rare circumstances, the owner may decide to limit the trim under. This can be accomplished by purchasing a stainless steel tilt pin (P/N 17-49930A1) and inserting it through whatever pin hole is desired. The non-stainless steel shipping bolt should not be used in this application other than on a temporary basis. WARNING Avoid possible serious injury or death. Adjust outboard to an intermediate trim position as soon as boat is on plane to avoid possible ejection due to boat spinout. Do not attempt to turn boat when engine is trimmed extremely under or in. a Page 1D-16 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION Trim Tab Adjustment Propeller steering torque may cause your boat to pull in one direction. This steering torque results from your outboard not being trimmed so the propeller shaft is parallel to the water surface. The trim tab can help compensate for this steering torque and can be adjusted within limits to reduce any unequal steering effort. Models Without Power Steering Operate your boat at normal cruising speed, trimmed to desired position. Turn your boat left and right and note the direction the boat turns more easily. If adjustment is necessary, loosen trim tab bolt until trim tab moves freely (does not rub against locking ridges). DO NOT strike tab to make adjustments. Make small adjustments at a time. If the boat turns more easily to the left, move the trailing edge of trim tab to the left. If the boat turns more easily to the right move the trailing edge of trim tab to the right. Position trim tab in one of the locating grooves BEFORE tightening bolt to prevent damage to holding mechanism. Torque bolt to 40 lb-ft (54 Nm) and retest. Models With Power Steering Trim tab adjustment is not required. The trailing edge of the trim tab should be set straight back. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 1D-17 IGNITION ELECTRICAL Section 2A – Ignition Table of Contents 2 A Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-1 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-2 Electrical Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-4 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-6 Ignition Component Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-6 Electronic Control Module (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-6 Flywheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-7 Ignition Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-7 Crank Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-7 Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-7 Charging System Alternator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-7 Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-8 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor . . . 2A-9 Air Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-9 Direct Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-9 Fuel Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-9 Specifications Ignition Coil Ohm Test Disconnecting Harness Connectors from Ignition Coils and/or Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-9 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-9 Troubleshooting Without Digital Diagnostic Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-10 Troubleshooting With the Digital Diagnostic Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-11 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-12 DDT Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-13 DFI Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-15 Ignition Components Removal and Installation . . 2A-18 Flywheel Cover Removal and Installation . . . . 2A-18 Electronic Control Module (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-19 Ignition Module (Coil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-20 Crank Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-21 Throttle Position Sensors (TPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-21 Connect meter leads between primary terminal (GRN/Striped) and ground (BLACK) terminal pin. 0.38 - 0.78 . Connect meter leads between spark plug wire/high voltage tower and ground terminal pin. 8.1 - 8.9 k . Temperature Sensor Test (Refer to Chart page 2A-8) Temperature Sensor(s) Between Black and each TAN/BLK wire. No Continuity Between each lead and ground No Continuity Direct Injector Test Direct Injector Ohm Test (Injector Lead Disconnected) Connect meter leads between each injector terminal pin. 1 - 1.6 . Fuel Injector Test Fuel Injector Ohm Test (Injector Lead Disconnected) Connect meter leads between each injector terminal pin. 1.7 - 1.9 . 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2A-1 IGNITION Special Tools 1. Digital Diagnostic Terminal (DDT) 91-823686A2 2. Software Cartridge 91-822608--5 3. DDT Reference Manual 90-825159-3 4. Adaptor Harness 84-822560A5 Page 2A-2 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 IGNITION 5. Multi-Meter/DVA Tester (91-99750A1) 6. Inductive Timing Light 91-99379 7. Spark Gap Tester 91-850439T 55117 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2A-3 IGNITION Page 2A-4 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Electrical Components NOTE: COAT ALL EYELET WIRING TERMINALS WITH #25 GACO N700 (LIQUID NEOPRENE 92-25711-2) NOTE: COAT ALL MULTI-PIN ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS (EXCEPT POWER TRIM RELAY CONNECTORS) WITH #6 DC-4 (DIELECTRIC GREASE 92-823506--1) 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 34 35 37 36 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 36 Liquid Neoprene (92-25711--2) 6 Dielectric Grease (92-823506--1) 25 IGNITION Electrical Components REFREF. .. NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION TORQUE lb-in lb-ft Nm. 1 1 ELECTRICAL MOUNTING PLATE 2 6 IGNITION COIL 3 1 HI-TENSION CABLE 4 6 SPARK PLUG (HEAVY DUTY) 240 20 27 5 6 SPACER 6 6 SCREW (1/4-20 x 3-1/4 IN.) 7 1 MAP SENSOR 8 2 SCREW (M6 x 14) 35 4 9 1 TUBING (31 IN.) 10 4 SCREW (.312-18 x 1-1/4 IN.) 235 19.6 26.5 11 4 WASHER 12 4 GROMMET 13 4 BUSHING 14 2 SCREW-engine harness ground (M6 x 14) 35 4 15 6 WASHER 16 6 NUT 17 1 TRIM HARNESS 18 3 RELAY 19 3 DECAL-Trim Relay 20 3 BRACKET 21 3 BUSHING 22 3 GROMMET 23 2 SCREW (M6 x 25) 35 4 24 1 SCREW (M6 x 35) 35 4 25 1 BUSHING 26 2 STA STRAP 27 1 ENGINE HARNESS 28 1 HARNESS (SERVICE ITEM) 29 4 FUSE 30 1 BRACKET-Fuse Holder 31 2 SCREW (M4 x 8) 32 1 ECU (135) 33 1 ECU (150) 34 1 PAD 35 3 SCREW (M6 x 25) 70 8 36 6 BUSHING 37 3 GROMMET 38 2 SCREW (M6 x 14) 100 11.5 39 1 CLIP 40 1 CLAMP 41 2 SCREW (10-16 x 3/8 IN.) 42 1 SOLENOID MOUNTING PLATE 43 3 SCREW (M6 x 12) 150 17 44 2 SCREW (M6 x 14) 35 4 45 1 STARTER SOLENOID 46 2 GROMMET 47 2 SCREW (M6 x 25) 35 4 48 1 CABLE (BLACK) 49 2 BUSHING 50 1 BATTERY CABLE (POSITIVE) 51 2 LOCKWASHER 52 2 NUT (5/16-18) 50 5.5 53 2 NUT (10-32) 8 0.9 54 1 CABLE 55 1 CAP NUT 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2A-5 IGNITION Theory of Operation When the ignition key is turned to the RUN position, battery voltage is applied to the main relay through the PURPLE wire. When the Electronic Control Module (ECM) receives a signal from the Crank Position Sensor, the main relay ground circuit is completed through the ECM. The main relay is then closed and D.C. current from the battery or charging system is transferred through the main relay 20 Amp fuse to the positive terminal of all 6 ignition coil primary windings. The negative terminal of the coil primary is connected to engine ground through the Electronic Control Module (ECM). When this circuit is closed, a magnetic field is allowed to be built up in the ignition coil. The Crank Position Sensor senses the location of the 24 teeth on the flywheel and supplies a trigger signal to the ECM. When the ECM receives this signal, the ECM will then open the ground circuit of the coil primary. The magnetic field in the ignition coil primary will then collapse cutting across the coil secondary winding creating a high voltage charge (50,000 volts) that is sent to the spark plug. Ignition Component Description Electronic Control Module (ECM) The ECM requires 8 VDC minimum to operate. If the ECM should fail, the engine will stop running. The inputs to the ECM can be monitored and tested by the Digital Diagnostic Terminal 91-823686A2 using adaptor harness 84-822560A5. The ECM performs the following functions: • Calculates the precise fuel and ignition timing requirements based on engine speed, throttle position, manifold pressure and coolant temperature. • Controls fuel injectors for each cylinder, direct injectors for each cylinder and ignition for each cylinder. • Controls all alarm horn and warning lamp functions. • Supplies tachometer signal to gauge. • Controls RPM limit function. • Monitors shift interrupt switch. • Records engine running information. Page 2A-6 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 IGNITION Flywheel 24 teeth under the flywheel ring gear provide engine rpm and crankshaft position information to the ECM through the crank position sensor. Ignition Coils Inductive type ignition coils are used on the DFI engines. Ignition Coil Ohm Test Connect meter leads between primary terminal (GRN/Striped) and ground (Black) terminal pin. 0.38 - 0.78 . Connect meter leads between spark plug wire/high voltage tower and ground terminal pin. 8.1 - 8.9 k . Crank Position Sensor Senses 24 teeth located on flywheel under ring gear. Supplies the ECM with crank position information and engine speed. If sensor should fail, the engine will stop running. Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) Two (2) Throttle Position Sensors are used in conjunction with one another. If one sensor should fail, the dash mounted CHECK ENGINE light will light and the warning horn will sound. RPM will be limited to 3000 rpm. If both TPS’s should fail, rpm will be reduced to idle by the ECM. TPS settings are not adjustable. TPS settings can be monitored with the Digital Diagnostic Terminal through the ECM. Charging System Alternator Battery charging system is contained within the belt driven alternator, including the regulator. At cranking speeds, electrical power for the engine is provided by the boat battery – minimum recommended size is 750 CCA, or 1,000 MCA, cold cranking amperes. Above 550 RPM, all electrical power is provided by the alternator. Should engine rpm drop below 550 RPM, the alternator is not capable of providing sufficient output and the battery becomes the primary source of electrical power. Alternator output (when hot) to the battery @ 2000 RPM is approximately 33 - 38 amperes. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2A-7 IGNITION Temperature Sensor Two (2) temperature sensors are used to provide cylinder head temperature information to the ECM. One sensor is mounted in the starboard cylinder head and one in the air compressor cylinder head. The ECM uses this information to increase injector pulse width for cold starts and to retard timing in the event of an over-heat condition. An ohms test of the temperature sensor would be as follows: Insert digital or analog ohmmeter test leads into both TAN/BLACK sensor leads. With engine at temperature (F) indicated, ohm readings should be as indicated ±10%. Temperature (F ) 270 255 240 225 210 195 180 165 150 135 120 105 90 75 60 45 30 15 0 Temperature Sensor 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 Resistance (k) Temperature Sensor(s) Between Black and each TAN/BLK wire. No Continuity Between each lead and ground No Continuity Page 2A-8 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 IGNITION Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor is mounted between the cylinder heads. A vacuum hose connects the map sensor to the intake manifold. The ECM regulates fuel flow, in part, based on manifold absolute pressure. Drawing a vacuum on the MAP sensor hose will create a lean fuel condition. Air Temperature Sensor The air temperature sensor is mounted on the intake manifold. The ECM regulates fuel flow, in part, based on manifold air temperature. As air temperature increases, the ECM decreases fuel flow. Direct Injectors 6 direct injectors (1 per cylinder) are used to inject a fuel/air mix into cylinders. Injectors are mounted between fuel rails and cylinder heads. Direct Injector Ohm Test (Injector Lead Disconnected) Connect meter leads between each injector terminal pin. 1 - 1.6 . Fuel Injectors 6 fuel injectors (1 per cylinder) are used to provide fuel from the fuel rail to the direct injectors. The fuel injectors are mounted in the fuel rail. Fuel Injector Ohm Test (Injector Lead Disconnected) Connect meter leads between each injector terminal pin. 1.7 - 1.9 . Disconnecting Harness Connectors from Ignition Coils and/or Injectors 54871 a a-Wire Clip (push center down to remove) Troubleshooting The ECM is designed such that if a sensor fails, the ECM will compensate so that the engine does not go into an over-rich condition. Disconnecting a sensor for troubleshooting purposes may have no noticeable effect. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2A-9 IGNITION Troubleshooting Without Digital Diagnostic Terminal Troubleshooting without the DDT is limited to checking resistance on some of the sensors. Typical failures usually do not involve the ECM. Connectors, set-up, and mechanical wear are most likely at fault. • Verify spark plug wires are securely installed (pushed in) into the coil tower. • The engine may not run or may not run above idle with the wrong spark plugs installed. • Swap ignition coils to see if the problem follows the coil or stays with the particular cylinder. NOTE: ECMs are capable of performing a cylinder misfire test to isolate problem cylinders. Once a suspect cylinder is located, an output load test on the ignition coil, fuel injector and direct injector may be initiated through use of the DDT. • Any sensor or connection can be disconnected and reconnected while the engine is operating without damaging the ECM. Disconnecting the crank position sensor will stop the engine. IMPORTANT: Any sensor that is disconnected while the engine is running will be recorded as a Fault in the ECM Fault History. Use the DDT to view and clear the fault history when troubleshooting/repair is completed. • If all cylinders exhibit similar symptoms, the problem is with a sensor or harness input to the ECM. • If problem is speed related or intermittent, it is probably connector or contact related. Inspect connectors for corrosion, loose wires or loose pins. Secure connector seating; use dielectric compound 92-823506-1. • Inspect the harness for obvious damage: pinched wires, chaffing. • Secure grounds and all connections involving ring terminals (coat with Liquid Neoprene 92-25711--3). • Check fuel pump terminals. • Check fuel pump pressure. • Check air compressor pressure. Page 2A-10 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 IGNITION Troubleshooting with the Digital Diagnostic Terminal a b dc a-Digital Diagnostic Terminal (91-823686A2) b-Software Cartridge (91-822608--4 or --5) c-DDT Reference Manual (90-825159-3) d-Adapter Harness (84-822560A5) The Quicksilver Digital Diagnostic Terminal (DDT) has been developed specifically to help technicians diagnose and repair Mercury Marine 2 and 4 cycle engines. Attach the diagnostic cable to the ECM diagnostic connector and plug in the software cartridge. You will be able to monitor sensors and ECM data values including status switches. The ECM program can help diagnose intermittent engine problems. It will record the state of the engine sensors and switches for a period of time and then can be played back to review the recorded information. Refer to the Digital Diagnostic Terminal Reference Manual for complete diagnostic procedures. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2A-11 IGNITION Notes: Page 2A-12 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 IGNITION DDT Functions – Optimax Models Software Version 4.0 and 4.1 Select Status: 1 - IGNITION 2 - INJECTOR 3 - PUMP 4 - SENSORS 5 - SWITCHES 6 - MISCELLANEOUS 7 - RPM LIMIT 8 - BREAK-IN MARINE DIAGNOSTICS 1 - Mariner/Mercury 2 - MerCruiser 3 -Injector Test 4 - Tool Setup SELECT ECM 1 - 3.0L Ignition ECM 2 - 3.0L Fuel ECM 3 - 824003 Fuel ECM 4 - 2.5L Hi Perf ECM 5 - DFI ECM 6 - 4 Stroke ECM Select Function: 1 - AUTO SELF TEST 2 - MANUAL TEST Select Function: 1 -DATA MONITOR 2 -STATUS SWITCHES 3 -SYSTEM INFO 4 -HISTORY 5 -SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Select Auto Test: 1 -STATIC TEST 2 -RUNNING TEST ENGINE RPM TPI 1 VOLTS TPI 2 VOLTS BATTERY VOLTS PWR 1 VOLTS PWR 2 VOLTS COOL TMP STB °F COOL TMP PRT °F MAP PSI AIR TMP ° TRIGGER ERR TIME TO OIL OIL INJ CNT TPI % AIR COM TMP °F BLOCK PSI Select Function: 1 -FAULT HISTORY 2 -RUN HISTORY 3 -CLEAR FAULT HIST 4 -CLEAR RUN HIST Select Function: 1 -OIL PUMP PRIME 2 -CYLINDER MISFIRE 3 -OUTPUT LOAD TEST 4 -RESET BREAK-IN OIL 98 DI ECM # CODE IGN PRI .38-.78 ohm SEC 8.1-8.9 Kohm DINJ 1.0-1.6 ohm FINJ 1.7-1.9 ohm TPI1 3.7-4.9v IDLE 0.3-1.8v WOT TPI2 0.1-1.5v IDLE 3.2-4.9v WOT TPI1 LtBlu/Red IN TPI2 LtBlu/Wht OUT TGAP 0.025-.04in PWR RLY 81-99 ohm CTS max 220F ACT max 150-220F 30-8000 ohm [email protected] AIR TMP .540-44 BATV 12.6-15.0 MAP 7-15 psi FUEL 88-90 psi AIR 77-81 psi Text Book Data (specs) Monitors Engine Functions While Engine is Running SWITCH ACTIVE HIST SHIFT SW ON NA H2O FUEL NO NO L OIL NO NO PUMP ACTIVE HIST OIL PMP PASS PASS LIMIT ACTIVE HIST CTS LIM OFF ON CTP LIM OFF OFF ACT LIM OFF OFF TP1 LIM OFF OFF TP2 LIM OFF OFF RPM LIM OFF OFF OIL LIM OFF ON BAT LIM OFF OFF BLK LIM OFF OFF PWR LIM OFF OFF STATUS BREAK-IN ENGINE IS IN BREAK-IN MODE. xxx MINUTES TO COMPLETION. STATUS BREAK-IN ENGINE HAS COMPLETED A FACTORY SCHED- ULED BREAK-IN. or MISC. ACTIVE HIST BATTERY PASS PASS PWR RLY PASS PASS PWR 1 V PASS PASS PWR 2 V PASS PASS HORN PASS PASS LAMP PASS PASS SENSOR ACTIVE HIST COOL STB PASS PASS COOL PRT PASS PASS MAP PASS PASS AIR TMP PASS PASS TPI 1 PASS PASS TPI 2 PASS PASS TRIG SIG PASS PASS COMP TMP PASS PASS BLOCK PSI PASS PASS INJECTOR ACTIVE HIST INJ 1 PASS PASS INJ 2 PASS PASS INJ 3 PASS PASS INJ 4 PASS PASS INJ 5 PASS PASS INJ 6 PASS PASS IGN ACTIVE HIST IGN 1 PASS PASS IGN 2 PASS PASS IGN 3 PASS PASS IGN 4 PASS PASS IGN 5 PASS PASS IGN 6 PASS PASS Engine Not Running During Test Engine Running During Test Select Fault Hist: 1-IGNITION 2-INJECTOR 3-PUMP 4-SENSORS 5-SWITCHES 6-MISCELLANEOUSRPM 3000-3999 xx RPM 4000-4999 xx RPM 5000-5999 xx RPM 6000+ xx BREAK IN Min xx OVER TMP Sec x RPM LIMIT CNT x RPM LIMIT SEC x ACT TEMP SEC x BLOCK PSI Sec x CTS TMP Sec x CTP TMP Sec x OIL PMP Sec x ECM RUN TIME xx RPM 0000-0999 xx RPM 1000-1499 xx RPM 1500-2999 xx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Any fault in Select Status functions 1 thru 7 will turn on the matching panel light. *Illuminated panel light 8 Indicates engine is in Break-in. *Key switch has to be ON for all Tests. *Engine has to be running for Tests 1,2,3, and 7. NOTE:Test data is lost when Key Switch is turned off. Any existing faults from Tests 1 thru 6 are transferred to Fault History. 1 or 2 1 5 Select Load Test: 1 -IGNITION 2 -FUEL INJECTOR 3 -DIRECT INJECTOR 4 -OIL PUMP 5 -FUEL PUMP 6 -HORN 7 -LAMPS 8 -TACHOMETER 9 -MAIN POWER RELAY 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2A-13 IGNITION DFI Troubleshooting Guide Symptom Cause Action 1. Engine cranks but won’t start 1.0 Lanyard stop switch in wrong position. 1.1 Weak battery or bad starter motor, battery voltage drops below 8 volts while cranking (ECM cuts out below 8 volts) (Fuel pump requires 9 Volts). 1.2 Low air pressure in rail (less than 70 psi at cranking 1.3 No fuel 1.4 Low fuel pressure 1.5 Sheared Flywheel Key 1.6 Blown fuse 1.7 Main Power Relay not functioning 1.8 Spark Plugs Reset lanyard stop switch. Replace/charge battery. Inspect condition of starter motor. Check condition of battery terminals and cables. Inspect air system for leaks. Inspect air filter for plugging (air pressure measured on port rail). Inspect air compressor reed valves if necessary. Check that primer bulb is firm. Key-on engine to verify that fuel pump runs for 2 seconds and then turn off. Measure fuel pressure (valve on starboard rail). Fuel pressure should be 10 ± 1 psi greater than the air pressure. Check fuel pressure from low pressure electric fuel pump (6–10 psi). Check for fuel leaks. If fuel pressure leaks down faster than air pressure, seals on fuel pump may be leaking. Check air system pressure, see 1.2. Remove flywheel and inspect key. Replace fuse. Inspect engine harness and electrical components. Listen for relay to “click” when the key switch is turned on. Remove fuel pump fuse. Unplug all direct injector connectors. Remove spark plugs from each cylinder. Connect spark plug leads to Spark Gap Tester 91-830230T. Crank engine or use DDT output load test for each ignition coil and observe spark. If no spark is present, replace appropriate ignition coil. If spark is present, replace spark plugs. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2A-15 IGNITION DFI Troubleshooting Guide (continued) Symptom Cause Action 1. Engine cranks but will not start (continued) 1.9 ECM not functioning Injection System: Listen for injector “ticking” when cranking or connect spare injector to each respective harness. Ticking should start after 2 cranking revolutions. Ignition System: – Check for proper operation by using Inductive Timing Light 91-99379. – Check battery voltage (RED/YEL Lead) @ ignition coils. – Check for blown fuse (C15). – Check battery voltage to fuse from main power relay (PURPLE Lead). – Check for shorted stop wire (BLK/YEL). – Check crank position sensor setting [0.015 in. – 0.040 in. (0.38mm – 1.01mm)] from flywheel or for defective crank position sensor. – Defective ECM. Power Supply: Clean and inspect remote control male and female harness connectors. 2. Engine cranks, starts and stalls 2.0 Low air pressure in rail 2.1 Low fuel pressure in rail 2.2 Abnormally high friction in engine 2.3 Air in fuel system/lines 2.4 TPS malfunction 2.5 Remote control to engine harness connection is poor See 1.2 See 1.2 and 1.3 Check for scuffed piston or other sources of high friction. See 1.3 Crank and start engine several times to purge. Check motion of throttle arm. Stop nuts should contact block at idle and WOT. Check TPS set-up. Must connect DDT with adapter harness (84-822560A5) to ECM. Clean and inspect male and female connectors. Page 2A-16 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 IGNITION DFI Troubleshooting Guide (continued) Symptom Cause Action 3. Engine idle is rough 3.1 Low air pressure in rail (less See 1.2 than 79 ± 2 psi while running) 3.2 Fouled spark plug Replace spark plug: –If carbon bridges electrode gap or if it is completely black. –If it is not firing and is wet with fuel. Note: If spark plug is grey or completely black with aluminum specs, this indicates a scuffed piston. 3.3 Failed direct injector Refer to specifications for ohm test. 3.4 Failed fuel injector Refer to specifications for ohm test. 3.5 Bad coil/weak spark Refer to specifications for ohm test. 3.6 Flywheel key sheared Remove flywheel and inspect key. 4. Engine idles fast (RPM >700) or surges 4.1 Broken fuel pressure regulator or tracker diaphragm 4.2 Fuel leak 4.3 Tracker Valve spring missing 4.4 Improper set-up Measure fuel pressure. Remove and inspect diaphragms (a special tool is required for assembly). Check for fuel entering induction manifold or air compressor inlet. Fuel pump diaphragm leaking and/ or Vapor Separator flooding over. Inspect tracker valve for proper as- sembly. Check throttle cable & cam roller adjustment. 5. Engine runs rough below 5.1 Fouled spark plug See 3.2 3000 rpm 5.2 Low air pressure in rail See 1.2 5.3 Throttle misadjusted Check throttle cam setup on induction manifold. Inspect linkage and roller. If throttle plate stop screws have been tampered with, contact Mercury Marine Service Department for correct adjustment procedures. 5.4 Bad coil/weak spark See 3.5 5.5 TPS malfunction See 2.4 6. Engine runs rough above 6.1 Fouled spark plug See 3.2 3000 rpm 6.2 Speed Reduction See 7 6.3 Low air pressure in rails See 1.2 6.4 TPS malfunction See 2.4 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2A-17 IGNITION Page 2A-18 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 DFI Troubleshooting Guide (continued) Symptom Cause Action 7. Speed Reduction (RPM reduced or limited to 3000) 7.1 Low battery voltage ECM requires 8 volts minimum Fuel Pump requires 9 volts Check battery and/or alternator. Check electrical connections. 7.2 Overheat condition (engine and/or air compressor) Check water pump impeller/cooling system. 7.3 Oil pump electrical failure Check electrical connection. 7.4 TPS failure If one (1) TPS fails rpm is reduced to 3,000. If both TPSs fail, rpm is reduced to idle Check electrical connections. 8. Engine RPM reduced to idle only 8.1 Both TPSs failed 8.2 Battery voltage below 9.5 volts See 2.4 Use DDT or volt meter to check battery voltage 9. Loss of spark on 1 cylinder 9.1 Loose wire or pin in connectors between ECM and coil primary. 9.2 Faulty ignition coil. 9.3 Faulty spark plug. 9.4 Faulty spark plug wire Note: Due to the long spark duration of this ignition system, the DDT may indicate the incorrect cylinder as having an ignition fault. Example: If the DDT indicates an ignition fault on cylinder #4, the problem may be on the prior cylinder in the firing order – I.E. cylinder number #3. Check connectors. Replace coil. Replace spark plug. Replace spark plug wire. Ignition Components Removal and Installation Flywheel Cover Removal and Installation REMOVAL Remove flywheel cover by lifting off. Disconnect the vent hose. a a - Vent Hose INSTALLATION Install flywheel cover as follows: a. Place cover onto the front flange. IGNITION 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2A-19 b. Push rear of the cover down onto the rear pin and air intake tube for the air compressor. c. Connect vent hose onto fitting. d. Position hoses into holder. a b d c a - Front Flange b - Air Intake Tube c - Fitting d - Holder Electronic Control Module (ECM) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect ECM harness connectors. 2. Remove 3 bolts securing ECM. a c f f g d a b c e f f g a - Electronic Control Module b - Bracket – Fuse Holder c - Rubber Pad d - Bolt (2) – Torque to 80 lb-in (9 N·m). e - Bolt (3) – Torque to 80 lb-in (9 N·m) f - Bushing g - Rubber Grommet INSTALLATION 1. Secure ECM to powerhead with 3 bolts. 2. Install rubber pad and bracket for the fuse holder. 3. Reconnect harness connectors. IGNITION Page 2A-20 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Ignition Module (Coil) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect coil harness and spark plug lead. 2. Loosen the electrical mounting plate to gain access to the rear locknuts. 3. Remove module attaching bolts. 56141 a c b g h i j b b c b d j i h g f e a - Bolts (6) –Torque to 80 lb-in (9 Nm). b - Ignition Coils (6) c - Spacer – Place on Bolts between coils d - Electrical Mounting Plate e - Bolts (4) – Torque to 235 lb-in (27 Nm). f - Washer g - Rubber Grommet h - Bushing i - Washer j - Locknut (6) INSTALLATION 1. Fasten coils to electrical mounting plate as shown. 2. Reinstall electrical mounting plate. 3. Reconnect spark plug lead and coil harness. IGNITION 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2A-21 Crank Position Sensor REMOVAL 1. Disconnect harness. 2. Remove bolt securing sensor to bracket. 56069 a b c d a - Shim (0.010 or 0.020 in.) (0.254 mm 0.508 mm) b - Crank Position Sensor c - Washer d - Bolt – Torque to 50 lb-in (5.5 Nm) INSTALLATION 1. Fasten sensor to bracket with bolt. 2. Set air gap @ 0.025 in. – 0.040 in. (0.635 mm – 1.01 mm) 3. Reconnect sensor harness. Throttle Position Sensors (TPS) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect wiring harness. 2. Remove screws securing sensors to bracket. a b d e a b c a - Throttle Sensor – Inside b - Spacer c - TPS Lever d - Throttle Sensor – Outside e - Screw (3) – Torque to 20 lb-in (2.5 Nm). INSTALLATION 1. Fasten sensors to bracket as shown. 2. Reconnect wiring harness. CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM ELECTRICAL Section 2B – Charging & Starting System Table of Contents Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-1 Battery Cable Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-2 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-2 Recommended Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-2 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-3 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-3 Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-3 Charging a Discharged Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-4 Winter Storage of Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-4 Flywheel Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-5 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-5 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-6 Flywheel/Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-8 System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-10 Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-10 Alternator Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-11 Diagnosis of Alternator System on Engine . . . . . . 2B-11 Alternator Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-12 Alternator System Circuitry Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-13 Output Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-13 Sensing Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-13 Voltage Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-14 Current Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-15 Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-15 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-15 Specifications Disassembly and Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-16 Rotor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-18 Stator Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-19 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-20 Pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-21 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-22 Alternator Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-22 Starter System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-23 Starter Motor Amperes Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-23 Starter System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-23 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-23 Starter Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-24 Troubleshooting the Starter Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-25 Starter Circuit Troubleshooting Flow Chart . . . . . . 2B-26 Starter Removal and Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-27 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-27 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-28 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-28 Starter Cleaning, Inspection and Testing . . . . . . . 2B-30 Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-30 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-30 Starter Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-32 Starter Solenoid Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-34 Commander 2000 Key Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-35 2 B CHARGING SYSTEM Alternator Output (Regulated) Brush Length Voltage Output Regulator Current Draw 32 - 38 Amperes @ 2000 RPM @ Battery 52 - 60 Amperes @ 2000 RPM @ Alternator Std Exposed Length: 0.413 in. (10.5 mm) Min. Exposed Length: 0.059 in. (1.5 mm) 13.5 to 15.1 Volts 0.15 mA (Ign. Switch Off) 30.0 mA (Ign. Switch On) STARTING SYSTEM Electric Start – All Models Starter Draw (Under Load) Starter Draw (No Load) Minimum Brush Length Battery Rating 165 Amperes 30 Amperes 0.25 in. (65.4 mm) 1000 (Minimum) Marine Cranking Amps (MCA) 750 (Minimum) Cold Cranking Amps (CCA) 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2B-1 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM Battery Cable Size If standard (original) battery cables are replaced with longer cables, the wire gauge size must increase. See chart below for correct wire gauge size. Battery Cable Length ÎÎ Wire Gage Size Battery Cable Wire Gage Size Mercury/Mariner OutboardsModels Battery Cable Length 8 ft. 2.4m 9 ft. 2.7m 10ft. 3.0m 11ft. 3.4m 12ft. 3.7m 13ft. 4.0m 14ft. 4.3m 15ft. 4.6m 16ft. 4.9m 17ft. 5.2m 18ft. 5.5m 19ft. 5.8m 20ft. 6.1m 21ft. 6.4m 22ft. 6.7m 23ft. 7.0m 24ft. 7.3m Wire Gage Size No. SAE 6-25 Hp #8* #8 #6 #6 #6 #6 #4 #4 #4 #4 #4 #4 #4 #4 #2 #2 #2 30-115 Hp #6* #4 #4 #4 #4 #4 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #0 #0 #0 125-250 Hp (except DFI) #6* #6 #4 #4 #4 #4 #4 #4 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 DFI Models #4* #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #0 #0 #0 * = Standard (original) Cable Length and wire gage size. Replacement Parts WARNING Electrical, ignition and fuel system components on your Mercury/Mariner outboard are designed and manufactured to comply with U. S. Coast Guard Rules and Regulations to minimize risks of fire and explosions. Use of replacement electrical, ignition or fuel system components, which do not comply with these rules and regulations, could result in a fire or explosion hazard and should be avoided. Recommended Battery A 12 volt marine battery with a minimum Cold Cranking amperage rating of 750 amperes or 1000 (minimum) Marine Cranking amperes should be used. Page 2B-2 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM Special Tools 1. Volt/Ohm Meter 91-99750A1or DMT 2000 Digital Tachometer Multimeter 91-854009A1 a b a-Volt/Ohm Meter 91-99750A1 b-DMT 2000 Digital Tachometer Multimeter 91-854009A1 2. Ammeter (60 Ampere minimum) (Obtain locally) 3. Flywheel Holder 91-52344 54964 4. Protector Cap 91-24161 5. Flywheel Puller 91-73687A1 Battery Precautions CAUTION If battery acid comes in contact with skin or eyes, wash skin immediately with a mild soap. Flush eyes with water immediately and see a doctor. When charging batteries, an explosive gas mixture forms in each cell. Part of this gas escapes through holes in vent plugs and may form an explosive atmosphere around battery if ventilation is poor. This explosive gas may remain in or around battery for several hours after it has been charged. Sparks or flames can ignite this gas and cause an internal ex- plosion which may shatter the battery. The following precautions should be observed to prevent an explosion. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2B-3 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM 1. DO NOT smoke near batteries being charged or which have been charged very recently. 2. DO NOT break live circuits at terminals of batteries because a spark usually occurs at the point where a live circuit is broken. Always be careful when connecting or disconnecting cable clamps on chargers. Poor connections are a common cause of electrical arcs which cause explosions. 3. DO NOT reverse polarity of battery terminal to cable connections. Charging a Discharged Battery WARNING Hydrogen and oxygen gases are produced during normal battery operation or charging. Sparks or flame can cause this mixture to ignite and explode, if they are brought near the vent openings. Sulphuric acid in battery can cause serious burns, if spilled on skin or in eyes. Flush or wash away immediately with clear water. The following basic rule applies to any battery charging situation: 1. Any battery may be charged at any rate (in amperes) or as long as spewing of electrolyte (from violent gassing) does not occur and for as long as electrolyte temperature does not exceed 125° F (52° C). If spewing of electrolyte occurs, or if electrolyte temperature exceeds 125° F, charging rate (in amperes) must be reduced or temporarily halted to avoid damage to the battery. 2. Battery is fully charged when, over a 2-hour period at a low charging rate (in amperes), all cells are gassing freely (not spewing liquid electrolyte), and no change in specific gravity occurs. Full charge specific gravity is 1.260-1.275, corrected for electrolyte temperature with electrolyte level at 3/16 in. (4.8 mm) over plate, unless electrolyte loss has occurred (from age or over-filling) in which case specific gravity reading will be lower. For most satisfactory charging, lower charging rates in amperes are recommended. 3. If, after prolonged charging, specific gravity of at least 1.230 on all cells cannot be reached, battery is not in optimum condition and will not provide optimum performance; however, it may continue to provide additional service, if it has performed satisfactorily in the past. 4. To check battery voltage while cranking engine with electric starting motor, place RED (+) lead of tester on POSITIVE (+) battery terminal and BLACK (–) lead of tester on NEGATIVE (–) battery terminal. If the voltage drops below 9-1/2 volts while cranking, the battery is weak and should be recharged or replaced. Winter Storage of Batteries Battery companies are not responsible for battery damage either in winter storage or in dealer stock if the following instructions are not observed: 1. Remove battery from its installation as soon as possible and remove all grease, sulfate and dirt from top surface by running water over top of battery. Be sure, however, that vent caps are tight beforehand, and blow off all excess water thoroughly with compressed air. Check water level, making sure that plates are covered. Page 2B-4 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2B-5 2. When adding distilled water to battery, be extremely careful not to fill more than 3/16 in. (4.8 mm) above perforated baffles inside battery. Battery solution or electrolyte expands from heat caused by charging. Overfilling battery will cause electrolyte to overflow (if filled beyond 3/16, above baffles). 3. Grease terminal bolts well with 2-4-C Marine Lubricant and store battery in a COOLDRY place. Remove battery from storage every 30-45 days, check water level and put on charge for 5 or 6 hours at 6 amperes. DO NOT FAST CHARGE. 4. If specific gravity drops below 1.240, check battery for reason and recharge. When gravity reaches 1.260, discontinue charging. To check specific gravity, use a hydrometer, which can be purchased locally. 5. Repeat preceding charging procedure every 30-45 days, as long as battery is in storage, for best possible maintenance during inactive periods to ensure a good serviceable battery in spring. When ready to place battery back in service, remove excess grease from terminals (a small amount is desirable on terminals at all times), recharge again as necessary and reinstall battery. Flywheel Removal and Installation Removal 1. Remove flywheel cover from engine. WARNING Engine could possibly start when turning flywheel during removal and installation; therefore, disconnect (and isolate) spark plug leads from spark plugs to prevent engine from starting. 2. Disconnect spark plug leads from spark plugs. 3. While holding flywheel with flywheel holder (91-52344), remove flywheel nut and washer. 57415 a a - Flywheel Holder (91-25344) 4. Install a crankshaft Protector Cap (91-24161) on end of crankshaft, then install Flywheel Puller (91-73687A2) into flywheel. CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM Page 2B-6 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 5. Hold flywheel tool with wrench while tightening bolt down on protector cap. Tighten bolt until flywheel comes free. 57413 a a - Flywheel Puller (91-73687A2) NOTE: Neither heat or hammer should be used on flywheel to aid in removal as damage to flywheel or electrical components under flywheel may result. 6. Remove flywheel. Inspect flywheel for cracks or damage. Installation IMPORTANT: Do not apply grease to the flywheel taper or corresponding crankshaft splines. The application of grease to these areas will result in flywheel hub breakage when tightening flywheel nut. 1. Install flywheel. 2. Install flywheel washer and nut. 3. Hold flywheel with Flywheel Holder (91-52344). Torque nut to 125 lb-ft (169.5 Nm). 57414 a a - Flywheel Holder (91-52344) CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM Notes: 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2B-7 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM Page 2B-8 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Flywheel/Alternator 1 2 12 14 23 27 16 4 15 20 17 21 25 26 3 22 19 24 18 14 7 8 9 10 11 13 6 5 5 7 9 4 4 20 5 7 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM Flywheel/Alternator REFREF. .. NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION TORQUE lb-in lb-ft Nm. 1 1 ALTERNATOR 2 1 SCREW (M10 x 100) 480 40 54 3 1 SCREW (M10 x120) 275 23 31 4 3 WASHER 5 3 MOUNT 6 1 BRACKET 7 3 WASHER 8 1 BRACKET 9 2 NUT 275 23 31 10 1 SCREW (M10 x 55) 275 23 31 11 1 CABLE 12 1 PIN 13 1 BRACKET 14 3 SCREW (5/16-18 x 1 IN.) 185 15.5 21 15 1 SPRING 16 1 BELT TENSIONER 17 1 STUD (M10 x 85) 18 1 NUT 180 15 20 19 1 BUSHING 20 2 WASHER 21 1 PULLEY 22 1 SCREW (M10 x 35) 300 25 34 23 1 BELT 24 1 FLYWHEEL 25 1 NUT 125 169 26 1 WASHER 27 1 PLUG 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2B-9 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM System Components The battery charging system consists of the alternator, battery, ignition switch, starter solenoid and the wiring which connects these components. 51708 To a b c d a-Alternator b-Battery c-20 Ampere Fuse d-Starter Solenoid Precautions The following precautions must be observed when working on the alternator system. Failure to observe these precautions may result in serious damage to the alternator system. 1. Do not attempt to polarize the alternator. 2. Do not short across or ground any of the terminals on the alternator, except as specifically instructed. 3. Never disconnect the alternator output lead, regulator harness or battery cables when the alternator is being driven by the engine. 4. Always remove NEGATIVE (–) battery cable from battery before working on alternator system. 5. When installing battery, be sure to connect the NEGATIVE (–) (GROUNDED) battery cable to NEGATIVE (–) battery terminal and the POSITIVE (+) battery cable to POSITIVE (+) battery terminal. 6. When using a charger or booster battery, connect it in parallel with existing battery (POSITIVE to POSITIVE; NEGATIVE to NEGATIVE). Page 2B-10 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM Alternator Description The alternator employs a rotor, which is supported in 2 end frames by ball bearings, and is driven at 2.5 times engine speed. The rotor contains a field winding enclosed between 2 multiple-finger pole pieces. The ends of the field winding are connected to 2 brushes which make continuous sliding contact with the slip rings. The current (flowing through the field winding) creates a magnetic field that causes the adjacent fingers of the pole pieces to become alternate north and south magnetic poles. A 3-phase stator is mounted directly over the rotor pole pieces and between the 2 end frames. It consists of 3 windings wound 120° electrically out-of-phase on the inside of a laminated core. The windings are connected together on one end, while the other ends are connected to a full-wave rectifier bridge. The rectifier bridge contains 8 diodes which allows current to flow from ground, through the stator and to the output terminal, but not in the opposite direction. When current is supplied to the rotor field winding, and the rotor is turned, the movement of the magnetic fields created induces an alternating current into the stator windings. The rectifier bridge changes this alternating current to direct current which appears at the output terminal. A diode trio is connected to the stator windings to supply current to the regulator and the rotor field during operation. Voltage output of the alternator is controlled by a transistorized voltage regulator that senses the voltage at the battery and regulates the field current to maintain alternator voltage for properly charging the battery. Current output of the alternator does not require regulation, as maximum current output is self-limited by the design of the alternator. As long as the voltage is regulated within the prescribed limits, the alternator cannot produce excessive current. A cutout relay in the voltage regulator also is not required, as the rectifier diodes prevent the battery from discharging back through the stator. A small amount of current is supplied by the excitation circuit in the regulator to the rotor field to initially start the alternator charging. Once the alternator begins to produce output, field current is supplied solely by the diode trio. The alternator is equipped with 2 fans which induce air flow through the alternator to remove heat created by the rectifier and stator. Diagnosis of Alternator System on Engine 1. If problem is an undercharged battery, verify condition has not been caused by excessive accessory current draw or by accessories which have accidentally been left on. 2. Check physical condition and state of charge of battery. Battery must be at least 75% (1.230 specific gravity) of fully charged to obtain valid results in the following tests. If not, charge battery before testing system. 3. Inspect entire alternator system wiring for defects. Check all connections for tightness and cleanliness, particularly battery cable clamps and battery terminals. IMPORTANT: RED output lead from alternator must be tight. A darkened RED sleeve indicates lead was loose and becoming hot. 4. Check alternator drive belt for cracks and fraying. Replace if necessary. Check belt tension. Adjust if necessary, as outlined under “Drive Belt Replacement and Adjustment.” 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2B-11 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM Alternator Assembly 51683 h a b c d e f g h ij a-Pulley Nut b-Pulley c-Spacer d-Frame and Rotor Assembly e-Brush Holder f-Brush Cover g-Regulator h-Rectifier (Diode Assembly) i-Insulator j-End Cover Page 2B-12 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2B-13 Alternator System Circuitry Test Using a 0-20 volt DC voltmeter, perform the following tests: Output Circuit 1. Connect POSITIVE (+) voltmeter lead to alternator terminal B (output terminal). Connect NEGATIVE (–) lead to case ground on alternator. 2. Shake alternator wiring harness. Meter should indicate battery voltage and should not vary. If proper reading is not obtained, check for loose or dirty connections or damaged wiring. VOLTS DC AMPS OHMS 0 10 8 6 4 2 DCV ACV DVA 00 5 10 20 30 10 40 15 20 0 5101520304060100200 56113 aa a - Terminal B Sensing Circuit 1. Unplug RED and PURPLE lead connector from alternator. 2. Connect POSITIVE (+) voltmeter lead to RED lead and NEGATIVE (–) voltmeter lead to ground. 3. Voltmeter should indicate battery voltage. If correct voltage is not present, check sensing circuit (RED lead) for loose or dirty connections or damaged wiring. 56114 a a a - Sense Lead (RED) CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM Page 2B-14 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Voltage Output 1. Using a 0-20 volt DC voltmeter, connect POSITIVE (+) lead of voltmeter to TERMINAL B of alternator and NEGATIVE (–) lead of voltmeter to engine ground. 2. Start engine and allow to warm up. Increase engine RPM from idle to 2000. Normal voltage output should be 13.5 – 15.1 volts. If voltage reading is greater than normal, replace voltage regulator. 3. If voltage reading is less than normal, fabricate a tool from a piece of stiff wire to the following specifications: 8 in. (203 mm) 13/16 in. (20.6 mm) 0.060 in. (1.52 mm) VOLTS DC AMPS OHMS 0 10 8 6 4 2 DCV ACV DVA 00 5 10 20 40 3105 10 20 0 5101520304060100200 56113 a a a - Terminal B 4. Insert bent end of tool through end cover and ground TERMINAL F. 56115 VOLTS DC AMPS OHMS 0 2 4 6 8 10 DCV ACV DVA 00 150 20 10 30 15 40 20 5 0 604030201510 100 200 b a c 51683 aa b c a a - Terminal F b - Tool c - Jumper Wire to Engine Ground (Attach to end of Tool) 5. With TERMINAL F grounded, voltage should rise to within the normal range (13.5 – 15.1). If voltage rises, replace the regulator. 6. If the voltage DOES NOT rise to within the normal range with TERMINAL F grounded, perform “CURRENT OUTPUT” test. CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2B-15 Current Output 1. With engine shut off, install ammeter (capable of reading 60+ amperes) in series between TERMINAL B on alternator and POSITIVE (+) terminal of battery. 2. Start engine and allow to warm up. Advance RPM to 2000. 3. Insert tool, previously fabricated for VOLTAGE OUTPUT, through end cover and ground TERMINAL F. 56116 b e a d c a - Terminal F b - Tool c - Jumper Wire to Engine Ground d - Terminal B e - Ammeter 4. Normal output is 60 amperes @ 2000 RPM. If output is normal, replace regulator. If output is low, a disassembly of the alternator is necessary to inspect and test individual components. Repair Removal 1. Remove top cowling. 2. Disconnect battery cables from battery. 3. Disconnect wiring harness from alternator. 4. Remove pivot bolt and tension bolt. a a b 56117 a b a a - Attaching Bolt b - Harnesses CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM Disassembly and Test 1. Remove 3 screws and nut securing end cover and remove insulator and cover. 2. Remove 5 screws securing regulator and brush assembly. 51680 e f g g 51683a b c d a-Cover b-Screws c-Nut d-Insulator e-Regulator f-Brush Assembly g-Screws NOTE: Proper regulator operation can be determined by VOLTAGE OUTPUT and CURRENT OUTPUT, previous. If regulator does not meet specifications, replace regulator. Torque regulator screws to 17 lb-in (2 Nm). NOTE: Brushes are replaced as an assembly. Inspect assembly for stuck brushes or excessive brush wear. Normal exposed brush length is 0.156 in. (4.0 mm). Minimum exposed brush length is 0.059 in. (1.5 mm). 3. Remove 4 screws securing rectifier (diode assembly) to alternator. 51684 a b a-Screws b-Rectifier (Diode Assembly) Page 2B-16 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM NOTE: To test rectifier assembly, touch POSITIVE (+) lead from ohmmeter to POSITIVE stud and NEGATIVE (–) lead from ohmmeter to each diode terminal. The ohmmeter should indicate continuity. 51679 a bc a-Positive Stud b-Positive Ohm Lead c-Negative Ohm Lead Reverse leads – NEGATIVE lead on POSITIVE stud and POSITIVE lead on each diode assembly. NO CONTINUITY should be observed. If continuity is observed in both tests, or NO CONTINUITY is observed in both tests, the rectifier assembly is defective and must be replaced. Torque rectifier screws to 17 lb-in (1.9 Nm). 51679aab c a-Positive Stud b-Negative Ohm Lead c-Positive Ohm Lead IMPORTANT: Depending on the polarity of the ohmmeter, reversed readings may be obtained – I.E. – CONTINUITY is observed when the NEGATIVE lead touches the POSITIVE stud and NO CONTINUITY is observed when the POSITIVE lead touches the POSITIVE stud. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2B-17 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM IMPORTANT: The regulator, rectifier and brush assembly are the only components individually replaceable on this alternator. If the rotor or stator is defective, the entire rotor, stator and housing must be replaced as an assembly. IMPORTANT: Clean anti-corrosion paint from electrical connections prior to reassembly. Coat all electrical connections with LIQUID NEOPRENE (92-25711-1). Rotor Test 1. Inspect slip ring surface for roughness, abnormal wear and/or burning. If such conditions exist, rotor is not considered serviceable and alternator should be replaced. 2. Measure the outer diameter of the slip rings using vernier calipers. STANDARD DIAMETER: 0.567 in. (14.4 mm); MINIMUM DIAMETER: 0.551 in. (14 mm). If slip ring diameter is less than minimum, rotor is not considered serviceable and alternator should be replaced. 5168051684 a a-Slip Rings 3. Inspect rotor for an open circuit. Using an ohmmeter, check for continuity between slip rings. Resistance should not exceed 3 ohms. If no continuity exists, rotor is defective. 4. Check rotor for short to ground. NO CONTINUITY should exist between slip rings and rotor shaft. If CONTINUITY exists, rotor is defective. 51682 a a-Slip Rings b-Rotor Shaft 51683 a b Page 2B-18 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM Stator Test 1. With rectifier removed, use an ohmmeter to check for a short circuit between each stator lead and the stator frame. If CONTINUITY exists, stator is defective. 51682 aab a-Stator Leads b-Frame 2. Inspect stator for open circuit. Using an ohmmeter, check for an open circuit between each of the stator leads. If no continuity exists, stator is defective. 51682 a a a-Stator Leads 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2B-19 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM Reassembly 1. Position rectifier assembly over stator leads. 2. Form stator leads in a clockwise loop and secure leads to rectifier with 4 screws. Torque screws to 17 lb-in (1.9 Nm). 51684b c c d d51683 a b b a-Rectifier Assembly b-Stator Leads c-Stator Leads d-Screws [Torque to 17 lb-in (1.9 Nm)] 3. Secure regulator to alternator with 2 screws [1 in. (25.4 mm) long]; 1 screw [0.25 in. (6.4 mm) long] and lockwashers. DO NOT tighten screws at this time. 4. Secure brush assembly with 2 screws – [0.25 in. (6.4 mm) long] and [0.312 in. (8.0 mm) long]. 51684 c a b c a-Regulatorb-Screws [1 in. (25.4 mm)] c-Screw [0.25 in. (6.4 mm)] d-Brush Assemblye-Screw [0.25 in. (6.4 mm)] f-Screw [0.312 in. (8.0 mm)] 51680 d e f Page 2B-20 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM 5. Install end cover. Secure cover with 3 screws. Torque screws to 23 lb-in. (2.5 Nm). Install terminal insulator. Torque nut to 36 lb-in (4 Nm). 51683 aab c d a-Cover b-Screw [Torque to 23 lb-in (2.5 Nm)] c-Terminal Insulator d-Nut [Torque to 36 lb-in. (4 Nm)] Pulley 1. While holding rotor shaft, remove pulley nut. 2. Before reinstalling pulley, verify spacer is installed on rotor shaft. 51683 d 51679 a b c a-Pulley b-Rotor Shaft c-Nut d-Spacer 3. Torque pulley nut to 50 lb-ft (68 Nm). 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2B-21 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM Page 2B-22 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Installation 1. Secure alternator to engine block with attaching bolts. Torque top bolt to 40 lb-ft (54 Nm). Torque bottom bolt to 35 lb-ft (47.5 Nm). 2. Install alternator belt in V-groove of flywheel and alternator pulley. 3. Reconnect electrical harness to alternator. a 56117 c a b c a - Top Bolt [Torque to 40 lb-ft (54 Nm)] b - Bottom Bolt [Torque to 35 lb-ft. (47.5 Nm)] c - Harnesses Alternator Belt Tension Adjustment Correct alternator belt tension is maintained by a belt tensioner assembly. a 56142 a a - Belt Tensioner Assembly CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM Starter System Starter Motor Amperes Draw STARTER MOTOR NO LOAD NORMAL PART NO. AMP. DRAW AMP. DRAW 50-833153-1 30 AMPS 165 AMPS Starter System Components 1. Battery 2. Starter Solenoid 3. Neutral Start Switch 4. Starter Motor 5. Ignition Switch Description The battery supplies electricity to activate the starter motor. When the ignition is turned to the “START” position, the starter solenoid is energized and completes the starter circuit between the battery and starter. The neutral start switch opens the starter circuit when the shift control lever is not in neutral thus preventing accidental starting when the engine is in gear. CAUTION The starter motor may be damaged if operated continuously. DO NOT operate continuously for more than 30 seconds. Allow a 2 minute cooling period between starting attempts. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2B-23 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM Starter Motor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 131411 12 15 715 17 14 1618 14 2 Cycle Outboard Oil (92-826666A24) REFREF. .. NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION TORQUE lb-in lb-ft Nm. 1 1 STARTER MOTOR 2 1 DRIVE CAP 3 2 THRU BOLT 70 8 4 1 DRIVE KIT 5 1 PINION 6 1 ARMATURE 7 1 BRUSH/SPRING KIT 8 1 BRUSH HOLDER 9 1 COMMUTATOR CAP 10 2 SCREW Drive Tight 11 1 LOCKWASHER 12 1 NUT (1/4-20) 35 4.0 13 1 LOCKWASHER 14 1 NUT (1/4-20) 35 4.0 15 3 SCREW (5/16-18 x 1-3/4) 210 17.5 24 16 1 BATTERY CABLE (NEGATIVE) 17 1 DECAL-Warning-High Voltage 18 1 BOOT Page 2B-24 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM Troubleshooting the Starter Circuit Before beginning the troubleshooting flow chart, verify the following conditions: 1. Confirm that battery is fully charged. 2. Check that control lever is in “NEUTRAL” position. 3. Check terminals for corrosion and loose connections. 4. Check cables and wiring for frayed and worn insulation. 5. Check 20 amp fuse. Location of “Test Points” (called out in flow chart) are numbered below. STARTER BATTERY STARTER SOLENOID 20 AMP FUSE IGNITION SWITCH NEUTRAL START SWITCH (LOCATED IN CONTROL HOUSING) TO ALTERNATOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Starter Circuit 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2B-25 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM Starter Circuit Troubleshooting Flow Chart Starter Motor Does Not Turn SAFETY WARNING: Disconnect yellow (starter motor) cable from starter solenoid test point 1 BEFORE making tests 1–thru–7 to prevent unexpected engine cranking. TEST 1 Use an ohmmeter (Rx1 scale) and connect meter leads between NEGATIVE (–) battery post and common power- head ground. No Continuity Indicated – There is an open circuit in the BLACK NEGATIVE (–) battery cable between the NEGATIVE (–) battery post and the powerhead. •Check cable for loose or corroded connections. •Check cable for open. Continuity Indicated Proceed to TEST 2 Test 2 a. Disconnect BLACK ground wire(s) from Test Point 2. b. Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 2. c. Turn ignition key to “Start” position. No voltage reading: proceed to TEST 3. TEST 3 a. Reconnect BLACK ground wire. b. Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 3. c. Turn ignition key to “Start” position. 12 Volt Reading* Check BLACK ground wire for poor connection or open circuit. Reconnect ground wire to starter solenoid. Proceed to TEST 7. 12 Volt Reading Defective starter solenoid TEST 4 a. Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 4. b. Turn ignition key to “Start” position. 12 Volt Reading* Neutral start switch is open or YELLOW/RED wire is open between Test Points 4 and 3. TEST 5 Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 5 12 Volt Reading* Defective ignition switch. TEST 6 Check for voltage between common engine ground and Test Point 6. No voltage reading: Check RED wire between battery(+) POSITIVE terminal and Test Point 6. 12 Volt Reading* Check fuse in RED wire between Test Points 5 and 6. Check for open RED wire between Test Points 5 and 6. *Battery Voltage No voltage reading: proceed to Step 4 No voltage reading: proceed to Test 5 No voltage reading: proceed to Test 6 Page 2B-26 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2B-27 TEST 7 a. Connect voltmeter between common engine and Test Point1. b. Turn ignition key to “Start” position. No voltage reading: Defective starter solenoid 12 Volt Reading* Should hear solenoid click: proceed to TEST 8 TEST 8 a. Reconnect BLACK cable (with YELLOW sleeve) to starter solenoid Test Point 1. b. Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 7. c. Turn ignition key to “Start” position. No voltage reading: Check BLACK cable (with YELLOW sleeve) for poor connection or open circuit. 12 Volt Reading* If starter motor does not turn, check starter motor. *Battery Voltage Starter Removal and Installation Removal CAUTION Disconnect battery leads from battery before removing starter. 1. Disconnect BLACK ground cable from starter. 2. Disconnect BLACK cable (with YELLOW sleeve) from starter. 3. Remove 2 upper bolts and 1 lower bolt securing starter and remove starter. a c 52135 b c a - BLACK (with YELLOW sleeve) POSITIVE (+) 12-Volt Cable b - Upper Mounting Bolts c - Lower Mounting Bolt CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM Page 2B-28 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Installation 1. Secure starter to engine with 3 bolts. Use Left top bolt to attach BLACK NEGATIVE (–) battery cable. Torque top attaching bolts to 23 lb-ft (31 Nm). Torque bottom attaching bolt to 21 lb-ft (28.5 Nm). 2. Secure BLACK cable (with YELLOW sleeve) to POSITIVE (+) terminal on starter. Torque nut to 60 lb-in (7 Nm). c b 52135 a a b d a - Top Bolts [Torque to 23 lb-ft (31 Nm)] b - Bottom Bolt [Torque to 21 lb-ft (28.5 Nm)] c - BLACK Cable (with YELLOW sleeve) d - Nut [Torque to 60 lb-in (7 Nm)] Disassembly 1. Remove starter as outlined in “Starter Removal and Installation,” preceding. 2. Remove 2 through bolts from starter. 3. Tap commutator end cap to loosen and remove from frame. Do not loose brush springs. 11646 a a b a - Through Bolts b - Commutator End Cap CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM 4. Brush replacement is recommended if brushes are pitted, chipped or worn to less than 0.25 in. (6.4 mm). If necessary, remove brushes as follows: a. Remove hex nut and washers from POSITIVE (+) terminal and remove POSITIVE brushes and terminal as an assembly. b. Remove 2 bolts securing NEGATIVE (–) brushes and brush holder to end cap. 11656 b a b c c bd a-Brush Holder b-Positive Brushes c-Negative Brushes d-Positive Terminal 5. Remove armature (with drive end cap) from starter frame. 6. Remove locknut and remove drive assembly from armature shaft. 51711 a 11658 b c d e f g h a-Hold Armature Shaft with Wrench on Hex Portion of Drive Assembly b-Locknut c-Spacer d-Spring e-Drive Assembly f-Drive End Cap g-Armature Shaft h-Washer 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2B-29 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM Starter Cleaning, Inspection and Testing Cleaning and Inspection 1. Clean all starter motor parts. 2. Check pinion teeth for chips, cracks or excessive wear. 3. Replace the drive clutch spring and/or collar if tension is not adequate or if wear is excessive. 4. Inspect brush holder for damage or for failure to hold brushes against commutator. 5. Replace brushes that are pitted or worn to less than 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) in length. 6. Inspect the armature conductor (commutator bar junction) for a tight connection. A loose connection (excessive heat from prolonged cranking melts solder joints) results in a burned commutator bar. 7. Resurface and undercut a rough commutator as follows: CAUTION Do not turn down the commutator excessively. a. Resurface the commutator and undercut the insulation between the commutator bars 1/32 in. (0.8mm) to the full width of the insulation and so that the undercut is flat. b. Clean the commutator slots after undercutting. c. Sand the commutator lightly with No. 00 sandpaper to remove burrs, then clean the commutator. d. Recheck the armature on a growler for shorts as specified in the following procedure (“Testing”). 8. Open-circuited armatures often can be repaired. The most likely place for an open circuit is at the commutator bars, as a result of long cranking periods. Long cranking periods overheat the starter motor so that solder in the connections melts and is thrown out. The resulting poor connections then cause arcing and burning of the commutator bars. 9. Repair bars, that are not excessively burned, by resoldering the leads in bars (using rosin flux solder) and turning down the commutator in a lathe to remove burned material, then undercut the mica. 10. Clean out the copper or brush dust from slots between the commutator bars. 11. Check the armature for ground. See the following procedure (“Testing”). Testing Armature Test for Shorts Check armature for short circuits by placing on growler and holding hack saw blade over armature core while armature is rotated. If saw blade vibrates, armature is shorted. Recheck after cleaning between commutator bars. If saw blade still vibrates, replace armature. 11669 Page 2B-30 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM Armature Test for Ground 1. Set ohmmeter to (R x 1 scale). Place one lead of ohmmeter on armature core or shaft and other lead on commutator. 2. If meter indicates continuity, armature is grounded and must be replaced. 51711 Checking Positive Brushes and Terminal Set ohmmeter to (R x 1 scale). Connect meter leads between POSITIVE brushes. Meter must indicate full continuity or zero resistance. If resistance is indicated, inspect lead to brush and lead to POSITIVE terminal solder connection. If connection cannot be repaired, brushes must be replaced. 51711 a a-POSITIVE (+) Brushes Testing Negative Brushes for Ground Set ohmmeter to (R x1 scale). Place one lead of the ohmmeter on the NEGATIVE brush and the other lead on the end cap (bare metal). If the meter indicates NO continuity, replace the NEGATIVE brush. Repeat this procedure on the other NEGATIVE brush. a b a-NEGATIVE (–) Brushes b-End Cap 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2B-31 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM Starter Reassembly 1. If brushes were removed, replace as follows: a. Install POSITIVE brushes (along with POSITIVE terminal) into commutator end cap. 52131 a b c d e f b g h i a-End Cap b-POSITIVE Brushes c-POSITIVE Terminal d-Insulating Block e-Insulating Washer f-Hex Nut g-POSITIVE (+) Terminal h-Long Brush Lead i-Push Lead into Slot b. Install NEGATIVE brushes (along with brush holder). 11656 d a b c ab d d a-POSITIVE (+) Brushes b-NEGATIVE (–) Brushes c-Brush Holder d-Bolts (Fasten NEGATIVE Brushes and Holder) Page 2B-32 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM 2. If removed, reinstall parts on armature shaft. Use a new locknut and tighten securely on end of shaft. 11658 a b c e d f g a-Locknut b-Spacer c-Spring d-Drive Assembly e-Drive End Cap f-Armature Shaft g-Washer 3. Lubricate helix threads on armature shaft with a drop of SAE 10W oil. 4. Lubricate bushing in drive end plate with a drop of SAE 10W oil. 5. Position armature into starter frame. 6. Lubricate bushing (located in commutator end cap) with one drop of SAE 10W oil. DO NOT overlubricate. 7. To prevent damage to brushes and springs when installing commutator end cap, it is recommended that a brush retaining tool be made as shown: 5, 9/16,2-1/6, 1-3/4, a (14.3 mm) (55.1 mm) (44.5 mm) (127.0 mm) a-Bushing (DO NOT overlubricate) 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2B-33 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM 8. Place springs and brushes into brush holder and hold in place with brush retainer tool. 9. Install commutator end cap onto starter frame. Align marks on frame with alignment marks on end caps. Remove brush retainer tool. Install through bolts and torque to 70 lb-in (8 Nm). 52130 51713 b a a-Brush Retainer Tool b-Alignment Marks Starter Solenoid Test 1. Disconnect all wires from solenoid. 2. Connect ohmmeter (R x1 scale) between terminals 1 and 2. 3. Connect a 12-volt power supply between terminals 3 and 4. Solenoid should click and meter should read 0 ohms (full continuity). 4. If meter does not read 0 ohms (full continuity), replace solenoid. DCV ACV DVA 1 a b 1 2 3 4 a-12-VOLT Supply b-VOA Leads Page 2B-34 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM Commander 2000 Key Switch Test 1. Disconnect remote control wiring harness and instrument panel connector. 2. Set ohmmeter on R x 1 scale for the following tests. 3. If meter readings are other than specified in the following tests, verify that switch and not wiring is faulty. If wiring checks ok, replace switch. IMPORTANT: Key switch must be positioned to “RUN” or “START” and key pushed in to actuate choke for this test. KEY POSITION OFF RUN START CHOKE* CONTINUITY SHOULD BE INDICATED AT THE FOLLOWING POINTS: BLK BLK/YEL RED YEL/RED PUR YEL/BLK 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2B-35 TIMING, SYNCHRONIZING & ADJUSTING ELECTRICAL Section 2C – Timing, Synchronizing & Adjusting Table of Contents 2 C Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-1 Throttle Plate Screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-6 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-2 Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) Adjustment . . . . . . 2C-6 Crank Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-4 Idle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-6 Throttle Cam Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-5 Maximum Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-5 Specifications FULL THROTTLE RPM RANGE 5000 - 5600 IDLE RPM (IN FORWARD GEAR) 550 ± 25 MAXIMUM TIMING: @ WIDE OPEN Not Adjustable Controlled by ECM IDLE TIMING Not Adjustable Controlled by ECM SPARK PLUG TYPE LIGHT DUTY HEAVY DUTY SPARK PLUG GAP NGK: ZFR5F-11 Champion RC12MC4 NGK: PZFR5F-11 (Heavy Duty)* 0.040 in. (1.0 mm) FIRING ORDER 1-2-3-4-5-6 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 (INNER TPS) @ IDLE @ W.O.T. 3.70 - 4.90 VDC 0.30 - 1.80 VDC THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 (OUTER TPS) @ IDLE @ W.O.T. 0.10 - 1.50 VDC 3.20 - 4.90 VDC *Standard with engine 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2C-1 TIMING, SYNCHRONIZING & ADJUSTING Special Tools 1. DMT 2000 Digital Tachometer Multi-meter P/N 91-854009A1 2. Digital Diagnostic Tool (DDT) 91-823686A2 3. Software Cartridge 91-822608--4 Page 2C-2 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 TIMING, SYNCHRONIZING & ADJUSTING 4. DDT Reference Manual 90-825159-2 5. ECM Harness 84-822560--5 6. Extension Cable [10 ft. (3.05m)] 84-5003A1 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2C-3 TIMING, SYNCHRONIZING & ADJUSTING Page 2C-4 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Crank Position Sensor NOTE: Crank Position Sensor is normally not adjustable, but shims are available if sensor is found to be to close to flywheel. 1. Remove flywheel cover. 2. Using a feeler gauge, measure the air gap between the crank position sensor and a tooth on the flywheel. Gap should be 0.025 in. - 0.040 in. (0.635 mm - 1.02 mm). IMPORTANT: Crank Position Sensor must be perpendicular to flywheel tooth. 3. Reinstall flywheel cover. d 56069 a c d b e a - Air Gap [0.025 in - 0.040 in.(0.635 mm - 1.02 mm)] b - Crank Position Sensor c - Flywheel Tooth d - Bracket Screw (Drive Tight) e - 0.010 in. (0.254 mm) or 0.020 in. (0.508 mm) Shim if required – refer to parts manual TIMING, SYNCHRONIZING & ADJUSTING 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2C-5 Throttle Cam Adjustment NOTE: Low pressure electric fuel pump is removed for viewing purpose. 1. Loosen roller arm screw allowing roller to move freely. 2. Allow roller to rest on throttle cam. Adjust idle stop screw on throttle arm to align cam roller in the pocket of the throttle cam. 3. Tighten roller arm screw to provide clearance of 0.005 in. ± 0.005 in. (0.127 mm ± 0.127 mm) between roller and cam. – d a 56061 a b c d e a - Roller Arm Screw b - Roller c - Throttle Cam d - Wide Open Throttle Stop Screw e - Idle Stop Screw Maximum Throttle 1. Hold throttle arm against full throttle stop. 2. Adjust full throttle stop screw (located behind electric fuel pump) to allow full throttle valve opening while maintaining a 0.020 in. (0.508 mm) clearance between arm of throttle shaft and stop on attenuator box. 3. Tighten jam nut on full throttle stop screw. TIMING, SYNCHRONIZING & ADJUSTING Page 2C-6 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 4. Check for free play (roller lifts from cam) between roller and cam at full throttle to prevent linkage from binding. Readjust full throttle stop screw, if necessary. a b c 56062 d e f a b c d e f a - Throttle Arm b - Stop c - Full Throttle Stop Screw d - Throttle Shaft Arm e - 0.020 in. (0.508 mm) Clearance f - Stop on Attenuator Box Throttle Plate Screw IMPORTANT: DO NOT adjust throttle plate stop screw from factory setting. However, should the throttle plate require adjustment, use the throttle plate stop screw to set the throttle plate clearance @ 0.045 in. (1.143 mm) using a #56 drill. 56151 b a b a - Throttle Plate Stop Screw b - Throttle Plate Clearance – Set @ 0.045 in. (1.143mm) Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) Adjustment The Throttle Position Sensors are not adjustable. TPS settings can be monitored with the Digital Diagnostic Terminal through the ECM. If TPS settings are not within specifications, refer to Section 2A. Idle Speed Engine idle speed is not adjustable. The parameters affecting idle speed can be checked and monitored by the DDT. Refer to the DDT Reference Manual for complete details. WIRING DIAGRAMS ELECTRICAL Section 2D – Wiring Diagrams Table of Contents 2 D Power Trim Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-2 Oil Level Gauge Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-12 Instrument Wiring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-3 Engine Synchronizer Wiring Diagram . . . . . . 2D-14 Commander 3000 Classic Panel Remote Control . 2D-4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-15 Commander 3000 Panel Remote Control . . . . . . . . 2D-5 Multi-Function Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-16 Instrument/Lanyard Stop Switch Wiring Diagram . 2D-6 Dip Switch Setting/Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-16 Oil Level Gauge Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-7 Outboard Multi-Function Gauge Setting . . . . 2D-17 Instrument/Lanyard Stop Switch Wiring Diagram Warning System Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-18 (Dual Outboard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-8 Warning System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-19 QSI Gauge Wiring Diagrams 2D-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel Mount Remote Control Wiring Installation 2D-22 Tachometer Wiring Diagram 2D-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1998 135/150 DFI Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-23 Water Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-11 1999 135/150 DFI Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-24 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2D-1 WIRING DIAGRAMS Page 2D-2 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Power Trim Wiring Diagram a b c e g i k l m a b c d e f g h j k l m n a -Tach. Connector b -Key Switch Assembly c -Trim Switch d -Trim Sender e -Start Solenoid f -To Battery g -To Alternator h -Trim Pump and Motor i -DOWN Solenoid j -UP Solenoid k -Bottom Cowl Switch l -20 Ampere Fuse m -Engine Harness n -Remote Control Harness WIRING DIAGRAMS Instrument Wiring Connections Speedometer Tachometer Temperature/Oil Warning Panel Volt Meter TAN/WHTTAN/BLK 51820 BLK = BLACK GROUND TAN/WHT = TAN/WHITE OIL LIGHT TAN/BLK = TAN/BLACK TEMPERATURE LIGHT TAN = TAN TEMPERATURE GAUGE PUR = PURPLE IGNITION 12 VOLT GRY = GRAY TACHOMETER BRN/WHT = BROWN/WHITE TRIM GAUGE TAN/BLU = TAN/BLUE VISUAL WARNING KIT (OPT.) Wire Color Where To a b c d Figure 1 – Without Light Switch NOTE: ANY INSTRUMENT WIRING HARNESS LEADS NOT USED MUST BE TAPED BACK TO THE HARNESS. TAN/WHTTAN/BLK Speedometer Tachometer Temperature/Oil Warning Panel Volt Meter 51819 To 12V a b c d e Figure 2 – With Light Switch a-Tachometer Receptacle - From Control Box or Ignition/Choke Switch b-Tachometer Wiring Harness c-Lead to Optional Visual Warning Kit (Taped Back to Harness) d-Cable Extension (For Two Function Warning Panel) e-Light Switch 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2D-3 WIRING DIAGRAMS Commander 3000 Classic Panel Remote Control BLK = Black BLU = Blue BRN = Brown GRY = Gray GRN = Green ORN = Orange PNK = Pink PUR = Purple RED = Red Tan = Tan WHT = White YEL = Yellow LIT = Light DRK = Dark a a-Neutral Interlock Switch Page 2D-4 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 WIRING DIAGRAMS Commander 3000 Panel Remote Control RED PURPLE GREEN a-Neutral Interlock Switch a BLK = Black BLU = Blue BRN = Brown GRY = Gray GRN = Green ORN = Orange PNK = Pink PUR = Purple RED = Red TAN = Tan WHT = White YEL = Yellow LIT = Light DRK = Dark 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2D-5 WIRING DIAGRAMS Instrument/Lanyard Stop Switch Wiring Diagram BLK=BLACK BLU=BLUE BRN=BROWN GRN=GREEN GRY=GRAY PUR=PURPLE RED=RED TAN=TAN WHT=WHITE YEL=YELLOW 52204 d b k f g abc d e h i j k j a-Ignition/Choke Switch b-Lanyard Stop Switch c-Lead Not Used on Outboard Installations d-Retainer e-Tachometer f-Trim Indicator Gauge (Optional) g-Temperature Gauge h-Remote Control i-Power Trim Harness Connector j-Connect Wires Together w/Screw and Nut (2 Places); Apply Liquid Neoprene to Connections and Slide Rubber Sleeve over each Connection. k-Lead to Optional Visual Warning Kit IMPORTANT: On installations where gauge options will not be used, tape back any unused wiring harness leads. Page 2D-6 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 WIRING DIAGRAMS Oil Level Gauge Wiring Diagram b h a b c d e f g h i j k lm n o p q r s t a-To 12 Volt Source b-PURPLE Wire (Connect to Trim Indicator Gauge “I” [or POSITIVE (+) 12 Volt Source that is Turned “ON” and “OFF” with Ignition Switch]) c-Oil Level Gauge d-BLACK Wire (Connects to NEGATIVE Ground) e-To Ground f-BLACK Wire (From Gauge to Oil Clip Connector) g-LIGHT BLUE Sender Lead to Gauge h-Wiring Harness (LT. BLU. and BLACK) i-Screw (10-16 x 5/8 in.) j-Spring k-Oil Clip Connector l-Adaptor Housing m-Screw (10-16 x 1/4 in.) n-Spring o-Screw (10-16 x 5/8 in.) p-BLACK Wire q-Oil Level Sender Unit r-Oil Pick-Up Tube s-WHITE Lead (from Oil Level Sender) t-Screw (10-16 x 5/8 in.) 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2D-7 WIRING DIAGRAMS Instrument/Lanyard Stop Switch Wiring Diagram (Dual Outboard) BLK=BLACK BLU=BLUE BRN=BROWN GRN=GREEN GRY=GRAY PUR=PURPLE RED=RED TAN=TAN WHT=WHITE YEL=YELLOW 52205 ga d n BATT GND SENDER PORT INSTALLATION a g d k d c b l d e f n nh o a-Ignition/Choke Switch b-Lanyard Stop Switch c-Lead not used on Outboard Installations d-Retainer e-Tachometer f-Trim Indicator Gauge g-Temperature Gauge h-Remote Control Page 2D-8 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 WIRING DIAGRAMS IMPORTANT: On installations where gauge options will not be used, tape back and isolate unused wiring harness leads. g 52206 mSTARBOARD INSTALLATION BATT GND SENDER i j f m o a e i-Synchronizer Gauge j-Synchronizer Module k-Lanyard Switch (Isolation) Diode l-Y Harness m-Power Trim Harness Connector n-Connect Wires together with Screw and Nut (4 Places); Apply Liquid Neoprene to Connections and slide Rubber Sleeve over each Connection. o-Lead to Visual Warning Kit 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2D-9 WIRING DIAGRAMS QSI Gauge Wiring Diagrams Tachometer Wiring Diagram Tachometer dial on back side of case must be set to position number 4. WIRING DIAGRAM A Use this wiring diagram when using a separate light switch for instrument lighting. 51106 a c d b a-Connect to +12 Volt b-+12 Volt Light Switch Wire c-Position Light Bulb to the Switched Position d-Connect to NEGATIVE (–) Ground WIRING DIAGRAM B Use this wiring diagram when instrument lighting is wired directly to the ignition key switch. (Instrument lights are on when ignition key switch is turned on.) 51106 a b c a-Connect to +12 Volt b-Position Light Bulb to the Unswitched Position c-Connect to NEGATIVE (–) Ground Page 2D-10 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 WIRING DIAGRAMS Water Temperature Gauge WIRING DIAGRAM A Use this wiring diagram when using a separate light switch for instrument lighting. SEND a b c d e a-Connect to + 12 Volt b-+12 Volt Light Switch Wire c-Position Light Bulb to the Switched Position d-Connect to NEGATIVE (–) Ground e-Connect to TAN Lead located at the Tachometer Receptacle on Commander Side Mount Remote Control or TAN Lead coming from Accessory Ignition/ Choke Assembly. WIRING DIAGRAM B Use this wiring diagram when instrument lighting is wired directly to the ignition key switch. (Instrument lights are on when ignition key is turned on.) 51105 SEND a b c d a-Connect to +12 Volt b-Position Light Bulb to the Unswitched Position c-Connect to NEGATIVE (–) Ground d-Connect to TAN Lead located at the Tachometer Receptacle on Commander Side Mount Remote Control or TAN Lead coming from Accessory Ignition/ Choke Assembly 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2D-11 WIRING DIAGRAMS Route TAN lead on starboard side of engine to engine/remote control harness. Connect as shown. IMPORTANT: Tape back and isolate any unused wiring harness leads. a b 28086 a-Lead from Temperature Sender b-Engine/Remote Control Harness Oil Level Gauge Wiring LIGHT BULB POSITION A Use this position when using a separate light switch for instrument lighting. 51109 a b a-+12 Volt Light Switch Wire b-Position Light Bulb to the Switched Position Page 2D-12 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 WIRING DIAGRAMS LIGHT BULB POSITION B Use this position when instrument lighting is wired directly to the ignition key switch. (Instrument lights are on when ignition key switch is turned on.) 51112 a b a-Position Light Bulb to the Unswitched Position b-Sender SENDER WIRING a b a-Connect to +12 Volt b-Connect to NEGATIVE (–) Ground 51108 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2D-13 WIRING DIAGRAMS Engine Synchronizer Wiring Diagram LIGHT BULB POSITION A Use this position when using a separate light switch for instrument lighting. SEND 51105 a b a-+12 Volt Light Switch Wire b-Position Light Bulb to the Unswitched Position LIGHT BULB POSITION B Use this position when instrument lighting is wired directly to the ignition key switch. (Instrument lights are on when ignition key switch is turned on.) 51106 a b a-Position Light Bulb to the Switched Position b-Sender Synchronizer wiring can be accomplished two different ways as an option to the user. Page 2D-14 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 WIRING DIAGRAMS Wiring Diagram – Gauge needle to point toward slow running engine GRY=GRAY WHT=WHITE BLK=BLACK PUR=PURPLE 51107 a b c d a-Tachometer Starboard Engine b-Synchronizer Gauge c-Tachometer Port Engine d-Synchronizer Module Wiring Diagram – Gauge needle to point toward fast running engine GRY=GRAY WHT=WHITE BLK=BLACK PUR=PURPLE 51107 a b c d a-Tachometer Starboard Engine b-Synchronizer Gauge c-Tachometer Port Engine d-Synchronizer Module Maintenance Clean gauge by washing with fresh water to remove sand and salt deposits. Wipe off with a soft cloth moistened with water. The gauge may be scored or damaged if wiped with abrasive material (sand, saline or detergent compounds, etc.) or washed with solvents such as trichloroethylene, turpentine, etc. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2D-15 WIRING DIAGRAMS Multi-Function Gauge Dip Switch Setting/Testing NOTE: The multi-function gauge “Dip Switch” must be set on the back of gauge prior to operation. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position before setting dip switch. The gauge will reset to selected settings when the ignition is turned “On”. IMPORTANT: Test the gauge and related wiring BEFORE making final “Dip Switch” settings and BEFORE securing the gauge to dashboard of boat. 1. With the ignition switch in the “Off” position, set the multi-function gauge “Dip Switch” in (test) position as shown. (BLACK dot indicates switch position). 52095Open 123 4 a a b a-“Dip Switch” (shown in test position) b-Black Dot - Switch in “Open” Position 2. Turn ignition switch to the “Run” position. The multi-function gauge now is in the display test mode. The gauge Temp, Batt, Oil, and Fuel red warning lights should be alternately flashing “On” and “Off”; the BLACK L.C.D. bar graphs should be cycling. (This indicates that all gauge functions are operational). 3. Turn ignition switch to the “Off” position. Reset the gauge “Dip Switch” to the correct operating position for the outboard application. a b a-Gauge Lights (Red) b-Gauge L.C.D. Bar Graph (Black) Page 2D-16 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 WIRING DIAGRAMS Outboard Multi-Function Gauge Setting Model Dip Switch Setting Test Display (All) Open 123 4 275 hp (3.4 Litre) Outboards (single engine) Open 123 4 135-250 hp Outboards (single engine) Open 123 4 “Note” On Dual Engine/Single Fuel Tank Applications: Position Dip Switch 4 “Open” * Open 123 4 * Dip Switch (4) in “Open Position” For Dual Engine Single Fuel Tank Applications. Switches 1, 2, 3 Must Be In Specified Model Position. Warning System The outboard warning system incorporates warning light gauge (a) and warning horn (b). The warning horn is located inside the remote control or is part of the ignition key switch wiring harness. a b b When the key switch is turned to the ON position, the warning lights and horn will turn on for a moment as a test to tell you the system is working. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2D-17 WIRING DIAGRAMS Warning System Signals NOTE: The warning system signals which includes audible and visual indicator involving the horn and lights will identify the potential problems listed in the chart Problem Horn Check Engine Light Low Oil Light Over Heat Light Water In Fuel Light Engine Speed Reduction Activated (approx. 3000 RPM) Power Up/System Check Single Beep Yes Yes Yes Yes No Low Oil 4 Beep... 2 Minutes Off Yes No No Oil Flow Continuous Beep Yes Yes Yes (Limits to 3000 RPM) Oil Pump Electrical Failure Yes Yes Yes (Limits to 3000 RPM) Over Heat Continuous Beep Yes Yes (Limits to 3000 RPM) Water In Fuel 4 Beep... 2 Minutes Off Yes Over Speed Continuous Beep Yes (Activated at 5800 RPM) Coolant Sensor Failure No Yes MAP Sensor Failure No Yes Air Temperature Sensor Failure No Yes Ignition Coil Failure No Yes Injector Failure No Yes Horn Failure N/A Yes No Battery Voltage too high (16V) or too low (11V) or very low (9.5V) No Yes Yes – If battery voltage is less than 10.4 V – RPM is reduced to 3000. If voltage is 9.5V or less, RPM is reduced to idle. Page 2D-18 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 WIRING DIAGRAMS Problem Horn Check Engine Light Low Oil Light Over Heat Light Water In Fuel Light Engine Speed Reduction Activated (approx. 3000 RPM) Over Heat Cyl. Head/ Compressor Continuous Beep Yes Yes Throttle Sensor Failure Continuous Intermittant Beeping Yes RPM reduces to 3000 if 1 sensor fails. RPM is reduced to Idle speed only if both sensors fail. Warning System Operation LOW OIL LEVEL a The system is activated when the oil in the engine mounted oil reservoir tank drops below 22 fl. oz. (175 ml) You still have an oil reserve remaining for 30 minutes of full speed operation. NOTE: The engine mounted oil reservoir tank (located beneath the top cowl) along with the remote oil tank will have to be refilled. The OIL light (a) will come on and the warning horn sounds a series of four short tones. If you continue to operate the outboard, the light will stay on and the horn will sound four short tones every two minutes. The engine has to be shut off to reset the warning system. NO OIL FLOW TO THE ELECTRIC OIL PUMP a b The system is activated when the flow of oil to the oil pump is blocked. No lubricating oil is being supplied to the engine. Stop the engine as soon as possible. Continuing to operate the engine can result in severe engine damage. The OIL light (a) and CHECK ENGINE light (b) will come on and the warning horn will be- gin sounding. The warning system will automatically reduce and limit the engine speed to 3000 RPM. The engine has to be shut off to reset the warning system. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2D-19 WIRING DIAGRAMS ENGINE OVERHEAT a The system is activated when the engine temperature is too hot. The TEMP light (a) will come on and the warning horn begins sounding. The warning system will automatically limit the engine speed to 3000 RPM. After the engine has cooled, shift the outboard into neutral to reset the overheat circuit. IGNITION COIL, SENSOR, OR INJECTOR NOT FUNCTIONING aa The system is activated if an ignition coil, sensor or injector is not functioning correctly. The CHECK ENGINE light (a) will turn on. THROTTLE SENSOR NOT FUNCTIONING a The system is activated if the throttle sensors are not functioning correctly. The CHECK ENGINE light (a) will turn on and the warning horn will begin sounding. WATER SEPARATING FUEL FILTER IS FULL OF WATER a The water level detection warning is activated when water in the water separating fuel filter reaches the full level. The water can be removed from the filter. The WATER DETECTION light (a) will come on and the warning horn will begin sounding a series of four beeps. If you continue to operate the outboard, the light will stay on and the horn will sound every two minutes. Page 2D-20 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 WIRING DIAGRAMS ENGINE OVER-SPEED PROTECTION SYSTEM a The system is activated when the engine speed exceeds the maximum allowable RPM. Anytime the engine over-speed system is activated, the warning horn (a) begins to sound continuously. The system will automatically reduce the engine speed to within the allowable limit. NOTE: Engine speed should never reach the maximum limit to activate the system unless the propeller is ventilating, an incorrect propeller is being used, or the propeller is faulty. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2D-21 WIRING DIAGRAMS Panel Mount Remote Control Wiring Installation BLK = Black 25 a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u 25 Liquid Neoprene (92-25711--2) a-(+) 12 Volt Terminal b-(–) Ground Terminal c-Speedometer d-Tachometer e-Tachometer Signal Terminal f-Connect Wires Together with Screw and Hex Nut (3 Places); Apply Quicksilver Liquid Neoprene to Connections and Slide Rubber Sleeve Over Each Connection. g-Power Trim Connector h-Horn i-8 Pin Harness Connector BLU = Blue BRN = Brown GRY = Gray GRN = Green ORN = Orange PNK = Pink PUR = Purple RED = Red TAN = Tan WHT = White YEL = Yellow LIT = Light DRK = Dark j-Multi-Function Gauge k-Multi-Function Adapter Harness l-To Fuel Sender (Optional) m-To Oil Sender (Optional) n-Two Wire Harness o-Ignition/Choke Switch p-Low Oil Sender Lead q-Over Temperature Switch Lead r-Panel Mount Remote Control s-To Engine t-To Engine u-Neutral Safety Switch Lead Page 2D-22 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 BLK = Black BLU = Blue BRN = Brown GRY = Gray GRN = Green ORN = Orange PNK = Pink PUR = Purple RED = Red TAN = Tan WHT = White YEL = Yellow LT. = Light DK. = Dark 1998 Model 135/150 DFI Wiring Diagram RED/BLU RED/BLU YEL LT.BLU/BLK PNK/ORG LT.BLU/RED PNK/BRN BRN/WHT BLK/ORG WHT/DK.BLU ORG/PNK ORG/WHT BRN/PNK WHT/BRN BLK RED/YEL PPL BLU/YEL TAN/BLK PNK/LT.BLU TAN/PPL TAN BLK/GRN BLK/YEL WHT LT.BLU BLK/TAN GRY/RED GRN/RED RED/YEL GRN/ORG RED/YEL GRN/YEL RED/YEL GRN/BLU RED/YEL GRN/PPL RED/YEL GRN/BRN WHT/BRN BRN/WHT WHT/RED RED/WHT WHT/ORG ORG/WHT WHT/YEL YEL/WHT WHT/DK.BLU DK.BLU/WHT WHT/PPL PPL/WHT GRN/PPL PPL/WHT RED/WHT PNK/RED DK.BLU/WHT WHT/PPL PPL/PNK WHT/YEL YEL/PNK WHT/RED DK.BLU/PNK GRN/YEL GRN/RED BLK BLK/TAN GRN/BLU GRN/ORG PNK/PPL YEL/WHT PNK/YEL RED/PNK PNK/DK.BLU BLK/TAN GRN/BRN ORG/PNK PNK/ORG RED/PNK PNK/RED BRN/PNK PNK/BRN PPL/YEL LT.BLU/GRN WHT/ORG BLK LT.BLU/GRN LT.BLU/BLK BLK RED/YEL PPL/YEL LT.BLU/RED BLK/ORG BLK/GRN LT.BLU/WHT BLU/YEL PPL/YEL YEL BLK/ORG LT.BLU/WHT TAN/WHT TAN/LT.BLU BLK/RED GRY TAN/GRN YEL/PPL DK.BLU BLK/GRN GRY/RED BLU/YEL ORG TAN/PPL TAN BLK/ORG PNK/LT.BLU TAN/BLK TAN/WHT ORG TAN BLK TAN/BLK TAN/BLK TAN/BLU BLK TAN DN UP BLK DDT BRN BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK PPL PPL BLK/GRN TAN/GRN TAN BLK/GRN LT.BLU LT.BLU BLK/ORG LT.BLU 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 921310415126137418156 1 117812920212234 1 121231344151561671781892910101 22232425262782390323112 1921310415126137148156 117182920212234 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BLK DK.BLU/PNK PNK/DK.BLU YEL/PNK PNK/YEL PPL/PNK PNK/PPL B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C D C B A C B A C B A A B C BLK PPL GRY BLK/ORG BLK/ORG BLK BLK BLK BLK/RED TAN/BLK TAN/BLK BLK/GRN BRN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 BLK/YEL PPL TAN/LT.BLU BLK GRY YEL/RED RED/PPL DK.BLU WHT A B 86 87 85 30 87a GRN/WHT GRN RED BLK BLK 86 87 85 30 87a PPL RED RED/WHT YEL/PPL RED RED/WHT RED/WHT RED/BLK RED/BLU RED/WHT RED/YEL RED/PPL B A B A B A B A 86 87 85 30 87a LT.BLU/WHT BLU RED BLK BLK RED A B C RED PPL RED RED BLK YEL/RED RED RED RED B RED/BLK A BLK BLK W/YEL ENDS BLK W/YEL ENDS RED RED/PPL RED/PPL RED/PPL RED/PPL LT.BLU/WHT GRN/WHT BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK/TAN BLK RED B RED/BLK A BLK 1 - Fuel Injector #1 2 - Fuel Injector #2 3 - Fuel Injector #3 4 - Direct Injector #1 5 - Direct Injector #2 6 - Direct Injector #3 7 - Direct Injector #4 8 - Direct Injector #5 9 - Direct Injector #6 10 - Oil Pump 11 - MAP Sensor 12 - T.P.S. #1 (Inner) 13 - T.P.S. #2 (Outer) 14 - Crank Position Sensor 15 - Air Temperature Sensor 16 - Water Sensor 17 - Shift Switch 18 - Low-Oil Switch 19 - Cylinder Head Temperature Switch 20 - Digital Diagnostic Terminal Connector 21 - Compressor Temperature Sensor 22 - Fuel Pump 20 Ampere Fuse 23 - Injector 20 Ampere Fuse 24 - ACC. and Trim Pump 20 Ampere Fuse 25 - Ignition Coils and Oil Pump 20 Ampere Fuse 26 - Fuel Pump #2 (Outside Vapor Separator) 27 - Fuel Pump #1 (Inside Vapor Separator) 28 - 12 Volt Battery 29 - Starter Solenoid 30 - To Remote Control Trim Switch 31 - Remote Control 32 - Auxiliary 33 - Check Engine Light 34 - Water In Fuel Light 35 - Over-Heat Light 36 - Low Oil Light 37 - Temperature Gauge 38 - Electronic Control Module 39 - Main Power Relay 40 - Trim Down Relay 41 - Trim Up Relay 42 - Cowl Mounted Trim Switch 43 - Trim Pump 44 - 60 Ampere Alternator 45 - Starter 46 - Ignition Coil #6 47 - Ignition Coil #5 48 - Ignition Coil #4 49 - Ignition Coil #3 50 - Ignition Coil #2 51 - Ignition Coil #1 52 - Fuel Injector #4 53 - Fuel Injector #5 54 - Fuel Injector #6 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 34 35 36 37 38 41 40 39 42 44 43 45 46 47 48 49 33 1 2 3 4 5 54 53 52 51 50 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 2D-23 BLK = Black BLU = Blue BRN = Brown GRY = Gray GRN = Green ORN = Orange PNK = Pink PUR = Purple RED = Red TAN = Tan WHT = White YEL = Yellow LT. = Light DK. = Dark 1999 Model 135/150 DFI Wiring Diagram RED/BLU RED/BLU YEL LT.BLU/BLK PNK/ORG LT.BLU/RED PNK/BRN BRN/WHT BLK/ORG WHT/DK.BLU ORG/PNK ORG/WHT BRN/PNK WHT/BRN BLK RED/YEL PPL BLU/YEL TAN/BLK PNK/LT.BLU TAN/PPL TAN BLK/GRN BLK/YEL WHT LT.BLU BLK/TAN GRY/RED GRN/RED RED/YEL GRN/ORG RED/YEL GRN/YEL RED/YEL GRN/BLU RED/YEL GRN/PPL RED/YEL GRN/BRN WHT/BRN BRN/WHT WHT/RED RED/WHT WHT/ORG ORG/WHT WHT/YEL YEL/WHT WHT/DK.BLU DK.BLU/WHT WHT/PPL PPL/WHT GRN/PPL PPL/WHT RED/WHT PNK/RED DK.BLU/WHT WHT/PPL PPL/PNK WHT/YEL YEL/PNK WHT/RED DK.BLU/PNK GRN/YEL GRN/RED BLK BLK/TAN GRN/BLU GRN/ORG PNK/PPL YEL/WHT PNK/YEL RED/PNK PNK/DK.BLU BLK/TAN GRN/BRN ORG/PNK PNK/ORG RED/PNK PNK/RED BRN/PNK PNK/BRN PPL/YEL LT.BLU/GRN WHT/ORG BLK LT.BLU/GRN LT.BLU/BLK BLK PPL/YEL LT.BLU/RED BLK/ORG BLK/GRN LT.BLU/WHT BLU/YEL PPL/YEL YEL BLK/ORG LT.BLU/WHT TAN/WHT TAN/LT.BLU BLK/RED GRY TAN/GRN YEL/PPL DK.BLU BLK/GRN GRY/RED BLU/YEL ORG TAN/PPL TAN BLK/ORG PNK/LT.BLU TAN/BLK TAN/WHT ORG TAN BLK TAN/BLK TAN/BLK TAN/BLU BLK TAN DN UP BLK DDT BRN BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK PPL PPL BLK/GRN TAN/GRN TAN BLK/GRN LT.BLU LT.BLU BLK/ORG LT.BLU 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 921310415126137418156 1 117812920212234 1 121231344151561671781892910101 22232425262782390323112 1921310415126137148156 117182920212234 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BLK DK.BLU/PNK PNK/DK.BLU YEL/PNK PNK/YEL PPL/PNK PNK/PPL B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C D C B A C B A C B A A B C BLK PPL GRY BLK/ORG BLK/ORG BLK BLK BLK BLK/RED TAN/BLK TAN/BLK BLK/GRN BRN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 BLK/YEL PPL TAN/LT.BLU BLK GRY YEL/RED RED/PPL DK.BLU WHT A B 86 87 85 30 87a GRN/WHT GRN RED BLK BLK 86 87 85 30 87a PPL RED RED/WHT YEL/PPL RED RED/WHT RED/WHT RED/BLK RED/BLU RED/WHT RED/YEL RED/PPL B A B A B A B A 86 87 85 30 87a LT.BLU/WHT BLU RED BLK BLK RED A B C RED PPL RED RED BLK YEL/RED RED RED RED B RED/BLK A BLK BLK W/YEL ENDS BLK W/YEL ENDS RED RED/PPL RED/PPL RED/PPL RED/PPL LT.BLU/WHT GRN/WHT BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK/TAN BLK RED B RED/BLK A BLK RED/BLU 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 41 40 39 42 44 43 45 51 50 49 48 47 46 54 53 52 1 - Fuel Injector #1 2 - Fuel Injector #2 3 - Fuel Injector #3 4 - Direct Injector #1 5 - Direct Injector #2 6 - Direct Injector #3 7 - Direct Injector #4 8 - Direct Injector #5 9 - Direct Injector #6 10 - Oil Pump 11 - MAP Sensor 12 - T.P.S. #1 (Inner) 13 - T.P.S. #2 (Outer) 14 - Crank Position Sensor 15 - Air Temperature Sensor 16 - Water Sensor 17 - Shift Switch 18 - Low-Oil Switch 19 - Cylinder Head Temperature Switch 20 - Digital Diagnostic Terminal Connector 21 - Compressor Temperature Sensor 22 - Fuel Pump 20 Ampere Fuse 23 - Injector 20 Ampere Fuse 24 - ACC. and Trim Pump 20 Ampere Fuse 25 - Ignition Coils and Oil Pump 20 Ampere Fuse 26 - Fuel Pump #2 (Outside Vapor Separator) 27 - Fuel Pump #1 (Inside Vapor Separator) 28 - 12 Volt Battery 29 - Starter Solenoid 30 - To Remote Control Trim Switch 31 - Remote Control 32 - Auxiliary 33 - Check Engine Light 34 - Water In Fuel Light 35 - Over-Heat Light 36 - Low Oil Light 37 - Temperature Gauge 38 - Electronic Control Module 39 - Main Power Relay 40 - Trim Down Relay 41 - Trim Up Relay 42 - Cowl Mounted Trim Switch 43 - Trim Pump 44 - 60 Ampere Alternator 45 - Starter 46 - Ignition Coil #6 47 - Ignition Coil #5 48 - Ignition Coil #4 49 - Ignition Coil #3 50 - Ignition Coil #2 51 - Ignition Coil #1 52 - Fuel Injector #4 53 - Fuel Injector #5 54 - Fuel Injector #6 Page 2D-24 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 FUEL PUMP FUEL SYSTEM Section 3A – Pulse Crankcase Driven Fuel Pump Table of Contents Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-1 Fuel Pump Pressure @ W.O.T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-1 Fuel Pump Pressure @ Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-1 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-1 Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-2 Fuel Pump Description/Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-3 Checking for Restricted Fuel Flow Caused by Anti-Siphon Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-4 Testing Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-5 Fuel Pump Removal/Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-6 Cleaning/Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-7 Reassembly/lnstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-7 3 A Specifications Fuel Pump Pressure @ W.O.T. Maximum – 10 psi Normal – 8-10 psi Minimum – 3 psi Fuel Pump Pressure @ Idle Normal – 2-3 psi Minimum – 1 psi NOTE: Electric fuel pump pressure, if used in conjunction with engine mechanical fuel pump, must be limited to no more than 4 psi. Special Tools 1. Fuel Pressure Gauge (0–15 psi) (Obtain Locally) 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3A-1 FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump Loctite PST Pipe Sealant (92-809822)9 A = TO VAPOR SEPARATOR FUEL INLET FITTING B = REFER TO SERVICE BULLETIN 98--8 Page 3A-2 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump REFREF. .. NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION TORQUE lb-in lb-ft Nm. 1 1 FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY 2 2 DIAPHRAGM KIT 3 1 DIAPHRAGM 4 2 RUBBER CHECK VALVE 5 2 RETAINER 6 1 SPRING 7 1 CAP 8 1 SPRING 9 1 CAP 10 1 DIAPHRAGM 11 1 GASKET 12 1 GASKET–boost 13 1 GASKET–pulse 14 1 PLATE 15 2 FITTING 1616 2 SCREW–fuel pump (M5 x 40) 55 6 2 SCREW–pump to crankcase (M6 x 50) 55 6 17 1 BASE 18 1 ELBOW (45 Degrees) 19 1 FITTING 20 1 TUBING (6 IN.) 21 5 STA STRAP 22 1 HOSE (W/Insulating Sleeve) (7 in.)(177.8 mm) 23 1 HOSE (W/Insulating Sleeve) (18 in.)(457.2 mm) 24 1 CONNECTOR 25 1 CLAMP Fuel Pump Description/Operation The fuel pump is a crankcase-pressure-operated, diaphragm-type pump. Crankcase pulsating pressure (created by the up-and-down movement of piston) is transferred to fuel pump by way of a passage (hole) between crankcase and fuel pump. When piston is in an upward motion, a vacuum is created in the crankcase, thus pulling in a fuel/air mixture [from Vapor Separator Tank (VST)] into crankcase. This vacuum also pulls in on the fuel pump diaphragm, thus the inlet check valve (in fuel pump) is opened and fuel (from fuel tank) is drawn into fuel pump. Downward motion of the piston forces the fuel/air mixture out of the crankcase into the cylinder. This motion also forces out on the fuel pump diaphragm, which, in turn, closes the inlet check valve (to keep fuel from returning to fuel tank) and opens the outlet check valve, thus forcing fuel to the VST. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3A-3 FUEL PUMP CHECKING for RESTRICTED FUEL FLOW CAUSED by ANTI-SIPHON VALVES While anti-siphon valves may be helpful from a safety stand-point, they clog with debris, they may be too small, or they may have too heavy a spring. Summarizing, the pressure drop across these valves can, and often does, create operational problems and/or power- head damage by restricting fuel to the fuel pump and VST. Some symptoms of restricted (lean) fuel flow, which could be caused by use of an anti-siphon valve, are: 1 - Loss of fuel pump pressure 2 - Loss of power 3 - High speed surging 4 - Preignition/detonation (piston dome erosion) 5 - Outboard cuts out or hesitates upon acceleration 6 - Outboard runs rough 7 - Outboard quits and cannot be restarted 8 - Outboard will not start 9 - Vapor lock Since any type of anti-siphon device must be located between the outboard fuel inlet and fuel tank outlet, a simple method of checking [if such a device (or bad fuel) is a problem source] is to operate the outboard with a separate fuel supply which is known to be good, such as a remote fuel tank. If, after using a separate fuel supply, it is found that the anti-siphon valve is the cause of the problem, there are 2 solutions to the problem; either 1) remove the anti- siphon valve or 2) replace it with a solenoid-operated fuel shut off valve. Page 3A-4 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 FUEL PUMP Testing Fuel Pump Install clear fuel hose(s) between fuel pump and VST. Run engine, and inspect fuel passing thru hose(s) for air bubbles. If air bubbles are found, see “Air Bubbles in Fuel Line,” below. If air bubbles are NOT found, see “Lack of Fuel Pump Pressure,” below. Problem: Air Bubbles in Fuel Line Low fuel in tank. Fill tank with fuel. Loose fuel line connection. Check and tighten all connectors. Fuel pump fitting loose. Tighten fitting. A hole or cut in fuel line. Check condition of all fuel lines and replace Fuel Pump anchor screw(s) loose. Tighten all screws evenly and securely. Fuel Pump filter cover anchor screw loose. Tighten screws securely. Fuel pump filter gasket worn out. Replace gasket. Fuel pump gasket(s) worn out. Rebuild fuel pump. Problem: Lack of Fuel Pump Pressure An anti-siphon valve. See ‘‘Checking for Restricted Fuel Flow” preceding. Air in fuel line. See ‘‘Air Bubbles in Fuel Line”, above. A dirty or clogged fuel filter. Clean or replace fuel filter. The fuel pickup in fuel tank is clogged or dirty. Clean or replace pickup. Worn out fuel pump diaphragm. Rebuild fuel pump. Worn out check valve(s) in fuel pump. Rebuild fuel pump. A leaky check valve gasket. Rebuild fuel pump. Pulse hole(s) plugged. Remove fuel pump and clean out holes. Hole in pulse hose. Replace pulse hose. Loose pulse hose. Tighten connection(s). Excessive fuel hose length. Cut fuel hose to proper length. Fuel hose internal diameter too small. Use 5/16 I.D. fuel hose. Primer bulb check valve not opening. Replace primer bulb. Excessive fuel lift required. Fuel lift from tank to pump 48 in. (1219.2 mm) maximum. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3A-5 FUEL PUMP Page 3A-6 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Fuel Pump Removal/Disassembly IMPORTANT: Fuel pump diaphragm and gaskets should not be re-used once fuel pump is disassembled. NOTE: External low pressure electric fuel pump and vapor separator has been removed from illustration to provide improved visual clarity for location of mechanical fuel pump. 1. Disconnect fuel hoses from fuel pump. 2. Disconnect pulse hose. 3. Remove two mounting screws. 4. Remove fuel pump from engine. a e 57298 c d b a - Fuel hose from tank to fuel pump b - Fuel hose from fuel pump to Water Separator c - Pulse hose d - Mounting screws e - Fuel pump 5. Disassemble fuel pump. FUEL PUMP Cleaning/Inspection 1. Clean fuel pump housing, check valves, pulse chamber and pump base in solvent and dry all but check valves with compressed air. 2. Inspect each check valve for splits, chips and for proper sealing against pump housing. 3. Inspect boost springs for weakness or breakage. 4. Inspect fuel pump housing, pulse chamber and base for cracks or rough gasket surface and replace if any are found. 5. Inspect fitting on fuel pump housing for loosening or any signs of fuel or air leaks. Replace or tighten fitting if a leak is found. Reassembly/lnstallation ASSEMBLY 1. Insert retainer thru plastic disc and rubber check valve. 23601 a b c a-Retainer b-Plastic Disc c-Rubber Check Valve 2. Install check valves and retainers into fuel pump body. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3A-7 FUEL PUMP 3. With retainer installed in pump body, break retainer rod from retainer by bending sideways. 23601 a b a-Rod b-Retainer Cap 4. Reinstall rod into retainer cap and, use a small hammer or hammer and punch to tap rod down into retainer until flush with top of retainer. 23601 a b a-Rod b-Retainer Cap Page 3A-8 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 FUEL PUMP 5. Place boost spring into pump body and place cap onto boost spring. 50161 a b c a-Boost Spring b-Pump Body c-Cap 6. Assemble remainder of components as shown and install retaining screws thru to align. 7. Install pump onto engine. Torque to 55 Ib-in (6 Nm). 8. Install hoses onto proper fittings and secure with sta-straps. 9. Run engine and check for leaks. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3A-9 DIRECT FUEL INJECTION FUEL SYSTEM Section 3B – Direct Fuel Injection Table of Contents Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-2 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-3 Notes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-5 Air Handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-6 Air Handler Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-8 Vapor Separator Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-10 Fuel Rails/Air Compressor Hose Routing . . . . . . . 3B-12 Fuel Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-14 Air Compressor Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-16 DFI Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-18 Air Induction Through Crankcase . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-18 Air Compressor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-18 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-18 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-19 Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-19 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-19 Testing Electric Fuel Pump Pressure Output . . . . 3B-20 Low Pressure Electric Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-20 High Pressure Electric Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . 3B-21 Fuel Management Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . 3B-22 Reed Block Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-25 Reed Block Assembly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-25 Air Temperature Sensor Removal . . . . . . . . . . 3B-25 Air Temperature Sensor Installation . . . . . . . . . 3B-26 Throttle Plate Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-26 Throttle Plate Assembly Installation . . . . . . . . . 3B-26 Vapor Separator Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-26 Vapor Separator Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-28 Air Plenum Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-29 Low Pressure Electric Fuel Pump Installation . 3B-29 Vapor Separator Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-31 Fuel Rail Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-33 Fuel Rail Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-34 Fuel Pressure Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-37 Air Pressure Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-39 Tracker Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-41 Fuel Rail Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-43 Direct Injector Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-43 Fuel Rail and Direct Injector Installation . . . . . 3B-45 Air Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-46 Air Compressor Disassembly/Reassembly . . . 3B-49 Air Compressor Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-50 Air Compressor Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-51 3 B 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-1 DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Specifications Fuel System Specifications Fuel Pressure 89 ± 2 psi (613.5 ± 13.8 kPa) Air Pressure 79 ± 2 psi (544.0 ± 13.8 kPa) Fuel/Air Differential 10 psi (68.5 kPa) High Pressure Electric Fuel Pump Amperage Draw 6-9 Amps Low Pressure Electric Fuel Pump Amperage Draw 1-2 Amps Low Pressure Electric Fuel Pump Output 6-10 psi (41.37 kPa – 68.5 kPa) Fuel Injector Ohm Resistance 1.8 ± 0.1W Direct Injector Ohm Resistance 1.3 ± 0.3W Air Compressor Specifications Air Compressor Type Compressor Output Reciprocating Piston (1 to 1 ratio with engine RPM) @ Idle – 80 psi @ W.O.T. – 110 psi Cylinder Block Displacement 7.07 cu. in. (116 cc) Cylinder Bore Diameter (Standard) Taper/Out-of-Round/Wear Maximum Bore Type 2.5591 in. (65.0 mm) 0.001 in. (0.025 mm) Cast Iron Stroke Length 1.374 in. (34.9 mm) Piston Piston Type Aluminum Piston Diameter Dimension “A” at Right Angle (90°) to Piston Pin 0.500 in. 2.5578 ± .0004 in. (64.97 ± 0.010 mm) Piston Ring End Gap Top Ring Middle Ring Bottom Ring 0.0059 – 0.0098 in. (0.15 – 0.25 mm) 0.0059 – 0.0098 in. (0.15 – 0.25 mm) 0.0039 – 0.014 in. (0.10 – 0.35 mm) Reeds Reed Stand Open 0.010 in. (0.25 mm) Page 3B-2 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 DIRECT FUEL INJECTION 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-3 Special Tools 1. Single Fuel/Air Pressure Gauge 160 psi – 91-16850A2 NOTE: To convert 100 psi gauge 91-16850A1 to 160 psi gauge, order upgrade 91-16850--1. 57416 91-16850A2 a a - Schrader Valve (22-84906) – part of Schrader Valve Fuel Pressure Kit (849021A4) 2. Duel Fuel Air/Air Pressure Gauge 160 psi – 91-852087A1 or A2 55295 3. Adaptors to convert pressure gauge 91-852078A1 to an A2 57341 4. Screw (5mm x 25mm) (2 each) – 10-40073-25 5. Flat Washer (2 each) – 12-30164. DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Page 3B-4 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 6. Seal/Teflon Ring Installation Tool – 91-851980 56015 7. Seal/Teflon Ring Sizing Tool – 91-851980-1 56014 8. DMT 2000 Digital Tachometer Multi-meter P/N 91-854009A1 9. Clamp Tool Kit 91-803146A2 57316 a a - Clamp Tool 91-803146T DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Notes: 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-5 DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Page 3B-6 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Air Handler A = OIL LINE TO COMPRESSOR B = TO FITTING IN FLYWHEEL COVER C = PRESS INTO TUBING 96 Loctite Superbonder 454 GEL 10 25 12 2 30 3 26 8 1 2 30 5 6 A 35 96 4 29 27 36 28 9 13 16 19 20 21 22 23 17 17 17 18 24 7 33 33 31 32 B C 34 37 15 38 39 40 11 14 DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Air Handler REFREF. .. NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION TORQUE lb-in lb-ft Nm. 1 1 COVER ASSEMBLY 2 2 GROMMET 3 1 AIR FILTER 4 1 COVER 5 1 RIVET 6 1 RETAINER 7 1 GROMMET 8 1 GROMMET (150) 9 1 GROMMET (135) 10 1 AIR HANDLER ASSEMBLY (See Breakdown on Air Handler Components) 1111 1 SHIM (.020 THICK) 1 SHIM (.010 THICK) 12 1 DECAL-Caution-Start in Gear 13 1 BRACKET 14 1 SLEEVE 15 4 SCREW (M6 x 16) 100 11.5 16 1 FUEL PUMP 17 4 CLAMP 18 1 HOSE 19 1 TUBING (18 IN.) 20 1 INSULATING SLEEVE 21 1 ELBOW 22 1 FITTING 23 1 O RING 24 1 GROMMET 25 1 ENCODER 26 1 SCREW (10-24 x 5/8 IN.) Drive Tight 27 1 WASHER 28 2 J CLAMP (Upper Stbd.) 29 1 CLAMP-(Lower) 30 12 SCREW (1/4-20 x 1-1/2 IN.) 175 15 20 31 1 TUBING (5-3/4 IN.) 32 1 CANISTER-Vent 33 3 STA STRAP 34 1 CONNECTOR 35 1 PIN 36 1 DECAL EPA LABEL (1999) (SEE NOTE) 37 1 CABLE TIE (14 IN.) 38 1 CABLE 39 1 WASHER 40 1 WASHER NOTE: THE EPA LABEL HAS IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON EPA EMISSION REGULATIONS. REPLACE ANY MISSING OR UNREADABLE EPA LABEL. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-7 DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Page 3B-8 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Air Handler Components 1 4 2 3 5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16 9 10 17 19 20 21 22 23 25 26 27 15 14 13 9 9 10 18 24 A 11 12 16 A = OIL LINE TO COMPRESSOR DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Air Handler Components REFREF. .. NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION TORQUE lb-in lb-ft Nm. – 1 AIR HANDLER 1 1 ADAPTOR PLATE KIT 2 1 GASKET 3 1 GASKET 4 6 REED BLOCK 5 12 SCREW (1/4-20 x .88) 100 11.5 6 1 OIL PUMP 7 1 GASKET 8 1 BRACKET 9 3 FITTING 10 3 FITTING 11 1 ELBOW 12 1 FITTING (STRAIGHT) 13 6 BUSHING 14 6 GROMMET 15 6 SCREW 140 12 16 16 6 WASHER 17 1 AIR PLENUM KIT 18 1 ELBOW 1919 1 ELBOW (.236 O.D.) 1 ELBOW (.159 O.D.) 20 1 GASKET 21 1 TEMPERATURE SENSOR 22 3 SCREW Drive Tight 23 3 LOCKWASHER 24 12 SCREW (M4 x 16) Drive Tight 25 1 THROTTLE BODY KIT 26 1 O RING 27 4 SCREW 100 11.5 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-9 DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Page 3B-10 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Vapor Separator Components 1 2 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 6 4 9 3 DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Vapor Separator Components REFREF. .. NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION TORQUE lb-in lb-ft Nm. 1 1 COVER KIT 2 1 FITTING - Straight 3 1 ELBOW 4 1 SEAL 5 1 FITTING KIT-Pump Outlet 6 1 O RING 7 7 SCREW 30 3.5 8 1 GASKET 9 1 FLOAT KIT 10 1 FLOAT PIN 11 1 NEEDLE VALVE 12 1 SCREW 10 1.0 13 1 FUEL PUMP KIT 14 1 SLEEVE 15 1 BOWL KIT 16 1 SEAL 17 1 PLUG KIT 18 2 ELBOW 19 1 FUEL FILTER ASSEMBLY 20 1 PROBE 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-11 DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Page 3B-12 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Fuel Rails/Air Compressor Hose Routing 2 54 Mineral Oil (Purchase Locally) 3 1 4 5 7 9 10 11 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 23 25 26 27 28   8 9 9 9 9 9 10 12 13 14 14 14 14 14 15 20°  14  20  90° 54  6 29 29 14 30 54 A = TO TELL TALE B = TO STARBOARD FUEL RAIL C = TO FUEL COOLER D = TO TOP OF AIR HANDLER E = QTY. OF ONE (1) ON EACH SIDE OF COMPRESSOR FLANGE G = TO VAPOR SEPARATOR DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Fuel Rails/Air Compressor Hose Routing REFREF. .. NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION TORQUE lb-in lb-ft Nm. 1 1 AIR COMPRESSOR (See breakdown on Air Compressor Components) 2 5 SCREW (M6 x 12) 100 11.5 3 1 PULLEY 4 2 SCREW 40 54 5 1 HOSE 6 1 INSULATOR SLEEVE (16 IN.) 7 1 FUEL RAIL (STARBOARD) 8 6 INJECTOR 9 4 CLAMP 10 2 HOSE (16 IN.) 11 1 STUD 12 2 WASHER 13 1 NUT 25 34 14 8 STA STRAP 15 1 FUEL RAIL (PORT) 16 1 TUBING (22-1/2 IN.) 17 1 CHECK VALVE 18 1 TUBING (2-1/2 IN.) 19 1 TUBING (28-1/2 IN.) 20 2 CLAMP 21 1 TUBING (28-1/2 IN.) 22 4 SCREW (M5 x 10) 23 4 CLAMP 24 4 STUD 25 4 NUT 33 45 26 1 HOSE (30 IN.) (W/INSULATING SLEEVE) 27 1 HOSE (W/INSULATING SLEEVE) 28 6 CUPPED WASHER 29 4 CLAMP 30 1 INSULATOR SLEEVE (18 IN.) 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-13 DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Page 3B-14 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Fuel Rails 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1 4 4 4 5 5 5 12 13 5 21 22 22 22 DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Fuel Rails REFREF. .. NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION TORQUE lb-in lb-ft Nm. 1 2 SCHRADER VALVE KIT (air and fuel) 2 1 FITTING (air inlet) 3 1 FITTING (fuel inlet) 4 4 CLAMP (fitting retainer) 5 10 SCREW M5X8 70 8 6 1 RAIL (starboard) w/out injectors 7 4 SCREW M5X16 70 8 8 1 COVER (tracker valve) 9 1 SPRING (tracker valve) 10 1 DIAPHRAGM (tracker valve) 11 1 O-RING (tracker cover) 12 2 FITTING (air/fuel) starboard 13 2 FITTING (air/fuel) port 14 6 RETAINER (injector) DESIGN II 15 6 RETAINER (injector) DESIGN I 16 6 INJECTOR (fuel) 17 O-RING KIT (large) 6 per kit 18 O-RING KIT (small) 6 per kit 19 2 FITTING 20 1 RAIL (port) w/out injectors 21 O-RING (2 per kit) 22 O-RING fitting/schrader (16 per kit) 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-15 DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Page 3B-16 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Air Compressor Components 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 14 15 16 4 17 20 2122 19 ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ 8 9 11 12 11 18 18 27 3 23 24 25 26 9 9 14 14 14 14 9 9 6 Dielectric Grease (92-823506--1) 6 9 Loctite PST Pipe Sealant (92-809822) 14 2 Cycle Outboard Oil (92-826666A24) DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Air Compressor Components REFREF. .. NO. DESCRIPTION TORQUE lb-in lb-ft Nm. 1 AIR COMPRESSOR 2 END CAP 3 RETAINING RING 4 SCREW (M6 x 20) 100 11.5 5 O RING 6 O RING 7 CONNECTING ROD 8 PISTON ASSEMBLY 9 LOCK RING 10 REED PLATE ASSEMBLY 11 O RING 12 O RING 13 SEAL 14 COMPRESSOR HEAD 15 FITTING-Straight 16 SCREW (M8 x 35) 240 20 27 17 ELBOW 18 ELBOW 19 FITTING-Straight 20 TEMPERATURE SENSOR 21 RETAINER 22 SCREW (M8 x 12) 240 20 27 23 O RING 24 FITTING 25 PIPE PLUG 26 DECAL-Important 27 GROMMET – O RING KIT 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-17 DIRECT FUEL INJECTION DFI Operation Air Induction Through Crankcase Combustion air enters the cowl through holes located in the top aft end of the cowl. The cowl liner directs this air to the bottom of the powerhead. This limits the exposure of salt air to the components inside the engine cowl. Once inside the cowl the air enters the plenum through the throttle shutter which are located in the plenum assembly. The air then continues through the reed valves and into the crankcase. The throttle shutter are actuated by the throttle shaft. Mounted onto a separate shaft are two throttle position sensors (TPS). These sensors tell the engine control unit (ECM) the position of the throttle. 2 TPS’s are installed on the DFI engine for safety redundancy. If one TPS should fail, the dash mounted CHECK ENGINE light will flash and the warning horn will sound. engine speed will be reduced to 3000 RPM. If both TPS’s should fail, engine speed will be reduced to idle. DFI engines require large amounts of air into the cylinders at idle speed. To accomplish this, the throttle shutters are partially open at low engine speeds. The dual TPS system reads the shaft movement in both directions, one reads movement up (increasing resistance), while the other reads the same movement as down (decreasing resistance). The ECM reads both and calculates the throttle shutter position. Air Compressor System Air from inside the engine cowl is drawn into the compressor through the flywheel cover. This cover acts like a muffler to quiet compressor noise and contains a filter to prevent the ingestion of debris into the compressor. The compressor is driven by a serpentine belt from a pulley mounted on the crankshaft, and is automatically self adjusted using a single idler pulley. This air compressor is a single cylinder unit containing a connecting rod, piston, rings, bearings, reed valves, and a crankshaft. The compressor is water cooled to lower the temperature of the air charge and is lubricated by oil from the engine oil pump assembly. As the compressor piston moves downward inside the cylinder, air is pulled through the filter, reed valves and into the cylinder. After the compressor piston changes direction, the intake reeds close and the exhaust reeds open allowing compressed air into the hose leading to the air/fuel rails. The air/fuel rails contain two passages; one for fuel, the second is the air passage. The air passage is common between all the cylinders included in the rail. A hose connects the starboard rail air passage to the air compressor. Another hose connects the starboard air rail passage to the port air rail passage. An air pressure regulator will limit the amount of pressure developed inside the air passages to approximately 10 psi below the pressure of the fuel inside the fuel passages (i.e. 80 psi air vs 90 psi fuel). Air exiting the pressure regulator is returned into the exhaust adaptor and exits thru the propeller. Fuel Fuel for the engine is stored in a typical fuel tank. A primer bulb is installed into the fuel line to allow priming of the fuel system. A crankcase mounted pulse driven diaphragm fuel pump draws fuel through the fuel line, primer bulb, fuel pump assembly and then pushes the fuel thru a water separating fuel filter. This filter removes any contaminates and water before the fuel reaches the vapor separator. Fuel vapors are bled through a vent cannister into the air compressor inlet in the front of the flywheel cover. The electric fuel pump is different than the fuel pump that is utilized on the standard EFI engine (non DFI), and is capable of developing fuel pressures in excess of 90 psi. Fuel inside the rail must remain pressurized at exactly 10 psi over the air rail pressure or the ECM (map) calibrations will be incorrect. Fuel from the vapor separator is supplied to the top of one fuel rail. A fuel line connects the bottom of the first rail to the opposite fuel rail. Fuel is stored inside the Page 3B-18 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 DIRECT FUEL INJECTION rail until an injector opens. A fuel pressure regulator controls pressure in the fuel rails, and allows excess fuel to return into the vapor separator. The fuel regulator not only regulates fuel pressure but also regulates it at approximately 10 p.s.i. higher than whatever the air rail pressure is. The fuel regulator diaphragm is held closed with a spring that requires 10 p.s.i. to force the diaphragm off the diaphragm seat. The back side of the diaphragm is exposed to air rail pressure. As the air rail pressure increases, the fuel pressure needed to open the regulator will equally increase. Example: If there is 50 p.s.i. of air pressure on the air rail side of the diaphragm, 60 p.s.i. of fuel pressure will be required to open the regulator. The return fuel line to the vapor separator is water cooled. To equalize the pulses developed by the pumps (both air and fuel) a tracker diaphragm (3) is installed in the starboard rail. The tracker diaphragm is positioned between the fuel and air passages. The tracker diaphragm is a rubber diaphragm which expands and retracts depending upon which side of the diaphragm senses the pressure increase (pulse). Oil Oil in this engine is not mixed with the fuel before entering the combustion chamber. Oil is stored inside a standard remote oil reservoir. Crankcase pressure will force oil from the remote oil reservoir into the oil storage reservoir on the side of the powerhead. Oil will flow from the oil storage tank into the oil pump. The oil pump is a solenoid design. It is activated by the ECM and includes 7 pistons with corresponding discharge ports. The oil pump is mounted directly onto the powerhead. Each cylinder is lubricated by one of the discharge ports. The oil is discharged into the crankcase. The seventh passage connects to the hose that leads to the air compressor for lubrication. Excess oil from the compressor returns into the plenum and is ingested through the crankcase. The ECM will change the discharge rate of the oil pump, depending upon engine demand. The ECM will also pulse the pump on initial start up to fill the oil passages eliminating the need to bleed the oil system. The ECM provides additional oil for break in, as determined by its internal clock. The oil ratio varies with engine rpm and load. Electrical The electrical system consists of the ECM, crank position sensor (flywheel speed & crankshaft position), throttle position sensor (TPS), MAP sensor, engine temperature sensor, ignition coils and injectors (fuel & direct). The engine requires a battery to start (i.e. the ignition and injection will not occur if the battery is dead). The system will run off of the alternator. Operation The operation of the system happens in milliseconds (ms); exact timing is critical for engine performance. As the crankshaft rotates, air is drawn into the crankcase through the throttle shutters, into the plenum, and through the reed valves. As the piston nears bottom- dead-center, air from the crankcase is forced through the transfer system into the cylinder. As the crankshaft continues to rotate the exhaust and intake ports close. With these ports closed, fuel can be injected into the cylinder. The ECM will receive a signal from the throttle position sensor (TPS), engine temperature sensor (TS) and the crank position sensor (flywheel speed and position sensor). With this information the ECM refers to the fuel calibration (maps) to determine when to activate (open and close) the injectors and fire the ignition coils. With the piston in the correct position, the ECM opens the fuel injector, 90 psi fuel is discharged into a machined cavity inside the air chamber of the air/fuel rail. This mixes the fuel with the air charge. Next the direct injector will open, discharging the air/fuel mixture into the combustion chamber. The direct injector directs the mixture at the bowl located in top of the piston. The piston’s bowl directs the air/fuel mixture into the center of the combustion chamber. This air fuel mixture is then ignited by the spark plug. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-19 DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Page 3B-20 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Compressor Notes: To aid in starting when the air rail pressure is low and before the compressor has time to build pressure, the direct injector is held open by the ECM. This allows the compression from inside the cylinders to pressurize the air rail faster (1 or 2 strokes, or 600 of crankshaft rotation). Idle Notes: Idle quality is controlled by fuel volume and fuel timing. The throttle shutters will be open at idle speeds. The shift cut-out switch will interrupt the fuel to 3 of the cylinders to assist in shifting. The TPS signals the ECM to change the fuel and spark without movement of the throttle shutters. The throttle cam is manufactured to allow the TPS sensor shaft to move before opening the throttle shutters. The crankshaft position sensor is different from the standard 3.0 liter sensor. The crank position sensor serves two functions (flywheel speed and position). Testing Electric Fuel Pump Pressure Output Low Pressure Electric Fuel Pump IMPORTANT: After completing fuel pressure tests, reconnect and secure fuel outlet hose to fuel pump with full circle stainless clamps in Clamp Tool Kit 91-803146T. 1. Remove outlet fuel hose from low pressure pump. Install a short piece of hose (obtain locally) onto pump outlet fitting. Install Schrader Valve t-fitting (22-849606) from Schrader Valve Fuel Pressure Kit (849021A4) between outlet fuel hose (removed from pump) and new fuel hose (installed on pump. Secure hose connections with stastraps. Connect Fuel/Air Pressure Gauge (91-16850A2) to Schrader Valve. Gauge should indicate 6-9 psi (41.37 – 62.04 kPa). 57416 a b c 91-16850A2 d a - Outlet Fuel Hose b - Low Pressure Electric Fuel Pump c - Fuel Hose (obtain locally) d - Schrader Valve (22-849606) DIRECT FUEL INJECTION 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-21 High Pressure Electric Fuel Pump 1. Install Pressure Gauge Assembly 91-852087A1/A2 to starboard fuel rail pressure test valve. NOTE: After 15 seconds of cranking engine with starter motor, fuel pressure gauge should indicate 89 ± 2 psi (613.5 ± 13.8 kPa). 56146 d b a a - Fuel Pressure Gauge (Should Indicate 89 ± 2 psi (613.5 ± 13.8 kPa) b - Fuel Pressure Test Valve DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Page 3B-22 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Fuel Management Assembly Removal CAUTION Fuel system must be bled off prior to removal of fuel system components. NOTE: Use Fuel/Air Pressure Gauge 91-16850--1 or 91-852087A1/A2 to de-pressurize air hose first and then fuel hose. 1. De-pressurize fuel system. b a a b a - Starboard Fuel Rail b - Fuel Pressure Port 2. Place suitable container underneath vapor separator drain plug and remove plug. 3. Disconnect electric fuel pump harness connector. 56049 a b 57317 a - Drain Plug b - Sensor Lead DIRECT FUEL INJECTION 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-23 4. Remove sta-strap securing air temperature sensor harness to fuel hose. 5. Remove vapor separator vent hose to air plenum. NOTE: Upper fuel hose goes to fuel cooler. Lower fuel hose goes to electric pump beside fuel/water separator. 6. Remove the fuel inlet hose from the pulse fuel pump. 7. Remove the fuel outlet hose and fuel return hose from the vapor separator. 8. Remove 3 mounting bolts and remove separator. 56157 cc a b g g f e d 57317 a - Harness Connector b - Sta-strap c - Fuel Hoses d - Fuel Inlet Hose e - Fuel Outlet Hose f - Fuel Return Hose g - Mounting Bolts DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Page 3B-24 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 9. Disconnect throttle cam link rod and the Throttle Position Sensor link rod. 10. Disconnect MAP Sensor hose and compressor oil return hose from air management assembly. 56068 b ac d b a 57317 a - Throttle Link Rod b - Throttle Position Sensor Link Rod c - MAP Sensor Hose d - Oil Return Hose 11. Disconnect oil hoses from oil pump. 12. Remove and plug oil inlet hose to oil pump. 13. Remove 12 bolts securing air management assembly to crankcase and remove assembly. 56144 b a 56140 b aa b c d a - Oil Hoses b - Oil Inlet Hose c - Air Management d - Bolts (12 each) DIRECT FUEL INJECTION 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-25 Reed Block Assembly Removal 1. Remove 2 screws securing air plenum to reed plate assembly. 2. Remove 3 bolts securing oil pump adaptor plate to air plenum assembly. 56144 b a a a a b aa a - Screws (2 each) b - Bolts (3 each) Reed Block Assembly Installation 1. Secure oil pump adaptor plate to air plenum with 3 bolts. Torque bolts to 16 lb. ft. (22.0 Nm). 2. Secure air plenum to reed plate with 2 screws. Drive screws tight. Air Temperature Sensor Removal Remove 3 screws securing sensor and remove sensor. 56144 a b a b a - Screws b - Sensor DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Page 3B-26 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Air Temperature Sensor Installation Secure sensor in air plenum with 3 screws. Drive screws tight. Throttle Plate Assembly Removal NOTE: The throttle plate assembly is calibrated and preset for proper running characteristics and emissions at the factory. Other than complete assembly removal from the air plenum, no further disassembly should be made. Remove 4 bolts securing throttle plate assembly to air plenum and remove assembly. b 56068 a a a b a a - Bolts b - Throttle Plate Assembly Throttle Plate Assembly Installation Secure throttle plate assembly to air plenum with 4 bolts. Torque bolts to 100 lb. in. (11.5 Nm). Vapor Separator Disassembly 1. Remove 7 screws securing separator cover and remove cover. 2. Inspect seal in fuel pump chamber of separator tank for cuts and abrasions. Replace seal if necessary. If seal is serviceable, apply 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant (92-825407A12) to seal lips. b 57342 a a a a a a a 57343 a - Screws (7 each) b - Seal DIRECT FUEL INJECTION 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-27 3. Fuel pump may be removed from cover by wiggling slightly while pulling outward. IMPORTANT: DO NOT twist pump during removal as wire harness may be damaged. 4. Disconnect harness from pump to separate pump from cover. Inspect filter screen for debris. Screen may be pried out of pump and cleaned as required. 5. Inspect seal above fuel pump for cuts or abrasions. Replace seal if necessary. Apply 2-4-C w/Teflon to seal lips. 56058 56057 c b a d a - Filter Screen b - Harness Connector c - Pump d - Seal (Seal shoulder faces OUT) 6. Loosen screw securing float assembly and remove float. Inspect float for deterioration or fuel retention. Replace float as required. 7. Remove phenolic sealing plate and inspect imbedded neoprene seal on both sides of plate for cuts or abrasions. Replace plate/seal assembly as required. 56059 ac d 56058 b aa b a - Screw b - Float c - Plate d - Seal DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Page 3B-28 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Vapor Separator Reassembly 1. Reinstall phenolic sealing plate onto vapor separator cover. 2. Secure float, needle and pivot pin assembly to separator cover with screw. Torque screw to 10 lb. in. (1.0 Nm) 3. Apply 2-4-C w/Teflon to lips of seal in separator cover. 4. Connect electrical harness to fuel pump. Inspect fuel pump filter screen for debris. Remove screen and clean as required. 5. Seat fuel pump and harness into separator cover being careful not to pinch harness. 56057 c ag i h 56058 d a c f a b c d e a - Sealing Plate b - Float c - Needle d - Pivot Pin e - Screw [Torque to 10 lb. in. (1.0 N·m) f - Seal (Seal shoulder faces OUT) g - Harness h - Filter i - Fuel Pump 6. Apply 2-4-C w/Teflon to lips of seal in separator tank. 7. Install separator cover with pump onto separator tank. 8. Secure cover to tank with 7 screws. Torque screws to 30 lb. in. (3.5 Nm). 57343 57342 b a b b b b b b a - Seal b - Screws [Torque to 30 lb. in. (3.5 Nm)] DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Air Plenum Installation Secure plenum to crankcase with 12 bolts. Torque bolts to 100 lb. in. (11.5 Nm). in sequence shown 2 3 6 7 9 10 11 12 a b 5 1 4 8 56144 a-Air Plenum b-Bolts [Torque to 100 lb. in. (11.5 Nm)] Low Pressure Electric Fuel Pump Installation NOTE: If pump does not have a sleeve or grommet, refer to Service Bulletin 98-8. 1. Seat electric fuel pump w/sleeve against grommet in pump bracket. Secure pump to bracket with sta-strap. d a b c a-Low Pressure Electric Fuel Pump b-Sleeve c-Grommet d-Bracket 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-29 DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Page 3B-30 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 2. Secure bracket assembly to vapor separator with 4 screws. Torque screws to 100 lb. in. (11.5 Nm). a a b c a - Screws – Torque to 100 lb. in. (11.5 Nm) b - Sta-strap securing pump to bracket c - Ground lead – attach to air plenum IMPORTANT: Only use tool 91-803146T (or Snap-On equivalent YA3080) to crimp full circle clamps. Using a different tool could result in a crimp that is too loose, or too tight. Do not use screw type metal hose clamp as it may damage hose. 3. Connect fuel hose from bottom of low pressure fuel pump to 90° elbow in bottom of vapor separator. Secure hose with 16.2 mm full circle clamp (54-855697) using crimping tool 91-803146T. a 27291 a - Secure Fuel Hose with 16.2 mm Full Circle Clamp (54-855697) DIRECT FUEL INJECTION 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-31 4. Connect fuel hose from top of low pressure fuel pump to 90° elbow on back side of vapor separator. Secure hose with 15.3 mm full circle clamp (54-856880) using crimping tool 91-803146T. (Back view of vapor separator shown below) a 57293 a - Secure Fuel Hose with 15.3 mm Full Circle Clamp (54-856880) Vapor Separator Installation 1. Secure vapor separator to air plenum with 3 bolts. Torque bolts to 45 lb. in. (5.0 Nm). 2. Connect fuel inlet hose from pulse pump. 3. Connect fuel outlet hose and fuel return hose to vapor separator. a b e f d c 57317 a - Mounting Bolts [Torque to 45 lb. in. (5.0 Nm) b - Fuel Inlet Hose c - Fuel Outlet Hose d - Fuel Return Hose e - Low Pressure Electric Fuel Pump (6 - 9 psi) f - Inlet Fuel Hose to Low Pressure Pump DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Page 3B-32 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 4. Connect water separator sensor lead to water separator. a 57317 a - Sensor Lead 5. Connect electric fuel pump harness. 6. Connect vapor separator vent hose to air plenum. 7. Secure air temperature sensor leads to fuel hose with sta-strap. 56157 c b a d a b c a - Electric Fuel Pump Harness Connector b - Sta-Strap c - Top Fuel Hose (Fuel return from fuel cooler) d - Bottom Fuel Hose (Inlet from low pressure pump) DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Fuel Rail Removal CAUTION Fuel system must be bled off prior to removal of fuel system components. NOTE: Use Fuel/Air Pressure Gauge 91-16850--1 or 91-852087A1/A2 to de-pressurize air hose first and then fuel hose. 1. De-pressurize fuel system. 2. Remove fuel injector harness from each injector by compressing spring clip with flat tip screw driver while pulling on connector. aabb a-Port Fuel Rail b-Air Pressure Port c-Spring Clip d-Fuel Injector b 56118 c d e f g e-Harness Connector f-Fuel Pressure Port g-Starboard Fuel Rail NOTE: Always remove fuel/air hose and fitting together by removing fitting retainer rather cutting clamps. 3. Remove fuel inlet hose, fuel outlet hose and air hose from fuel rail. 56140 d e f aab c Top Fuel Rail Connections Bottom Fuel Rail Connections a-Air Hose d-Air Hose b-Retainer e-Fuel Hose c-Allen Screws (remove) f-Allen Screws 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-33 DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Page 3B-34 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 NOTE: It is recommended that direct injectors remain in the cylinder head (if they are not to be replaced) while removing the fuel rail. The direct injectors have a teflon seal which may expand if the injector is removed from the head. This expansion may cause reinstallation difficulty or require the replacement of the seal. 4. Remove 2 nuts securing fuel rail. 5. As fuel rail is removed, use a flat tip screw driver to hold direct injectors in cylinder head. 56121 a b b a b b a - Fuel Rail b - Direct Injectors Fuel Rail Disassembly The starboard fuel rail contains 3 fuel injectors and a tracker valve. The port fuel rail contains 3 fuel injectors, 1 fuel fuel regulator and 1 air regulator. NOTE: Each fuel/air inlet or outlet hose adaptor has 2 O-ring seals. These O-rings should be inspected for cuts or abrasions and replaced as required when fuel rail is disassembled for cleaning. 56122 a a b c a b c d a a a a e a e f f a - Fuel Injector b - Fuel Regulator c - Air Regulator d - Tracker Valve e - Fuel/Air Inlet (hidden) f - Fuel/Air Outlet DIRECT FUEL INJECTION DIRECT FUEL INJECTION FUEL INJECTOR REMOVAL 1. Remove 2 screws securing injector. NOTE: Use a cotter pin extractor tool in pry holes to remove injectors. 2. Gently pry up on injector to loosen O-ring adhesion and remove injector. 56125 a b 57418 a-Screws b-Pry Holes 3. Inspect fuel injector orifices for foreign debris; O-rings for cuts or abrasions and plastic components for heat damage. Replace components as required. 4. An ohm test of the fuel injector may be made by connecting test leads to injector terminals. Ohm reading should be 1.8 ± 0.1 ohm. b a b c 56124 VOLTS DC AMPS OHMS 0 2 46 8 10 DCV ACV DVA 00 510 20 10 3015 4020 0 5101520304060100200 X1 56002 a-Fuel Injector b-Fuel Nozzle c-O-Rings 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-35 DIRECT FUEL INJECTION FUEL INJECTOR INSTALLATION NOTE: Apply anti-seize grease (obtain locally) or 2-4-C w/Teflon to fuel injector attaching screw threads. 1. Insert fuel injector into fuel rail with connector pins facing (inwards) towards center of engine. NOTE: Turn injector back-and-forth slightly to seat injector O-rings in fuel rail while securing injector with retainer and 2 screws. Torque screws to 70 lb. in. (8.0 Nm). 56125 c a b a-Injector b-Retainer c-Screws [Torque to 70 lb. in. (8.0 Nm)] Page 3B-36 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Fuel Pressure Regulator Regulator Closed Regulator Open 11 13101 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1-Top Cover 2-Expansion Plug 3-O-ring 4-Spring Retainer 5-Spring 6-O-ring 8-Air Rail 9-Air Passage (from Air Compressor) 10 -Fuel Return Passage (to Vapor Separator) 11 -Fuel Inlet Passage (from Electric Fuel Pump) 12 -Diaphragm Assembly 13 -Calibration Screw (Do Not Turn) 7-Diaphragm Seat The fuel pump is capable of delivering more fuel than the engine can consume. Excess fuel flows through the fuel pressure regulator, interconnecting passages/hoses, fuel cooler, and back to the vapor separator tank. This constant flow of fuel means that the fuel system is always supplied with cool fuel, thereby preventing the formation of fuel vapor bubbles and minimizing the chances of vapor lock. The fuel pressure regulator is calibrated to raise the fuel pressure to 10 psi above the air pressure. The fuel regulator is mounted on the port fuel rail, near the top. This regulator relies on both air and spring pressure to control the fuel pressure. Inside the regulator assembly is a 10 lb. spring, this spring holds the diaphragm against the diaphragm seat. The contact between the diaphragm and diaphragm seat closes the passage between the incoming fuel (from the electric fuel pump) and the fuel return passage. When the engine is not running (no air pressure on the spring side of the diaphragm) the fuel pressure required to move the diaphragm is 10 psi. When the engine is running, air pressure from the air compressor (80 psi) is routed through the air passages, to the spring side of the fuel pressure regulator diaphragm. The air pressure (80 psi) and spring pressure (10 psi) combine to regulate system fuel pressure to 90 psi - or 10 psi higher than the air pressure in the DFI system fuel/air rails. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-37 DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Page 3B-38 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 FUEL REGULATOR REMOVAL 1. Remove 4 screws securing regulator and remove regulator. 2. Inspect regulator diaphragm for cuts or tears. 3. Inspect regulator housing O-ring for cuts and abrasions. Replace components as required. 56127 c b d a c e d f 56126 b a b a a - Screws b - Fuel Regulator c - Diaphragm d - Spring e - Cup f - O-Ring FUEL REGULATOR INSTALLATION NOTE: Apply a light coat of 2-4-C w/Teflon to diaphragm surface and O-ring to aid in the retention of diaphragm and O-ring on fuel rail during reassembly. 1. Position diaphragm on fuel rail. 2. Position O-ring on fuel rail. 3. Position spring and cup onto diaphragm. NOTE: Apply anti-seize grease (obtain locally) or 2-4-C w/Teflon to regulator attaching screw threads. 4. Place cover over spring/cup/diaphragm assembly and secure with 4 screws. Torque screws to 70 lb. in. (8.0 Nm). 56126 ea ea 56128 c bb a c d a - Diaphragm b - O-Ring c - Spring d - Cup e - Screws [Torque to 70 lb. in. (8.0 Nm)] DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Air Pressure Regulator Regulator Closed Regulator Open ÇÇÇÇ6 101 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1-Top Cover 7-Air Rail 2-Expansion Plug 8-Air Passage (from Air Compressor) 3-Spring Retainer 9-Excess Air Passage (to Exhaust Adaptor) 4-Vent 10 -Fuel Inlet Passage (from Electric Fuel Pump) 5-Spring 11 -Diaphragm Assembly 6-Diaphragm Seat 12 -Calibration Screw (Do Not Turn) The air pressure regulator is designed to limit the air pressure inside the rails to approximately 80 psi. The air regulator uses a spring (pressure) to control the air pressure. This spring (80 psi) holds the diaphragm against the diaphragm seat. The contact area blocks (closes) the air inlet passage from the excess air, return passage. As the air pressure rises (below the diaphragm), it must reach a pressure equal to or greater than the spring pressure holding the diaphragm closed. Once this pressure is achieved, the spring compresses, allowing the diaphragm to move. The diaphragm moves away from the diaphragm seat, allowing air to exit through the diaphragm seat, into the excess air passage leading to the exhaust adaptor plate. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-39 DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Page 3B-40 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 AIR REGULATOR REMOVAL 1. Remove 4 screws securing regulator and remove regulator. 2. Inspect regulator diaphragm for cuts or tears. Replace as required. 56130 a b c c d e 56129 a aa b a - Screws b - Air Regulator c - Diaphragm d - Spring e - Cup AIR REGULATOR INSTALLATION NOTE: Apply a light coat of 2-4-C w/Teflon to diaphragm surface to aid in the retention of diaphragm on fuel rail during reassembly. 1. Position diaphragm, spring and cup onto fuel rail with fuel rail in horizontal position. NOTE: Apply anti-seize grease (obtain locally) or 2-4-C w/Teflon to regulator attaching screw threads. NOTE: Due to the stiffness of the regulator spring, it is recommended that 2 longer screws (5mm x 25mm long) (10-40073 25) and 2 flat washers (12-30164) be installed through cover first to begin compression. This will allow 2 shorter screws (5mm x 15mm long) to be installed. Remove 2 long screws w/flat washers and install remaining 2 short screws (5mm x 15mm). Torque screws to 70 lb. in. (8.0 Nm). 56132 a c b b c d f e e f 56131 c b aa b a - Cup b - Spring c - Diaphragm d - Cover e - Screws (5mm x 25mm) (10-40073 25) f - Flat Washers (12-30164) DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Tracker Valve Engine Off (No Pressure) Engine at Operating Pressures 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1-Top Cover 6-Air Rail 2-Spring Retainer (not shown) 7-Air Passage (from Air Compressor) 3-Spring 8-Fuel Inlet Passage (from Electric 4-O-ring Fuel Pump) 5-Diaphragm (at rest) Seat 9-Diaphragm Assembly The tracker is located on the starboard fuel/air rail assembly. The DFI system must maintain a constant 10 psi pressure difference between the fuel pressure and air pressure in the rails, at all times. The tracker is designed to maintain the 10 psi differential when the air or fuel pressure suddenly raises (i.e. pulses generated by the compressor’s piston or by the fuel injectors opening and closing). The tracker contains a spring on the air side of the diaphragm. This spring positions the diaphragm against the diaphragm’s seat (when the engine is not running). After the engine starts, and the fuel and air pressure reach normal operating range, the fuel pressure will compress the spring and the diaphragm will move slightly away from the seat (to a neutral position). At this point the pressure on both sides of the tracker diaphragm is equal (10 psi spring pressure + 80 psi air pressure = 90 psi fuel pressure). Any air or fuel pressure “spikes” on one side of the diaphragm will transfer this pressure rise to the other system (air or fuel) on the other side of the diaphragm. Both systems will have a momentary increase in pressure so that the 10 psi difference between air and fuel system pressures can be maintained. NOTE: To prevent excessive wear in the seat, the tracker is calibrated to allow the diaphragm to be slightly away from the seat during normal operation. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-41 DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Page 3B-42 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 TRACKER VALVE REMOVAL 1. Remove 4 screws securing tracker valve and remove tracker assembly. 2. Inspect tracker diaphragm for cuts and tears. 3. Inspect tracker cover O-ring for cuts and abrasions. Replace components as required. 56136 a b c b c d a 56135 a a a a - Screws b - Diaphragm c - Spring d - O-ring TRACKER VALVE INSTALLATION NOTE: Apply a light coat of 2-4-C w/Teflon to tracker diaphragm and cover O-ring to aid in their retention on fuel rail while reinstalling tracker valve to fuel rail. NOTE: Apply anti-seize grease (obtain locally) or 2-4-C w/Teflon to tracker valve attaching screw threads. 1. Position diaphragm, spring and O-ring onto fuel rail. 2. Place cover over diaphragm/spring/O-ring assembly and secure with 4 screws. Torque screws to 70 lb. in. (8.0 Nm). 56135 a b b c b a 56137 d e e a b c a - Diaphragm b - Spring c - O-ring d - Cover e - Screws [Torque to 70 lb. in. (8.0 Nm)] DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Fuel Rail Cleaning After all fuel injectors, air regulator, tracker valve, fuel regulator, inlet hoses and outlet hoses have been removed, the fuel rails may be flushed out with a suitable parts cleaning solvent. Use compressed air to remove any remaining solvent. 56140 d e f aab c Top Fuel Rail Connections Bottom Fuel Rail Connections a-Air Hose d-Air Hose b-Retainer e-Fuel Hose c-Allen Screws (remove) f-Allen Screws Direct Injector Removal 1. Remove harness connectors from direct injectors. 2. Remove direct injector from cylinder head 56138 ab a-Direct Injector (3 each cylinder head) b-Harness Connector 3. Inspect injector teflon sealing ring (white) for signs of combustion blowby (teflon ring will be streaked brownish black). If blowby is present, replace teflon sealing ring. If blowby is not present, sealing ring may be reused. 4. Inspect O-rings and cork gasket for cuts or abrasions. Replace components as required. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-43 DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Page 3B-44 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 5. If teflon seal requires replacement, use teflon ring installation tool 91-851980 to slide new seal onto injector. Following installation of teflon ring, the teflon ring sizing tool (91-851980-1) can be used to compress the teflon seal to aid in the installation of the injector into the cylinder head. d b a c e e 91-851980-1 f a - Teflon Sealing Ring b - O-ring c - Teflon Seal d - Seal Installation Tool (91-851980) e - O-ring f - Teflon Ring Sizing Tool (91-851980-1) 6. An ohm test of the direct injector may be made by connecting test leads to injector terminals. Ohm reading should be 1.3 ± 0.3 ohm. 7. Carbon buildup on tip of direct injector may be removed by use of a brass wire hand brush. 56017 a b b c VOLTS DC AMPS OHMS 0 2 4 6 8 10 DCV ACV DVA 0 0 5 10 20 10 30 15 40 20 0 5 15 10 60 40 30 20 100 200 X1 aa 56003 a - Direct Injector b - Direct Injector c - Tip DIRECT FUEL INJECTION 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-45 NOTE: If cylinder head is going to be replaced, remove cup washers from each direct injector port by prying out with a flat tip screwdriver. Reinstall washers with retainers into new cylinder head. Washers provide tension between direct injectors, cylinder head and fuel rails. 56148 aa b a - Cup Washer b - Retainer Fuel Rail and Direct Injector Installation 1. Use Teflon Ring Sizing Tool (91-851980-1) to compress new teflon sealing rings prior to installation of injector into cylinder head. 2. Carefully slide fuel rail over mounting studs and onto direct injectors. IMPORTANT: ALL fuel and air hoses attached to the fuel rails MUST be secured with stainless steel hose clamps. 3. Secure each fuel rail with 2 nuts. Torque nuts to 33 lb. ft. (44 Nm). 4. Reinstall direct injector harness connectors. 56141 b a a a a b a a b b a - Nuts [Torque to 33 lb.ft. (44 Nm)] b - Direct Injector Harness Connectors DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Air Compressor Air compressor is a single cylinder, water cooled and lubricated by the outboard oil pump. Air Compressor Specifications Air Compressor Type Compressor Output Reciprocating Piston (1 to 1 ratio with engine RPM) @ Idle – 80 psi @ W.O.T. – 110 psi Cylinder Block Displacement 7.07 cu. in. (116 cc) Cylinder Bore Diameter (Standard) Taper/Out-of-Round/Wear Maximum Bore Type 2.5591 in. (65.0 mm) 0.001 in. (0.025 mm) Cast Iron Stroke Length 1.374 in. (34.9 mm) Piston Piston Type Aluminum Piston Diameter Dimension “A” at Right Angle (90°) to Piston Pin 0.500 in. 2.5578 ± .0004 in. (64.97 ± 0.010 mm) Piston Ring End Gap Top Ring Middle Ring Bottom Ring 0.0059 – 0.0098 in. (0.15 – 0.25 mm) 0.0059 – 0.0098 in. (0.15 – 0.25 mm) 0.0039 – 0.014 in. (0.10 – 0.35 mm) Reeds Reed Stand Open 0.010 in. (0.25 mm) Page 3B-46 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 DIRECT FUEL INJECTION 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-47 COMPRESSOR REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery cables from battery terminals. 2. Remove top cowling. IMPORTANT: Prior to removing flywheel cover, remove vent hose from fitting on flywheel cover. 3. Remove flywheel cover. 4. Use 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) drive on belt tensioner arm to relieve belt tension. Remove belt. b a 56142 a b a - Belt Tensioner b - 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) drive CAUTION If engine has been recently run, air pressure outlet hose fittings may be extremely hot. Allow components to cool off before beginning disassembly. 5. Disconnect air pressure outlet hose. DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Page 3B-48 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 6. Disconnect water outlet hose (tell-tale). 56149 b a a a - Air Pressure Outlet Hose b - Water outlet Hose (tell-tale) 7. Disconnect air compressor oil inlet hose. 8. Disconnect water inlet hose. 9. Disconnect excess oil return hose. 56147 a c a b a - Air Compressor Oil Inlet Hose b - Water Inlet Hose c - Excess Oil Return Hose 10. Remove 4 bolts securing air compressor to outboard and remove compressor. DIRECT FUEL INJECTION 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-49 Air Compressor Disassembly/Reassembly NOTE: If cylinder bore is scored, air compressor must be replaced as an assembly. NOTE: The piston and rings are not sold separately. They must be replaced as an assembly. The connecting rod and bearings are not sold separately. They must be replaced as an assembly. ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ a b c d e f g i j k 9 14 9 14 14 14 9 9 6 h 6 Dielectric Grease (92-823506--1) 9 Loctite PST Pipe Sealant (92-809822) 14 2 Cycle Outboard Oil (92-826666A24) NOTE: End cap bearing and seal are not sold separately. End cap must be replaced as an assembly NOTE: Piston Installation – use a metal hose clamp for piston ring compressor. Stagger piston ring openings. a - Bolt [Torque to 100 lb. in. (11.5 Nm)] b - Bolt (4 each) [Torque to 100 lb. in. (11.5 Nm)] c - End Cap Assembly (Inspect bearing for roughness) d - O-rings (Inspect for cuts or abrasions) e - O-rings (Inspect for cuts or abrasions) f - Reed Plate (Inspect for broken or chipped reeds/stops) Maximum Reed Stand-Open – 0.010 in. (0.254 mm) g - O-rings (Inspect for cuts or abrasions) h - Cylinder Head i - Bolt [Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)] j - Temperature Sensor k - Bolt [Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)] DIRECT FUEL INJECTION Page 3B-50 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Air Compressor Flow Diagram ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ 56150 a b d h j l m n o r s u v j j j l w a b c d e f g i j k m n p q r t v w j j a - Air Inlet b - Air Filter c - Compressor Air Inlet w/Inlet Restrictor d - Air Compressor e - Compressor Air Outlet f - Compressor Water Inlet g - Excess Oil Return h - Compressor Oil Inlet i - Fuel System Pressure Test Valve j - Fuel Injector k - Starboard Fuel Rail l - High Pressure Fuel [89 ± 2 psi (613.5 ± 13.8 kPa)] m - Tracker Valve n - Fuel Inlet o - Fuel Regulator [89 ± 2 psi (613.5 ± 13.8 kPa)] p - Air Regulator [79 ± 2 psi (544.0 ± 13.8 kPa)] q - Air [79 ± 2 psi (544.0 ± 13.8 kPa)] r - Excess Air Return to Exhaust Adaptor Plate s - Port Fuel Rail t - Excess Fuel Return to Fuel Cooler u - Air Pressure Test Valve v - High Pressure w - Low Pressure DIRECT FUEL INJECTION 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3B-51 Air Compressor Pressure Test Install Pressure Gauge Assembly 91-852087A1/A2 to fuel rail pressure test valves. Starboard rail has fuel pressure test valve. Port fuel rail has air pressure test valve. NOTE: After 15 seconds of cranking engine with starter motor, air pressure gauge should indicate 79 ± 2 psi (544.0 ± 13.8 kPa) and fuel pressure gauge should indicate 89 ± 2 psi (613.5 ± 13.8 kPa). 56146 a b c d b c d a - Air Pressure Gauge (Should Indicate 79 ± 2 psi (544.0 ± 13.8 kPa) b - Fuel Pressure Gauge (Should Indicate 89 ± 2 psi (613.5 ± 13.8 kPa) c - Fuel Pressure Test Valve d - Air Pressure Test Valve DIRECT FUEL INJECTION FUEL PRESSURE AND AIR PRESSURE TROUBLESHOOTING CHART PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION Fuel Pressure and Air Pressure are Both Low 1. Inspect air compressor air intake (air filter in flywheel cover) for blockage. 2. Remove air compressor cylinder head and inspect for scuffing of cylinder wall. Inspect for broken reeds and/or reed stops. 3. Tracker Valve – Remove and inspect diaphragm for cuts or tears and seat damage on diaphragm and rail. 4. Air Regulator – Remove and inspect diaphragm for cuts or tears on diaphragm and rail. Fuel Pressure Low or Fuel Pressure Drops while Running (Air Pressure Remains Normal) 1. Each time key is turned to the RUN position, both electric pumps should operate for 2 seconds. If it they do not run, check 20 ampere fuse and wire connections. 2. If pumps run but have no fuel output, check vapor separator (remove drain plug) for fuel. 3. If no fuel present in vapor separator, check fuel/ water separator for debris. Check crankcase mounted fuel pump for output. 4. Check high pressure pump amperage draw. Normal draw is 6 - 9 amperes; if draw is below 2 amperes, check fuel pump filter (base of pump) for debris. If filter is clean, replace pump. If amperage is above 9 amperes, pump is defective – replace pump. Check low pressure output – 6-9 psi. Check low pressure electric fuel pump amperage draw. Normal draw is 1 - 2 amperes; if draw is below 1 ampere, check for blockage between pump inlet fitting and vapor separator tank. If ampere draw is above 2 amperes, replace pump. 5. Fuel Regulator – Remove and inspect diaphragm for cuts or tears. Fuel Pressure High and Air Pressure is Normal 1. Stuck check valve in fuel return hose. 2. Debris blocking fuel regulator hole. 3. Faulty pressure gauge Fuel and Air Pressure Higher than Normal 1. Debris blocking air regulator passage. 2. Air dump hose (rail to driveshaft housing) blocked/plugged. Page 3B-52 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 OIL INJECTION FUEL SYSTEM Section 3C – Oil Injection Table of Contents Oil System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-1 Oil Pump Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-1 Oil System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-2 Oil Hose Check Valve Installation on 1998 Model 135/150 DFI Outboards SN 0G886266 and Below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-3 Oil Injection Hose Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-9 Oil Pump Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . 3C-10 Engine Oil Reservoir Removal and Installation 3C-11 Priming the Oil Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-12 Priming Procedure – Method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-13 Remote Oil Hose Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-14 Filling the Oil Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-14 Purging Air From the Engine Oil Reservoir and Remote Oil Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-15 Oil Warning Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-15 Oil System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-16 Low Oil Warning System is Activated . . . . . . 3C-16 3 C Oil System Operation Oil in this engine is not mixed with the fuel before entering the combustion chamber. Oil is stored inside the remote oil tank in the boat. Crankcase pressure forces oil from the remote oil tank into the engine oil reservoir. The engine oil reservoir feeds oil to the oil pump. The oil pump is ECM driven and controls oil distribution to the crankcase and air compressor. The oil pump has seven oil discharge ports. Six of the oil discharge ports inject oil into the crankcase through hoses, one hose for each cylinder. The last oil discharge port discharges oil into the air compressor for lubrication. Unused oil from the air compressor returns to the plenum and is ingested through the crankcase. The ECM is programmed to automatically increase the oil supply to the engine during the initial engine break-in period. The oil ratio is doubled during the first 120 minutes of operation whenever engine speed exceeds 2500 RPM; below 2500 RPM the oil pump provides oil at the normal ratio. After the engine break-in period, the oil ratio will return to normal – 300 - 400:1 at idle to 60:1 at WOT. NOTE: On some light boat applications after the break-in is completed and the engine is being run at cruising speed – between 4000 and 5000 RPM – the fuel to oil ratio may be as high as 28:1. This results from a reduced throttle opening with a corresponding reduction in fuel consumption. Oil Pump Output Using the DDT to activate auto prime, the oil pump should discharge 110 ml (cc) ± 8 ml (cc) during the auto prime time period. To check the oil pump output: • Verify the onboard oil reservoir is full. • Release any pressure (loosen cap) from the remote oil tank in the boat. • With engine not running, use the DDT to activate the auto prime. • Using a ml or cc graduated container, record the amount of oil needed to refill the onboard oil reservoir. • Retighten cap on the remote oil tank in the boat. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3C-1 OIL INJECTION Oil System f h a b c d e g i a-Remote Oil Tank b-Engine Oil Reservoir c-Oil Supply Hose to the Oil Pump d-Oil Pump e-Oil Supply Hoses to the Cylinders (6) f-Oil Supply Hose to the Air Compressor g-Air Compressor h-Check Valve i-Oil Return Hose from the Air Compressor Page 3C-2 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 OIL INJECTION 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3C-3 Oil Hose Check Valve Installation on 1998 Model 135/150 DFI Outboards SN 0G886266 and Below To prevent possible momentary oil starvation in the oil pump delivery hoses, it is recommended that check valve kit 21-858945A2 be installed as follows: NOTE: Refer to Service Bulletin 98-23. 1. Remove flywheel cover. Pull out vent hose. a a - Vent Hose 2. Remove 4 bolts securing bottom cowl halves and remove bottom cowling. 55970 52352 55932 a a a a - Bolt 3. Remove throttle cable from throttle arm. a a - Throttle Cable OIL INJECTION Page 3C-4 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 4. Remove 3 bolts securing oil reservoir and lay reservoir off to one side. a b a - Bolts b - Oil Reservoir 5. Remove throttle link arm and bolt securing throttle arm. Remove throttle arm. – a b c a - Throttle Link Arm b - Bolt c - Throttle Arm OIL INJECTION 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3C-5 6. Remove alternator/air compressor belt. 7. Remove aft alternator bolt and pivot alternator forward. a b c d a - Alternator/Air Compressor Belt b - Belt Tensioner (rotate counterclockwise) c - Aft Alternator Bolt d - Alternator (rotate forward) NOTE: It is recommended that a razor knife be used to make a small slit in the oil hoses to aid in removal. Removing hoses without cutting them may result in the breakage of the oil fitting. Trim cut portion off of oil hose before reinstalling hose. 8. Remove oil hoses from fittings on #2, #4, and #6 cylinders. OIL INJECTION Page 3C-6 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 NOTE: All check valve/hose assemblies for cylinders 2, 4, 6 are brass colored and have 1.250 (31.75 mm) long hoses attached to check valve. IMPORTANT: Due to the close proximity of the #2 cylinder oil hose to the flywheel, it will be necessary to trim the length of the #2 oil hose to provide adequate clearance between the oil hose and the flywheel when the check valve assembly is installed. 9. Trim off #2 cylinder oil hose to an appropriate length (to provide clearance between hose and flywheel) and install new check valve/hose assembly. Secure hose connections with sta-straps. 10. Install new check valve/hose assemblies on cylinders #4 and #6. Secure all hose connections with sta-straps. 57410 d d d c b a a - #2 Cylinder Oil Hose [Trim hose length as required] b - #4 Check Valve/Hose Assembly c - #6 Check Valve/Hose Assembly d - Sta-straps OIL INJECTION 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3C-7 11. Reinstall throttle control arm. Connect throttle link to throttle cam. Torque bolt to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm). 12. Reinstall oil reservoir. Torque bolts to 170 lb. in. (19 Nm). 13. Reinstall alternator. Torque bolt to 40 lb. ft. (54 Nm). 57409 b a c a - Torque Bolt to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm) b - Torque Bolts to 170 lb. in. (19 Nm) c - Torque bolt to 40 lb. ft. (54 Nm) 14. Reinstall alternator/air compressor belt. 15. Remove Electronic Control Module (ECM) (lay off to one side). 16. Remove solenoid/trim relay plate (lay off to one side). 17. Remove starter motor (lay off to one side). NOTE: All check valve/hose assemblies for cylinders 1, 3, 5 have a BLUE stripe/band and a 3.125 in. (79.37 mm) long hose attached to the check valve. OIL INJECTION Page 3C-8 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 18. Install new check valve/hose assemblies on cylinders #1, #3 and #5. Secure all hose connections with sta-straps. 57411 a b c a - #1 Cylinder Check Valve/Hose Assembly b - #3 Cylinder Check Valve/Hose Assembly c - #5 Cylinder Check Valve/Hose Assembly 19. Reinstall starter motor. Torque bolts to 17.5 lb ft. (23.5 Nm). 20. Reinstall starter solenoid/trim relay plate. Torque bolts to 150 lb. in. (17 Nm). 21. Reinstall ECM. Torque bolts to 70 lb. in. (8 Nm). 57412 a b b c c c a - Torque bolts to 17.5 lb ft. (23.5 Nm) b - Torque bolts to 150 lb. in. (17 Nm) c - Torque bolts to 70 lb. in. (8 Nm) 22. Reinstall bottom cowling. 23. Reinstall flywheel cover. OIL INJECTION 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3C-9 Oil Injection Hose Installation Install the correct inside diameter and length of hose between oil pump and fittings on the engine (see chart below). Cylinders #1, #3, #5 only have a BLUE stripe/band. Fasten hoses on both ends with sta-straps. Cyl #1 Cyl #2 Cyl #3 Cyl #4 Cyl #5 Cyl #6 Cyl Cyl #1 #3 Cyl #5 Cyl #6 Cyl #4 Cyl #2 a b c a 2 3 4 5 6 1 d d d d d d e 7 a - Air Compressor b - Oil Pump Cyl. #1 0.078 in. (1.98 mm) I.D. Check Valve with 3.125 in. (79.4 mm) length Hose Cyl. #3 0.078 in. (1.98 mm) I.D. Check Valve with 3.125 in. (79.4 mm) length Hose Cyl. #5 0.078 in. (1.98 mm) I.D. Check Valve with 3.125 in. (79.4 mm) length Hose Cyl. #2 0.063 in. (1.60 mm) I.D. Check Valve with 1.250 in. (31.7 mm) length Hose Cyl. #4 0.063 in. (1.60 mm) I.D. Check Valve with 1.250 in. (31.7 mm) length Hose Cyl. #6 0.063 in. (1.60 mm) I.D. Check Valve with 1.250 in. (31.7 mm) length Hose Note All check valve I.D. measurements given are ± 0.002 in. (0.050 mm) c - Fasten Hose Ends with Sta-Straps d - Check Valves e - Check Valve (oil return) Oil Hose Sizes Hose Inside Diameter ± .01 (0.25mm) Length ± 0.20 (5.1 mm) 1 0.125 (3.2 mm) 16 in. (406 mm) 2 0.125 (3.2 mm) 20 in. (508 mm) 3 0.125 (3.2 mm) 16 in. (406 mm) 4 0.092 (2.3 mm) 28 in. (711 mm) 5 0.092 (2.3 mm) 24 in. (610 mm) 6 0.092 (2.3 mm) 24 in. (610 mm) 7 0.092 (2.3 mm) 24 in. (610 mm) OIL INJECTION Oil Pump Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the wiring harness from the pump. 2. Disconnect the oil hoses. 3. Remove three bolts and remove pump. h a c d e f g b a-Oil Pump b-Gasket c-Bracket d-Bushing (3) e-Rubber Grommet (3) – Insert into Hole f-Washer (3) g-Bolt (3) – Torque to 16 lb. ft. (21.5 Nm) h-Sta-Straps – Fasten All Hose Ends INSTALLATION 1. Install pump as shown. 2. Reconnect the oil hoses. Refer to Oil Injection Hose Installation for correct location. Fasten hoses to pump fittings with sta-straps. 3. Connect the wiring harness. NOTE: Replacement oil pump may have 2 pin electrical connection vs. 4 pin with original oil pump. The 2 pin connection will still function with the existing wire harness. 4. Refill the oil system. Refer to Priming the Oil Pump. Page 3C-10 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 OIL INJECTION 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3C-11 Engine Oil Reservoir Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the oil hoses. Plug the hoses to prevent spillage. 2. Disconnect the LIGHT BLUE wire leads. 3. Remove three bolts securing oil tank and fuel cooler to powerhead and remove tank. a b c d e f g h i j d g e g k a - Oil Reservoir b - Fuel Cooler (Design 1) c - Bolt (1) – Torque to 170 lb. in. (19 Nm) d - Washer (3) e - Rubber Grommet (3) – Insert into Holes f - Low Oil Switch g - Bushing (3) h - Grommet (2) – Insert into Hole i - Bolt (2) – Torque to 170 lb. in. (19 Nm) j - Sta-Straps – Fasten All Hose Ends k - Fuel Cooler (Design 2) INSTALLATION 1. Install oil reservoir as shown. 2. Fasten the oil hoses with sta-straps. 3. Connect the LIGHT BLUE wire leads. 4. Refill the oil system. Refer to Priming the Oil Pump. OIL INJECTION Priming the Oil Pump Priming the oil pump (filling pump and hoses) is required on new or rebuild engines and any time maintenance is performed on the oiling system. There are three methods for priming the oil pump: METHOD 1 – SHIFT SWITCH ACTIVATION PRIME This method does three things: a. Fills the oil pump, oil supply hose feeding pump and oil hoses going to the crankcase and air compressor. b. Activates break-in oil ratio. c. Initiates a new 120 minute engine break-in cycle. Refer to priming procedure following. METHOD 2 – (DDT) DIGITAL DIAGNOSTIC TERMINAL – RESET BREAK-IN This method is the same as Method 1, except the run history and fault history are erased from the ECM. Refer to procedure in the Technician Reference Manual provided with the Digital Diagnostic Software Cartridge Part. No. 91-822608-4 or -5. METHOD 3 – (DDT) DIGITAL DIAGNOSTIC TERMINAL – OIL PUMP PRIME This method fills the oil pump, oil supply hose feeding pump, and oil hoses going to the crankcase and air compressor. Refer to procedure in the Technician Reference Manual provided with the Digital Diagnostic Software Cartridge Part. No. 91-822608-4 or -5. Conditions Requiring Priming the Oil Pump Condition Priming Procedure New engine Use Method 1 or 2 Rebuilt Powerhead Use Method 1 or 2 New Powerhead Use Method 1 or 2 Oil system ran out of oil Use Method 3 Oil drained from oil supply hose feeding pump Use Method 3 Oil pump removed Use Method 3 Oil injection hoses drained Use Method 3 Page 3C-12 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 OIL INJECTION Priming Procedure – Method 1 METHOD 1 – SHIFT SWITCH ACTIVATION PRIME PROCEDURE Before starting engine for the first time, prime the oil pump. Priming will remove any air that may be in the pump, oil supply hose, or internal passages. a b a-Oil Injection Pump b-Oil Supply Hose CAUTION To prevent damage to the fuel pumps, fill the engine fuel system with fuel. Otherwise the fuel pumps will run without fuel during the priming process. Prime the oil injection pump as follows: 1. Fill the engine fuel system with fuel. Connect fuel hose and squeeze primer bulb until it fells firm. 2. Turn the ignition key switch to the “ON” position. 3. Within the first 10 seconds after the key switch has been turned on, move the remote control handle from neutral into forward gear 3 to 5 times. This will automatically start the priming process. N F NOTE: It may take a few minutes for the pump to complete the priming process. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3C-13 OIL INJECTION Page 3C-14 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Remote Oil Hose Connections CONNECTING OIL HOSE WITH BLUE STRIPE 1. Remove shipping cap from fitting and connect oil hose (a). Fasten hose with sta-strap. a a - Oil Hose with Blue Stripe CONNECTING OIL HOSE WITHOUT BLUE STRIPE 1. Remove shipping cap from fitting and connect hose (a). Fasten hose with sta-strap. a a - Oil Hose Without Blue Stripe Filling the Oil Tanks 1. Fill remote oil tank with the recommended oil listed in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Tighten fill cap. 2. Remove cap and fill engine oil tank with oil. Reinstall the fill cap. 3. Remove air from remote oil hose. Refer to Purging Air from the Engine Oil Reservoir and Remote Oil Hose. c b a a - Fill Cap b - Engine Oil Reservoir c - Fill Cap OIL INJECTION Purging Air From the Engine Oil Reservoir and Remote Oil Hose NOTE: Before starting engine, make sure the oil pump has been primed. 1. Start the engine. Run the engine until all the air has been vented out of the reservoir and oil starts to flow out of the reservoir. Re-tighten fill cap. a a-Fill Cap Oil Warning Systems LOW OIL LEVEL NOTE: The low oil condition must exist for a minimum of 15 seconds before horn or light is activated. The system is activated when the oil in the engine mounted oil reservoir tank drops below 22 fl. oz. (175 ml). You still have an oil reserve remaining for 30 minutes of full speed operation. NOTE: The engine mounted oil reservoir (located beneath the top cowl) along with the remote oil tank will have to be refilled (refer to Filling the Oil tanks). The warning system works as follows: The OIL light (a) will come on and the warning horn sounds a series of four short tones. If you continue to operate the outboard, the light will stay on and the horn will sound four short tones every two minutes. The engine has to be shut off to reset the warning system. a OIL PUMP NOT FUNCTIONING ELECTRICALLY The system is activated if the oil pump stops functioning electrically. No lubricating oil is being supplied to the engine. Stop the engine as soon as possible. Continuing to operate the engine can result in severe engine damage. The warning system works as follows: The OIL light (a) and CHECK ENGINE light (b) will come on and the warning horn will be- gin sounding. The warning system will automatically reduce and limit the engine speed to 3000 RPM. The engine has to be shut off to reset the warning system. a b 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3C-15 OIL INJECTION Oil System Troubleshooting Low Oil Warning System is Activated Low oil level in en- gine oil reservoir and also remote oil tank Low oil level in engine oil reservoir but not low in remote oil tank Note: Oil level in engine oil reservoir should be up to the fill cap Oil level is not low in either tank Refill both oil tanks. Purge air from en- gine oil tank. Refer to procedure Air was never purged from engine oil tank Fill cap is leaking air on re- mote tank Remote oil hoses blocked or punctured Restricted oil outlet filter in re- mote oil tank Air leak in upper portion on the oil pickup tube Faulty pressure check valve. Located in engine at end of (black without blue stripe) re- mote oil hose Caps on remote tank must be sealed and installed tight Check hoses for a kink or leakage Remove filter and clean Replace tube Replace check valve Purge air from engine oil tank. Refer to procedure Disconnect blue wires going to the low oil float switch in the engine oil reser- voir. Check switch for continuity Remove screw and pull out the oil float switch from the tank. Check switch again for continuity Continuity Oil Float switch is faulty. Re- place switch Continuity Float in oil tank is faulty. Re- place oil tank No Continuity Blue wire is shorted to ground No Continuity Problem Problem Problem Problem Oil leaks out of exhaust or #6 cylinder Pulse hose and oil supply hose are reversed Boat oil tank is mounted higher than pulse hose fitting on engine and oil tank is over-filled Continuity Check continuity with engine run- ning and electrical system under load. Refer to Service Bulletin 98-3 Page 3C-16 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 EMISSIONS FUEL SYSTEM Section 3D – Emissions Table of Contents Exhaust Emissions Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-1 What Are Emissions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-1 Hydrocarbons – HC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-1 Carbon Monoxide – CO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-1 Oxides of Nitrogen - NOx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-2 Controlling Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-2 Stoichiometric (14.7:1) Air/Fuel Ratio . . . . . . . . 3D-2 Outboard Hydrocarbon Emissions Reductions . . . 3D-2 Stratified vs Homogenized Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-3 Homogenized Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-3 Stratified Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-4 Emissions Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-4 Manufacturer’s Responsibility: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-4 Dealer Responsibility: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-5 Owner Responsibility: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-5 EPA Emission Regulations: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-5 Decal Location: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-6 Replacement of Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-7 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-7 Date Code Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-7 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-7 3 D Exhaust Emissions Standards Through the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the federal government has established exhaust emissions standards for all new marine engines sold in the United States. What Are Emissions? Emissions are what comes out of the exhaust system in the exhaust gas when the engine is running. They are formed as a result of the process of combustion or incomplete combustion. To understand exhaust gas emissions, remember that both air and fuel are made of several elements. Air contains oxygen and nitrogen among other elements; gasoline contains mainly hydrogen and carbon. These four elements combine chemically during combustion. If combustion were complete, the mixture of air and gasoline would result in these emissions: water, carbon dioxide and nitrogen, which are not harmful to the environment. However, combustion is not usually complete. Also, potentially harmful gases can be formed during and after combustion. All marine engines must reduce the emission of certain pollutants, or potentially harmful gases, in the exhaust to conform with levels legislated by the EPA. Emissions standards become more stringent each year. Standards are set primarily with regard to three emissions: hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO) and oxides of nitrogen (NOx). Hydrocarbons – HC Gasoline is a hydrocarbon fuel. The two elements of hydrogen and carbon are burned during combustion in combination with oxygen. But they are not totally consumed. Some pass through the combustion chamber and exit the exhaust system as unburned gases known as hydrocarbons. Carbon Monoxide – CO Carbon is one of the elements that make up the fuel burned in the engine along with oxygen during the combustion process. If the carbon in the gasoline could combine with enough oxygen (one carbon atom with two oxygen atoms), it would come out of the engine in the form of carbon dioxide (CO2). CO2 is a harmless gas. However, carbon often combines with insufficient oxygen (one carbon atom with one oxygen atom). This forms carbon monoxide, CO. Carbon monoxide is the product of incomplete combustion and is a dangerous, potentially lethal gas. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3D-1 EMISSIONS Oxides of Nitrogen - NOx NOx is a slightly different byproduct of combustion. Nitrogen is one of the elements that makes up the air going into the engine. Under extremely high temperatures it combines with oxygen to form oxides of nitrogen (NOx). This happens in the engine’s combustion chambers when temperatures are too high. NOx itself is not harmful, but when exposed to sunlight it combines with unburned hydrocarbons to create the visible air pollutant known as smog. Smog is a serious problem in California as well as many other heavily populated areas of the United States. Controlling Emissions There are two principle methods of reducing emissions from a two-stroke-cycle marine engine. The first method is to control the air/fuel ratio that goes into the combustion chamber. The second is to control the time when this air/fuel mixture enters the combustion chamber. Timing is important, to prevent any unburned mixture from escaping out of the exhaust port. Stoichiometric (14.7:1) Air/Fuel Ratio In the search to control pollutants and reduce exhaust emissions, engineers have discovered that they can be reduced effectively if a gasoline engine operates at an air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1. the technical term for this ideal ratio is stoichiometric. An air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 provides the best control of all three elements in the exhaust under almost all conditions. The HC and CO content of the exhaust gas is influenced significantly by the air/fuel ratio. At an air/fuel ratio leaner than 14.7:1, HC and CO levels are low, but with a ratio richer than 14.7:1 they rise rapidly. It would seem that controlling HC and CO by themselves might not be such a difficult task; the air/fuel ratio only needs to be kept leaner than 14.7:1. However, there is also NOx to consider. As the air/fuel ratio becomes leaner, combustion temperatures increase. Higher combustion temperatures raise the NOx content of the exhaust. However, enrichening the air/fuel ratio to decrease combustion temperatures or reduce NOx also increases HC and CO, as well as lowering fuel economy. So the solution to controlling NOx - as well as HC and CO - is to keep the air/fuel ratio as close to 14.7:1 as possible. Outboard Hydrocarbon Emissions Reductions 8 1/3%  per Year Over 9 Model Years 120 100 80 60 40 20 0 96 97 98 99200001 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Page 3D-2 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 EMISSIONS Stratified vs Homogenized Charge DFI engines use a stratified charge inside the combustion chamber to aid in reducing emissions. All other models use a homogenized charge. The difference between the two is: Homogenized Charge A homogenized charge has the fuel/air particles mixed evenly throughout the cylinder. This mixing occurs inside the carburetor venturi, reed blocks and crankcase. Additional mixing occurs as the fuel is forced through the transfer system into the cylinder. The homogenized charge is easy to ignite when the air/fuel ratio is approximately 14.7:1. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3D-3 EMISSIONS Stratified Charge A stratified charge engine only pulls air through the transfer system. The fuel required for combustion is forced into the cylinder through an injector placed in the top of the cylinder (head). The injector sprays a fuel/air mixture in the form of a bubble into the cylinder. Surrounding this bubble is air supplied by the transfer system. As the bubble is ignited and burns, the surrounding air provides almost complete combustion before the exhaust port opens. A stratified charge is hard to ignite. The fuel/air bubble is not evenly mixed at 14.7:1 and is not easily ignited. Emissions Information Manufacturer’s Responsibility: Beginning with 1998 model year engines, manufacturers of all marine propulsion engines must determine the exhaust emission levels for each engine horsepower family and certify these engines with the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). A certification decal/emissions control information label, showing emission levels and engine specifications directly related to emissions, must be placed on each engine at the time of manufacture. Page 3D-4 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 EMISSIONS Dealer Responsibility: When performing service on all 1998 and later outboards that carry a certification, attention must be given to any adjustments that are made that affect emission levels. Adjustments must be kept within published factory specifications. Replacement or repair of any emission related component must be executed in a manner that maintains emission levels within the prescribed certification standards. Dealers are not to modify the engine in any manner that would alter the horsepower or allow emission levels to exceed their predetermined factory specifications. Exceptions include manufacturers prescribed changes, such as that for altitude adjustments. Also included would be factory authorized: • Installation of performance style gear housings by Mercury Marine. • Service replacement parts modified, changed or superceded by Mercury Marine. Owner Responsibility: The owner/operator is required to have engine maintenance performed to maintain emission levels within prescribed certification standards. The owner/operator is not to modify the engine in any manner that would alter the horsepower or allow emissions levels to exceed their predetermined factory specifications. Single engine exceptions may be allowed with permission from the EPA for racing and testing. EPA Emission Regulations: All new 1998 and later outboards manufactured by Mercury Marine are certified to the United States Environmental Protection Agency as conforming to the requirements of the regulations for the control of air pollution from new outboard motors. This certification is contingent on certain adjustments being set to factory standards. For this reason, the factory procedure for servicing the product must be strictly followed and, whenever practicable, returned to the original intent of the design. The responsibilities listed above are general and in no way a complete listing of the rules and regulations pertaining to the EPA laws on exhaust emissions for marine products. For more detailed information on this subject, you may contact the following locations: VIA U.S. POSTAL SERVICE: Office of Mobile Sources Engine Programs and Compliance Division Engine Compliance Programs Group (6403J) 401 M St. NW Washington, DC 20460 VIA EXPRESS or COURIER MAIL: Office of Mobile Sources Engine Programs and Compliance Division Engine Compliance Programs Group (6403J) 501 3rd St. NW Washington, DC 20001 EPA INTERNET WEB SITE: http:/www.epa.gov/omswww 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3D-5 EMISSIONS CERTIFICATION LABEL: The certification label must be placed on each engine at the time of manufacture and must be replaced in the same location if damaged or removed. Shown below is a typical certification label and is not representative of any one model. Label shown below is not to scale; (shown at twice the normal size). JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUNE JULY AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC Emission Control Information 1998 PART # 37–855211 27 This engine conforms to 1998 Model Year U.S. EPA regulations for marine SI engines. Idle Speed (in gear): 550 RPM Timing: Not Adjustable ECM Controlled Spark Plug: Champion PZFR5F-11 Gap: .040” Valve Clearance (Cold) mm Intake: N/A Exhaust: N/A Family: WM9XM03.0220 FEL: 100.00 GM/KW-HR 2508 cc 135 HP DFI a k Refer to Owners Manual for required maintenance b c h i j e g f d a-Spark Ignition (SI) b-Cubic Centimeter c-Model year of engine and production decal part number d-Idle Speed (In Gear) e-Timing specifications when adjustable f-Recommended spark plug for best engine performance g-Valve Clearance (Four Stroke engines only) h-Engine Horsepower rating i-Month of production (Boxing month will punched) j-FEL: Represents (Mercury Marine) statement of the maximum emissions out put for the engine family k-Family example W M9X M. 02.5 2 2 0 Model Year Regulation Application Unspecified W=1998 M=Marine 1=PWC X=1999 2=OB Manufacturer Displacement Technology type Mercury Marine Liter 1=Existing Cubic Inch 2=New Decal Location: Model Production Part No. Service Part No. Location on Engine 1998 Merc/Mar 2.5 L V6 DFI (135 – 150 H.P.) 37-855211 26 37-855577 26 Intake Plenum STBD Side or Flywheel Cover 1999 Merc/Mar 2.5 L V6 DFI (135 – 150 H.P.) 37-856984 13 37-856985 13 Intake Plenum STBD Side or Vapor Separator Page 3D-6 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 EMISSIONS Replacement of Certification Label IMPORTANT: By federal law, it is required that all 1998 and newer Mercury Marine outboards have a visible and legible emission certification label. If this label is missing or damaged, replacement labels can be obtained from Mercury Marine. Removal Remove all remaining pieces of the damaged or illegible label. Do not install new label over the old label. Use a suitable solvent to remove any traces of the old label adhesive from the display location. Date Code Identification Cut and remove a “V” notch through the month of engine manufacture before installing the new label. The month of manufacture can be found on the old label. If the label is missing or the date code illegible, contact Mercury Marine Technical Service for assistance. JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUNE JULY AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC Emission Control Information 1998 PART # 37–855211 27 This engine conforms to 1998 Model Year U.S. EPA regulations for marine SI engines. Idle Speed (in gear): 550 RPM Timing: Not Adjustable ECM Controlled Spark Plug: Champion PZFR5F-11 Gap: .040” Valve Clearance (Cold) mm Intake: N/A Exhaust: N/A Family: WM9XM03.0220 FEL: 100.00 GM/KW-HR 2508 cc 135 HP DFI Refer to Owners Manual for required maintenance a b a-“V” Notch b-Month of Manufacture Installation Install the label on a clean surface in the original factory location. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 3D-7 POWERHEAD POWERHEAD Section 4A Table of Contents Powerhead Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-1 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-1 Powerhead Repair Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-3 Cylinder Block and End Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-4 Exhaust Manifold and Exhaust Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-6 Cylinder Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-8 Crankshaft, Pistons and Connecting Rods . . . . . . 4A-10 Torque Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-11 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-13 Powerhead Removal from Driveshaft Housing . . 4A-13 Powerhead Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-17 Water Pressure Relief Valve Components . . . 4A-25 Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-25 Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-26 Cylinder Block and Crankcase Cover . . . . . . . 4A-26 Special Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-26 Cylinder Bores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-27 Pistons and Piston Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-28 Cylinder Heads and Exhaust Divider Plate . . . 4A-30 Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-30 Powerhead Specifications Crankshaft (and End Cap) Bearings . . . . . . . . 4A-31 Reed Block Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-32 End Bearing Bleed System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-33 Connecting Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-33 Thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-35 Powerhead Reassembly and Installation . . . . . . . 4A-36 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-36 Crankshaft Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-40 Piston and Connecting Rod Reassembly . . . . 4A-42 Piston and Piston Ring Combinations . . . . . . . 4A-43 Piston Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-44 Crankcase Cover Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-46 Assembly of Reed Blocks to Intake Manifold . 4A-48 Assembly of Exhaust Divider Plate to Block . . 4A-48 Reinstalling Engine Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-51 Throttle Lever and Shift Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-52 Throttle Lever and Shift Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-53 Powerhead Installation on Driveshaft Housing . . 4A-54 Break-ln Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-58 4 A CYLINDER BLOCK Type Displacement V-6 Cylinder, Two Cycle, Direct Injected 153 cu. in. (2508 cc) 60° Vee STROKE Length (All Models) 2.65 in. (67.3 mm) CYLINDER BORE Diameter (Std) Diameter 0.015 in. Oversize Taper/Out of Round/Wear Maximum Bore Type 3.501 in. (88.925 mm) 3.516 in. (89.306 mm) 0.003 in. (0.076 mm) Cast Iron PISTON Piston Type Diameter Standard Diameter 0.015 in. Oversize Aluminum 3.4925 in. ± .0005 in. (88.7095 mm ± 0.0127 mm) 3.5075 in. ± 0.0005 in. (89.0905 mm ± 0.0127 mm) CRANKSHAFT Maximum Runout 0.006 in. (0.152 mm) 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-1 POWERHEAD PISTON DIAMETER Dimension “A” at Right Angle (90°) to Piston Pin 0.700 17.78mm 3.4925 in. ± .0005 in. (88.7095 mm ± .0127 mm) Using a micrometer, measure dimension “A” at location shown. Dimension “A” should be 3.4925 in. ± .0005 for a STANDARD size piston (new) Dimension “A” will be 0.001 - 0.0015 less if coating is worn off piston (used) REEDS Reed Stand 0pen (Max.) 0.020 in. (0.50 mm) Special Tools 1. Lifting Eye 91-90455 2. Powerhead Stand 91-30591A1 3. Piston Ring Expander 91-24697 4. Lockring Removal Tool 91-52952A1 5. Piston Pin Tool 91-74607A1 6. Driver Head 91-55919 Page 4A-2 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWERHEAD 7. Universal Puller Plate 91-37241 8. Snap Ring Pliers 91-24283 9. Lockring Installation Tool 91-77109A1 10. Piston Ring Compressor for 2.5 Litre (153 cu. in.) 91-818773 11. Compression Tester 91-29287 Powerhead Repair Stand A powerhead repair stand may be purchased from: Bob Kerr’s Marine Tool Co. P.O. Box 1135 Winter Garden, FL 32787 Telephone: (305) 656-2089 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-3 POWERHEAD Cylinder Block and End Caps 9 12 14 Loctite PST Pipe Sealant (92-809822) Loctite “514” Master Gasket (92-12564-2) 2 Cycle Outboard Oil (92-13249A24) PORT OIL FITTING ORIENTATION TOP OF BLOCK 2 o’clock HEAD CRANK 33 95 Loctite “RCA/680” Retaining Compound BOTTOM OF BLOCK (92-809833) 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-825407A12) A = TO AIR HANDLER B = TO ON BOARD OIL TANK Page 4A-4 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWERHEAD Cylinder Block and End Caps REFREF. .. NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION TORQUE lb-in lb-ft Nm. 1 1 CYLINDER BLOCK 2 6 STUD–powerhead (1-3/4 IN.) 33 2 STUD–powerhead (5-1/2 IN.) 2 STUD–powerhead (6-3/4 IN.) 4 2 DOWEL PIN–locating 5 2 DOWEL PIN (BEARING RACE) 6 2 GASKET–sealing 7 1 PIPE PLUG (1/2-14) Drive Tight 8 1 CHECK VALVE 9 1 CHECK VALVE 10 1 TUBING (19 IN.) 11 10 STA STRAP 12 2 FITTING (STRAIGHT)(STARBOARD - TOP/BOTTOM) 13 1 FITTING (ELBOW) (STARBOARD - CENTER) 14 3 FITTING (ELBOW) (PORT) 1515 2 TUBING (16 IN.) (TOP/BOTTOM) 1 TUBING (20 IN.) (CENTER) 16 3 TUBING (24-1/2 IN.) 17 1 CONDUIT (7 IN.) 18 1 FITTING 19 1 TUBING (11-1/2 IN.) 20 1 CONNECTOR 21 6 STA-STRAP 22 8 SCREW (3/8-16 x 3-1/4) 37 50 23 6 SCREW (.312-18 x 1-1/4) 15 20 24 1 CAP 25 1 ADJUSTING SCREW (1/4-20 x 1-3/4) 26 1 JAM NUT 27 1 UPPER END CAP 28 1 O-RING 29 1 ROLLER BEARING 30 1 BEARING RACE 31 1 OIL SEAL 32 4 SCREW (5/16-18 x 1) 205 17 23 33 1 LOWER END CAP 34 1 O-RING (3-1/4 IN. I.D.) 35 2 OIL SEAL 36 4 SCREW (1/4-20 x 3/4) 80 9 37 4 LOCKWASHER 38 1 BRACKET 39 1 TPI LEVER 40 3 SCREW -Bracket to crankcase 70 8 41 6 BUSHING 42 3 GROMMET 43 1 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (INSIDE) 44 1 SPACER 45 1 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (OUTSIDE) 46 3 SCREW -TPS to bracket (#10-32 x 2-3/4 IN.) 15 1.7 47 1 THROTTLE LINK 48 1 PLUG-Serial Number 49 1 STA-STRAP-Oil Lines 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-5 POWERHEAD Exhaust Manifold and Exhaust Plate 1 2 3 31 4 5 8 9 10 1112 18 13 14 15 16 17 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 30 26 27 2829 37 38 39 33 34 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 18 10 32 35 36 10 10 6 7 D A B C 10 Permabond 105 Cyanacrylate Adhesive (Purchase Locally) 62 95 51 9 62 7 A = TO FUEL COOLER WATER IN B = TO FUEL COOLER WATER OUT FITTING C = TO LOWER PORT FUEL RAIL SIDE FITTING D = TO AIR COMPRESSOR LOWER WATER INLET FITTING 51 Loctite 222 (92-809818) 7 Loctite 271 (92-809820) 95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12) Loctite PST Pipe Sealant (92-809822)9 Page 4A-6 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWERHEAD Exhaust Manifold and Exhaust Plate REFREF. .. NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION TORQUE lb-in lb-ft Nm. 1 1 GASKET 2 1 DIVIDER PLATE 3 1 SEAL 4 17 SCREW (5/16-18 x 1-1/2 IN.) 160 13 18 5 2 SCREW (5/16-18 x 1 IN.) 160 13 18 6 1 STRAINER 7 1 HOSE (4-1/2 IN.) 8 1 ELBOW 9 1 HOSE (21-1/2 IN.) 10 5 STA-STRAP 11 1 COVER–relief valve 12 4 SCREW (5/16-18 x 1-1/4 IN.) 150 12.5 17 13 1 SCREW (10-16 x 3/4 IN.) 25 3 14 1 WASHER 15 1 DIAPHRAGM 16 1 WATER DEFLECTOR 17 1 PLATE 18 2 GASKET 19 1 SPRING 20 1 WASHER 21 1 POPPET 22 1 GROMMET 23 1 CARRIER 24 1 GASKET 25 1 EXHAUST PATE 26 2 DOWEL PIN 27 1 SEAL 28 1 BRACKET 29 8 SCREW (10-16 x 1/2 IN.) 80 9 30 1 FITTING (STRAIGHT)(BACK) 31 1 ELBOW (STARBOARD-TOP HOLE) 32 1 FITTING (STRAIGHT)(STARBOARD-BOTTOM HOLE) 33 1 GROMMET 34 1 GROMMET 35 1 HOSE (25 IN.) 36 1 HOSE 37 4 WASHER 38 6 NUT 23 31 39 1 BUSHING 40 1 SCREW (5/16-18 x 1-1/4 IN.) 45 61 41 1 SCREW (5/16-18 x 2-1/2 IN.) 45 61 42 3 SCREW (3/8-16 x 3-1/2 IN.) 23 31 43 1 FRONT BRACKET ASSEMBLY 44 4 SCREW (5/16-18 x 1/2 IN.) 17 23 45 4 WASHER 46 4 GROMMET 47 1 REAR BRACKET ASSEMBLY 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-7 POWERHEAD Cylinder Head Water Fitting Orientation 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 10 14 1 2 13 4 12 13 A 13 13 9 9 6 14 15° Back of Engine Looking Down at Top of Block 6 9 14 16 15 Dielectric Grease (92-823506--1) Loctite PST Pipe Sealant (92-809822) 2 Cycle Outboard Oil (92-13249A24) A = TO STRAIGHT FITTING ON BACK OF EXHAUST PLATE Page 4A-8 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWERHEAD Cylinder Head REFREF. .. NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION TORQUE lb-in lb-ft Nm. 11 1 CYLINDER HEAD (PORT) 1 CYLINDER HEAD (STARBOARD) 2 2 GASKET 3 24 BOLT (2 IN.) 30 lb-ft (40.7 N·m) then tighten additional 90° 4 4 DOWEL PIN 5 2 GASKET 6 2 COVER 7 2 THERMOSTAT (143 degrees) 8 4 SCREW (M6 x 25) 200 16.5 22.5 9 1 ELBOW (STARBOARD) 10 1 ELBOW (PORT) 11 1 HOSE (21-1/2 IN.) 12 1 HOSE (11-1/2 IN.) 13 5 STA-STRAP 14 1 TEMPERATURE SENSOR (STARBOARD) 15 1 RETAINER 16 1 SCREW (M8 x 12) 200 16.5 22.5 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-9 POWERHEAD Crankshaft, Pistons and Connecting Rods 1 2 3 8 4 5 6 7 12 13 14 15 16 12 9 10 11 8 14 95 95 1495 95 9514 14 2 Cycle Outboard Oil (92-13249A24) 95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-825407A12) 95 95 Page 4A-10 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWERHEAD Crankshaft, Pistons and Connecting Rods REFREF. .. NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION TORQUE lb-in lb-ft Nm. 1 1 CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY 2 1 BALL BEARING (LOWER) 3 1 RETAINING RING 4 1 CARRIER ASSEMBLY 5 1 SEAL 6 7 RING–sealing 7 2 ROLLER BEARING 8 2 RACE 99 3 PISTON (STARBOARD) 3 PISTON (PORT) 10 1 PISTON RING 11 12 LOCK RING 12 6 CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY 13 12 SCREW 1st Torque: 15 lb-in 2nd Torque: 30 lb-ft Turn Screw additional 90° after 2nd torque 14 12 WASHER 15 6 ROLLER BEARING ASSEMBLY 16 174 NEEDLE BEARING–piston end Torque Sequence CRANKCASE COVER BOLTS (AND TORQUE SEQUENCE) 1 3 5 6 78 a b 4 2 a-Add light oil to threads and bolt face: 8 Bolts (3/8 in. - 16 in.) 38 lb. ft. (51.5 N·m) b-Bolts (5/16 in. - 18) 180 lb. in. (20 N·m) 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-11 POWERHEAD EXHAUST DIVIDER PLATE BOLTS 200 lb. in. (22.5 N·m) Apply Loctite 271 to threads 1 2 3 4 56 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 1819 10 16 17 56167 CYLINDER HEAD BOLTS Add light oil to threads and bolt face: 30 lb. ft. (41 N·m) then turn an additional 90°. 9 5 1 4 8 12 56168 2 3 6 7 10 11 Page 4A-12 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWERHEAD AIR PLENUM/REED BLOCK ASSEMBLY PLATE BOLTS 100 lb. in. (11.3 N·m) 56160 12 3 4 56 7 8 910 11 12 General Information Powerhead “Disassembly” and “Reassembly” instructions are printed in a sequence that should be followed to assure best results when removing or replacing powerhead components. If complete disassembly is not necessary, start reassembly at point disassembly was stopped. (Refer to “Table of Contents,” preceding.) Usually, complete disassembly of powerhead will be required. If major powerhead repairs are to be performed, remove powerhead from drive shaft housing. Removal of powerhead is not required for 1) inspection of cylinder walls and pistons (refer to “Powerhead Removal and Disassembly,” following, and remove cylinder heads and exhaust cover), 2) minor repairs on components, such as ignition system, fuel injection, reed blocks and cylinder heads and checking operation of thermostats. Powerhead Removal from Driveshaft Housing 1. Disconnect battery cables from battery terminals. 2. Disconnect fuel tank hose from outboard. 3. Remove top cowling. 4. Remove two screws which secure remote control harness retainer and remove retainer. 52188 a b a-Screws b-Retainer 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-13 POWERHEAD Page 4A-14 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 5. Disconnect remote oil tank hose connector. 6. Disconnect remote control harness from powerhead harness connector and wires as shown. GRN/WHT BLU/WHT BRN/WHT TAN BLU/WHT GRN/WHT a a - Power Trim Connections 7. Remove sta-strap which secures tell-tale hose to fitting on lower cowl and remove hose from fitting. 56141 a a - Tell-tale Hose 8. Disconnect warning gauge harness. 1 2 3 45 6 a cb d a cb d e a - TAN/BLACK b - TAN/WHITE c - PINK/LT. BLUE to PINK/LT. BLUE d - ORANGE e - Sta-Straps POWERHEAD 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-15 9. Remove BLUE and GREEN trim harness leads from trim solenoids. a a - Trim Solenoids 10. Slide outboard shift lever into neutral position. 11. Remove throttle cable. 12. Remove locknut that secures shift cable latch assembly and remove latch, flat washer, nylon wear plate, spring and shift cable from control cable anchor bracket. 13. Disconnect input fuel line. c a b d a - Throttle Cable b - Shift Cable c - Hose Clamp d - Fuel Line 14. Remove 4 bolts securing bottom cowl halves and remove bottom cowling. 55970 52352 55932 a a a a - Bolt POWERHEAD Page 4A-16 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 15. Remove fuel cooler inlet and outlet water hoses from fittings on exhaust adaptor plate and poppet valve cover. Remove excess air hose (from port fuel rail) from fitting on exhaust adaptor plate. 16. Remove thermostat cover hose from exhaust adaptor plate. 56158 56159 d a b c a - Fuel Cooler Outlet Water Hose b - Fuel Cooler Inlet Water Hose c - Air Hose d - Thermostat Cover Hose 17. Remove 10 nuts and washers (five each side) from powerhead base. 18. Remove plastic cap from center of flywheel and install LIFTING EYE (91-90455) into flywheel at least five full turns. Using a hoist, lift powerhead assembly from driveshaft housing. 56162 51846 a a a a b a a - Nuts and Washers (5 Each Side) b - Lifting Eye POWERHEAD 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-17 REMOVING ENGINE COMPONENTS Remove the following engine components: Section 2 Starter Motor Starter Motor *Electronic Control Module *Ignition Coil *Starter Solenoid Alternator Flywheel Section 3 Direct Fuel Injection Fuel Pump On-Board Oil Tank Oil Pump Section 7 Shift Cable Latch Assembly Control Cable Anchor Bracket *All ignition and electrical components should remain attached to electrical plate. Plate with components can be removed as an assembly. Powerhead Disassembly 1. Place powerhead in repair stand or on a bench. 2. Remove thermostat covers, thermostats and gaskets. 3. Remove cylinder heads from engine block. 56165 e d 56163 f a b c a - Thermostat Cover b - Thermostat c - Gasket d - Cylinder Head e - Gasket f - Engine Block POWERHEAD Page 4A-18 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 4. Remove exhaust manifold cover and seal. 5. Referring to Section 3B, remove air plenum/reed block/adaptor plate assembly from cylinder block. d 56166 a c b a - Exhaust Manifold Cover b - Seal c - Gasket d - Reed Block/Adaptor Plate Assembly 6. Inspect reeds as outlined in “Cleaning and Inspection”. 56169 7. Remove bolts from end caps. POWERHEAD UPPER END CAP 51854 a a-Crankcase Attaching End Cap Bolts LOWER END CAP 51849 a a-Crankcase Attaching End Cap Bolts 1. Remove bolts which secure crankcase cover to cylinder block. 2. Pry crankcase cover off cylinder block using pry bars in locations shown. 51845 ab a a-Pry Points b-Crankcase Cover 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-19 POWERHEAD CRANKCASE COVER REMOVED 51848 1. Use Powerhead Stand (91-30591A1) for rotating crankshaft to desired position for removal of connecting rods. 2. Using an awl or electric pencil, scribe the cylinder identification number on each connecting rod as shown. Reassemble connecting rods in same cylinder. 51849 Ä 3. Use a 5/16 in. 12 point socket to remove connecting rod bolts, then remove rod cap, roller bearings and bearing cage from connecting rod. 51850 a a-Connecting Rod Bolts 4. Push piston out of cylinder block. 5. After removal, reassemble each piston and connecting rod assembly. Page 4A-20 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWERHEAD 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-21 CAUTION Each connecting rod and end cap are a matched machined set and must never be mismatched. 6. Inspect pistons as outlined in “Cleaning and Inspection,” following. 7. Use Piston Ring Expander (91-24697) to remove piston rings. Always install new piston rings. 56155 56153 8. Using an awl, scribe identification number of connecting rod on inside of piston (a). Reassemble piston on same connecting rod. 9. Using tool (91-52952A1), remove piston pin lockrings from both ends of piston pin. Never re-use piston pin lockrings. 51083 56154 b a a - Scribe Identification Number b - Lockring IMPORTANT: Warming the piston dome using a torch lamp will ease removal and installation of piston pin. POWERHEAD 10. Support piston and tap out piston pin using service tool (91-76159A1) as shown. 11. Remove piston pin needle bearings (29 per piston) and locating washers (2 per piston) as shown. IMPORTANT: We recommend that you use new needle bearings at reassembly for lasting repair. However, if needle bearings must be re-used, keep each set of bearings identified for reassembly on same connecting rod. 51853 b a c 51088 a-Piston Pin b-Piston Pin Tool (91-76159A1) c-Needle Bearing Locating Washers 12. Remove upper end cap and lower end cap from crankshaft. 13. Remove and discard O-ring seals from each end cap. 14. Remove oil seal(s) from end of each end cap by driving seal out with a punch and hammer. 15. Inspect roller bearing in upper end cap as outlined in “Cleaning and Inspection”. NOTE: If roller bearing is damaged, replace upper end cap and roller bearings as an assembly. 51848 ab a-Upper End Cap b-Lower End Cap c-O-Ring d-Seal 51853 c d Page 4A-22 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWERHEAD 16. Remove crankshaft and place in powerhead stand as shown. IMPORTANT: DO NOT remove crankshaft sealing rings from crankshaft, unless replacement of a sealing ring(s) is necessary. Usually, crankshaft sealing rings do not require replacement, unless broken. CAUTION Safety glasses should be worn when removing or installing crankshaft sealing rings. 17. Remove retaining ring as shown. 51850 a b a-Sealing Rings b-Retaining Ring 18. Remove bearing race halves and roller bearings from crankshaft. IMPORTANT: Keep same bearing races and roller bearings together. 51850 a a b a-Bearing Race Halves b-Roller Bearings 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-23 POWERHEAD Inspect crankshaft ball bearing as outlined in “Cleaning and Inspection,” following. IMPORTANT: DO NOT remove crankshaft ball bearing, unless replacement is required. 19. Remove lower ball bearing from crankshaft as follows: a. Remove retaining ring using a pair of snap ring pliers. a b c 51854 a-Crankshaft Ball Bearing b-Pliers c-Retaining Ring b. Press crankshaft out of lower ball bearing as shown. 51081 a b c d a-Press b-Powerhead Stand (91-30591A1) c-Crankshaft Ball Bearing d-Universal Puller Plate (91-37241) Page 4A-24 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWERHEAD Water Pressure Relief Valve Components 1. If necessary, remove water pressure relief valve components as shown. a b 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 3 50803 1-Cover 2-Bolt 3-Gasket 4-Relief Valve Plate 5-Diaphragm 6-Water Deflector 7-Washer 8-Screw 9-Spring 10 -Poppet Valve 11 -Grommet 12 -Carrier 13 -Washer Torque Specifications a 150 lb. in. (17 N·m) b 25 lb. in. (3 N·m) 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-25 POWERHEAD Cleaning and Inspection Cylinder Block and Crankcase Cover IMPORTANT: Crankcase cover and cylinder block are a matched, line-bored as- sembly and never should be mismatched by using a different crankcase cover or cylinder block. CAUTION If crankcase cover or cylinder block is to be submerged in a very strong cleaning solution, it will be necessary to remove the crankcase cover/cylinder block bleed system from crankcase cover/cylinder block to prevent damage to hoses and check valves. 1. Thoroughly clean cylinder block and crankcase cover. Be sure that all sealant and old gaskets are removed from matching surfaces. Be sure that carbon deposits are removed from exhaust ports. 2. Inspect cylinder block and crankcase cover for cracks or fractures. 3. Check gasket surfaces for nicks, deep grooves, cracks and distortion that could cause compression leakages. 4. Check all water and oil passages in cylinder block and crankcase cover to be sure that they are not obstructed and that plugs are in place and tight. Special Service Information Grooves in Cylinder Block Caused By Crankshaft Sealing Rings Grooves in cylinder block caused by crankshaft sealing rings are not a problem, except if installing a new crankshaft and the new sealing rings on crankshaft do not line up with existing grooves in cylinder block. If installing a new crankshaft, refer to crankshaft installation, Powerhead Reassembly section to determine if powerhead can be used. Page 4A-26 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWERHEAD Cylinder Bores 1. Inspect cylinder bores for scoring, scuffing or a transfer of aluminum from piston to cylinder wall. Scoring or scuffing, if NOT TOO SEVERE, can normally be removed by honing. If a transfer of aluminum has occurred, an acidic solution such as “TIDY BOWL CLEANER” should be applied to the areas of the cylinder bore where transfer of aluminum has occurred. After the acidic solution has removed the transferred aluminum, thoroughly flush the cylinder bore(s) to remove any remaining acid. Cylinder walls may now be honed to remove any glaze and to aid in the seating of new piston rings. HONING PROCEDURE a. When cylinders are to be honed, follow the hone manufacturer’s recommendations for use of the hone and cleaning and lubrication during honing. b. For best results, a continuous flow of honing oil should be pumped into the work area. If pumping oil is not practical, use an oil can. Apply oil generously and frequently on both stones and work area. CAUTION When honing cylinder block, remove hone frequently and check condition of cylinder walls. DO NOT hone any more than absolutely necessary, as hone can remove cylinder wall material rapidly. c. Start stroking at smallest diameter. Maintain firm stone pressure against cylinder wall to assure fast stock removal and accurate results. d. Localize stroking in the smallest diameter until drill speed is constant throughout length of bore. Expand stones, as necessary, to compensate for stock removal and stone wear. Stroke at a rate of 30 complete cycles per minute to produce best cross-hatch pattern. Use honing oil generously. e. Thoroughly clean cylinder bores with hot water and detergent. Scrub well with a stiff bristle brush and rinse thoroughly with hot water. A good cleaning is essential. If any of the abrasive material is allowed to remain in the cylinder bore, it will cause rapid wear of new piston rings and cylinder bore in addition to bearings. After cleaning, bores should be swabbed several times with engine oil and a clean cloth, then wiped with a clean, dry cloth. Cylinders should not be cleaned with kerosene or gasoline. Clean remainder of cylinder block to remove excess material spread during honing operation. 2. Hone all cylinder walls just enough to de-glaze walls. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-27 POWERHEAD 3. Measure cylinder bore diameter (with a snap gauge micrometer) of each cylinder, as shown below. Check for tapered, out-of-round (egg-shaped) and oversize bore. 51846 135/150 Models Models Cylinder Block Finish Hone Standard Piston Bore 3.501 in. (88.93mm) .015 in. (0.381mm) Oversize Piston Bore 3.516 in. (89.31mm) 4. If a cylinder bore is tapered, out-of-round or worn more than 0.003 in. (0.076mm) from standard “Cylinder Block Finish Hone” diameter (refer to chart, preceding), it will be necessary to re-bore that cylinder(s) to 0.015 in. (0.381mm) oversize or re-sleeve and install oversize piston(s) and piston rings during reassembly. NOTE: The weight of an oversize piston is approximately the same as a standard size piston; therefore, it is not necessary to re-bore all cylinders in a block just because one cylinder requires re-boring. 5. After honing and thoroughly cleaning cylinder bores, apply light oil to cylinder walls to prevent rusting. Pistons and Piston Rings IMPORTANT: If engine was submerged while engine was running, piston pin and/or connecting rod may be bent. If piston pin is bent, piston must be replaced. (Piston pins are not sold separately because of matched fit into piston.) If piston pin is bent, connecting rod must be checked for straightness (refer to “Connecting Rods,” following, for checking straightness). 1. Inspect pistons for scoring and excessive piston skirt wear. 2. Check tightness of piston ring locating pins. Locating pins must be tight. 3. Thoroughly clean pistons. Carefully remove carbon deposits from pistons, with a soft wire brush or carbon remove solution. Do not burr or round off machined edges. Inspect piston ring grooves for wear and carbon accumulation. If necessary, scrape carbon from piston ring grooves being careful not to scratch sides of grooves. Refer to procedure following for cleaning piston ring grooves. Page 4A-28 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWERHEAD CLEANING PISTON RING GROOVES Keystone (tapered) ring grooves CAUTION Care must be taken not to scratch the side surfaces of the ring groove. Scratching the side surface of the ring groove will damage the ring groove. 1. Use a bristle brush and carbon remover solution to remove carbon from side surfaces. 2. A tool can be made for cleaning the inner diameter of the tapered ring grooves. The tool can be made from a broken tapered piston ring with the side taper removed to enable the inside edge of the ring to reach the inner diameter of the groove. Carefully scrape carbon from inner diameter of ring grooves. Care must be taken not to damage the grooves by scratching the side surfaces of the grooves. Piston with two half keystone (half tapered) rings (135/150 Models) Enlarged View of Piston Ring Grooves 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-29 POWERHEAD MEASURING PISTON ROUNDNESS Piston has a barrel profile shape and is not a true diameter. Standard 135/150 Models - 153 cu. in. (2508 cc) 1. Using a micrometer, measure dimension “A” at location shown. Dimension “A” should be as indicated in chart following. Piston Dimension “A” Standard Piston 3.4925 in. ± 0.0005 in. 0.015 in. Oversize Piston 3.5075 in. ± 0.0005 in. 2. Using a micrometer, measure dimension “B” at location shown. Dimension “B” should be within 0.008 in. of dimension “A.” a b 0.700 in. (17.78mm) a-Dimension “A” at RIGHT Angle (90°) to Piston Pin b-Dimension “B” (in line with Piston Pin) Cylinder Heads and Exhaust Divider Plate 1. Inspect internal surface of cylinder heads for possible damage (as a result of piston or foreign material striking cylinder heads). IMPORTANT: Cylinder head warpage should not exceed 0.004 in. (0.1 mm) over the ENTIRE length of the cylinder head. If measured warpage, as determined on a surface block, exceeds 0.004 in. (0.1 mm) or a discontinuity of up to 0.004 in. (0.1 mm) exists in a narrow portion of the cylinder head’s surface length, then the cylinder head may be re-surfaced up to 0.010 in. (0.25 mm). 2. Replace cylinder head(s) as necessary. 3. Thoroughly clean gasket surfaces of exhaust divider plate. 4. Inspect exhaust divider plate for deep grooves, cracks or distortion that could cause leakage. Replace parts as necessary. Crankshaft 1. Inspect crankshaft to drive shaft splines for wear. (Replace crankshaft, if necessary.) 2. Check crankshaft for straightness. Maximum runout is 0.006 in. (0.152 mm). (Replace as necessary.) 3. Inspect crankshaft oil seal surfaces. Sealing surfaces must not be grooved, pitted or scratched. (Replace as necessary.) 4. Check all crankshaft bearing surfaces for rust, water marks, chatter marks, uneven wear and/or overheating. (Refer to “Connecting Rods”.) Page 4A-30 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWERHEAD 5. If necessary, clean crankshaft surfaces with crocus cloth. a b c c a-Crankshaft Journals b-Crocus Cloth c-Work Cloth “Back-and-Forth” 51847 WARNING DO NOT spin-dry crankshaft ball bearing with compressed air. 6. Thoroughly clean (with solvent) and dry crankshaft and crankshaft ball bearing. Recheck surfaces of crankshaft. Replace crankshaft, if surfaces cannot be properly “cleaned up.” If crankshaft will be re-used, lubricate surfaces of crankshaft with light oil to prevent rust. DO NOT lubricate crankshaft ball bearing at this time. Crankshaft (and End Cap) Bearings 1. After cleaning crankshaft, grasp outer race of crankshaft ball bearing (installed on lower end of crankshaft) and attempt to work race back-and-forth. There should not be excessive play. 2. Lubricate ball bearing with light oil. Rotate outer bearing race. Bearing should have smooth action and no rust stains. If ball bearing sounds or feels “rough” or has “catches,” remove and discard bearing. (Refer to “Powerhead Removal and Disassembly - Crankshaft Removal and Disassembly”.) Lower Ball Bearing 3. Thoroughly clean (with solvent) and dry crankshaft center main roller bearings. Lubricate bearings with 2-Cycle Outboard Oil. CAUTION DO NOT intermix halves of upper and lower crankshaft center main roller bearings. Replace bearings in pairs only. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-31 POWERHEAD 4. Thoroughly inspect center main roller bearings. Replace bearings if they are rusted, fractured, worn, galled or badly discolored. Center Main Roller Bearing 5. Clean (with solvent) and dry crankshaft roller bearing that is installed in upper end cap. Lubricate bearing with light oil. 6. Thoroughly inspect upper end cap roller bearing. If roller bearing is rusted, fractured, worn, galled, badly discolored or loose inside of end cap replace end cap and roller bearing as an assembly. Upper Roller Bearing Reed Block Assembly IMPORTANT: DO NOT remove reeds from reed blocks, unless replacement is necessary. DO NOT turn used reeds over for re-use. Replace reeds in sets only. 1. Thoroughly clean gasket surfaces of reed blocks and reed block housing. Check for deep grooves, cracks and distortion that could cause leakage. Replace parts as necessary. 2. Inspect reed block neoprene surface for wear, cuts or abrasions. Replace reed block(s) as required. 3. Check for chipped and broken reeds. 020 051 56161 Allowable reed opening is 0.020 in. (0.51 mm) or less. Replace reeds if either reed is standing open more than 0.020 in. (0.51 mm). Page 4A-32 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWERHEAD End Bearing Bleed System 1. Check rubber bleed hoses. Replace any hose that is cracked, cut or deteriorating. 2. Check operation of lower end cap check valve. If valve is working properly, air can be drawn thru check valve “one way” only. If air can pass thru a check valve both ways, valve is not working properly and must be replaced. Connecting Rods 1. Check connecting rods for alignment by placing rods on a surface plate. If light can be seen under any portion of machined surfaces, if rod has a slight wobble on plate, or if a 0.002 in. (0.051 mm) feeler gauge can be inserted between any machined surface and surface plate, rod is bent and must be discarded. 2. Overheating: Overheating is visible as a bluish bearing surface color that is caused by inadequate lubrication or excessive RPM. 3. Rust: Rust formation on bearing surfaces causes uneven pitting of surface(s). 51853a a-Pitting 4. Water Marks: When bearing surfaces are subjected to water contamination, a bearing surface “etching” occurs. This etching resembles the size of the bearing. 51853 5. Spalling: Spalling is the loss of bearing surface, and it resembles flaking or chipping. Spalling will be most evident on the thrust portion of the connecting rod in line with the “I” beam. General bearing surface deterioration could be caused by or accelerated by improper lubrication. 51853a a-Spalling 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-33 POWERHEAD 6. Chatter Marks: Chatter marks are the result of a combination of low speed - low load -cold water temperature operation, aggravated by inadequate lubrication and/or improper fuel. Under these conditions, the crankshaft journal is hammered by the connecting rod. As ignition occurs in the cylinder, the piston pushes the connecting rod with tremendous force, and this force is transferred to the connecting rod journal. Since there is little or no load on the crankshaft, it bounces away from the connecting rod. The crankshaft then remains immobile for a split second until the piston travel causes the connecting rod to catch up to the waiting crankshaft journal, then hammers it. The repetition of this action causes a rough bearing surface(s) which resembles a tiny washboard. In some instances, the connecting rod crank pin bore becomes highly polished. During operation, the engine will emit a “whirr” and/or “chirp” sound when it is accelerated rapidly from idle speed to approximately 1500 RPM, then quickly returned to idle. If the preceding conditions are found, replace both the crankshaft and connecting rod(s). 51853a a-Chatter Marks Between Arrows 7. Uneven Wear: Uneven wear could be caused by a bent connecting rod. 51853a a-Uneven Wear Between Arrows 8. If necessary, clean connecting rod bearing surfaces, as follows: a. Be sure that “etched” marks on connecting rod (crankshaft end) are perfectly aligned with “etched” marks on connecting rod cap. Tighten connecting rod cap attaching bolts securely. CAUTION Crocus cloth MUST BE USED to clean bearing surface at crankshaft end of connecting rod. DO NOT use any other type of abrasive cloth. b. Clean CRANKSHAFT END of connecting rod by using CROCUS CLOTH placed in a slotted 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) diameter shaft, as shown. Chuck shaft in a drill press and operation press at high speed while keeping connecting rod at a 90° angle to slotted shaft. Page 4A-34 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWERHEAD IMPORTANT: Clean connecting rod just enough to clean up bearing surfaces. DO NOT continue to clean after marks are removed from bearing surfaces. 51083 c. Clean PISTON PIN END of connecting rod, using same method as in Step “b”, preceding, but using 320 grit carborundum cloth instead of crocus cloth. d. Thoroughly wash connecting rods to remove abrasive grit. Recheck bearing surfaces of connecting rods. Replace any connecting rod(s) that cannot be properly “cleaned up.” Lubricate bearing surfaces of connecting rods (which will be re-used) with light oil to prevent rust. Thermostats 1. Inspect thermostat covers and cylinder head covers (thermostat opening) for cracks and corrosion damage that could cause leakage. Replace parts as necessary. 2. Remove and discard gasket from each thermostat. 3. Wash thermostats with clean water. 4. Using a thermostat tester, similar to the one shown, test each thermostat as follows: a. Open thermostat valve, then insert a thread between valve and thermostat body. Allow valve to close against thread. b. Suspend thermostat (from thread) and thermometer inside tester so that neither touches the container. Bottom of thermometer must be even with bottom of thermostat to obtain correct temperature of thermostat opening. c. Fill thermostat tester with water to cover thermostat. d. Plug tester into electrical outlet. e. Observe temperature at which thermostat begins to open. (Thermostat will drop off thread, that was installed in Step “a”, when it starts to open.) Thermostat must begin to open when temperature reaches 140°-145° F (60°-63° C). f. Continue to heat water until thermostat is completely open. g. Unplug thermostat tester. h. Replace thermostat, if it fails to open at the specified temperature, or if it does not fully open. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-35 POWERHEAD NOTE: BE SURE that water in thermostat tester is allowed to cool sufficiently [below 130° F (56° C)] before testing the other thermostat. 51087 Powerhead Reassembly and Installation General Before proceeding with powerhead reassembly, be sure that all parts to be re-used have been carefully cleaned and thoroughly inspected, as outlined in “Cleaning and Inspection,” preceding. Parts, which have not been properly cleaned (or which are questionable), can severely damage an otherwise perfectly good powerhead within the first few minutes of operation. All new powerhead gaskets MUST BE installed during reassembly. During reassembly, lubricate parts with Quicksilver 2-Cycle Outboard Lubricant whenever “light oil” is specified. Quicksilver part numbers of lubricants, sealers and locking compounds and tools are listed in “Powerhead General Information,” preceding. A torque wrench is essential for correct reassembly of powerhead. DO NOT attempt to reassemble powerhead without using a torque wrench. Attaching bolts for covers, housings and cylinder heads MUST BE torqued by tightening bolts in 3 progressive steps (following specified torque sequence) until specified torque is reached (see “Example,” following). EXAMPLE: If cylinder head attaching bolts require a torque of 30 Ib. ft. (41 N·m), a) tighten all bolts to 10 Ib. ft. (13.5 N·m), following specified torque sequence, b) tighten all bolts to 20 Ib. ft. (27 N·m), following torque sequence, then finally c) tighten all bolts to 30 Ib. ft. (41 N·m), following torque sequence. 1. If removed, press lower crankshaft ball bearing onto crankshaft as shown. Be sure bearing is pressed firmly against counterweight. Page 4A-36 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWERHEAD 2. Reinstall retaining ring using a suitable pair of Snap Ring Pliers. a b c d a-Crankshaft b-Crankshaft Ball Bearing c-Suitable Mandrel d-Press e-Retaining Ring 51852 51854 e 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-37 POWERHEAD 3. If removed, spread new crankshaft sealing rings just enough to slide over crankshaft journal. 4. Use Piston Ring Expander (91-24697) and install crankshaft sealing rings into groove. 51854 a a-Crankshaft Sealing Rings 5. Lubricate center main crankshaft roller bearings and races with light oil. a b 14 51854 14 2 Cycle Outboard Oil (92-826666A24) a-Install so LARGER of the 3 holes is toward DRIVE SHAFT end of crankshaft b-Verify retaining ring bridges the separating lines of the bearing race Page 4A-38 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWERHEAD 6. Place center main crankshaft roller bearings on upper and lower main bearing journals as shown. 7. Install center main bearing races as shown. 8. Secure center main bearing races together with retaining rings. Make sure retaining ring bridges the separating lines of the bearing race. FLYWHEEL END a a a-Center Main Bearing Races 9. Install oil seals into lower end cap as follows: a. Apply a thin bead of Loctite 271 to outer diameter on 2 lower end cap oil seals (a). b. Using driver head (91-55919) press one oil seal (lip facing down) into lower end cap until firmly seated. Remove any excess Loctite. c. Press second oil seal (lip facing down) until firmly seated on first oil seal. Remove any excess Loctite. d. Lubricate oil seal lips with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-825407A12). e. Lubricate O-ring seal surface on end cap with 2 cycle oil. Install O-ring over lower end cap. 51850 DRIVE SHAFT END 51849 b a 7 Loctite 271 (92-809820) 7 14 2 Cycle Outboard Oil (92-826666A24) 14 95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12) 95 a-Oil Seal b-O-ring 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-39 POWERHEAD 10. Install oil seal into upper end cap as follows: a. Apply a thin bead of Loctite 271 to outer diameter of upper end cap oil seal. b. Use a suitable mandrel, press oil seal into upper end cap (lip facing down) until bottomed out on lip of end cap. Remove any excess Loctite. c. Lubricate oil seal lip with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-825407A12). d. Lubricate O-ring seal surface on end cap with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-825407A12). Install O-ring on end cap. 51849c a b 7 95 95 7 95 Loctite 271 (92-809820) 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12) a-Oil Seal b-Lip of End Cap c-O-ring Crankshaft Installation SPECIAL INFORMATION Installing A New Crankshaft Assembly Into Cylinder Block Check the crankshaft sealing ring mating surfaces in the cylinder block and crankcase cover for wear grooves that were caused by the crankshaft sealing rings from the previous crankshaft. If wear grooves are present, the sealing rings on the new crankshaft will have to fit into the grooves without binding the crankshaft. Before installing crankshaft, remove any burrs that may exist on groove edges. Lubricate sealing rings with light oil and install new crankshaft as instructed. Install upper and lower end caps and then inspect fit between sealing rings and grooves. Temporarily install crankcase cover and rotate crankshaft several times to check if sealing rings are binding against crankshaft. (You will feel a drag on the crankshaft.) If sealing rings are binding, recheck grooves for burrs. If this does not correct the problem, it is recommended that the cylinder block be replaced. Page 4A-40 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWERHEAD Install crankshaft as follows: 1. Lubricate crankshaft sealing rings with light oil. 2. Check cylinder block to be sure that dowel pins are in place. 51848 a a-Dowel Pins 3. Position all crankshaft seal ring gaps straight up. 4. Align hole in each center main bearing race with dowel pin. 5. Gently push crankshaft down into position making sure that the dowel pins are lined up with the holes in center main bearings and crankshaft seal rings are in place. 6. Lubricate crankshaft ends (oil seal areas) with light oil, then install upper and lower end caps (“a” and “b”). Secure end caps to cylinder block with attaching bolts. DO NOT tighten end cap bolts at this time. 51848 51848 b c a 14 14 14 2 Cycle Outboard Oil (92-826666A24) a-Dowel Pin b-Upper End Cap c-Lower End Cap 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-41 POWERHEAD Piston and Connecting Rod Reassembly 1. Place needle bearings on a clean piece of paper and lubricate with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant. NOTE: There are 29 needle bearings per piston. 2. Place sleeve which is part of piston pin tool (91-74607A1) into connecting rod and install needle bearings around sleeve as shown. 3. Place locating washers on connecting rod. IMPORTANT: Position connecting rod part number facing towards flywheel. Carefully position piston over end of rod. Make sure locating washers remain in place. 51851 b 51851 b a a-Sleeve (Part of Tool Assy. 91-74607A1) b-Locating Washers 4. Insert piston pin tool (91-74607A1) and push sleeve out of piston. Keep piston pin tool in piston. 5. Use a mallet and tap piston pin into piston and push piston pin tool out. 51086 51080 c d a b a-Piston Pin Tool (91-74607A1) b-Sleeve c-Piston Pin d-Piston Pin Tool Page 4A-42 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWERHEAD 6. Install new piston pin lockrings (one each end of piston pin) with Lockring Installation Tool (91-77109A1). 7. Make sure lockrings are properly seated in piston grooves. 51086 51086 a a b a-Lockring Installation Tool (91-77109A1) b-Lockring Piston and Piston Ring Combinations 153 CU. IN. (2508 cc) MODELS All 153 cu. in. (2508 cc) models have two half keystone (half tapered) rings. Pistons with two half keystone (half tapered) rings 0.056 in. (1.4 mm) 0.056 in. (1.4 mm) a b a-Half Keystone (half tapered) Piston Ring b-Enlarged View of Piston Ring Grooves 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-43 POWERHEAD Piston Installation 1. Before installing new piston rings, check gap between ring ends by placing each ring in its respective cylinder, then pushing ring about 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) into cylinder using piston to assure proper position. 2. Check end gap of each new piston ring with a feeler gauge. End gap must be within 0.010 in. to 0.018 in. (0.25 mm to 0.45 mm). If end gap is greater, check other piston rings in cylinder bore, until rings (within tolerance) are found. IMPORTANT: Piston ring side with dot or letter must be facing up. 51852 b a c d e f a-Piston Ring b-Dots (Faces Up) c-Feeler Gauge d-Ring End Gap e-Dot or Letter f-Piston Ring 3. Use Piston Ring Expander (91-24697) and install piston rings (dot side up) on each piston. Spread rings just enough to slip over piston. 4. Check piston rings to be sure that they fit freely in ring groove. 5. Lubricate piston, rings and cylinder wall with 2-Cycle Outboard Oil. 56155 a b a-Piston Ring Expander b-Dot Side “Up” on Piston Ring 6. Rotate each piston ring so end of ring is aligned with locating pin as shown. 7. Install Piston Ring Compressor. Page 4A-44 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWERHEAD 8. Remove screws and connecting rod cap from piston rod assembly being installed. IMPORTANT: Piston must be correctly installed and positioned as shown. Pistons marked with the word “UP” and with the letter “P” or “S” on top of piston. Pistons with the letter “P” must be installed in the port side of engine and the word “UP” facing toward top of engine. Pistons with the letter “S” must be installed in the star- board side of engine and the word “UP” toward top of engine. 9. Coat cylinder bore with 2-cycle oil. Match piston assembly with cylinder it was removed from, and position piston as described below. Push piston into cylinder. 56156 CYL 2 CYL 4 CYL 6 CYL 1 CYL 3 CYL 5 UP P UP P UP P UP S UP S UP S 14 14 2 Cycle Outboard Oil (92-826666A24) 10. Apply Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon to bearing surface of connecting rod and install bear- ing assembly, as shown. 11. Place connecting rod cap on connecting rod. Apply light oil to threads and face of connecting rod bolts. Thread connecting rod bolts finger-tight while checking for correct alignment of the rod cap as shown. IMPORTANT: Connecting rod and connecting rod caps are matched halves. Do not torque screws before completing the following procedure. • Run a pencil lightly over ground area. • If pencil stops at fracture point, loosen bolts, retighten, and check again. NOTE: If you still feel the fracture point, discard the rod. 12. Tighten connecting rod bolts (using a 5/16 in. - 12 point socket). First torque to 15 lb. in. (1.7 N·m) then 30 lb. ft. (41 N·m). Turn each bolt an additional 90° after 2nd torque is attained. Recheck alignment between rod cap and rod as shown. 51850 a a 95 95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12) a-Connecting Rod Screws 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-45 POWERHEAD 13. Rotate crankshaft several times (using powerhead stand) to assure free operation (no binds and catching). Connecting Rod Cap Alignment Check each connecting rod cap for correct alignment. If not aligned, a ridge can be seen or felt at the separating line as shown below. Correct any misalignment. End View End View Side View End View Incorrect-Incorrect-Cap Side View Incorrect-Cap Correct Not Aligned on Backwards Correct ÄÄÄÄon Backwards ÄÄÄÄ14. Verify that no piston rings were broken during installation by pressing in on each piston ring thru exhaust port using a screwdriver. If no spring tension exists (ring fails to re- turn to position), it’s likely ring is broken and must be replaced. 51852 a a-Screwdriver Crankcase Cover Installation 1. Thoroughly remove all oil from mating surfaces of crankcase cover and cylinder block with Loctite 7649 Primer (92-809824). 2. Install gasket strips into grooves in crankcase cover. Trim end of each gasket strip flush with edge of cover as shown. 51852 a b a-Gasket Strips b-Edge of Cover Page 4A-46 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWERHEAD 3. Apply a thin, even coat of Loctite Master Gasket #203 on mating surfaces of crankcase cover and cylinder block. 4. Place crankcase cover in position on cylinder block. Turn the 8 center main bolts in a LITTLE at a time, (following torque sequence) compressing crankshaft seal rings until crankshaft cover has been drawn down to cylinder block. Tighten eight bolts (a) evenly in three progressive steps (following torque sequence). 5. Install remaining crankcase cover flange bolts. 6. Tighten end cap bolts to specified torque. 8 7 4 2 65 3 1 51846 b c d e 12 a 12 Loctite Master Gasket (92-12564-2) a-Loctite Master Gasket (92-12564-2) b-Upper End Cap Bolts – Torque to 150 lb. in. (17 N·m) c-Lower End Cap Bolts – Torque to 80 lb. in. (9 N·m) d-Add Light Oil to Threads and Bolt Face – 8 Bolts (3/8 in.-18) Torque to 38 lb. ft. (51.5 N·m) e-Bolts (5/16 in.-18) Torque to 180 lb. in. (20 N·m) 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-47 POWERHEAD Page 4A-48 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Assembly of Reed Blocks to Intake Manifold aa a - Torque to 105 lb. in. (12 N·m) Assembly of Exhaust Divider Plate to Block 1. Place exhaust divider seal into slot in block. 2. Install exhaust divider plate with gasket. 3. Clean bolt threads with Loctite 7649 Primer (92-809824). 4. Apply Loctite 271 to bolt threads and torque bolts to 16.5 Ib. ft. (22 Nm). 5. Torque exhaust divider plate bolts in following sequence. Torque bolts to 16.5 lb. ft. (22 N·m). Add Loctite 271 to threads. 56167 1 2 3 4 6 5 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 18 10 50805 a b c d a - Divider Seal b - Exhaust Divider Plate c - Gasket d - Attaching Bolt POWERHEAD 6. If removed, install water pressure relief valve components as shown. Torque bolts to specifications. 2 1 3 8 5 4 9 10 11 12 7 6 3 13 50803 1-Cover 2-Bolt - 150 lb. in. (17 N·m) 3-Gasket 4-Relief Valve Plate 5-Diaphragm 6-Water Deflector 7-Washer 8-Screw - 25 lb. in. (3 N·m) 9-Spring 10 -Poppet Valve 11 -Grommet 12 -Carrier 13 -Washer 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-49 POWERHEAD Page 4A-50 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 CYLINDER HEAD INSTALLATION 1. Install each cylinder head to engine block with thermostat pocket “UP”. Apply light oil to cylinder head bolt threads and torque bolts to 30 Ib. ft. (41 N·m) then turn an additional 90°. 2. Install thermostat assembly into each cylinder head. 3. Install overheat temperature sensor into STARBOARD cylinder head below #1 spark plug. 56168 2 1 3 4 6 5 7 8 10 9 11 12 a b b b b c c d e f g h i j k l a - Elbow (Starboard) b - Sta-strap c - Hose d - Elbow (Port) e - Bolt [Torque to 30 lb. ft. (41 N·m) and then turn 90°] f - Bolt [Torque to 17 lb. ft. (23.0 N·m)] g - Cover h - Gasket i - Thermostat (143°) j - Temperature Sensor (Starboard) k - Bolt [Torque to 17 lb. ft. (23.0 N·m)] l - Retainer NOTE: The temperature sender provides continuous temperature information to the ECU while the engine is running. Should temperature reach approximately 221° F (104.5° C), the ECU will activate a warning horn and warning light. POWERHEAD 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-51 4. Thermostat and temperature sensor installed. 56163 56164 a b a - Thermostat (143° F 61.7° C) b - Overheat Temperature Sensor NOTE: When installing thermostat hoses, secure starboard to port thermostat hose (a) with sta-straps (b) to prevent hose from being cut by alternator/air compressor belt. a b Reinstalling Engine Components Reinstall the following engine components: Section 2 Starter Motor Electronic Control Module Ignition Coil Starter Solenoid Alternator Flywheel Section 3 Direct Fuel Injection Fuel Pump On-Board Oil Tank Oil Pump Section 7 Shift Cable Latch Assembly Control Cable Anchor Bracket POWERHEAD Page 4A-52 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Throttle Lever and Shift Shaft 16 17 14 18 19 2 1 3 6 7 8 9 11 10 12 13 15 36 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 39 38 40 41 43 44 42 35 37 15 21 22 20 95 95 95 4 5 95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-825407A12) A A – Tighten and back off 1/2 turn POWERHEAD Throttle Lever and Shift Shaft REFREF. .. NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION TORQUE lb-in lb-ft Nm. 1 1 THROTTLE CONTROL LEVER 2 1 SCREW (.375-16 x 1-3/4 IN.) 240 20 27 3 1 BUSHING 4 1 WASHER 5 1 WASHER 6 1 SCREW (2-1/8 IN.) 7 1 NUT (1/4-20) 8 1 CAP 9 1 INSERT 10 1 WASHER 11 1 NUT 50 5.5 12 1 CAM 13 1 BUSHING 14 1 SCREW (M6 x 40) 45 5 15 2 SWIVEL BUSHING 16 1 THREADED BALL Drive Tight 17 1 LINK 18 1 ROLLER 19 1 THROTTLE ROLLER 20 1 SCREW (M5 x 16) Drive Tight 21 1 WASHER 22 1 STAR WASHER 23 1 ANCHOR BRACKET 24 1 LATCH 25 2 SCREW-Drive 26 1 CAP 27 1 WEAR PLATE 28 1 LATCH 29 1 WASHER 30 1 NUT 31 3 SCREW (.312-18 x 7/8) 160 18 32 1 GUIDE BLOCK 33 1 SPRING 34 1 LINK ROD ASSEMBLY 35 1 SHIFT SHAFT ASSEMBLY 36 1 ROLL PIN 37 1 SHIFT SHAFT LEVER–UPPER 38 1 BUSHING 39 1 WAVE WASHER 40 1 WASHER 41 1 NUT 42 1 IDLE STABILIZING SHIFT KIT 43 2 SCREW (6-32) 15 1.7 44 2 WASHER 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-53 POWERHEAD Page 4A-54 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Powerhead Installation on Driveshaft Housing 1. Install Lifting Eye (91-90455) into flywheel. WARNING BE SURE that Lifting Eye is threaded into flywheel as far as possible BEFORE lifting powerhead. 2. Using a hoist, lift powerhead high enough to allow removal of powerhead from repair stand. Remove powerhead from repair stand, being careful not to damage drive shaft housing gasket surface of powerhead. 3. Place a new gasket around powerhead studs and into position on base of powerhead. IMPORTANT: DO NOT apply lubricant to top of driveshaft as this will prevent driveshaft from fully engaging into crankshaft. 4. Apply a small amount of 2-4-Cw/Teflon Marine Lubricant (92-90018A12) onto driveshaft splines. 5. Use hoist to lower powerhead onto driveshaft housing. It may be necessary to turn flywheel (aligning crankshaft splines with driveshaft splines) so that powerhead will be fully installed. 6. Install 10 flat washers and10 locknuts which secure powerhead to exhaust extension plate/driveshaft housing. Torque locknuts in 3 progressive steps until secured. 7. Disconnect hoist from Lifting Eye and remove Lifting Eye from flywheel. 8. Reinstall plastic cap into center of flywheel cover. 51846 b b 56162 a a - Lifting Eye (91-90455) b - Powerhead Attaching Locknuts and Flat Washers – Torque Nuts to 20 lb. ft. (27 N·m) 9. Install fuel cooler inlet and outlet water hoses to fittings on exhaust adaptor plate and poppet valve cover. Install air hose from port fuel rail to fitting on exhaust adaptor plate. Secure all hoses with sta-straps. POWERHEAD 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-55 10. Install thermostat cover hose to exhaust adaptor plate. 56158 d 56159 a b c a - Fuel Cooler Outlet Water Hose b - Fuel Cooler Inlet Water Hose c - Air Hose d - Thermostat Cover Hose 11. Install 4 bolts securing bottom cowl halves and install bottom cowling. 55970 52352 55932 a a a a - Bolt POWERHEAD Page 4A-56 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 12. Reconnect input fuel line. 13. Reconnect BLUE and GREEN trim harness leads to trim solenoids. ac a a b a - Hose Clamp b - Fuel Line c - Trim Solenoids 14. Reconnect remote control harness to powerhead harness connector and wires as shown. GRN/WHT BLU/WHT BRN/WHT TAN BLU/WHT GRN/WHT a a a - Power Trim Connections POWERHEAD 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4A-57 15. Reconnect warning gauge harness. 1 2 3 4 5 6 a c b d a c b d f e a - TAN/BLACK b - TAN/WHITE c - PINK/LT. BLUE to PINK/LT. BLUE d - ORANGE e - Sta-Straps f - Connect PURPLE to 12 Volt Source or Adjacent Gauge IMPORTANT: Sufficient slack must exist in engine wiring harness, battery cables, fuel hose, and oil hoses routed between clamp and engine attachment point, to relieve stress and prevent hoses from being kinked or pinched. 1. Place the clamp over the wiring, hoses, and control cables as shown. ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÉÇÉ ÉÉ ÇÇ ÇÇ a b c d e g f a - Battery Cables b - Remote Wiring Harness c - Warning Gauge Wiring Harness d - Control Cables e - Oil Hose with Blue Stripe f - Fuel Hose g - Oil Hose POWERHEAD 2. Fasten clamp together with two screws. a 3. Slide outboard shift lever into neutral position. 4. Install shift cable and secure with spring, nylon wear plate, flat washer, latch and lock nut. Install throttle cable and secure with latch. a b a-Shift Cable b-Throttle Cable Refer to Section 2 of this Service Manual “Timing/ Synchronizing/Adjusting” for engine set-up procedures. Break-ln Procedure CAUTION Severe damage to the engine can result by not complying with the Engine Breakin Procedure. FUEL REQUIREMENTS Do not use pre-mixed gas and oil in this engine. Use straight gasoline during engine break-in and after engine break-in. The ECM is programmed to signal the oil pump to provide additional oil (50:1 ratio) during the first 120 minutes of operation. The ECM will monitor this period through its own internal clock. At the end of this period, the ECM will signal the oil pump to go to a standard ratio of 300 – 400:1 @ idle and 60:1 @ W.O.T. INITIATING ENGINE BREAK-IN SEQUENCE Refer to Section 3C for proper procedures. ENGINE BREAK-IN PROCEDURE (ALL MODELS) Vary the throttle setting during the first hour of operation. Avoid remaining at a constant speed for more than two minutes and avoid sustained wide open throttle. Page 4A-58 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 COOLING POWERHEAD Section 4B - Cooling Table of Contents Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-1 Water Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-1 Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-1 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-2 Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-3 2.5 Liter Optimax/DFI Water Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-3 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-3 1998/1999 Water Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-5 1999 1/2 Water Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-6 Thermostat Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-7 Water Pressure Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-8 Water Pump Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-9 Problem Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-10 Specifications Water Pressure Idle 1.0 – 3.0 PSI (6.8 – 20.5 kPa) Poppet Valve Opening 4 – 9 PSI (27.4 – 61.6 kPa) W.O.T. 12.0 PSI (82.1 kPa) Minimum 4 BTemperature Sensor(s) Between Black and each TAN/BLK wire. No Continuity Between each lead and ground No Continuity Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . 120°F (48.9°C) Temperature Sensor Location Starboard Cylinder Head Horn Activation Speed Reduction (3000 RPM) 221°F (105°C) Compressor Horn Activation 221°F (105°C) 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4B-1 COOLING Special Tools 1. Volt/Ohm Meter 91-99750A1 2. Water Pressure Gauge 91-79250A2 56725 Page 4B-2 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 COOLING 0 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180 195 210 225 240 255 270 Temperature (F) Temperature Sensor 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 Resistance (k) Temperature Sensor Two temperature sensors are used to provide cylinder head temperature information to the ECM. A sensor is mounted in starboard cylinder head and one in the air compressor cylinder head. The ECM uses this information to increase injector pulse width for cold starts and to retard timing in the event of an over-heat condition. An ohms test of the temperature sensor would be as follows: Insert digital or analog ohmmeter test leads into both TAN/BLACK sensor leads. With engine at temperature (F) indicated, ohm readings should be as indicated ±10%. NOTE: The air compressor temperature sensor and cylinder head temperature sensors are the same part number. The ECM has been programmed to activate a warning circuit at different temperatures depending upon sensor location. NOTE: The Digital Diagnostic Terminal (DDT) can be used to monitor temperature readings from all three temperature sensors. 2.5 Liter Optimax/DFI Water Flow Description Cooling water enters the cooling system through the lower unit water inlets. The pump assembly forces water through the water tube and exhaust adapter plate passages filling the power head central water chamber (located behind the exhaust cavity). Water enters the exhaust cover cavity through 2 holes near the top of the exhaust cover. Water also exits the top of the exhaust plate through a strainer screen to supply water to the air compressor. Water exits the exhaust cover cavity through 4 slots (2 each side) filling the water passages around the cylinders. Water flows around each bank of cylinders to the top of the cylinder block. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4B-3 COOLING Page 4B-4 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Water flow exiting the cylinder block is controlled by the thermostats (1 in each cylinder head) and the poppet valve (located at the bottom starboard side of powerhead). At low RPM (below 1500 RPM), the thermostats control water flow depending upon engine temperature. When the thermostats are open, water passes through the cylinder heads and exits to the drive shaft housing. At higher RPM (above 1500 RPM) the poppet valve will control the water flow. Water that passes through the poppet valve enters water passages in the adaptor plates. Water passes through the adaptor plates into the driveshaft housing. Water dumped into the drive shaft housing builds up a wall of water around the exhaust tube. This performs 2 functions: • Helps silence the exhaust • Prevents air from being drawn into the pump Water exits the engine in 3 locations: • Excess water from the wall of water exits around anodes on the gear housing. • Water that passes through the air compressor exits out the tell tail. • Water exits through two 1/8 in. (3.175 mm) holes in the lower adaptor plate into the exhaust. To allow complete passage filling and to prevent steam pockets, all cooling passages are interconnected. Small passages are incorporated to allow the cooling system to drain. NOTE: When installing thermostat hoses, secure starboard to port thermostat hose (a) with sta-straps (b) to prevent hose from being cut by alternator/air compressor belt. a b Cylinder Block and Adaptor Plate Drive Shaft Housing Lower Unit and Water Pump A BOTTOM VIEW B B A 57339 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 - Air Compressor 2 - Cylinder Head Cover – Removed from head for illustration, normally part of head casting 3 - Thermostats (2) 143° F (61.6° C) – If stuck closed, engine will overheat at idle. 4 - Strainer Screen for air compressor water supply – If restricted, compressor will overheat and tell-tale will be weak. 5 - Exhaust Divider Plate – Separated for illustration 6 - Poppet Valve – Controls water flow at high RPM. Note: If poppet valve is stuck open at low RPM, the engine will not reach proper operating temperature (run cold) and will run rough at idle. 7 - Fuel Cooler – If internal leak occurs, fuel will be forced into cooling system. 8 - Water Outlet from Air Compressor – Connects to tell-tale outlet on bottom cowl. 9 - Water Dump Holes Exhaust Cooling (2 each) 1/8 in. (3.175 mm) – If holes are plugged, tuner pipe will melt and bearing carrier prop shaft seals will be damaged. 10- Water Tube 11- Wall of Water – If water level height is insufficient, water pump may draw in air resulting in an overheated engine. 12- Check Valve for powerhead flush. 13- Excess water from wall of water around exhaust bucket exits around anodes. 12 13 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4B-5 1998/1999 Water Flow Diagram BOTTOM VIEW Drive Shaft Housing Lower Unit and Water Pump 57339 9 10 11 1 - Air Compressor 2 - Cylinder Head Cover – Removed from head for illustration, normally part of head casting 3 - Thermostats (2) 143° F (61.6° C) – If stuck closed, engine will overheat at idle. 4 - Strainer Screen for air compressor water supply – If restricted, compressor will overheat and tell-tale will be weak. 5 - Exhaust Divider Plate – Separated for illustration 6 - Poppet Valve – Controls water flow at high RPM. Note: If poppet valve is stuck open at low RPM, the engine will not reach proper operating temperature (run cold) and will run rough at idle. 7 - Fuel Cooler – If internal leak occurs, fuel will be forced into cooling system. 8 - Water Outlet from Air Compressor – Connects to fuel cooler and then to tell-tale outlet on bottom cowl. 9 - Water Dump Holes Exhaust Cooling (2 each) 1/8 in. (3.175 mm) – If holes are plugged, tuner pipe will melt and bearing carrier prop shaft seals will be damaged. 10- Water Tube 11- Wall of Water – If water level height is insufficient, water pump may draw in air resulting in an overheated engine. 12- Check Valve for powerhead flush. 13- Excess water from wall of water around exhaust bucket exits around anodes. 13 1 2 3 3 4 5 7 12 Cylinder Block and Adaptor Plate 8 6 57389 Page 4B-6 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 1999 1/2 Water Flow Diagram COOLING Troubleshooting Thermostat Test 1. Inspect thermostat covers and cylinder head covers (thermostat opening) for cracks and corrosion damage that could cause leakage. Replace parts as necessary. 2. Remove and discard gasket from each thermostat. 3. Wash thermostats with clean water. 4. Using a thermostat tester, similar to the one shown, test each thermostat as follows: a. Open thermostat valve, then insert a thread between valve and thermostat body. Allow valve to close against thread. b. Suspend thermostat (from thread) and thermometer inside tester so that neither touches the container. Bottom of thermometer must be even with bottom of thermostat to obtain correct temperature of thermostat opening. c. Fill thermostat tester with water to cover thermostat. d. Plug tester into electrical outlet. e. Observe temperature at which thermostat begins to open. (Thermostat will drop off thread, that was installed in Step “a”, when it starts to open.) Thermostat must begin to open when temperature reaches 140°-145° F (60°-63° C). f. Continue to heat water until thermostat is completely open. g. Unplug thermostat tester. h. Replace thermostat, if it fails to open at the specified temperature, or if it does not fully open. NOTE: BE SURE that water in thermostat tester is allowed to cool sufficiently [below 110°F (43.3° C)] before testing the other thermostat. 51087 IMPORTANT: DO NOT operate engine without thermostats installed. 90-858347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4B-7 COOLING Page 4B-8 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Water Pressure Check Using Water Pressure Gauge 91-79250A2, cut compressor water inlet hose and install tee fitting (provided) as shown. NOTE: This is also the same location for installing the water pressure hose for a dash mounted water pressure gauge. 52582 9 56141 9 Loctite Pipe Sealant w/Teflon-592 g b d c a e f a - Tee Fitting (22-64706) b - Fitting (22-63651) c - Tubing d - Compression Nut (22-63670) e - Compressor Water Inlet Hose (Cut and splice in this location) f - Sta-straps g - Compressor Water Inlet Hose WARNING Shut off engine and refer to troubleshooting chart if water pressure is not within specification. DO NOT exceed 3000 RPM in neutral. Idle 1.0 – 3.0 PSI (6.8 – 20.5 kPa) Poppet Valve Opening 4 – 9 PSI (27.4 – 61.6 kPa) W.O.T. 12.0 PSI (82.1 kPa) Minimum COOLING Water Pump Cleaning and Inspection 1. Inspect the water tube coupling for wear or damage. If necessary replace. a a-Water Tube Coupling 2. Inspect the water pump impeller for wear on the end, top and bottom of the impeller blades. Replace the impeller if this condition is found. 3. Inspect for proper bonding between the hub and the impeller. Replace the impeller if improper bonding is found. a b a-Hub b-Impeller 4. Inspect the impeller blades to see if they are cracked, burnt, hard or deformed. Replace the impeller if the blades are in this condition. IMPORTANT: The circular groove formed by the impeller sealing bead should be disregarded when inspecting cover and plate. The depth of the groove will not affect water pump output. 5. Replace cover if plastic is melted from excessive heat (lack of water). Replace stainless insert and/or face plate if grooves (other than impeller sealing bead groove) are more than 0.010 in. (0.254 mm) deep. 57408 a b c d a-Water Pump Face Plate b-Sealing Groove (disregard) c-Water Pump Cover d-Stainless Insert [discard if grooves exceed 0.010 in. (0.254 mm)] IMPORTANT: It is recommended that all seals and gaskets be replaced (as a normal repair procedure) to assure effective repair. IMPORTANT: It is recommended that the water pump impeller be replaced whenever the gearcase is removed for maintenance. However, if it is necessary to re-use the impeller, DO NOT install in reverse to original rotation as premature impeller failure will occur. 90-858347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 4B-9 COOLING Problem Diagnosis Condition Recommended Range Possible Cause Pressure below specification @ idle 1.0 – 3.0 PSI (6.8 – 20.5 kPa) •Poppet valve spring defective (weak, broken, missing) •Defective poppet valve seal •Thermostat stuck open •Severe internal leak •Low output water pump •Inlet restriction •Strainer screen for air compressor water supply is restricted Pressure above 5 psi (34.2kPa) @ idle 1.0 – 3.0 PSI (6.8 – 20.5 kPa) •Plugged poppet by-pass passage or fuel cooler Pressure does not drop between 1000 – 2500 RPM indicating poppet valve has opened 4 – 9 PSI (27.4 – 61.6 kPa) between 1000 – 2200 RPM •Wrong poppet valve spring •Low output water pump •Inlet restriction •Poppet valve vent hole plugged or restricted •Severe internal leak •Defective poppet valve seal Poppet valve flutter/water pressure drop does not stabilize prior to 2500 RPM 4 – 9 PSI (27.4 – 61.6 kPa) between 1000 – 2200 RPM •Wrong poppet valve spring •Low output water pump •Inlet restriction •Broken diaphragm in poppet valve •Severe internal leak •Defective poppet valve seal Pressure is below minimum specification @ W.O.T. 12 PSI (54.9 – 68.5kPa) •Inlet restriction •Engine mounted too high on transom •Engine trimmed out too far •Configuration of boat bottom interfering with adequate flow of water to coolant inlets •Severe internal leak •Low output water pump •Plugged strainer screen for air compressor water supply Pressure higher than normal @ Maximum pressure – 23 PSI •Outlet water passages restricted. W.O.T., but engine still indicates overheat condition (157.4 kPa) •Steam pocket has formed at top of powerhead due to lack of cooling water Page 4B-10 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING MID-SECTION Section 5A – Clamp/Swivel Brackets & Drive Shaft Housing Table of Contents Swivel Bracket and Steering Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-2 Removal and Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-8 Transom Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-4 Reassembly and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-11 Drive Shaft Housing and Exhaust Tube . . . . . . 5A-6 Drive Shaft Housing and Dyna-Float Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-8 5 A 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5A-1 CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING Swivel Bracket and Steering Arm 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1415 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 3 27 29 28 30 95 95 95 7 95 95 95 B Loctite “271” Adhesive Sealant (92-809819) 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-825407A12) A 7 95 Page 5A-2 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING Swivel Bracket and Steering Arm REFREF. .. NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION TORQUE lb-in lb-ft Nm. 1 1 SWIVEL BRACKET ASSEMBLY (BLACK) 2 1 OIL SEAL (LOWER) 3 2 BUSHING 4 1 SPACER 5 1 O-RING 6 2 GREASE FITTING 75 8.5 7 2 BUSHING 8 1 THRUST WASHER 9 2 SCREW (7/16-20 x 7-1/2 IN.) 10 2 MOUNT 11 2 WASHER 12 2 WASHER 13 2 NUT 50 68 14 1 STEERING LINK ASSEMBLY 15 1 SCREW (3/8-24 x 1-1/4 IN.) 20 27 16 2 NUT See Note 17 2 WASHER 18 1 SWIVEL PIN AND STEERING ARM (BLACK) 19 1 BOTTOM YOKE (BLACK) 20 1 RETAINING RING 21 1 BUMPER 22 2 SCREW (1/4-28 x 1/2 IN.) 100 11.5 23 1 TRIM SENDER ASSEMBLY 24 2 SCREW 15 1.7 25 2 LOCKWASHER 26 2 WASHER 27 2 STRIKER PLATE 28 2 LOCKWASHER 29 2 NUT 23 31 30 1 DECAL-Serial Number Overlaminate NOTE: A – Torque nut to 120 lb. in. (13.5 Nm) and then back off 1/4 turn. NOTE: B – Torque nut to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm) 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5A-3 CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING Page 5A-4 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Transom Brackets 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 17 16 18 14 14 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-825407A12) CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING Transom Brackets REFREF. .. NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION TORQUE lb-in lb-ft Nm. 1 1 TRANSOM BRACKET (STARBOARD)(BLACK) 2 1 TRANSOM BRACKET (PORT) (BLACK) 3 1 GREASE FITTING (PORT) 80 9 4 1 TILT TUBE 5 1 NUT (1 IN.-14) 45 61 6 1 O-RING 7 2 WAVE WASHER 8 1 NUT (7/8-14) 45 61 9 4 BOLT 10 4 WASHER 11 4 NUT 12 1 TILT LOCK LEVER ASSEMBLY 13 1 SPRING 14 2 BUSHING 15 1 SPRING 16 1 KNOB 17 1 GROOVE PIN 18 1 PIN 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5A-5 CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING Drive Shaft Housing and Exhaust Tube 26 23 32 33 38 25 95 29 28 19 20 36 7 1 18 27 3 17 Loctite 271 (92-809820) 4 Soap (Purchase Locally) 12 P80 Rubber Lubricant 11 (Purchase Locally) 5 13 6 Permabond 105 Cyanacrylate Adhesive 8 (Purchase Locally) 14 10 16 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-825407A12) 33 2 15 9 Loctite Superbonder 454 Gel (Purchase Locally) 7 Loctite “RCA/680” Retaining Compound (92-809833) 31 62 24 95 37 35 23 30 36 21 96 22 34 36 96 62 23 33 95 7 Page 5A-6 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING Drive Shaft Housing and Exhaust Tube REFREF. .. NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION TORQUE lb-in lb-ft Nm. 11 1 DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING (LONG)(BLACK) 1 DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING (X-LONG)(BLACK) 2 2 STUD 3 2 SCREW (1/2-20 x 6 IN.) 4 1 GROUND WIRE 5 2 LOWER MOUNT 6 2 WASHER 7 1 GROUND WIRE 8 2 NUT 50 68 9 1 SCREW (1/4-20 x 3/8 IN.) 10 2 WASHER 11 2 NUT 50 68 12 2 CLAMP 13 4 SCREW (5/16-18 x 1-1/4 IN.) 22 30 14 2 COVER (BLACK) 15 4 SCREW (12-24 x 5/8 IN.) 17 1.9 16 4 NUT 25 34 17 1 WASHER 18 1 NUT 57 77 19 4 WASHER 20 4 NUT 23 31 21 1 IDLE EXHAUST BOOT 22 1 PLUG 23 1 GASKET 24 1 SEAL (LOWER) 25 1 EXHAUST TUBE 26 1 SEAL (UPPER) 2727 1 EXHAUST EXTENSION (150) 1 EXHAUST EXTENSION (135) 2828 1 WATER TUBE (LONG) 1 WATER TUBE (X-LONG) 29 1 GASKET 30 1 PLATE ASSEMBLY 31 1 SEAL 32 1 BRACKET 33 12 SCREW (10-16 x 1/2 IN.) 80 9 34 2 DOWEL PIN 35 1 SEAL 36 6 SCREW (1/4-20 x 3/4 IN.) 60 7 37 2 PLUG (USE WHERE APPLICABLE) 38 1 GASKET 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5A-7 CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING Drive Shaft Housing and Dyna-Float Suspension Refer to “Powerhead Removal” section to remove powerhead. Refer to “Lower Unit Removal” in this section to remove lower unit. Removal and Disassembly 1. Remove shift shaft from driveshaft housing by pulling straight up on shaft. 2. Remove 5 bolts which secure exhaust extension plate to drive shaft housing. After bolts are removed, lift exhaust extension plate off drive shaft housing. 3. Remove screws, which secure lower mount covers to drive shaft housing, then remove covers. a b c d e f a-Shift Shaft Linkage b-Exhaust Extension Plate c-Exhaust Plate to Drive Shaft Housing Bolts d-Driveshaft Housing Plate e-Lower Mount Cover (One Each Side) f-Mounting Bracket Bolts 51858 Page 5A-8 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING SHIFT LINKAGE ASSEMBLY a b c d d e f g a-Shift Shaft Assembly b-Bushing c-Lock Nut d-Washer (2) e-Bushing (Hidden) f-Spring g-Guide Block 1. Remove upper mount nuts and flat washers. a a-Upper Mount Nuts 2. Lift driveshaft housing plate off housing. 51850 a b a-Drive Shaft Housing Plate b-Drive Shaft Housing 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5A-9 CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING 3. Remove water tube from driveshaft housing plate. 4. Exhaust diffuser is secured to housing plate with 6 bolts. Remove bolts, then remove diffuser. 5. Pull exhaust tube out of drive shaft housing. 51850 51857 c d a b a-Water Tube b-Exhaust Diffuser c-Exhaust Tube d-Drive Shaft Housing 6. Remove all gasket material from driveshaft housing and related components. 7. Remove bolts, which secure lower mount retainers to drive shaft housing, and remove retainers. 8. Remove rubber caps from lower mount bolts. 51855 a b a-Bolts b-Lower Mount Retainer (One Each Side) Page 5A-10 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING 9. Remove lower mount nuts. 51855 a b a-Lower Mount Nuts b-Lower Mount 10. Remove driveshaft housing from swivel bracket by pulling alternately from top to bottom on housing. 11. Remove upper and lower mounts by lifting them out of driveshaft housing. Reassembly and Installation 1. Apply a thin coat of 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant onto inside portion of exhaust tube seal. 2. Install exhaust tube seal into driveshaft housing with tapered side of seal facing up. 51856 a b a-Exhaust Tube Seal b-Driveshaft Housing 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5A-11 CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING 3. Push exhaust tube boots onto tabs on each side of exhaust tube. 4. Position exhaust tube in drive shaft housing and push down on tube until boots rest in grooves on inside of housing. 5. Position driveshaft housing to plate gasket on top of housing. 6. Install an exhaust diffuser gasket and exhaust diffuser onto plate, then secure both to plate with 6 bolts. Clean bolts with Loctite 7649 Primer and then apply Loctite 271 to bolt threads. Torque bolts to 60 Ib. in. (7.0 Nm). 51857 c d 51856 a b b a-Exhaust Tube b-Exhaust Tube Boots c-Exhaust Diffuser Gasket d-Exhaust Diffuser 7. Apply a small amount of 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant onto water tube seal. 8. Install water tube seal into driveshaft housing plate with plastic end of seal facing up and install water tube. 51856 a b a-Water Tube Seal b-Driveshaft Housing Plate Page 5A-12 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING 9. Position drive shaft housing plate on top of housing. 10. Apply a thin coat of Perfect Seal onto metal portion of upper dyna-float mounts. 11. Position mounts on drive shaft housing plate. 12. Install a rubber washer onto each upper mount, followed by a metal washer. 51857 a b cd d bc a-Water Tube Seal (Plastic End) b-Dyna-Float Mounts c-Rubber Washers d-Metal Washer 13. Install a ground strap onto one of the lower mount mounting bolts. NOTE: Apply Perfect Seal along length of lower mount bolts. 14. Insert a mounting bolt thru the short end of each lower mount. 15. Position a mount on each lower side of driveshaft housing. 16. Install a flat washer over each lower mounting bolt. 17. Position a bumper on steering arm between mounting bolts. 18. Start upper mounting bolts in upper mounts and align lower mounting bolts with holes in swivel pin yoke. Slide driveshaft housing up against yoke and bumper. 19. Secure upper mounts to steering arm with flat washers and self-locking nuts. Torque nuts to 50 Ib. ft. (68.0 Nm). 20. Install ground strap (if equipped) between port lower mount bolt and swivel bracket. 21. Secure lower mounts to swivel pin yoke with self- locking nuts. Torque nuts to 50 Ib. ft. (68.0 Nm). Place a rubber cap over each lower mounting bolt head. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5A-13 CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING 22. Install lower mount retainers and secure each retainer with 2 bolts. (Secure ground strap with the nearest retainer bolt.) Torque bolts to 160 Ib. in. (18.0 Nm). 51855 51855 e f f g a b d c a-Lower Mount b-Nut [Torque to 50 lb. ft. (68.0 Nm)] c-Rubber Cap d-Ground Strap (only one side) e-Lower Mount Retainer f-Bolts [Torque to 160 lb. in. (18.0 Nm)] g-Ground Strap 23. Install lower mount covers and secure each cover with 2 screws. 24. Install exhaust extension plate on driveshaft housing with shift shaft assembly. Secure extension plate to drive shaft housing with 5 bolts. 51858 c d e f g h 51855 a b a-Cover (One Each Side) b-Screws (Two for Each Cover) c-Shift Shaft Linkage d-Exhaust Extension Plate e-Exhaust Plate to Driveshaft Housing Bolts, Torque to 25 Ib. ft. (34 Nm) f-Drive Shaft Housing Plate g-Lower Mount Cover (One Each Side) h-Mounting Bracket Bolts, Torque to 40 Ib. ft. (54 Nm) Page 5A-14 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWER TRIM MID-SECTION Section 5B – Power Trim Table of Contents Power Trim Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-1 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-2 Power Trim Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-4 Power Trim Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-6 Power Trim - General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-7 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-7 Trimming Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-7 Trailering Outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-8 Tilting Outboard Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-8 Trim “In” Angle Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-9 Striker Plate Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-9 Anode Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-10 Trim Indicator Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-10 Check, Fill and Purge - Power Trim System . . 5B-10 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-12 Power Trim System with Relays and 2 Wire Trim Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-14 Electrical System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-15 General Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-15 Troubleshooting the “Down Circuit” . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-15 Troubleshooting the “Up” Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-16 Troubleshooting the “Down” and “Up” Circuits (All Circuits Inoperative) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-17 Power Trim Assembly Removal and Installation . 5B-18 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-18 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-21 Testing Power Trim System With Test Gauge Kit (91-52915A6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-23 “UP” Pressure Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-23 “DOWN” Pressure Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-26 Hydraulic Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-28 Trim Rod End Cap Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-29 Tilt Ram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-30 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-31 Scraper Seal Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-34 Motor and Electrical Tests/Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-38 Trim Pump Motor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-38 Motor Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-38 Armature Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-39 Motor Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-40 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-44 Reassembly - Motor and Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-46 Priming Power Trim System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-47 Trim Sender Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-47 Trim Indicator Gauge Needle Adjustment . . . . 5B-48 Trim Indicator Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-49 5 B Power Trim Specifications NOTE: Maximum acceptable amount of leak down in 24 hours is 2 inches (50.8 mm). Test Reading Trim “UP” 1300 PSI (91kg/cm2) Maximum Pressure Trim “DOWN” 500 PSI (35kg/cm2) Minimum Pressure 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5B-1 POWER TRIM Special Tools 1. Alignment Tool 91-11230 17238 2. Trim Rod Removal Tool 91-44486A1 51337 3. Trim Rod Guide Removal Tool 91-44487A1 51337 4. Power Trim Test Gauge Kit 91-52915A6 73835 Page 5B-2 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWER TRIM 5. Adaptor Fitting 91-82278A2 and 91-82278A3 54458 6. Spanner Wrench 91-74951 51337 7. Multi-Meter DVA Tester 91-99750A1 or DMT 2000 Digital Tachometer Multi-meter 91-854009A1 a b a-Multi-Meter DVA Tester 91-99750A1 b-DMT 2000 Digital Tachometer Multi-meter 91-854009A1 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5B-3 POWER TRIM Power Trim Components 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 5 5 6 6 6 6 5 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 9 3 6 18 33 34 35 94 7 109 94 Anti-Corrosion Grease (92-78376A6) 109 GM Silicone Sealer (92-91600-1) 36 37 13 13 13 7 Loctite 271 (92-809820) 110 38 110 Power Trim & Steering Fluid (92-90100A12) Page 5B-4 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWER TRIM Power Trim Components REFREF. .. NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION TORQUE lb-in lb-ft Nm. – 1 POWER TRIM ASSEMBLY–Complete 1 1 MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY 2 9 PIPE PLUG 3 1 TILT CYLINDER ASSEMBLY 4 1 PISTON ROD 5 1 GUIDE KIT 6 1 REPAIR KIT 7 1 CHECK VALVE KIT 8 2 GUIDE ASSEMBLY 99 1 PISTON/ROD ASSEMBLY (PORT) 1 PISTON/ROD ASSEMBLY (STBD.) 10 1 TRIM FILTER ASSEMBLY 11 1 VALVE ASSEMBLY 12 1 E RING 13 1 O RING KIT 14 1 PUMP 15 1 PLUG ASSEMBLY 16 4 SCREW 17 4 WASHER 18 1 COVER 19 1 DRIVE SHAFT 20 1 TRIM MOTOR (Breakdown on Power Trim Motor) 2121 2 SCREW (LONG) 80 9 2 SCREW (SHORT) 80 9 22 1 SHAFT ASSEMBLY 23 2 PIPE PLUG 24 1 GROOVE PIN 25 1 GROOVE PIN 26 1 SHAFT 27 1 ANODE ASSEMBLY 28 2 SCREW (M6 x 1 x 25) 70 8 29 2 WASHER 30 6 SCREW (M10 x 1.5 x 30) 45 61 31 6 WASHER 32 1 DECAL-Caution power trim 33 1 SCREW (10-16 x 3/5 IN.) 34 1 C WASHER 35 2 CLAMP 36 1 TUBING 37 1 STA-STRAP 38 2 FILTER SCREENS NOTE: Lubricate all O-rings with Power Trim and Steering Fluid. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5B-5 POWER TRIM Power Trim Motor 1 2 3 3 REFREF. .. TORQUE NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb.in. lb.ft. N·m – 1 POWER TRIM MOTOR 1 1 BRUSH AND SEAL KIT 2 1 ARMATURE KIT 3 1 END FRAME (Complete) Page 5B-6 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWER TRIM Power Trim - General Information Description The Power Trim System consists of an electric motor, pressurized fluid reservoir, pump, tilt cylinder, and two trim rams. The remote control (or trim panel) has switches that trim the outboard “Up” or “Down” and tilt the engine for “Trailering”. The outboard can be trimmed and tilted under power or when the outboard is not running. Trimming Characteristics NOTE: Because hull designs react differently in varying water conditions, varying the trim position will often improve the ride and boat handling. When trimming from a mid-trim position (with outboard trim tab in a straight fore and aft position), expect the following: TRIMMING OUTBOARD “UP” (OUT): WARNING Excessive trim “Out” may reduce the stability of some high speed hulls. To correct instability, reduce the power gradually and trim the outboard “In” slightly be- fore resuming high speed operation. A rapid reduction in power will result in a sudden change of steering torque and may cause additional boat instability. Will lift boat bow, increasing top speed. Transfers steering torque harder to port (left) on installations below 23 in. (584.2 mm) transom height. Increases gearcase clearance over submerged objects. Excess trim can cause “porpoising” and/or ventilation. WARNING Excessive outboard trim angle will result in insufficient water supply causing water pump and/or powerhead overheating damage. Insure water level is above water intake holes whenever outboard is running. The “Up” circuit actuates the up solenoid (under outboard cowl) and closes the motor circuit. The electric motor drives the pump, forcing fluid thru passageways into the up side of the trim cylinders. The trim cylinders position the outboard at the desired trim angle in the 20 degree maximum trim range. The system will not allow the outboard to be trimmed above the 20 degree trim range as long as the engine RPM is above approximately 2000 RPM. The outboard can be trimmed above the 20 degree maximum trim angle (for shallow water operation, etc.), by keeping the engine RPM below 2000. If the RPM increases over 2000, propeller thrust (if propeller is deep enough) will cause the trim system to return the outboard to the 20 degree maximum trim position. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5B-7 POWER TRIM TRIMMING OUTBOARD “DOWN” (IN): WARNING Excessive speed at minimum trim “In” may result in undesirable and/or unsafe steering conditions. Test for handling characteristics after any adjustment is made to the trim angle (and tilt pin location). Aids planing, particularly with heavy loads. Improves ride in choppy water conditions. Excess trim “In” can cause “bow steer” (boat veers to left or right). Transfers steering torque to starboard (right). Improves acceleration to planing speed. The “Down” circuit actuates the down solenoid (under engine cowl) and closes the motor circuit. The electric motor drives the pump in the opposite direction as the up circuit, forcing fluid thru passageways into the “down” side of the tilt ram. The tilt ram moves the engine down to the desired position. Trailering Outboard The “Up” circuit first moves the trim cylinders; when the trim cylinders extend fully, the tilt ram extends to tilt the outboard to the full up position for trailering. Before the boat is trailered, the operator should check for clearance between the outboard skeg and pavement to prevent damage to skeg from striking pavement. If the outboard must be tilted for clearance between skeg and pavement, a device such as a “Transom Saver” should be installed to prevent stress to boat transom from outboard weight while the boat/outboard are being trailered. Tilting Outboard Manually WARNING Before opening the manual release valve knob, insure all persons are clear of outboard as outboard will drop to full “Down” when valve is opened. The outboard can be raised or lowered manually by opening the manual release valve 3 to 4 turns counterclockwise. Close manual release valve to hold outboard at the desired tilt position. 51353 a a-Manual Release Valve Page 5B-8 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWER TRIM Trim “In” Angle Adjustment WARNING Boat operation with outboard trimmed to the full “In” trim angle [not using the trim angle adjustment bolt] at planing speed may result in undesirable and/or unsafe steering conditions. A water test for handling/steering conditions is required after any trim angle adjustments. IMPORTANT: Some boat/motor combinations not using the trim angle adjustment pin and trimmed to the full “In” trim angle position may not exhibit any undesirable and/or unsafe handling and/or steering characteristics at planing speed. If so, not using the trim angle adjustment bolt may be advantageous to acceleration and planing. A water test is required to determine if these characteristics apply to a particular boat/motor combination. 51353 a a-Trim Angle Adjustment Bolt Striker Plate Replacement Visually inspect striker plates and replace if worn excessively. 27930 a b c a-Striker Plate (2) b-Lockwasher c-Locknut. Torque to 80 lb. in. (9.0 Nm) 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5B-9 POWER TRIM Anode Plate Anode plate is a self-sacrificing alloy plate that is consumed gradually by corrosion while providing protection to the midsection and power trim from galvanic corrosion. Replace anode plate when it is 50% consumed. a 27932 a-Anode Plate IMPORTANT: Do not paint or place protective coating on anode plate, or corrosion protection function will be lost. Trim Indicator Gauge A Quicksilver Trim Indicator Gauge accessory kit is available for the power trim sender (if not previously installed). Check, Fill and Purge - Power Trim System TO CHECK: CAUTION Tilt outboard to full “Up” position and engage tilt lock lever before checking fluid level. System is pressurized. Extend trim and tilt rams fully to depressurize system. Remove fill plug and O-ring. System is full when oil level is present at filler hole. Tighten fill plug securely. NOTE: Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) Type F, FA, Dexron II or Dexron III may be used. 51368 a a-Tilt Lock Lever Page 5B-10 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWER TRIM TO FILL: IMPORTANT: This trim system is pressurized. Remove “Fill” plug only when outboard is tilted to the full “Up” position or the trim/tilt rams are fully extended. Retighten “Fill” plug before tilting outboard down or retracting tilt/trim rams. Remove “Fill” plug and O-ring. System is full when oil level is present at fill hole. Tighten “Fill” plug securely. 51344 a b c a-Fill Plug and O-ring (remove to fill system, tighten securely) b-Oil Can (fill system with Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid) c-Tilt Lock Lever (engage to support engine in “Up” position) TO PURGE: IMPORTANT: Fill plug and O-ring must be tightened securely before purging system. IMPORTANT: Run Trim System in short “jogs” until pump is primed and trim system moves. If trim motor is run without priming pump, driveshaft failure could result. Cycle outboard through entire trim/tilt range 4 times. Check fluid level after purging system. Push down on outboard when trim rams are slightly extended. If rams retract more than 1/8 in. (3.2 mm), air is present in system. Cycle system again and check fluid level. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5B-11 POWER TRIM Troubleshooting IMPORTANT: Determine if Electrical or Hydraulic problem exists. IMPORTANT: Acceptable power trim leak down should not exceed 1 in. (25.4 mm) (when measured at the tilt ram) in a 24 hour period. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING IMPORTANT: Make one correction at a time. Check operation of trim system before proceeding to the next check. CONDITION OF TRIM SYSTEM PROBLEM A. Trim motor runs; trim system does not move up or down. 1, 2, 5, 10 B. Does not trim full down. Up trim OK. 2, 3, 4 C. Does not trim full up. Down trim OK. 1, 6 D. Partial or “Jerky” down/up. 1, 3 E. “Thump” noise when shifting. 2, 3, 6, 7 F. Does not trim under load. 5, 8, 9,10 G. Does not hold trim position under load. 2, 5, 6 H. Trail out when backing off from high speed. 3, 4 I. Leaks down and does not hold trim. 2, 5, 7 J. Trim motor working hard and trims slow up and down. 8, 9 K. Trims up very slow. 1, 2, 8, 9 L. Starts to trim up from full down position when “IN” trim button is depressed. 3, 4 M. Trim position will not hold in reverse. 3, 4 PROBLEM 1. Low oil level. 2. Pump assembly faulty. 3. Tilt ram piston ball not seated (displaced, dirt, nickel seat). 4. Tilt ram piston O-ring leaking or cut. 5. Manual release valve leaking (check condition of O-rings) (Valve not fully closed). 6. Lower check valve not seating in port side trim ram. 7. Upper check valve not seating in port side trim ram. 8. Check condition of battery. 9. Replace motor assembly. 10. Broken motor/pump drive shaft. External Mounted Hydraulic System 51491 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 Page 5B-12 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWER TRIM ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING CONDITION OF TRIM SYSTEM PROBLEM A. Trim motor does not run when trim button is depressed. 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 B. Trim system trims opposite of buttons. 3 C. Cowl mounted trim buttons do not activate trim system. 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 PROBLEM 1. Battery low or discharged. 2. Open circuit in trim wiring. 3. Wiring reversed in remote control. 4. Wire harness corroded through. 5. Internal motor problem (brushes, shorted armature). 6. Blown fuse(s). 7. Trim switch failure. 8. Verify relays are functioning correctly. POWER TRIM RELAY TEST PROCEDURE The trim motor relay system used on permanent magnet trim systems connect each of the two wires from the trim motor to either ground or positive in order to allow the motor to run in both directions. If the motor will not run in the UP direction, it could be either the UP relay is not making contact to 12 volts OR the DOWN relay is not making contact to ground. The opposite is true if the system will not run DOWN. When the system is not energized, both relays should connect the heavy motor leads to ground. To test which relay is faulty if the trim system does not operate in one direction: 1. Disconnect the heavy gauge pump wires from the trim control relay. 2. Check for continuity between the heavy leads from the trim relays to ground. Ohmmeter Resistance Scale Reading* Leads Between (Ohms) (x____________) GREEN and Ground 0 Full Continuity (Rx1) BLUE and Ground 0 Full Continuity (Rx1) Replace the relay that does not have continuity. 3. Connect a voltmeter to the heavy BLUE lead and to ground. You should have 12 volts on the BLUE lead when the UP switch is pushed. You should should also have 12 volts on the GREEN lead when the DOWN switch is pushed. Replace the relay that does not switch the lead to positive. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5B-13 POWER TRIM Page 5B-14 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Power Trim System with Relays and 2 Wire Trim Motor BLK = Black BLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red WHT = White UP Relay DOWN Relay 53794 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 POWER TRIM Electrical System Troubleshooting General Checks Before troubleshooting the Power Trim electrical system, check the following: 1. Check for disconnected wires. 2. Make certain all connections are tight and corrosion free. 3. Check that plug-in connectors are fully engaged. 4. Make certain battery is fully charged. Refer to the preceding four wiring diagrams for connection points when troubleshooting the electrical systems (Connection points are specified by number.) Troubleshooting the “Down Circuit” Battery Voltage Indicated: Battery Voltage Indicated: Relay good: No Voltage Indicated: No Voltage Indicated: No Voltage Indicated: No Voltage Indicated: Connect Voltmeter red lead to Point 5. If battery voltage is indi- cated, trim switch is faulty. If no battery voltage, check for loose or corroded connection at Point 5 or open circuit in wire supply- ing current to Point 5. Relay Switch is defective. There is an open circuit be- tween Point 3 and positive (+) battery terminal. •Connect Voltmeter red lead to Point 2. Connect Voltmeter red lead to Point 3. Connect Voltmeter red lead to Point 4 and black lead to ground. Depress “Down” trim button. If battery voltage is indicated, wire is open between Points 4 and 1. Connect Voltmeter red lead to Point 1 and black lead to ground. Depress the “Down” trim button. •Depress “Down” trim button. •Pump motor wiring is defec- tive. •Pump motor is defective. •Check for loose or corroded connections. •Check wires for open. Battery Voltage Indicated: •Test UP relay. Refer to page 5B-13 for relay test procedure. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5B-15 POWER TRIM Troubleshooting the “Up” Circuit Battery Voltage Indicated: Battery Voltage Indicated: No Voltage Indicated: No Voltage Indicated: No Voltage Indicated: No Voltage Indicated: Connect Voltmeter red lead to Point 5. If battery voltage is indi- cated, trim switch is faulty. If no battery voltage, check for loose or corroded connection at Point 5 or open circuit in wire supply- ing current to Point 5. Relay Switch is defective. There is an open circuit be- tween Point 9 and positive (+) battery terminal. •Connect Voltmeter red lead to Point 6. Connect Voltmeter red lead to Point 9. Connect Voltmeter red lead to Point 7 and black lead to ground. Depress “Up” trim button. If bat- tery voltage is indicated, wire is open between Points 7 and 8. Connect Voltmeter red lead to Point 8 and black lead to ground. Depress the “Up” trim button. •Depress “Up” trim button. •Pump motor wiring is defec- tive. •Pump motor is defective. •Check for loose or corroded connections. •Check wires for open. Battery Voltage Indicated: •Test DOWN relay. Refer to page 5B-13 for relay test procedure. Relay good: Page 5B-16 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWER TRIM Troubleshooting the “Down” and “Up” Circuits (All Circuits Inoperative) Battery Voltage Indicated: No Voltage Indicated: Battery Voltage Indicated: Battery Voltage Indicated: Battery Voltage Indicated: No Voltage Indicated: No Voltage Indicated: No Voltage Indicated: Blown Fuse: Fuse Not Blown: Check in-line fuse (under cowl) to see if fuse is blown. •Correct problem that caused fuse to blow. •Replace fuse. •Check battery leads for poor connections or open circuits. •Check battery charge. •Connect Voltmeter red lead to Point 8 and black lead to ground. •Depress “Up” trim button and check for battery voltage. •Check black ground wires for poor connection or poor ground, Point 10. •Pump motor is faulty. Refer to “Motor and Electrical Tests/ Repair”, following. •Check for open in wire. •Check for loose or corroded connections. •Check for voltage at any instru- ment, using a Voltmeter. •Turn ignition switch to “Run” position. •DO NOT start engine. •Check for pinched or severed wires. •Check all trim harness con- nectors for loose or corroded connections. •Check trim switch. Connect Voltmeter red lead to Point 3 and black lead to ground. Battery voltage should be indicated. There is an open circuit in wire between Point 5 and Red ter- minal on the back of the ignition switch. Red wire is open between Point 3 and red terminal on back of the ignition switch. Check that voltage is being supplied to control by performing the following checks: Connect red Voltmeter lead to Point 5, and black lead to ground. Trim switch is faulty or there is an open circuit in wires (green-white, blue-white) between trim buttons and trim pump. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5B-17 POWER TRIM Power Trim Assembly Removal and Installation Removal 1. Remove clamps on transom bracket to free power trim wiring. 2. Raise outboard to full “Up” position and engage tilt lock lever. 51377 a a a-Clamps b-Tilt Lock Lever 50605 b WARNING Failure to support outboard as shown could result in personal injury and/or damage to outboard or boat. 51346 b c c a a-Tilt Lock Lever b-Support Tool c-Retaining Clips IMPORTANT: Support outboard as shown above to prevent engine from tipping when power trim retaining pin is removed. Page 5B-18 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWER TRIM SUPPORT TOOL 3/8 in. diameter metal rod (a used shift shaft works well) 14” 2” 1/4” a a a-Drill holes for retaining clips METRIC CONVERSION 14 in. = 35.56 cm 2 in. = 50.8 mm 3/8 in. = 9.5 mm 1/4 in. = 6.35 mm CAUTION Disconnect battery cables at battery before removing power trim wires from solenoids. 3. Disconnect power trim wires at solenoids (BLUE, GREEN, and BLACK) or if relay style, disconnect (BLUE and GREEN) bullet connector harness. 4. Open filler cap and release any remaining pressure in the system. IMPORTANT: Outboards equipped with thru-the-tilt-tube steering - remove steering link arm from end of steering cable and cable retaining nut from tilt tube. a 51339 a-Filler Cap b-Retaining Nut b 51354 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5B-19 POWER TRIM 5. Remove outboard transom mounting bolts, and loosen tilt tube nut until nut is flush with end of tilt tube thread. 6. Remove 3 screws and washers and move starboard transom bracket. a b a c d 51375 a-Transom Mount Bolts (2) b-Tilt Tube Nut (flush with end of thread) c-Screws (3) d-Washers (3) IMPORTANT: Cross pin (a) should not be reused. Replace with new cross pin. 7. Drive out cross pin, push out upper swivel pin, and remove 3 screws and washers retaining trim system. Remove system from outboard. a b c 51339 a-Cross Pin b-Upper Swivel Pin c-Port Transom Bracket Screws and Washers (3). Remove to Release Trim System from Outboard. Page 5B-20 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWER TRIM Installation 1. Paint any exposed metal surfaces to prevent corrosion. 2. Apply Loctite 271 to screws. Install trim system, starboard transom bracket, and tilt tube nut. 3. Use a 12 volt power source to extend tilt ram up to align upper swivel shaft hole and end of ram. Connect trim motor wires [BLUE wire to POSITIVE (+), BLACK wire to NEGATIVE (–)]. If ram extends too far, retract ram by connecting GREEN wire to POSITIVE (+). 4. Install Upper Swivel Pin with slotted end to left (port) side of engine. de f 51375 a b c a-Screw (6) Torque to 40 lb. ft. (54.0 N·m) b-Lockwasher (6) Install one per screw c-Tilt Tube Nut d-Upper Swivel Pin e-Slotted end f-Cross hole (in line with slotted end) IMPORTANT: Cross pin should not be reused. Install a new pin. 5. Position slot on end of swivel shaft in line with hole in tilt ram end. Insert a punch into tilt ram hole to align cross hole in upper swivel shaft. Tap new cross pin in until flush. a d bc a-Upper Swivel Shaft (Slot is in line with cross hole) b-Chamfered End of Hole (Faces away from transom) c-Retaining Pin d-Tilt Ram End 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5B-21 POWER TRIM Page 5B-22 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 6. Connect trim motor wires to solenoids. Refer to Wiring Diagrams in this manual. Route trim wires as specified in this manual. NOTE: The 2 power leads going to the trim motor should be encapsulated with conduit tubing. If tubing has not been previously installed, order 32-828547-353 and cut to appropriate length. 56921 56922 a a - Conduit Tubing 7. Apply marine sealer to shanks of mount bolts and install transom mount bolts. IMPORTANT: Do not use an impact driver to tighten transom mount bolts. Apply marine sealer to threads of mount bolts. Secure with flat washers and locknuts. Be sure installation is watertight. 8. Tighten tilt tube nut securely. IMPORTANT: Outboards equipped with thru-the-tilt-tube steering: Tighten steering cable retaining nut securely to tilt tube. a 51354 a - Steering Cable Retaining Nut 9. Apply Quicksilver Liquid Neoprene (91-25511--2) on all electrical connections. POWER TRIM WARNING Electrical wires passing through cowl openings must be protected from chafing or being cut. Follow the recommended procedures outlined in Section 1D of this Manual. Failure to protect wires as described could result in electrical system failure and/or injury to occupants of boat. Testing Power Trim System With Test Gauge Kit (91-52915A6) IMPORTANT: This test will not locate problems in the trim system. The test will show if the system is correct after a repair. If minimum pressures are not obtainable, the trim system requires additional repair. “UP” Pressure Check IMPORTANT: Insure battery is fully charged before performing tests. 1. Tilt outboard to full “Up” position and engage tilt lock lever. 2. Slowly remove “Fill” plug to bleed pressure from reservoir. 3. Remove circlip securing manual release valve and unscrew release valve from trim assembly. NOTE: A small amount of trim fluid may drip from manual release valve hole. Place a suitable container under trim assembly to collect any leakage. NOTE: Assemble test adaptor by using O-ring installation tool to position small O-ring onto adaptor 1st, then install medium O-ring and lastly large O-ring. Thread brass fitting into test adaptor securely using teflon tape on threads. f e c b54457a bcdef g a-Test Adaptor (91-822778A2) b-O-ring Installation Tool c-Small O-ring (Install 1st) d-Medium O-ring (Install 2nd) e-Large O-ring (Install Last) f-Brass Fitting g-Apply Teflon Tape 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5B-23 POWER TRIM 4. Install test adaptor 91-822778A2 into manual release valve hole. a 54458 a-Test Adaptor (91-822778A2) 5. Thread hose from Test Gauge Kit (91-52915A6) into brass fitting on adaptor. a b c d e 54459 a-Brass Fitting b-Test Gauge Assembly c-Tilt Pin (Position in Hole Shown) d-Hose e-Hose (Not Used) 6. Reinstall fill plug. 7. Disengage tilt lock lever. Page 5B-24 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWER TRIM CAUTION Failure to install spare tilt pin (or hardened bolts and nuts) in hole shown could result in transom bracket failure and possible injury. 8. Move outboard “IN” until hole in swivel bracket “ear” aligns with the 3rd tilt hole in transom bracket. Lock engine in trim range by installing a 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) diameter tilt pin or two 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) hardened bolts and nuts thru the transom brackets and swivel bracket in the hole shown. a 54460 a-Tilt Pin Hole (Install Spare Tilt Pin or Hardened Bolts and Nuts) 9. Open valve (a) and close valve (b). a b 51374 10. Run trim “UP”. The minimum pressure should be 1300 P.S.I. (91 kg/cm2). 11. Run trim “DOWN” to release pressure and remove spare tilt pin or bolts and nuts. 12. Tilt outboard full “UP” and engage tilt lock lever. 13. Slowly remove “Fill” plug to bleed pressure. 14. Remove test gauge hose and adapter. 15. Reinstall Manual Release Valve and secure valve with circlip. 16. Retighten “Fill” plug. NOTE: If pressure is less than 1300 PSI (91 kg/cm2), troubleshoot system per instructions on page 5B-16. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5B-25 POWER TRIM “DOWN” Pressure Check IMPORTANT: Insure battery is fully charged before performing tests. 1. Tilt outboard to full “Up” position and engage tilt lock lever. 2. Slowly remove “Fill” plug to bleed pressure from reservoir. 3. Remove circlip securing manual release valve and unscrew release valve from trim assembly. NOTE: A small amount of trim fluid may drip from manual release valve hole. Place a suitable container under trim assembly to collect any leakage. NOTE: Assemble test adaptor by using O-ring installation tool to position small O-ring onto adaptor 1st, then install medium O-ring and lastly large O-ring. Thread brass fitting into test adaptor securely using teflon tape on threads. 3 f a e d c b g  a-Test Adaptor (91-822778A3) b-O-ring Installation Tool c-Small O-ring (Install 1st) d-Medium O-ring (Install 2nd) e-Large O-ring (Install Last) f-Brass Fitting g-Apply Teflon Tape 4. Install test adaptor 91-822778A3 into manual release valve hole. a 54458 a-Test Adaptor (91-822778A3) Page 5B-26 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWER TRIM 5. Thread hose from Test Gauge Kit (91-52915A6) into brass fitting on adaptor. a b c d e f g 54459 a-Brass Fitting b-Test Gauge Assembly c-Tilt Pin (Position in Hole Shown) d-Hose e-Hose (Not Used) f-OPEN Valve g-CLOSE Valve 6. Reinstall fill plug. 7. Disengage tilt lock lever. 8. Open valve (f) and close valve (g). 9. Run trim “DOWN”. Minimum pressure should be 500 P.S.I. (35 kg/cm2). 10. Tilt outboard full “UP” and engage tilt lock lever. 11. Slowly remove “Fill” plug to bleed pressure. 12. Remove test gauge hose and adaptor. 13. Reinstall manual release valve and secure valve with circlip. 14. Retighten “Fill” plug. NOTE: If pressure is less than 500 PSI (35 kg/cm2), troubleshoot system per instructions on Page 5B-15. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5B-27 POWER TRIM Hydraulic Repair TRIM ROD REMOVAL AND REPAIR NOTE: Power Trim does not have to be removed from outboard to remove trim rods. 1. Tilt outboard to full “UP” position and engage tilt lock lever. 2. Slowly remove “Fill” plug to bleed reservoir pressure. 3. Turn Manual Release Valve 3 to 4 turns (counterclockwise) to bleed remaining pressure. 4. Remove trim rod cylinder caps. NOTE: Place a clean pan under trim system to catch fluid. c d a b b 5133751353 a-Trim Rod Cylinder Cap b-Turn Counterclockwise to Remove c-Removal Tool (91-44487A1) d-Spanner Wrench (91-74951) 5. Install trim rod removal tool and pull trim rod from cylinder. a 27933 a-Trim Rod Removal Tool (91-44486A1) Page 5B-28 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWER TRIM CLEANING AND INSPECTION - TRIM RODS AND CAPS CAUTION Do not remove check valve (a). Check valve is preset to operate at a specific pressure. Removal and installation of check valve could result in improper operating pressure and possible system damage. NOTE: Check valve is in port side trim rod only. 1. Inspect check valve and check valve screen for debris; if debris cannot be removed, replace trim rod assembly. Clean trim rod with parts cleaner and dry with compressed air. 51352 a b a-Check Valve b-Check Valve Screen Trim Rod End Cap Seal 1. Inspect trim cap end seal and replace if damaged or if seal does not keep trim rod clean. a 51343 a-Seal (remove as shown) 2. Install new seal with seal lip up. TRIM ROD INSTALLATION IMPORTANT: Components must be free of dirt and lint. Any debris in the system can cause system to malfunction. NOTE: Install trim rod with check valve in the port (left) cylinder. 1. Apply Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid on all O-rings and seals before in- stallation. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5B-29 POWER TRIM 2. Install trim rods and caps. Use installation tool (91-44487A1) or spanner wrench (91-74951) to tighten caps securely. a a b b c c 51353 a-Trim Rods b-Cylinder End Caps c-Rod End Rollers (lubricate with Quicksilver Anti-Corrosion Grease or Special Lubricant 101) Tilt Ram REMOVAL - TILT ROD ASSEMBLY ONLY NOTE: Tilt Rod Assembly can be removed from cylinder without removing entire power trim system from outboard. TILT RAM COMPONENTS 51372 1 2 3 4 2 2 5 2 2 6 7 8 9 11 10 1-Housing - Tilt Ram 2-O-ring* (5) 3-Memory Piston** 4-Washer 5-Piston Assembly 6-End Cap 7-Oil Seal 8-Bolt (Design 1) 9-Nut (Design 2) 10 -Tilt Rod (Design 1) 11 -Tilt Rod (Design 2) *O-ring Repair Kit Available, P.N. 811607A1 (Includes item 7, Oil Seal) **Memory piston (3) for tilt rods (10 and 11) are different and must be used with correct tilt rod/cylinder assembly. Memory piston for Design 1 tilt rod is flat, Design 2 is dished to clear nut and thread. Page 5B-30 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWER TRIM TILT RAM REMOVAL - POWER TRIM SYSTEM REMOVED FROM OUTBOARD CAUTION Insure trim system is depressurized prior to tilt ram removal. 1. Remove cross pin. 2. Remove lower swivel pin. 51355 51366a b a-Cross Pin (Remove as shown) b-Lower Swivel Pin (Remove as shown) Disassembly 1. Secure tilt ram in a soft jawed vise. Remove tilt rod and cap. 51364 51337 91-74951 a b c a-Cap (Turn Counterclockwise to Remove) b-Spanner Wrench (91-74951) c-Tilt Rod - Pull to Remove 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5B-31 POWER TRIM 2. Clamp tilt rod in a soft jawed vise. Remove bolt or nut as applicable to disassemble rod assembly. Remove O-ring. 51378 51340 a b a-Bolt (Design 1) or Stud/Nut (Design 2) b-O-Ring IMPORTANT: Note Design 1 and 2 on page 5B-31. Design 1 tilt rod assembly replaces either tilt rod assembly. Either design will fit as a (replace) cylinder assembly complete. Design 2 will NOT fit a cylinder originally using a Design 1 tilt rod assembly. Memory Pistons for Design 1 and 2 differ also and must be used only on the cylinder the piston was removed from. 3. Remove washer, check valve assemblies, and piston. NOTE: Check valve held in by roll pin can be cleaned but not removed. 51363 a b c a-Washer b-Check Valve Assembly (7) c-Piston Page 5B-32 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWER TRIM 4. Remove end cap from tilt rod. 5. Remove allen plug. IMPORTANT: Remove plug from same side as holes in shaft. DO NOT REMOVE 51376 a b c 51361 a-End Cap b-Allen Plug c-Hole In Shaft 6. Lubricate shaft with Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid. Insert shaft into cylinder. 51342 7. Tap shaft into cylinder until shaft is positioned as shown. 51365 WARNING Memory Piston Cup may be expelled at a high velocity when air pressure is applied. Failure to place cylinder as shown below could result in personal injury. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5B-33 POWER TRIM 8. Place cylinder as shown. Hold down on cylinder and inject air into shaft opening. 51353 c b a a-Shop Cloth b-Solid Surface c-Air Nozzle 9. Remove shaft after Memory Piston Cup has been expelled. Replace allen plug removed in Step 5 and tighten securely. CLEANING AND INSPECTION 1. Inspect all internal parts for damage or wear. Clean and replace parts as necessary. 2. Inspect tilt rod for scratches. Replace scraper seal in rod end cap if tilt rod is scratched or worn. 3. Slight scratches or tool marks less than 0.005 in. (0.1 mm) deep in cylinder are acceptable. Scraper Seal Replacement 1. Remove components from end cap. a b b c d e a-Cap b-O-ring (2) c-Scraper Seal d-Washer e-Retaining Ring Page 5B-34 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWER TRIM REASSEMBLY IMPORTANT: Components must be clean for reassembly. Any debris in the system can cause the system to malfunction. NOTE: Refer to “Tilt Ram Components” for proper O-ring sizes. 1. Apply Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid on O-rings prior to reassembly. 2. Install O-ring on Memory Piston Cup and install in cylinder. 51372 a b a-O-ring b-Memory Piston Cup (Design 1 shown) 3. Assemble end cap. 4. Install end cap. a b b c d e a-End Cap b-O-ring (2) c-Scraper seal d-Washer e-Retaining Ring f-End Cap f 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5B-35 POWER TRIM 5. Install components on rod. 51340 51363 a b c c de a-Piston b-O-ring c-Check Valve Assembly (7) d-Washer e-Bolt or Locknut. (Tighten securely) 6. Clamp cylinder in a soft jawed vise and install tilt rod assembly. Use spanner wrench and tighten end cap securely. 51341 51337 91-74951 a b c a-Cylinder b-Tilt Rod Assembly c-End Cap (Tighten Securely.) Use Spanner Wrench. Page 5B-36 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWER TRIM TILT RAM ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION 1. Lubricate alignment tool (91-11230) and shaft. Use Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid. 51369a b a-Alignment Tool (91-11230) b-Shaft 2. Align tilt ram and housing using alignment tool. 3. Install shaft. 51348 b c d a a-Alignment Tool (91-11230) b-Shaft c-Groove d-Hole [Groove (c) will Align with this Hole] 4. Drive pin in until flush. 51356 a a-Pin (Drive Against Knurled End) 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5B-37 POWER TRIM Motor and Electrical Tests/Repair Trim Pump Motor Test WARNING Do not perform this test near flammable materials, as a spark may occur while making electrical connections. 1. Connect a 12 volt power supply to motor wires; one motor lead to POSITIVE (+) battery terminal and the other motor lead to the NEGATIVE (–) battery terminal. Motor should run. Reverse motor leads between battery terminals. Motor should run. 53774 2. If motor does not run, disassemble and check components. Motor Disassembly 1. Remove 2 screws. 53774 a a a-Screw (2) Page 5B-38 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWER TRIM 2. Remove frame and armature from end cap. Use care not to drop armature. 53779 a b c a-Frame b-Armature c-End Cap Armature Tests TEST FOR SHORTS Check armature on a Growler per the Growler manufacturer’s instructions. Replace armature if a short is indicated. TEST FOR GROUND 1. Use an Ohmmeter (Rx1 scale). Connect one lead on armature shaft and other lead on commutator. If continuity is indicated, armature is grounded. Replace armature. 53786 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5B-39 POWER TRIM CHECKING AND CLEANING COMMUTATOR 1. If commutator is worn it may be turned on an armature conditioner or a lathe. 2. Clean commutator with “OO” sandpaper. a 53775 a-Commutator FIELD TESTS IMPORTANT: Commutator end of armature must be installed in brushes when performing the following tests. Ohmmeter Leads Between Resistance (Ohms) Scale Reading* (x____________) BLUE and BLACK Motor Wires 0 (Rx1) BLACK Motor Wire, and Frame (Motor Housing) No Continuity (Rx1) BLUE Motor Wire and Frame No Continuity (Rx1) *If specified readings are not obtained, check for: • defective armature • dirty or worn brushes • dirty or worn commutator If defective components are found, repair or replace component(s) and retest. Motor Repair REMOVAL NOTE: Power Trim System does not have to be removed from outboard to repair/replace motor. DISASSEMBLY Refer to “Motor Disassembly” on page 5B-38 to disassemble motor from pump. Page 5B-40 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWER TRIM 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5B-41 CLEANING AND INSPECTION Inspect O-rings and replace if necessary. Carefully inspect power cord for cuts or tears which will allow water to enter motor. Replace cord if cut or torn. Clean, inspect, and test motor components. Refer to “Brush Replacement”, “Armature Test”, and “Field Tests” for inspection and test procedures. 53779 a b c d e a - Frame b - Armature c - Shim d - Brush Card Assembly e - O-rings BRUSH REPLACEMENT 1. Brush replacement is required if brushes are pitted, chipped, or if distance (a) between the brush pigtail and end of brush holder slot is 1/16 in. or less. Check distance with armature installed. 53784 a a - 1/16 in. POWER TRIM 2. To replace brush card, disconnect spade terminal. 3. Cut crimped brush lead. 4. Remove 2 screws securing brush card to end cap. a b c a-Spade Terminal b-Crimped Brush Lead c-Screws 5. Install new brush card (BRUSH and SEAL KIT 828714A1). 6. Crimp metal connector onto motor lead and new brush lead. 7. Connect spade connector motor lead to brush card connector. 8. Secure brush card to end cap with 2 screws and lockwashers. 9. Inspect O-ring for cuts and abrasions. Replace O-ring as required (BRUSH and SEAL KIT 828714A1). 53778 a b c d e a-Brush Card b-Metal Connector c-Spade Connector d-Screws and Lockwashers e-O-ring Page 5B-42 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWER TRIM 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5B-43 END CAP INSPECTION 1. Inspect seal and O-ring for cuts and abrasions. If replacement is required, install BRUSH and SEAL KIT 828714A1. 2. Inspect bushing for wear. If bushing appears to be excessively worn – grooves, scratches, etc. – install END FRAME ASSEMBLY (COMPLETE) 828715A1. 53785 c 53783 a b a - Seal (Apply 2-4-C w/Teflon to seal lips) b - O-ring c - Bushing 3. If trim motor is overheated, a thermoswitch located under brush card will open. Normally, this switch will reset itself within 1 minute. 53781 a a - Thermoswitch POWER TRIM Page 5B-44 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Reassembly IMPORTANT: Components must be clean. Any debris in power trim system can cause system to malfunction. 1. Install armature into end cap/brush card assembly. 53779 53784 a b c d a - Armature b - Shim c - End Cap Assembly d - Armature (Spread brushes to install armature into end cap) 2. Install O-rings in end cap. 53784 53783 a a a - O-rings POWER TRIM IMPORTANT: Attach Vise Grip[ pliers to armature shaft before installing frame as- sembly. The Vise Grip[ pliers will prevent the armature from being drawn out of the brush card assembly by the frame magnets while installing the frame assembly. 3. Install Vise Grip[ pliers on armature shaft. 4. Carefully install frame assembly over armature. 5. Position harness retainer hole over tab in end cap. 6. Secure frame assembly to end cap with 2 screws. 53776 a b c d e g h i if a-Vise Grip[ Pliers b-Armature Shaft c-O-ring d-End Cap e-Harness Retainer f-Retainer Hole g-O-ring h-Frame Assembly i-Screws 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5B-45 POWER TRIM Reassembly - Motor and Pump NOTE: Drive shaft is a loose part and may fall out of position. 1. Install pump onto power trim manifold. Insure O-rings are in proper locations. Secure with two (2) screws. Torque screws to 80 lb. in. (9 N·m). IMPORTANT: Install pump with location flat facing towards starboard transom bracket. 51433 a b c dc a-Pump (Flat Towards Starboard Transom Bracket) b-Flat - Faces Starboard Transom Bracket) c-O-rings (4) d-Drive Shaft (Install in Center Hole in Pump) 2. Fill pump with Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid prior to installing motor. 3. Install motor, secure with two (2) screws. Route wiring; refer to Wiring Diagrams in this service manual. Page 5B-46 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWER TRIM NOTE: Verify motor and drive shaft are aligned. 53782 53777 a b c c a-Motor b-O-ring c-Screw (2) Tighten securely. 4. Complete reassembly of Power Trim System as outlined in “Installation” on page 5B-21. Priming Power Trim System 1. Fill system with Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid or Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) Type F,FA, Dexron II or Dexron III. Refer to “Fill, Check, and Purge” on page 5B-10. IMPORTANT: Run Trim System in short “jogs” until pump motor primes and trim system moves. If trim motor is run without priming pump, drive shaft failure could result. Trim Sender Test 1. Check trim sender black lead for proper ground. 2. Trim outboard to full “DOWN” position. 3. Place ignition switch to “ON” position. 4. Disconnect BRN/WHT trim sender wire from trim sender harness. 5. Connect Ohmmeter (Rx1 scale) leads between outboard ground and Point 1 (trim sender end). 6. Depress “UP” button. Ohmmeter needle should move as the outboard is trimmed up. If needle does not move, trim sender is defective. a 1 22908 a-Trim sender 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5B-47 POWER TRIM Trim Indicator Gauge Needle Adjustment 1. Turn ignition key to “RUN” position. 2. Tilt outboard to full “IN” position. Needle of trim indicator gauge should be in full “IN” position. 3. If not, tilt outboard to full “OUT” position to gain access to trim sender and engage tilt lock lever. 4. Loosen trim sender screws and reposition trim sender. 5. Tighten trim sender screws. a b c d e 22744 a-Trim Sender b-Screws, Loosen to Rotate Sender c-Turn Sender Counterclockwise to raise needle reading d-Turn Sender Clockwise to Lower Needle Reading e-Tilt lock lever Page 5B-48 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 POWER TRIM Trim Indicator Wiring Diagrams Wiring Diagram - For boats equipped with Quicksilver Commander Series side mount remote control. Wiring Diagram - For boats equipped with Quicksilver Ignition/Choke and Main Harness Assembly. a b c e d a f g c e d a-Trim Indicator b-Remote Control c-Trim Sender d-Engine Ground e-To Engine f-Ignition Switch g-Power Trim Harness 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 5B-49 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING LOWER UNIT Section 6A – Right Hand Non-Ratcheting Table of Contents Gear Housing Specifications (Standard Rotation) . 6A-1 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-2 Notes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-5 Gear Housing (Drive Shaft)(Standard Rotation) . . 6A-6 Gear Housing (Prop Shaft)(Standard Rotation) . . . 6A-8 General Service Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-10 Removal, Disassembly, Cleaning and Inspection – Standard Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-11 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-11 Draining and Inspecting Gear Housing Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-12 Water Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-13 Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft Removal . 6A-16 Shift Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-18 Propeller Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-20 Clutch Actuator Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-22 Pinion Gear and Driveshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-22 Forward Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-25 Gear Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-26 Reassembly and Installation Standard Rotation . 6A-26 Driveshaft Needle Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-26 Bearing Carrier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-27 Forward Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-30 Forward Gear Bearing Race . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-31 Driveshaft and Pinion Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-32 Pinion Gear Depth/Forward Gear Backlash/Reverse Gear Backlash . . . . . . . . . . 6A-34 Clutch Actuator Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-38 Shift Shaft Bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-38 Propeller Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-39 Water Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-42 Gear Lubricant Filling Instructions . . . . . . . . . . 6A-45 Installing Gear Housing to Driveshaft Housing 6A-45 Propeller Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-46 6 A Gear Housing Specifications (Standard Rotation) Ratio Pinion Depth Forward Gear Backlash Reverse Gear Backlash 1.87:1 0.025 in. (0.635 mm) With Tool 91-12349A2 using Disc #2 and Flat #7 0.018 in. to 0.027 in. (0.460 mm to 0.686 mm) Pointer on line mark #1 0.030 in. to 0.050 in. (0.762 mm to 1.27 mm) 2.0:1 0.025 in. (0.635 mm) With Tool 91-12349A2 using Disc #2 and Flat #7 0.015 in. to 0.022 in. (0.38 mm to 0.56 mm) Pointer on line mark #2 0.030 in. to 0.050 in. (0.762 mm to 1.27 mm) 2.3:1 0.025 in. (0.635 mm) With Tool 91-12349A2 using Disc #2 and Flat #7 0.018 in. to 0.023 in. (0.46 mm to 0.58 mm) Pointer on line mark #4 0.030 in. to 0.050 in. (0.762 mm to 1.27 mm) Gearcase Lubricant Capacity All Ratios 22.5 fl. oz. (665.4 ml) 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6A-1 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING Special Tools 1. Shift Shaft Bushing Tool 91-31107 2. Gear Housing Cover Nut Tool 91-61069 3. Bearing Carrier Removal Tool 91-46086A1 and Puller Bolt 91-85716 4. Slide Hammer Puller 91-34569A1 5. Bearing Removal and Installation Kit 91-31229A5. This kit contains the following tools: Pilot 91-36571; Puller Rod 91-31229; Nut 11-24156; Puller Plate 91-29310; Mandrel 91-38628; and Driver Rod 91-37323. 6. Pilot 91-36571 7. Puller Rod 91-31229 and Nut 91-24156 Page 6A-2 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING 8. Puller Plate 91-29310 9. Mandrel 91-38628 10. Driver Rod 91-37323 11. Universal Puller Plate 91-37241 12. Cross Pin Tool 91-86642 13. Driveshaft Holding Tool 91-34377A1or 91-90094 14. Oil Seal Driver 91-31108 15. Forward Gear Bearing Tool 91-86943 16. Bearing Driver Cup 91-31106 17. Pinion Locating Gear Tool 91-12349A2 or 91-74776 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6A-3 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING 18. Backlash Indicator Rod 91-78473 19. Dial Indicator 91-58222A1 20. Bearing Retainer Tool 91-43506 21. Bearing Preload Tool 91-14311A1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1-Adaptor (N.S.S.) 2-Bearing (N.S.S.) 3-Washer (N.S.S.) 4-Spring (24-14111) 5-Bolt (10-12580) 6-Nut (11-13953) 7-Set Screw (10-12575) 8-Sleeve (23-13946) 22. Mandrel 91-92788 23. Mandrel 91-15755 24. Dial Indicator Holder 91-89897 Page 6A-4 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING Notes: 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6A-5 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING Page 6A-6 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Gear Housing (Drive Shaft)(Standard Rotation) 1 2 3 7 8 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 22 23 24 26 25 27 29 30 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 46 45 47 48 49 11 20 10 45 28 31 23 95 95 7 95 95 95 98 33 109 7 95 95 7 95 19 95 109 9 95 23 Soap (Purchase Locally) 4.75 IN./120.65MM TORPEDO DIA. 7 Loctite 271 (92-809820) 19 Perfect Seal (92-34227-1) 33 Loctite 680 (92-809833) 95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12) 109 GM Silicone Sealer (92-91600-1) 4 5 6 18 21 19 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING Gear Housing (Drive Shaft)(Standard Rotation) REFREF. .. NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION TORQUE lb-in lb-ft Nm. 1 1 GEAR HOUSING (BLACK)(BASIC) 2 1 CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY 50 5.5 3 2 DOWEL PIN 44 1 STUD (3-1/8 IN.) (LONG) 1 STUD (3-11/16 IN.) (X-LONG) 5 2 STUD (2-1/16 IN.) 6 1 STUD (3-3/8 IN.) 7 2 STUD (3-1/8 IN.) 8 1 FILLER BLOCK 9 1 ROLLER BEARING 10 2 ANODE 11 1 SCREW (M6 x 40) 12 1 NUT 60 7 1313 1 PINION GEAR (1.87:1 - 15 TEETH)(150)(Part of 43-828174A2) 1 PINION GEAR (2:1 - 14 TEETH)(135)(Also part of 43-828176A2) 14 1 WASHER 15 1 NUT 75 101 16 AR SHIM SET 17 1 SCREW–drain (MAGNETIC) 60 7 18 1 SCREW–grease filler 60 7 19 2 WASHER 20 1 STA-STRAP 21 1 SHIFT SHAFT 22 1 O-RING 23 1 BUSHING ASSEMBLY 50 5.5 24 1 OIL SEAL 25 1 WASHER–rubber 2626 1 DRIVE SHAFT (LONG) 1 DRIVE SHAFT (X-LONG) 27 1 ROLLER BEARING 28 1 CUP 29 1 RETAINER 100 135 30 1 WATER PUMP BASE 31 1 RETAINER 32 1 GASKET 33 1 O-RING 34 1 OIL SEAL 35 1 OIL SEAL 36 1 GASKET–lower 37 1 GASKET–upper 38 1 FACE PLATE 39 1 WATER PUMP BODY ASSEMBLY 40 1 INSERT 41 1 SEAL–rubber 42 1 lMPELLER 43 1 KEY 44 1 SCREW (#14-8 x 2-1/4 IN.) 35 4 45 2 WASHER 46 2 NUT 50 68 47 1 WASHER 48 1 NUT 50 68 49 1 SLEEVE 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6A-7 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING Gear Housing (Prop Shaft)(Standard Rotation) 87 Super Duty Gear Lubricant (92-13783A24) 4.75 IN./120.65MM TORPEDO DIA. 7 Loctite 271 (92-809820) 94 Anti-Corrosion Grease (92-78376A6) 95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12) Page 6A-8 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING Gear Housing (Prop Shaft)(Standard Rotation) REFREF. .. NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION TORQUE lb-in lb-ft Nm. 1 1 GEAR HOUSING (BLACK)(BASIC) 50 1 CAM FOLLOWER 51 1 SHIFT CAM 52 1 ROD 5353 1 FORWARD GEAR (1.87:1 – 15/28)(150) 1 FORWARD GEAR (2:1 – 14/28)(135) 54 AR SHIM SET 55 1 TAPERED ROLLER BEARING 56 1 CUP 57 1 NEEDLE BEARING 58 1 CLUTCH 59 1 CROSS PIN 60 1 DETENT PIN 61 1 SPRING 62 1 PROPELLER SHAFT 6363 1 REVERSE GEAR (1.87:1 – 15/28)(150) 1 REVERSE GEAR (2:1 – 14/28)(135) 64 1 THRUST SPACER 65 1 THRUST RING 66 1 BALL BEARING 67 1 O-RING 68 1 BEARING CARRIER ASSEMBLY 69 1 ROLLER BEARING 70 1 OIL SEAL (INSIDE) 71 1 OIL SEAL (OUTSIDE) 72 1 KEY 73 1 TAB WASHER 74 1 COVER 210 285 75 1 TRIM TAB 76 1 SCREW (1-3/4 IN.) 25 34 77 1 SCREW (3/8-16 x 1 IN.) 30 41 78 2 WASHER 79 2 NUT 50 68 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6A-9 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING General Service Recommendations There may be more than one way to “disassemble” or “reassemble” a particular part(s), therefore, it is recommended that the entire procedure be read prior to repair. IMPORTANT: Read the following before attempting any repairs. In many cases, disassembly of a sub-assembly may not be necessary until cleaning and inspection reveals that disassembly is required for replacement of one or more components. Service procedure order in this section is a normal disassembly-reassembly sequence. It is suggested that the sequence be followed without deviation to assure proper repairs. When performing partial repairs, follow the instructions to the point where the desired component can be replaced, then proceed to “reassembly and installation” of that component in the reassembly part of this section. Use the “Table of Contents” (on back of section divider) to find correct page number. Threaded parts are right hand (RH), unless otherwise indicated. When holding, pressing or driving is required, use soft metal vise jaw protectors or wood for protection of parts. Use a suitable mandrel (one that will contact only the bearing race) when pressing or driving bearings. Whenever compressed air is used to dry a part, be sure that no water is present in air line. BEARINGS Upon disassembly of gear housing, all bearings must be cleaned and inspected. Clean bearings with solvent and dry with compressed air. Air should be directed at the bearing so that it passes thru the bearing. DO NOT spin bearing with compressed air, as this may cause bearing to score from lack of lubrication. After cleaning, lubricate bearings with Quicksilver Gear Lubricant. DO NOT lubricate tapered bearing cups until after inspection. Inspect all bearings for roughness, catches and bearing race side wear. Work inner bearing race in-and-out, while holding outer race, to check for side wear. When inspecting tapered bearings, determine condition of rollers and inner bearing race by inspecting bearing cup for pitting, scoring, grooves, uneven wear, imbedded particles and/or discoloration from overheating. Always replace tapered bearing and race as a set. Roller bearing condition is determined by inspecting the bearing surface of the shaft that the roller bearing supports. Check shaft surface for pitting, scoring, grooving, imbedded particles, uneven wear and/or discoloration from overheating. The shaft and bearing must be replaced, if the conditions described are found. SHIMS Keep a record of all shim amounts and location during disassembly to aid in reassembly. Be sure to follow shimming instructions during reassembly, as gears must be installed to correct depth and have the correct amount of backlash to avoid noisy operation and premature gear failure. SEALS As a normal procedure, all O-rings and oil seals SHOULD BE REPLACED without regard to appearance. To prevent leakage around oil seals, apply Loctite 271 to outer diameter of all metal case oil seals. When using Loctite on seals or threads, surfaces must be clean and dry. To ease installation, apply Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant on all O-rings. To prevent wear, apply Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant on l.D. of oil seals. Page 6A-10 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING To prevent corrosion damage after reassembly, apply Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant to external surfaces of bearing carrier and cover nut threads prior to installation. Removal, Disassembly, Cleaning and Inspection – Standard Rotation Removal WARNING Disconnect high tension leads from spark plugs and remove spark plugs from engine before removing gear housing from driveshaft housing. 1. Disconnect high tension leads from spark plugs and remove spark plugs from engine. CAUTION Gear housing MUST BE in NEUTRAL position and shift shaft MUST BE removed from gear housing BEFORE propeller shaft can be removed from gear housing. 2. Shift engine into neutral position. 3. Tilt engine to full up position and engage tilt lock lever. 4. Bend tabs of propeller tab washer away from thrust hub (rear), then remove propeller locknut, tab washer, thrust hub (rear), propeller and thrust hub (forward) from propeller shaft. a-Thrust Hub (Forward) b-Propeller Shaft c-Continuity Washer (If Equipped) d-Rear Thrust Hub e-Tab Washer f-Propeller Nut 5. Mark gear housing and trim tab so that trim tab can be reinstalled in the same position. Remove plastic cap at rear edge of driveshaft housing, then unthread bolt that secures trim tab and remove trim tab from gear housing. 6. Once trim tab is removed, remove bolt from inside of trim tab cavity. 51871 51866 a b c d d e f 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6A-11 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING 7. Remove 2 locknuts from bottom middle of anti-cavitation plate. 51866 a b c a-Bolt (Secures Trim Tab) b-Bolt (Inside Trim Tab Cavity) c-Locknuts and Washers 8. Remove locknut from the front gear housing mounting stud. 9. Loosen the side mounting locknuts. (DO NOT attempt to remove one nut before opposite side is loosened sufficiently, or driveshaft housing could be damaged.) 10. Pull gear housing away from driveshaft housing as far as the loosened nuts (in Step 9) will allow, then remove loosened nuts. (DO NOT allow gear housing to fall, as it now is free.) 11. Pull gear housing from driveshaft housing. 51879 a b a-Front Mounting Locknut b-Side Mounting Locknut (One Each Side) Draining and Inspecting Gear Housing Lubricant 1. Place gear housing in a suitable holding fixture or vise with the driveshaft in a vertical position. Page 6A-12 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING NOTE: Drain and Fill screws may be located on the starboard side of gearcase on later models. 2. Position a clean drain pan under gear housing and remove “Fill” and “Vent” screws from gear housing. 51871 b a a-“Fill” Screw b-“Vent” Screw 3. Inspect gear lubricant for metal particles. Presence of a small amount of fine metal particles (resembling powder) indicates normal wear. Presence of larger particles (or a large quantity of fine particles) indicates need for gear housing disassembly, and component inspection. 4. Note the color of gear lubricant. White or cream color indicates presence of water in lubricant. Check drain pan for water separation from lubricant. Presence of water in gear lubricant indicates the need for disassembly, and inspection of oil seals, seal surfaces, O-rings and gear housing components. NOTE: Gear lubricant drained from a recently run gear case will be a light chocolate brown in color due to agitation/aeration. Oil which is stabilized will be a clear yellow brown in color. Water Pump CLEANING AND INSPECTION 1. Clean all water pump parts with solvent and dry with compressed air. 2. Inspect water pump cover and base for cracks and distortion (from overheating). 3. Inspect face plate and water pump insert for grooves and/or rough surfaces. IMPORTANT: When completing gear housing repairs, that require removal of water pump impeller, it is recommended that the impeller be replaced. If it is necessary, however, to re-use impeller, DO NOT install in reverse to original rotation, or premature impeller failure will occur. 4. Inspect impeller side seal surfaces and ends of impeller blades for cracks, tears and wear. Replace impeller if any of these conditions are found. 5. Inspect impeller bonding to impeller hub. 6. Inspect impeller for glazed or melted appearance (caused by operation without sufficient water supply). Replace impeller if any of these conditions exist. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6A-13 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING IMPORTANT: It is recommended that all seals and gaskets be replaced (as a normal repair procedure) to assure effective repair. REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY 1. Slide rubber centrifugal slinger up and off driveshaft. 2. Remove water tube guide and seal from water pump cover. (Retain guide for reassembly and discard seal.) 3. Remove (and retain) 3 nuts, one bolt and all washers which secure water pump cover to gear housing. 4. Using 2 pry bars, lift water pump cover up and off driveshaft. 51874 a-Water Tube Guide b-Water Tube Seal c-Nuts, Bolt and Washers To Be Removed a b c 5. Inspect water pump cover and insert, as outlined in “Cleaning and Inspection,” previous. 6. If inspection of water pump insert determines that replacement is required, follow Step “a” or “b” (immediately following) to remove insert from water pump cover. NOTE: Try Step “a” first. If insert cannot be removed with Step “a,” use Step “b”. a. Drive water pump insert out of water pump cover with a punch and hammer. 51874 Page 6A-14 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING b. Drill two 3/16 in. (4.8mm) diameter holes thru the top of water pump cover (but not thru insert). Drive insert out of cover with a punch and hammer. 51873 a a-Drill Two Holes at These Locations 7. Remove impeller from driveshaft. (It may be necessary to use a punch and hammer to drive impeller upward on driveshaft. In extreme cases, it may be necessary to split hub of impeller with a hammer and chisel.) 8. Once impeller is removed, remove impeller drive key from driveshaft. 9. Remove water pump face plate and both gaskets (one above and below face plate) from water pump base. 10. Using 2 pry bars, positioned and padded as shown, lift water pump base up and off driveshaft. 51874 a a-Pads 11. Remove (and discard) O-ring from O-ring groove on water pump base. 12. Using a screwdriver, pry oil seals out of water pump base from gear housing side of base. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6A-15 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft Removal CAUTION Gear housing MUST BE in NEUTRAL position, and shift shaft MUST BE removed from gear housing before propeller shaft can be removed from gear housing. 51865 bc 51874 a 1. Place gear housing in a suitable holding fixture with propeller shaft in a horizontal position. 2. Use Shift Shaft Bushing Tool (91-31107) to unthread shift shaft bushing. (DO NOT remove bushing from shift shaft at this time.) IMPORTANT: Prior to removal of shift shaft from gear housing, recheck that gear housing is in NEUTRAL position. 3. Bend cover nut lock tab out of cover nut recess. a-Shift Shaft Bushing Tool (91-31107) b-Punch c-Tab of Tab Washer 4. Remove gear housing cover nut with Cover Nut Tool (91-61069). a 51866 a-Cover Nut Tool (91-61069) 5. After cover nut has been removed, remove lock tab washer from gear housing. CAUTION Once bearing carrier is removed from gear housing, extreme care MUST BE taken not to apply any side force on propeller shaft. Side force on propeller shaft may break the neck of the clutch actuator rod. Page 6A-16 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING 6. Use long Puller Jaws (91-46086A1) and Puller Bolt (91-85716) to remove bearing carrier. (Use propeller thrust hub to maintain outward pressure on puller jaws.) NOTE: When bearing carrier is removed from gear housing, the bearing carrier alignment key will come out with it. 7. With gear housing in NEUTRAL, pull shift shaft out of gear housing. If necessary, use a pliers to pull shift shaft out of gear housing. If pliers are used to pull shift shaft out, wrap a strip of soft metal (aluminum) around splines before clamping pliers. DO NOT turn shaft (clockwise OR counterclockwise) while pulling shaft out. (For further information on shift shaft, see “Shift Shaft Cleaning/lnspection and Disassembly.”) 51867 d e a b c a-Long Puller Jaws (91-46086A1) b-Puller Bolt (91-85716) c-Thrust Hub d-Shift Shaft Bushing e-Shift Shaft CAUTION Propeller shaft, cam follower and shift cam, in most cases, will come out of gear housing by simply pulling outward on propeller shaft. DO NOT FORCE shaft sideways or ATTEMPT TO PULL with a slide hammer or any mechanical puller. 8. Remove propeller shaft, cam follower and shift cam by pulling shaft straight out of gear housing. (DO NOT JERK propeller shaft.) If propeller shaft will not come out, proceed with Step “a” or “b”, following: a. Push propeller shaft back into place against the forward gear. Visually inspect location of shift cam by looking down shift shaft hole (illuminated with a flashlight). If splined hole in shift cam is visible, reinstall shift shaft and rotate shift shaft to neutral position. Remove shift shaft, then remove propeller shaft as instructed in Step 8, immediately preceding. b. Push propeller shaft back into place against forward gear. Slide bearing carrier back into gear housing (to support propeller shaft). Place gear housing on its left side (viewed from rear) and strike upper leading end of gear housing with a rubber mallet. This will dislodge the shift cam from cam follower into a clearance pocket in left side of gear housing. Remove bearing carrier and pull propeller shaft out of gear housing. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6A-17 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING NOTE: If Step 8-b was used to remove propeller shaft, the shift cam can be retrieved after removal of forward gear. Shift Shaft CLEANING AND INSPECTION 1. Clean shift shaft and bushing with solvent and dry with compressed air. 2. Check shift shaft splines on both ends for wear and/or corrosion damage. 3. Inspect shift shaft for groove(s) at shift shaft bushing seal surface. 4. Inspect shift shaft bushing for corrosion damage. 5. Inspect shift shaft bushing oil seal for wear and/or cuts. NOTE: Oil seal in shift shaft bushing should be replaced as a normal repair procedure. DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove (and discard) shift shaft bushing oil seal by prying it out or driving it out with a punch and hammer. CLEANING/INSPECTION - BEARING CARRIER IMPORTANT: It is recommended that all seals and O-rings be replaced (as a normal repair procedure) to assure effective repair. 1. Clean bearing carrier with solvent and dry with compressed air. CAUTION DO NOT spin bearings dry with compressed air, as this could cause bearing to score. 2. Bearing carrier propeller shaft needle bearing condition is determined by propeller shaft bearing surface condition. (See “Propeller Shaft Inspection.”) 3. Inspect reverse gear to pinion gear wear pattern (should be even and smooth). If not, replace reverse gear and pinion gear. 4. Check clutch jaws on reverse gear for damage. Replace reverse gear, if damage is found on clutch jaws. 5. Apply light oil to reverse gear bearing. Rotate reverse gear bearing while checking bearing for rough spots and/or catches. Push in and pull out on reverse gear to check for bearing side wear. Replace bearing if any of the listed conditions exist. DISASSEMBLY - BEARING CARRIER 1. Remove and discard O-ring from between bearing carrier and thrust washer. 2. If inspection of reverse gear or reverse gear bearing determines that replacement of gear or bearing is required, remove gear and bearing as follows: a. Position bearing carrier in a soft jaw vise. b. Use Slide Hammer (91-34569A1) and remove reverse gear. 51868 Page 6A-18 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 a a RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING c. If reverse gear bearing remains attached to reverse gear, install Universal Puller Plate (91-37241) and position puller plate, gear and bearing on a press with gear side down. Use a suitable mandrel and press gear out of bearing. 51874a b a-Universal Puller Plate b-Mandrel d. If reverse gear bearing has remained in bearing carrier, use slide hammer to remove bearing in the same methods as was used to remove reverse gear (Step “b”). 3. Propeller shaft oil seals can be removed by (a) using a pry bar, or (b) pressing seals out when propeller shaft needle bearing is pressed out of bearing carrier. 4. If inspection of propeller shaft needle bearing determines that replacement of bearing is required, use Universal Bearing Removal and Installation Tool (91-31229A1) to press bearing and seals out of bearing carrier. NOTE: Reverse gear must be removed from bearing carrier before propeller shaft needle bearing can be removed. 51871 b c d 51868 a-Pry Bar b-Propeller Shaft Needle Bearing c-Mandrel d-Oil Seals 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6A-19 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING Propeller Shaft INSPECTION 1. Clean propeller shaft assembly with solvent and dry with compressed air. 2. Inspect bearing carrier oil seal surfaces for grooves. Run fingernail across seal surface to check for groove. Replace shaft if groove is found. 3. Visually check bearing surfaces of propeller shaft for pitting, grooves, scoring, uneven wear or discoloration (bluish color) from overheating. Replace shaft and corresponding needle bearing if any of the above conditions are found. (Bearing carrier needle bearing contacts propeller shaft just in front of oil seal surface. Forward gear bearing contacts propeller shaft in front of sliding clutch splines.) 4. Inspect propeller shaft splines for wear and/or corrosion damage. 5. Check propeller shaft for straightness. Use either method, following: BALANCE WHEELS Place propeller shaft on balance wheels. Rotate propeller shaft and observe propeller end of shaft for “wobble.” Replace shaft if any “wobble” is observed. a b b c 51872 a-Balance Wheels b-Bearing Surfaces c-Watch for Wobble Position propeller shaft roller bearing surfaces on “vee” blocks. Mount a dial indicator at front edge of propeller splines. Rotate propeller shaft. Dial indicator movement of more than 0.006 in. (0.152 mm) (or noticeable “wobble”) is reason for replacement. a bb c 51872 a-“Vee” Blocks b-Bearing Surfaces c-Measure with Dial Indicator at this Point Page 6A-20 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING 6. Inspect sliding clutch. Check reverse gear and forward gear clutch jaws. Rounded jaws indicate one or more of the following: a. Improper shift cable adjustment. b. Improper shift habits of operator(s) (shift from NEUTRAL to REVERSE gear too slowly). c. Engine idle speed too high (while shifting). 51865 a a a-Clutch Jaws 7. Check condition of cam follower. If it shows wear (pitting, scoring or rough surface), replace cam follower and shift cam. DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove shift cam from cam follower. 2. Insert a thin blade screwdriver or awl under first coil of cross pin retainer spring and rotate propeller shaft to unwind spring from sliding clutch. DO NOT over-stretch spring. CAUTION Detent pin is free and can fall out of sliding clutch. Care MUST BE taken not to lose pin. 3. Detent pin is free and can be removed from sliding clutch at this time. 51864 a b a-Awl b-Cross Pin Retainer Spring c-Detent Pin d-Cross Pin e-Sliding Clutch 51864 c d e 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6A-21 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING 4. Push cross pin out of sliding clutch and propeller shaft with Cross Pin Tool (91-86642). 5. Pull sliding clutch off propeller shaft. 6. Pull cam follower and clutch actuator rod out of propeller shaft. DO NOT force cam follower up-or-down or side-to-side when pulling from propeller shaft. 51864 51864 c d e a b a-Cross Pin Tool (91-86642) b-Cross Pin c-Cam Follower d-Clutch Actuator Rod e-Propeller Shaft 7. Once cam follower and clutch actuator rod are removed from propeller shaft, lift rod out of cam follower. Clutch Actuator Rod CLEANING AND INSPECTION 1. Clean clutch actuator rod in solvent and dry with compressed air. 2. Inspect actuator components for wear or damage. Replace components as required. Pinion Gear and Driveshaft REMOVAL 1. Remove bearing retainer using Bearing Retainer Tool (91-43506). 51865 a b a-Bearing Retainer b-Bearing Retainer Tool (91-43506) 2. Place Driveshaft Holding Tool (91-34377A1) over driveshaft splines. 3. Use a socket and flex handle to hold pinion nut. (Pad area of gear housing where flex handle will make contact to prevent damage to gear housing.) 4. Use a socket and flex handle on Driveshaft Holding Tool to loosen pinion nut. Remove pinion nut and Driveshaft Holding Tool. Page 6A-22 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING 5. Remove gear housing from vise and re-position it as shown. Be sure to use soft jaw vise covers and clamp as close as possible to water pump studs. 6. Place a block of wood on gear housing mating surface. Use a mallet and carefully tap gear housing away from driveshaft. CAUTION DO NOT strike gear housing hard with the mallet or allow gear housing to fall. 51870 ab a-Wooden Block b-Soft Jaw Vise Covers 7. Reach into gear housing and remove pinion gear and forward gear assembly. 8. After driveshaft is removed from gear case, remove and retain shim(s) that were located under upper tapered driveshaft bearing. 9. If inspection determines that replacement of driveshaft tapered bearing is required, remove bearing from driveshaft as follows: a. Position driveshaft in a vise; DO NOT tighten vise jaws against shaft. b. Strike shaft with a lead hammer; take care not to drop shaft. 51866 10. Remove 18 loose needles from outer race of driveshaft needle bearing. 11. If inspection of driveshaft needle bearing surface determines that replacement of needle bearing is required, the 18 loose needle bearings previously removed must be reinstalled in bearing race to provide surface for mandrel to drive against. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6A-23 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING NOTE: FORWARD gear must be removed first BEFORE removing driveshaft needle bearing. IMPORTANT: Discard driveshaft needle bearing after removal. (Bearing cannot be reused.) 51869 a b c a-Mandrel (91-37263) b-Pilot* (91-36571) c-Driver Rod* (91-37323) *From Bearing Removal and Installation Kit (91-31229A5) CLEANING AND INSPECTION 1. Clean driveshaft, tapered bearing and race, and pinion gear with solvent. Dry with compressed air. DO NOT allow driveshaft bearing to spin while drying. 2. Inspect pinion gear for pitting, grooves, scoring, uneven wear and/or discoloration from overheating. Replace pinion gear, if any of the above conditions are found. 3. Inspect driveshaft needle bearing surface (area just above pinion gear splines) for pitting, grooves, scoring, uneven wear and/or discoloration from overheating. Replace driveshaft and driveshaft needle bearing, if any of the preceding conditions are found. 4. Inspect driveshaft to crankshaft splines for wear. Replace driveshaft if wear is excessive. 5. Inspect tapered bearing race for pitting, grooves, scoring, uneven wear and discoloration from overheating. Replace tapered bearing and race as a set, if any of the preceding conditions are found. 6. Inspect driveshaft for groove(s) where water pump base oil seals contact shaft. Replace driveshaft if groove(s) are found. Page 6A-24 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING Forward Gear REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY NOTE: Forward gear can only be removed from gear housing after driveshaft and pinion gear have been removed. 1. Reach into gear housing and lift out forward gear. IMPORTANT: DO NOT remove tapered bearing or needle bearings from forward gear, unless replacement of bearings is required. (Bearings cannot be reused after they have been removed.) 2. If inspection determines that replacement of forward gear tapered bearing is required, remove bearing from gear and bearing race from gear housing (tapered bearing and race MUST BE replaced as a set), as follows: a. Install Universal Puller Plate (91-37241) between forward gear and tapered bearing. b. Place forward gear, bearing and puller plate on a press and press gear out of bearing with a suitable mandrel. c. Use Slide Hammer (91-34569A1) to remove forward gear tapered bearing race. 5186551870 c d a b a-Universal Puller Plate b-Mandrel c-Slide Hammer d-Tapered Bearing Race d. After forward gear tapered bearing race is removed from gear housing, lift out and retain shims which were behind bearing race. 3. If inspection determines that replacement of propeller shaft needle bearings in forward gear is required, remove bearing from gear as follows: a. Clamp forward gear in a soft jaw vise securely. b. From toothed-side of gear, drive propeller shaft needle bearings out of gear with a punch and hammer. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6A-25 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING CLEANING AND INSPECTION CAUTION DO NOT spin bearings dry with compressed air, as this could cause bearing to score. 1. Clean forward gear and bearings with solvent and dry with compressed air. 2. Inspect gear teeth for pitting, grooves, scoring, uneven wear and for discoloration (from overheating). Replace gear if any of these conditions are found. 3. Check clutch jaws on forward gear for damage. Replace forward gear if damage is found. 4. Inspect tapered bearing race for pitting, grooves, scoring, uneven wear and discoloration (from overheating). Replace tapered bearing (on forward gear) and race if any of these conditions are found. (Always replace tapered bearing and race as a set.) 5. To determine condition of propeller shaft needle bearings (in forward gear), inspect propeller shaft forward gear needle bearing surface as outlined in “Propeller Shaft Inspection.” Gear Housing CLEANING AND INSPECTION 1. Clean gear housing with solvent and dry with compressed air. 2. Check gear housing carefully for impact damage. 3. Check for loose fitting bearing cups and needle bearings. 4. Inspect bearing carrier cover nut retainer threads in gear housing for corrosion damage and/or stripped threads. Reassembly and Installation Standard Rotation Driveshaft Needle Bearing REASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION CAUTION If driveshaft needle bearing failure has occurred, and original bearing race has turned in the gear housing, gear housing MUST be replaced. Loose fitting needle bearing will move out of position and cause repeated failures. 1. Apply a thin coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Lubricant to driveshaft needle bearing bore in gear housing. 2. By way of propeller shaft cavity, place needle bearing in driveshaft bore with numbered side of bearing facing up driveshaft bore. Page 6A-26 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING 3. Install and seat needle bearing with the following tools: Puller Rod* (91-31229), Nut* (11-24156), Pilot* (91-36571), Plate* (91-29310), and Mandrel (models with preloaded driveshaft use 91-38628*; models with standard driveshaft use 91-92788). Pull bearing up into bore until it bottoms on gear housing shoulder. (DO NOT use excessive force.) *From Bearing Removal and Installation Kit (91-31229A5) 51869 a b c d e f a-Mandrel b-Bearing c-Pilot d-Plate e-Puller Rod f-Hold Bearing Carrier REASSEMBLY 1. Place reverse gear on a press with gear teeth facing down. IMPORTANT: The reverse gear thrust washer has a tapered outside diameter so that one side is larger than the other. The larger outside diameter of washer must be toward reverse gear. 2. Place thrust washer over gear with the larger outside diameter down toward gear. 3. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant onto inside diameter of reverse gear ball bearing. 4. Position ball bearing over gear (with numbered side of bearing up). 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6A-27 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING 5. Press ball bearing onto gear with a suitable mandrel until firmly seated. (Be sure to press only on inner race of bearing and that bearing is firm against gear.) 6. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant onto outside diameter of propeller shaft needle bearing. 7. Place propeller shaft needle bearing into aft end of bearing carrier with numbered side toward aft end. 8. Use Mandrel 91-15755 and press needle bearing into bearing carrier. 51872 51873 a b c a-Thrust Washer b-Mandrel c-Mandrel (91-15755) 9. Apply Loctite 271 to outer diameter of propeller shaft oil seals. 10. Place one seal on longer shoulder side of Oil Seal Driver (91-31108) with lip of seal away from shoulder. Press seal into bearing carrier until seal driver bottoms against bearing carrier. 51872 a b c a-Oil Seal (Lip of Seal Down) b-Oil Seal Driver c-Seated Page 6A-28 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING 11. Place second seal on short shoulder side of seal driver with lip of seal toward shoulder. Press seal into bearing carrier until seal driver bottoms against bearing carrier. a b c 51872 a-Oil Seal (Lip of Seal Up) b-Oil Seal Driver c-Seated 12. Wipe off excess Loctite. 13. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant onto the outside diameter of reverse gear ball bearing. 14. Place bearing carrier over reverse gear and bearing assembly. Press bearing carrier onto bearing. 51870 a b a-Mandrel b-Seated 15. Place O-ring over bearing carrier and position it between bearing carrier and thrust washer. 16. Lubricate oil seals and O-ring with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6A-29 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING Forward Gear REASSEMBLY 1. Place forward gear on a press with gear teeth down. 2. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant onto the inside diameter of forward gear tapered bearing. 3. Position forward gear tapered bearing over gear. 4. Press bearing onto gear until firmly seated. (Be sure to press only on inner race of bearing and that bearing is firm against the gear.) 51869 a b a-Mandrel b-Wooden Block 5. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant to bore in center of forward gear. 6. Place one forward gear needle bearing on longer shoulder side of Forward Gear Bearing Tool (91-86943) with numbered side of bearing toward shoulder. Press bearing into forward gear until bearing tool bottoms against gear. 51873 a b a-Forward Gear Bearing Tool (91-86943) b-Numbered Side of Needle Bearing 7. Place second needle bearing on short shoulder side of bearing tool with numbered side of bearing toward shoulder. Press bearing into forward gear until bearing tool bottoms against gear. Page 6A-30 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING Forward Gear Bearing Race INSTALLATION 1. Place shim(s) (retained from disassembly) into gear housing. If shim(s) were lost or a new gear housing is being used, start with approximately 0.010 in. (0.254 mm). 2. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant to forward gear bearing race bore in gear housing. 3. Position tapered bearing race squarely over bearing bore in front portion of gear housing. 4. Place Bearing Driver Cup (91-87120) over tapered bearing race. NOTE: A used propeller shaft is recommended for use in Step 5. If it is necessary, however, to use the propeller shaft that will be installed in gear housing, the propeller shaft must be disassembled. (Refer to “Propeller Shaft Disassembly,” preceding.) 5. Place propeller shaft into hole in center of bearing driver cup. 6. Install bearing carrier assembly over propeller shaft and lower it into gear housing. Bearing carrier acts as a pilot to assure proper bearing race alignment. 7. Thread a nut onto propeller shaft to protect propeller shaft threads. 8. Use a mallet to drive propeller shaft against bearing driver cup until tapered bearing race is seated against shim(s). 51867a b c a-Tapered Bearing Race b-Bearing Driver Cup (91-31106) c-Shim(s) 9. Remove nut from propeller shaft, then remove bearing carrier and propeller shaft from gear housing. Lift bearing driver cup out of gear housing. 10. Apply a light coat of oil on tapered bearing race, then place forward gear assembly into forward bearing race. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6A-31 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING Driveshaft and Pinion Gear REASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION 1. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant on l.D. of driveshaft tapered bearing. 2. Thread a used pinion nut onto end of driveshaft. Leave approximately 1/16 in. (2 mm) of nut threads exposed. Driveshaft threads MUST NOT extend beyond nut or thread damage could result while pressing. 3. Place bearing over driveshaft. 4. Using an old driveshaft bearing inner race or other suitable mandrel (which applies pressing force on center bearing race only), press bearing onto shaft until seated. a b c d e a-Used Pinion Nut b-Driveshaft c-Tapered Bearing d-Old Bearing Inner Race e-Universal Puller Plate 5. Position pinion gear in gear housing below driveshaft bore with teeth of pinion gear meshed with teeth of reverse gear. 6. Insert driveshaft into driveshaft bore while holding pinion gear. Rotate driveshaft to align and engage driveshaft splines with pinion gear splines. Continue to insert driveshaft into gear housing until driveshaft tapered bearing is against bearing race. NOTE: It is recommended that after final pinion depth is obtained, a new pinion nut be installed. Clean pinion nut threads with Loctite 7649 Primer (92-809824) before applying Loctite 271. 7. Place a small amount of Loctite 271 onto threads of pinion gear nut and install flat washer and nut on driveshaft with flat side of nut away from pinion gear. Hand tighten pinion nut. 8. Place shim(s) (retained from disassembly) into gear housing. If shim(s) were lost or are not reusable (damaged), start with approximately 0.010 in. (0.254 mm). Page 6A-32 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING 9. Install bearing race and bearing retainer. 5188051867 f g h i a b c d e a-Driveshaft (rotate to engage splines with pinion gear) b-Forward Gear Assembly c-Pinion Gear d-Washer (located above pinion nut) e-Pinion Nut (apply Loctite 271 on threads and install with flat side away from pinion gear) f-Shim(s) g-Bearing Race h-Bearing Retainer (Word “OFF” must be visible) Torque to 100 lb. ft. (135.5 Nm) i-Bearing Retainer Tool (91-43506) 10. Use a socket and flex handle to hold pinion nut (pad area where flex handle will contact gear housing while torquing nut). 11. Place Driveshaft Holding Tool (91-34377A1) or (91-90094) over crankshaft end of driveshaft. Torque pinion nut to 75 lb. ft. (101.5 Nm). a b a c c d a-Driveshaft Holding Tool (91-34377A1) b-Torque Wrench; Torque Nut to 75 lb. ft. (101.5 Nm) c-Socket d-Breaker Bar IMPORTANT: Wipe any excess Loctite from pinion nut and pinion gear. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6A-33 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING Pinion Gear Depth/Forward Gear Backlash/Reverse Gear Backlash DETERMINING PINION GEAR DEPTH NOTE: Read entire procedure before attempting any change in shim thickness. IMPORTANT: Forward gear assembly must be installed in gear housing when checking pinion gear depth or an inaccurate measurement will be obtained. 1. Clean the gear housing bearing carrier shoulder. 2. Install Bearing Preload Tool (91-14311A1) over driveshaft in sequence shown. NOTE: Bearing Preload Tool (91-44307A1) may also be used. Follow instructions provided with tool for proper installation. a b c d e f g h g a-Adaptor b-Bearing c-Washer d-Spring e-Nut; thread nut all the way onto bolt f-Bolt g-Set Screw h-Sleeve; Holes in sleeve must align with set screw 3. Align adaptor on driveshaft bearing pocket ledge. 4. With tool installed over driveshaft, tighten both set screws securely, making certain to align sleeve holes to allow set screws to pass thru. Page 6A-34 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING 5. Measure distance (a) and increase that distance by 1 in. (25.4 mm) by turning bottom nut away from top nut. 1 in. (25.4 mm) 51870 b c a a-Distance b-Adaptor c-Ledge 6. Turn driveshaft clockwise 2 or more turns to seat driveshaft bearings. 7. Insert Pinion Gear Locating Tool* (91-74776) into gear housing until it bottoms out on bearing carrier shoulder. *Pinion Gear Locating Tool (91-12349A2) can be used. Use flat #7 and disc #2. Follow instructions supplied with tool. 8. Determine pinion gear depth by inserting a feeler gauge thru access slot in pinion gear shimming tool. 9. Clearance between shimming tool and pinion gear should be 0.025 in. (0.64 mm). 10. If clearance is correct, leave Bearing Preload Tool on driveshaft for “Determining Forward Gear Backlash,” following. 11. If clearance is not correct, add (or subtract) shims at location shown to raise (or lower) pinion gear. When reinstalling pinion nut, apply Loctite 271 on threads of nut and retorque pinion nut. 24643 a bc d c a a-Pinion Gear Tool (91-74776 or 91-12349A2) b-Feeler Gauge c-Obtain 0.025 in. (0.64 mm) Clearance between Shimming Tool and Pinion Gear d-Add or Subtract Shim(s) Here 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6A-35 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING NOTE: Bearing Preload Tool (91-14311A1) should remain installed on driveshaft after setting pinion gear depth as it is required to properly check forward gear and reverse gear backlash. DETERMINING FORWARD GEAR BACKLASH IMPORTANT: Bearing carrier must be assembled to provide a pilot for propeller shaft. 1. Insert propeller shaft into position in gear housing. (DO NOT place shift cam on propeller shaft.) 2. Place bearing carrier into gear housing and thread cover nut tightly against bearing carrier. (It is not necessary to torque cover nut against bearing carrier.) 3. Attach Bearing Carrier Removal Tool (91-46086A1) and Puller Bolt (91-85716) onto gear housing. 4. Torque puller bolt against propeller shaft to 45 Ib. in. (5 Nm). Turn driveshaft 10 revolutions with the load applied to propeller shaft. This will seat forward gear bearing. 51867 ab c d e a-Propeller Shaft (DO NOT install shift cam) b-Bearing Carrier (assembled) c-Cover Nut (Tighten; DO NOT torque) d-Bearing Carrier Removal Tool (91-46086A1) e-Puller Bolt (91-85716); Torque to 45 lb. in. (5 Nm) 5. Fasten dial indicator to gear housing and Backlash Indicator Tool (91-78473) to driveshaft. 6. Recheck torque on puller bolt [45 Ib. in. (5 Nm)]. Page 6A-36 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING 7. Position dial indicator pointer on line marked “1” on Backlash Indicator Tool, if gear ratio is 1.87:1 (15 teeth on pinion gear), or on line marked “2” on Backlash Indicator Tool, if gear ratio is 2:1 (14 teeth on pinion gear) or on line marked “4” if gear ratio is 2.3:1 (13 teeth on pinion gear). 51880 a b c d e a-Thread Stud Adaptor (from 91-14311A1) b-Stud c-Backlash Indicator Tool (91-78473) d-Dial Indicator Holder (91-89897) e-Dial Indicator (91-58222A1) 8. Lightly turn driveshaft back-and-forth (no movement should be noticed at propeller shaft). 9. Dial indicator registers amount of backlash which must be 0.018 in. to 0.027 in. (0.46 mm to 0.69 mm) for the 1.87:1 gear ratio, 0.015 in. to 0.022 in. (0.38 mm to 0.56 mm) for the 2:1 gear ratio and 0.018 in. to 0.023 in. (0.46 mm to 0.58 mm) for the 2.3:1 gear ratio. 10. If backlash is LESS than the specified minimum, REMOVE shim(s) from in front of forward gear bearing race to obtain correct backlash. When reinstalling pinion nut, apply Loctite 271 on threads of nut. 11. If backlash is MORE than the specified MAXIMUM, add shim(s) in front of forward gear bearing race to obtain correct backlash. When reinstalling pinion nut, apply Loctite 271 on threads of nut. NOTE: By adding or subtracting 0.001 in. (0.025 mm) shim, the backlash will change approximately 0.001 in. (0.025 mm ). REVERSE GEAR Determining Reverse Gear Backlash Although reverse gear backlash is not adjustable, it may be checked as follows: 1. Propeller shaft and bearing carrier must be completely assembled and installed in gearcase. 2. Install shift shaft in gearcase. 3. Shift gearcase into reverse. 4. Slide 6 in. x 1.5 in. I.D. (152.5 mm x 38.0 mm) piece of PVC pipe over propeller shaft and position pipe against bearing carrier. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6A-37 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING 5. Secure pipe against carrier with propeller nut and tab washer. 51866 ab c a-Pipe [6 in. x 1.5 in. (152.5 mm x 38.0 mm)] b-Propeller Nut c-Tab Washer 6. Torque propeller nut to 45 lb. in. (5 Nm). 7. Gently rock driveshaft. Dial indicator should show backlash of 0.030 in.-0.050 in. (0.762 mm- 01.27 mm). If backlash is not as indicated, gear case is not properly assembled or parts are excessively worn and must be replaced before returning gear case to service. Clutch Actuator Rod REASSEMBLY 1. Place a small amount of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Lubricant on actuator rod and install cam follower. ab a-Actuator Rod b-Cam Follower Shift Shaft Bushing REASSEMBLY 1. Position shift shaft bushing on a press with threaded side down. 2. Apply Loctite 271 to outside diameter of oil seal. 3. Press oil seal into shift shaft bushing with lip of seal up. 4. Wipe any excess Loctite from oil seal and bushing. 5. Place rubber washer against oil seal. 6. Install O-ring over threads and up against shoulder of bushing. 7. Lubricate O-ring and oil seal with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant. Page 6A-38 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING Propeller Shaft REASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION 1. Insert clutch actuator rod assembly into end of propeller shaft. Align cross pin slot in actuator rod with cross pin slot in propeller shaft. 2. On PRODUCTION MODEL GEAR CASES, position sliding clutch onto propeller shaft with GROOVED RINGS (ON SLIDING CLUTCH) TOWARD PROPELLER END OF PROPELLER SHAFT. Cross pin hole and detent holes (in sliding clutch) must line up with cross pin slot and detent notches on propeller shaft. 51864 51864 c d e f g h a b a-Cam Follower b-Propeller Shaft c-Sliding Clutch d-Grooved Rings e-Cross Pin Hole f-Detent Hole (Behind Finger and Thumb) g-Detent Notch (One on Each Side) h-Cross Pin Slot 3. Insert cross pin thru sliding clutch, propeller shaft and actuator rod, forcing cross pin tool out. 4. Apply a small amount of 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant on detent pin. Position a detent pin in detent pin hole of sliding clutch with rounded end of pin toward propeller shaft. 51864 a a-Cross Pin b-Detent Pin c-Cross Pin d-Sliding Clutch 51864 b c d 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6A-39 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING 5. Install cross pin retaining spring onto sliding clutch as follows: IMPORTANT: DO NOT over-stretch retaining spring when installing onto sliding clutch. 6. Spirally wrap spring into groove on sliding clutch. 7. Place gear housing in a soft jaw vise with the driveshaft in a vertical position. 8. Coat cam pocket of cam follower with 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant. 9. Place shift cam into cam pocket of cam follower with numbered side of cam facing up. 10. With shift cam positioned as shown, insert propeller shaft thru forward gear until shaft bottoms out. 51864 de55095 ab c a-Cam Pocket b-Cam Follower c-Shift Cam d-Shift Cam (Position as Shown) e-Gear Housing Page 6A-40 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING CAUTION Until bearing carrier is installed into gear housing, extreme care MUST BE taken not to apply any side force on propeller shaft. Side force on propeller shaft may break the neck of the clutch actuator rod. 11. Insert shift shaft down shift shaft hole (of gear housing) and thru shift cam and cam follower. (It may be necessary to rotate shift shaft back-and-forth slightly for it to enter shift cam.) 12. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant to threads of shift shaft bushing. (Thread bushing into position, but do not tighten down at this time) 51867 a b a-Shift Shaft Bushing b-Shift Shaft 13. Lubricate O-ring on bearing carrier with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant. 14. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant to outside diameter of bearing carrier (where carrier contacts gear housing). NOTE: When performing Step 15, rotate driveshaft clockwise (viewed from top) to mesh pinion gear with reverse gear. 15. Position bearing carrier over propeller shaft and slide it into gear housing. (Be sure to align bearing carrier keyway with gear housing keyway.) 16. Push bearing carrier in as far as possible by hand, then install bearing carrier key. 17. Place tab washer against bearing carrier. 18. Apply Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant to threads of cover nut and install cover nut in gear housing (verify that the word “OFF” and arrow are visible). 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6A-41 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING 19. Start cover nut a few turns by hand, then using Cover Nut Tool (91-61069) and torque wrench, torque cover nut to 210 Ib. ft. (285 Nm). 51871 a b c a-O-ring b-Cover Nut Tool c-Torque Wrench 20. Bend one lock tab of tab washer into cover nut (only one will align). 21. Bend remaining tabs of tab washer toward front of gear housing. 22. Use Shift Shaft Bushing Tool (91-31107) and torque shift shaft bushing to 30 Ib. ft. (41 Nm). Water Pump REASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION 1. Install oil seals into water pump base, as follows: a. Place water pump base on a press. b. Just before installing each seal apply Loctite 271 on outside diameter of oil seal. c. With a suitable mandrel, press the smaller diameter oil seal into pump base with lip of oil seal toward impeller side of base. d. With a suitable mandrel, press the larger diameter oil seal into pump base with lip of oil seal toward gear housing side of base. e. Wipe any excess Loctite from oil seals and water pump base. 2. Install O-ring into O-ring groove of water pump base. Lubricate O-ring and oil seals with 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant (92-90018A12). 51869 a bc a-Mandrel b-Oil Seal (Smaller OD) c-O-ring Groove Page 6A-42 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING 3. Install divider block if removed. Use RTV Sealer to seal seams between divider block and gear housing. 4. Install a new water pump base gasket and install water pump base. 51866 51870 b c d a a-Divider Block b-Water Pump Base c-Gasket d-Hole (MUST be positioned as shown) 5. Install the following in order: Pump base to face plate gasket, face plate gasket and face plate to pump cover gasket. Gaskets and face plate are indexed by dowel pin location and must be installed correctly. 51868 a b c a-Gasket (Water Pump Base to Face Plate) b-Face Plate c-Gasket (Face Plate to Water Pump Cover) 6. Place impeller drive key on flat of driveshaft. Hold key on driveshaft with a small amount of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant. IMPORTANT: When completing gear housing repair, that requires removal of water pump impeller, it is recommended that the impeller be replaced. If it is necessary, however, to reuse the impeller, DO NOT install in reverse to original rotation, or premature impeller failure will occur. Original rotation is clockwise. CAUTION A visual inspection of impeller drive key MUST BE made to determine that drive key is on flat of driveshaft after impeller is installed. If key has moved off flat of driveshaft, repeat Steps 7 and 8. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6A-43 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING 7. Slide impeller down driveshaft to impeller drive key. Align drive key with keyway in the center hub of impeller, and slide impeller over drive key. 8. If removed, install new water pump insert into pump cover as follows: a. Apply Perfect Seal to water pump insert area of pump cover. b. Install water pump insert into pump cover. Verify that tab on insert enters recess in pump cover. c. Wipe any excess Perfect Seal from insert and cover. NOTE: If 2 holes were drilled in top of water pump cover to aid in removal of insert, fill holes with RTV Sealer or equivalent. Allow to cure, 24 hours prior to operating engine. 9. Install water tube seal into pump cover, being sure that plastic side of seal goes into cover first. 10. Reinstall water tube guide into water pump cover. 11. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant inside of water pump insert. 12. Position assembled water pump cover over driveshaft and lower over water pump studs. Rotate driveshaft in a clockwise direction (viewed from top), while pushing down on pump cover to ease impeller entry into cover. 13. Install water pump cover retainer washers, nuts and bolt. CAUTION DO NOT over-torque nuts and bolt, as this could cause cover to crack during operation. 14. Torque water pump nuts to 50 Ib. in. (5.5 Nm), and water pump bolt to 35 Ib. in. (4 Nm). 15. Install centrifugal slinger over driveshaft and down against pump cover. 51874 a b c a-Water Tube Guide b-Water Tube Seal c-Nuts, Bolts and Washers Page 6A-44 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING Gear Lubricant Filling Instructions 1. Remove any gasket material from “Fill” and “Vent” screws and gear housing. 2. Install new gaskets on Fill and Vent screws. IMPORTANT: Never apply lubricant to gear housing without first removing Vent screw, or gear housing cannot be filled because of trapped air. Fill gear housing ONLY when housing is in a vertical position. 3. Slowly fill housing thru Fill hole with Quicksilver Super Duty Lower Unit Lubricant until lubricant flows out of “Vent” hole and no air bubbles are visible. 4. Install Vent screw into Vent hole. IMPORTANT: DO NOT lose more than one fluid ounce (30cc) of gear lubricant while reinstalling Fill screw. 5. Remove grease tube (or hose) from Fill hole and quickly install Fill screw into Fill hole. Installing Gear Housing to Driveshaft Housing WARNING Disconnect high tension leads from spark plugs and remove spark plugs from engine before installing gear housing onto driveshaft housing. 1. Tilt engine to full up position and engage the tilt lock lever. 2. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant onto driveshaft splines. CAUTION DO NOT allow lubricant on top of driveshaft. Excess lubricant, that is trapped in clearance space, will not allow driveshaft to fully engage with crankshaft. Subsequently, tightening the gear housing nuts (while excess lubricant is on top of driveshaft) will load the driveshaft/crankshaft and damage either or both the powerhead and gear housing. Top of driveshaft is to be wiped free of lubricant. 3. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant onto shift shaft splines. (DO NOT allow lubricant on top of shift shaft.) 4. Apply a thin bead of G.E. Silicone Sealer (92-91600-1) against the top of divider block. 5. Insert trim tab bolt into hole in rear of gear housing to driveshaft housing machined surface. 6. Shift gear housing into forward gear and place guide block anchor pin into forward gear position. 51900 a a-Guide Block Anchor Pin 7. Position gear housing so that the driveshaft is protruding into driveshaft housing. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6A-45 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING NOTE: If, while performing Step 8, the driveshaft splines will not align with crankshaft splines, place a propeller onto propeller shaft and turn it counterclockwise as the gear housing is being pushed toward driveshaft housing. 8. Move gear housing up toward driveshaft housing, while aligning shift shaft splines and water tube with water tube guide (in water pump cover). 9. Place flat washers onto studs (located on either side of driveshaft housing). Start a nut on these studs and tighten finger-tight. 10. Start bolt at rear of gear housing inside trim tab recess. DO NOT tighten bolt at this time. 11. Recheck shift shaft spline engagement and correct if necessary. IMPORTANT: Do not force gearcase up into place with attaching nuts. 12. Evenly tighten 2 nuts which were started in Step 9. Torque to listing in “Torque Specifications,” preceding. 13. After 2 nuts (located on either side of driveshaft housing) are tightened, check shift operation as follows: a. Place guide block anchor pin into forward gear position. Rotate flywheel clockwise (viewed from top); propeller shaft should rotate clockwise. b. Place guide block anchor pin into neutral position. Propeller shaft should rotate freely clockwise/counterclockwise. c. Place guide block anchor pin into reverse gear position. Rotate flywheel clockwise (viewed from top); propeller shaft should rotate counterclockwise. IMPORTANT: lf shifting operation is not as described, preceding, the gear housing must be removed and the cause corrected. 14. Install washers and nuts onto studs (located on bottom center of anti-cavitation plate). Torque to listing in “Torque Specifications,” preceding. 15. Install special flat washer and nut on stud at leading edge of driveshaft housing. Torque to listing in “Torque Specifications,” preceding. 16. Torque bolt (started in Step 10) to listing in “Torque Specifications,” preceding. 17. Install trim tab, adjust to position in which it had previously been installed, and tighten securely. 18. Install plastic cap into trim tab bolt opening at rear edge of driveshaft housing. Propeller Installation WARNING When installing or removing propeller, because of the engine’s ease in starting, be sure that the remote control is in neutral position and that the key switch is “OFF.” Place a block of wood between the anti-cavitation plate and propeller to prevent accidental starting and to protect hands from propeller blades while removing or installing nut. 1. To aid in future removal of the propeller, liberally coat the propeller shaft splines with one of the following Quicksilver products: -- Anti-Corrosion Grease (92-78376A6) -- Special Lubricant 101 (92-13872A1) -- 2-4-C Marine Lubricant (92-90018A12) -- Perfect Seal (92-34227--1) Page 6A-46 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING 2. Place forward thrust hub over propeller shaft with shoulder side toward propeller. 3. Place propeller on propeller shaft and slide it up against thrust hub. 51866 a b a-Forward Thrust Hub b-Propeller Shaft 4. Place continuity washer (if equipped) onto shoulder of rear thrust hub. 5. Place rear thrust hub, tab washer and propeller nut on propeller shaft. 6. Thread propeller nut onto propeller shaft until nut is recessed into tab washer. 7. After propeller nut is recessed into tab washer, tighten nut securely [minimum of 55 Ib. ft. (74.5 Nm) torque]. 8. Bend 3 of the tabs of tab washer down in grooves of rear thrust hub to secure propeller nut. (If tab washer tabs do not align with slots, continue to tighten propeller nut to obtain alignment. DO NOT loosen nut to align tabs.) CAUTION DO NOT misinterpret propeller shaft movement with propeller movement. If propeller and propeller shaft together move forward-and-aft, this is normal; however, propeller should not move forward-and-aft on propeller shaft. 9. After first use, retighten propeller nut and again secure with tab washer (Steps 7 and 8, preceding). Propeller should be checked periodically for tightness, particularly if a stainless steel propeller is used. a b c d 51866 a-Continuity Washer (if Equipped) b-Rear Thrust Hub c-Tab Washer d-Propeller Nut 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6A-47 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING LOWER UNIT Section 6B – Left Hand Non-Ratcheting Table of Contents Gear Housing Specifications (Counter Rotation) . . 6B-1 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-2 Gear Housing (Drive Shaft)(Counter Rotation) . . . 6B-6 Gear Housing (Prop Shaft)(Counter Rotation) . . . . 6B-8 General Service Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-11 Removal, Disassembly, Cleaning and Inspection of Counter Rotation (Left Hand) Gear Housing . . . . 6B-12 Water Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-15 Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft . . . . . . . . . 6B-17 Shift Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-19 Propeller Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-21 Clutch Actuator Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-24 Forward Gear and Bearing Adapter . . . . . . . . . 6B-24 Pinion Gear and Driveshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-26 Reverse Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-28 Gear Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-30 Reassembly and Installation of Counter Rotation Gear Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-31 Driveshaft Needle Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-31 Bearing Carrier, Forward Gear and Bearing Adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-32 Reverse Gear Bearing Adaptor Assembly . . . 6B-35 Driveshaft and Pinion Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-37 Pinion Gear Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-39 Reverse Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-41 Forward Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-42 Propeller Shaft/Forward Gear Bearing Adapter/Bearing Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-45 Water Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-52 Gear Lubricant Filling Instructions . . . . . . . . . . 6B-55 Installing Gear Housing to Driveshaft Housing 6B-55 Propeller Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-56 Gear Housing Specifications (Counter Rotation) 6 B Ratio Pinion Depth Forward Gear Backlash Reverse Gear Backlash 1.87:1 0.025 in. (0.635 mm) With Tool 91-12349A2 using Disc #2 and Flat #7 0.018 in. to 0.027 in. (0.460 mm to 0.686 mm) Pointer on line mark #1 0.030 in. to 0.050 in. (0.762 mm to 1.27 mm) 2.0:1 0.025 in. (0.635 mm) With Tool 91-12349A2 using Disc #2 and Flat #7 0.015 in. to 0.022 in. (0.38 mm to 0.56 mm) Pointer on line mark #2 0.030 in. to 0.050 in. (0.762 mm to 1.27 mm) Gearcase Lubricant Capacity All Ratios 22.5 fl. oz. (665.4 ml) 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-1 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING Special Tools 1. Shift Shaft Bushing Tool 91-31107T 2. Gear Housing Cover Nut Tool 91-61069 3. Bearing Carrier Removal Tool 91-46086A1 and Puller Bolt 91-85716 4. Slide Hammer Puller 91-34569A1 5. Bearing Removal and Installation Kit 91-31229A5. This kit contains the following tools: Pilot 91-36571; Puller Rod 91-31229; Nut 11-24156; Puller Plate 91-29310; Mandrel 91-38628; and Driver Rod 91-37323. 6. Pilot 91-36571 7. Puller Rod 91-31229 and Nut 91-24156 Page 6B-2 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 8. Puller Plate 91-29310 9. Mandrel 91-38628 10. Driver Rod 91-37323 11. Universal Puller Plate 91-37241 12. Driveshaft Holding Tool 91-34377A1 or91-90094 13. Oil Seal Driver 91-31108 14. Forward Gear Bearing Tool 91-86943 15. Pinion Locating Gear Tool 91-12349A2 or 91-74776 16. Backlash Indicator Rod 91-78473 17. Dial Indicator 91-58222A1 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-3 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 18. Bearing Retainer Tool 91-43506 19. Mandrel 91-92788 20. Mandrel 91-15755 21. Dial Indicator Holder 91-89897 22. Bearing Preload Tool 91-14311A1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1-Adaptor (N.S.S.) 2-Bearing (N.S.S.) 3-Washer (N.S.S.) 4-Spring (24-14111) 5-Bolt (10-12580) 6-Nut (11-13953) 7-Set Screw (10-12575) 8-Sleeve (23-13946) 23. Propeller Shaft 44-93003 and Load Washer (i) 12-37429 24. Forward Gear Installation Tool 91-815850 Page 6B-4 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 25. Reverse Gear Installation Kit 91-18605A1 includes Pilot 91-18603; Retainer 91-18604; Shaft 91-18605 and Screw 10-18602 a b c d a-Pilot 91-18603 b-Shaft 91-18605 c-Retainer 91-18604 d-Screw 10-18602 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-5 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING Page 6B-6 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Gear Housing (Drive Shaft)(Counter Rotation) 23 95 95 7 95 95 95 98 33 7 95 95 7 95 19 95 109 95 23 Soap (Purchase Locally) 4.75 IN./120.65 MM TORPEDO DIA. 7 Loctite 271 (92-809820) 19 Perfect Seal (92-34227-1) 33 Loctite 680 (92-809833) 95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12) 109 GM Silicone Sealer (92-91600-1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1918 20 21 22 23 24 26 25 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 46 45 47 48 49 50 7 19 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING Gear Housing (Drive Shaft)(Counter Rotation) REFREF. .. NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION TORQUE lb-in lb-ft Nm. 1 1 GEAR HOUSING (BLACK)(BASIC) 2 1 CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY 3 2 DOWEL PIN 4 1 STUD (3-11/16 IN.) 5 2 STUD (2-1/16 IN.) 6 1 STUD (3-3/8 IN.) 7 2 STUD (3-1/8 IN.) 8 1 FILLER BLOCK 9 1 ROLLER BEARING 10 2 ANODE 11 1 SCREW 12 1 NUT 60 7 1313 1 PINION GEAR (1.87:1 - 15 TEETH)(150)(Part of 43-828701A1) 1 PINION GEAR (2:1 - 14 TEETH)-(135)(Also part of 43-828703A1) 14 1 WASHER 15 1 NUT 75 101 16 AR SHIM SET 17 1 SCREW–drain (MAGNETIC) 60 7 18 1 SCREW–grease filler 60 7 19 2 WASHER 20 1 STA-STRAP 21 1 SHIFT SHAFT 22 1 O-RING 23 1 BUSHING ASSEMBLY 50 5.5 24 1 OIL SEAL 25 1 WASHER–rubber 26 1 DRIVE SHAFT 27 1 ROLLER BEARING 28 1 CUP 29 1 RETAINER 100 11.5 30 1 WATER PUMP BASE 31 1 RETAINER 32 1 GASKET 33 1 O-RING 34 1 OIL SEAL 35 1 OIL SEAL 36 1 GASKET–lower 37 1 GASKET–upper 38 1 FACE PLATE 39 1 WATER PUMP BODY ASSEMBLY 40 1 INSERT 41 1 SEAL–rubber 42 1 lMPELLER 43 1 KEY 44 1 SCREW (#14-8 x 2-1/4 IN.) 35 4 45 2 WASHER 46 2 NUT 50 5.5 47 1 WASHER 48 1 NUT 50 5.5 49 1 SLEEVE 50 1 DECAL-Counter Rotation 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-7 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING Page 6B-8 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Gear Housing (Prop Shaft)(Counter Rotation) 1 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 79 78 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 74 73 72 95 87 87 95 87 87 87 87 94 95 87 7 95 95 95 87 87 4.75 IN./120.65 MM TORPEDO DIA. 7 Loctite 271 (92-809820) 94 Anti-Corrosion Grease (92-78376A6) 87 Quicksilver Gear Lubricant (92-19007A24) 95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12) 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING Gear Housing (Prop Shaft)(Counter Rotation) REFREF. .. NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION TORQUE lb-in lb-ft Nm. 1 1 GEAR HOUSING (BLACK)(BASIC) 51 1 CAM FOLLOWER 52 1 SHIFT CAM 53 1 ROD 54 AR SHIM SET 55 1 BEARING ADAPTOR ASSEMBLY 56 1 ROLLER BEARING 57 1 THRUST WASHER 58 1 THRUST BEARING 5959 1 REVERSE GEAR (1.87:1 – 15/28)(150) 1 REVERSE GEAR (2:1 – 14/28)-(135) 60 1 ROLLER BEARING 61 1 SPRING 62 1 SLIDING CLUTCH 63 1 CROSS PIN 64 1 DETENT PIN 65 1 PROPELLER SHAFT 6666 1 FORWARD GEAR (1.87:1 – 15/28)(150) 1 FORWARD GEAR (2:1 – 14/28)-(135) 67 AR SPACER SHIM .206 IN. AR SPACER SHIM .208 IN. AR SPACER SHIM .210 IN. AR SPACER SHIM .212 IN. AR SPACER SHIM .214 IN. AR SPACER SHIM .216 IN. AR SPACER SHIM .218 IN. AR SPACER SHIM .220 IN. AR SPACER SHIM .222 IN. AR SPACER SHIM .224 IN. AR SPACER SHIM .226 IN. AR SPACER SHIM .228 IN. AR SPACER SHIM .230 IN. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-9 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING Page 6B-10 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Gear Housing (Prop Shaft)(Counter Rotation) 1 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 74 73 72 95 87 87 95 87 87 87 87 94 95 87 7 95 95 95 87 87 4.75 IN./120.65 MM TORPEDO DIA. 7 Loctite 271 (92-809820) 87 Quicksilver Gear Lubricant (92-19007A24) 94 Anti-Corrosion Grease (92-78376A6) 95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12) 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING Gear Housing (Prop Shaft)(Counter Rotation) REFREF. .. NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION TORQUE lb-in lb-ft Nm. 1 1 GEAR HOUSING (BLACK)(BASIC) 68 1 ROLLER BEARING 69 1 THRUST WASHER 70 1 BEARING ADAPTOR ASSEMBLY 71 1 ROLLER BEARING 72 2 THRUST WASHER 73 2 THRUST BEARING 74 2 THRUST RACE 75 2 KEEPER 76 1 O RING 77 1 BEARING CARRIER ASSEMBLY 78 1 ROLLER BEARING 79 1 OIL SEAL (INSIDE) 80 1 OIL SEAL (OUTSIDE) 81 1 TAB WASHER 82 1 KEY 83 1 COVER 210 285 84 1 TRIM TAB 85 1 SCREW (1-3/4 IN.) 25 34 86 1 SCREW (3/8-16 x 1) 30 41 87 2 WASHER 88 2 NUT 50 68 General Service Recommendations There may be more than one way to “disassemble” or “reassemble” a particular part(s), therefore, it is recommended that the entire procedure be read prior to repair. IMPORTANT: Read the following before attempting any repairs. In many cases, disassembly of a sub-assembly may not be necessary until cleaning and inspection reveals that disassembly is required for replacement of one or more components. Service procedure order in this section is a normal disassembly-reassembly sequence. It is suggested that the sequence be followed without deviation to assure proper repairs. When performing partial repairs, follow the instructions to the point where the desired component can be replaced, then proceed to “reassembly and installation” of that component in the reassembly part of this section. Use the “Index” (on back of section divider) to find correct page number. Threaded parts are right hand (RH), unless otherwise indicated. When holding, pressing or driving is required, use soft metal vise jaw protectors or wood for protection of parts. Use a suitable mandrel (one that will contact only the bearing race) when pressing or driving bearings. Whenever compressed air is used to dry a part, verify that no water is present in air line. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-11 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING BEARINGS Upon disassembly of gear housing, all bearings must be cleaned and inspected. Clean bearings with solvent and dry with compressed air. Air should be directed at the bearing so that it passes thru the bearing. DO NOT spin bearing with compressed air, as this may cause bearing to score from lack of lubrication. After cleaning, lubricate bearings with Quicksilver Gear Lubricant. DO NOT lubricate tapered bearing cups until after inspection. Inspect all bearings for roughness, catches and bearing race side wear. Work inner bearing race in-and-out, while holding outer race, to check for side wear. When inspecting tapered bearings, determine condition of rollers and inner bearing race by inspecting bearing cup for pitting, scoring, grooves, uneven wear, imbedded particles and/or discoloration from over-heating. Always replace tapered bearing and race as a set. Roller bearing condition is determined by inspecting the bearing surface of the shaft that the roller bearing supports. Check shaft surface for pitting, scoring, grooving, imbedded particles, uneven wear and/or discoloration from overheating. The shaft and bearing must be replaced, if the conditions described are found. SHIMS Keep a record of all shim amounts and location during disassembly to aid in reassembly. Be sure to follow shimming instructions during reassembly, as gears must be installed to correct depth and have the correct amount of backlash to avoid noisy operation and premature gear failure. SEALS As a normal procedure, all O-rings and oil seals SHOULD BE REPLACED without regard to appearance. To prevent leakage around oil seals, apply Loctite 271 to outer diameter of all metal case oil seals. When using Loctite on seals or threads, surfaces must be clean and dry. To ease installation, apply 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant on all O-rings. To prevent wear, apply 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant on l.D. of oil seals. To prevent corrosion damage after reassembly, apply Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon to external surfaces of bearing carrier and cover nut threads prior to installation. Removal, Disassembly, Cleaning and Inspection of Counter Rotation (Left Hand) Gear Housing REMOVAL WARNING Disconnect high tension leads from spark plugs and remove spark plugs from engine before removing gear housing from driveshaft housing. 1. Disconnect high tension leads from spark plugs and remove spark plugs from engine. CAUTION Gear housing MUST BE in NEUTRAL position and shift shaft MUST BE removed from gear housing BEFORE propeller shaft can be removed from gear housing. 2. Shift engine into NEUTRAL position. 3. Tilt engine to full up position and engage tilt lock lever. Page 6B-12 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 4. Bend tabs of propeller tab washer away from thrust hub (rear), then remove propeller locknut, tab washer, thrust hub (rear), propeller and thrust hub (forward) from propeller shaft. 51916 51912 a b c d e f a-Thrust Hub (Forward) b-Propeller Shaft c-Continuity Washer (If Equipped) d-Rear Thrust Hub e-Tab Washer f-Propeller Nut 5. Mark gear housing and trim tab so that trim tab can be reinstalled in the same position. Remove plastic cap at rear edge of driveshaft housing. Remove bolt that secures trim tab and remove tab from gear housing. 6. Once trim tab is removed, remove bolt from inside of trim tab cavity. 7. Remove 2 locknuts from bottom middle of anti-cavitation plate. 51866 a b c a-Bolt (Secures Trim Tab) b-Bolt (Inside Trim Tab Cavity) c-Locknuts and Washers 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-13 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 8. Remove locknut from the front gear housing mounting stud. 9. Loosen the side mounting locknuts. (DO NOT attempt to remove one nut before opposite side is loosened sufficiently, or driveshaft housing could be damaged.) 51873 a b a-Front Mounting Locknut b-Side Mounting Locknut (One Each Side) 10. Pull gear housing away from driveshaft housing as far as the loosened nuts (in Step 9) will allow, then remove loosened nuts. (DO NOT allow gear housing to fall, as it now is free.) 11. Pull gear housing from driveshaft housing. DRAINING AND INSPECTING GEAR HOUSING LUBRICANT 1. Place gear housing in a suitable holding fixture or vise with the driveshaft in a vertical position, as shown. NOTE: Drain and Fill screws may be located on the starboard side of gearcase on later models. 2. Position a clean drain pan under gear housing and remove “Fill” and “Vent” screws from gear housing. 3. Inspect gear lubricant for metal particles. Presence of a small amount of fine metal particles (resembling powder) indicates normal wear. Presence of larger particles (or a large quantity of fine particles) indicates need for gear housing disassembly, and component inspection. 4. Note the color of gear lubricant. White or cream color indicates presence of water in lubricant. Check drain pan for water separation from lubricant. Presence of water in gear lubricant indicates the need for disassembly, and inspection of oil seals, seal surfaces, O-rings and gear housing components. IMPORTANT: Gear lubricant drained from a recently run gear case will be a light chocolate brown in color due to agitation/aeration. Oil which is stabilized will be a clear yellow brown in color. 51871 a b a-Fill Screw b-Vent Screw Page 6B-14 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING Water Pump CLEANING AND INSPECTION 1. Clean all water pump parts with solvent and dry with compressed air. 2. Inspect water pump cover and base for cracks and distortion (from overheating). 3. Inspect face plate and water pump insert for grooves and/or rough surfaces. IMPORTANT: When completing gear housing repairs, that require removal of water pump impeller, it is recommended that the impeller be replaced. If it is necessary, however, to re-use impeller, DO NOT install in reverse to original rotation, or premature impeller failure will occur. 4. Inspect impeller side seal surfaces and ends of impeller blades for cracks, tears and wear. Replace impeller if any of these conditions are found. 5. Inspect impeller bonding to impeller hub. 6. Inspect impeller for glazed or melted appearance (caused by operation without sufficient water supply). Replace impeller if any of these conditions exist. IMPORTANT: It is recommended that all seals and gaskets be replaced (as a normal repair procedure) to assure effective repair. REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY 1. Slide rubber centrifugal slinger up and off driveshaft. 2. Remove water tube guide and seal from water pump cover. (Retain guide for reassembly and discard seal.) 3. Remove (and retain) 3 nuts, one bolt and all washers which secure water pump cover to gear housing. 4. Using 2 pry bars, lift water pump cover up and off driveshaft. 51874 51874 a b c a-Water Tube Guide b-Water Tube Seal c-Nuts, Bolt and Washers to be Removed 5. Inspect water pump cover and insert, as outlined in “Cleaning and Inspection,” previous. 6. If inspection of water pump insert determines that replacement is required, follow Step “a” or “b” (immediately following) to remove insert from water pump cover. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-15 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING NOTE: Try Step “a” first. If insert cannot be removed with Step “a,” use Step “b.” a. Drive water pump insert out of water pump cover with a punch and hammer. b. Drill two 3/16 in. (4.8 mm) diameter holes thru the top of water pump cover (but not thru insert). Drive insert out of cover with a punch and hammer. 51873 51874 a a-Drill Two Holes at These Locations 7. Remove impeller from driveshaft. (It may be necessary to use a punch and hammer to drive impeller upward on driveshaft. In extreme cases, it may be necessary to split hub of impeller with a hammer and chisel.) 8. Once impeller is removed, remove impeller drive key from driveshaft. 9. Remove water pump face plate and both gaskets (one above and below face plate) from water pump base. 10. Using 2 pry bars, positioned and padded as shown, lift water pump base up and off driveshaft. 51874 a a-Pads 11. Remove (and discard) O-ring from O-ring groove on water pump base. 12. Using a screwdriver, pry oil seals out of water pump base from gear housing side of base. Page 6B-16 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft REMOVAL CAUTION Gear housing MUST BE in neutral position, and shift shaft MUST BE removed from gear housing before propeller shaft can be removed from gear housing. 1. Place gear housing in a suitable holding fixture or vise with propeller shaft in a horizontal position. 2. Use Shift Shaft Bushing Tool (91-31107) to unthread shift shaft bushing. (DO NOT remove bushing from shift shaft at this time.) 3. Bend retainer nut lock tab out of retainer nut recess. 51865 cd 51882 a b a-Shift Shaft Bushing Tool (91-31107) b-Shift Shaft Bushing c-Punch d-Tab of Tab Washer 4. Remove gear housing retainer nut with Retainer Nut Tool (91-61069). 5. After retainer nut has been removed, remove lock tab washer from gear housing. 51911 a b a-Retainer Nut Tool (91-61069) b-Retainer Nut c-Tab Washer 51885 c 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-17 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING CAUTION Once bearing carrier is removed from gear housing, extreme care MUST BE taken not to apply any side force on propeller shaft. Side force on propeller shaft may break the neck of the clutch actuator rod. 6. Use long Puller Jaws (91-46086A1) and Puller Bolt (91-85716) to remove bearing carrier. (Use propeller thrust hub to maintain outward pressure on puller jaws.) NOTE: When bearing carrier is removed from gear housing, the bearing carrier alignment key will come out with it. 51867 a b c a-Long Puller Jaws (91-46086A1) b-Puller Bolt (91-85716) c-Thrust Hub IMPORTANT: Prior to removal of shift shaft from gear housing, recheck that gear housing is in neutral position. 7. With gear housing in neutral, pull shift shaft out of gear housing. If necessary, use a pliers to pull shift shaft out of gear housing. If pliers are used to pull shift shaft out, wrap a strip of soft metal (aluminum) around splines before clamping pliers. DO NOT turn shaft (clockwise OR counterclockwise) while pulling shaft out. (For further information on shift shaft, see “Shift Shaft Cleaning/lnspection and Disassembly.”) 51867 a b a-Shift Shaft Bushing b-Shift Shaft Page 6B-18 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING CAUTION Propeller shaft, cam follower and shift cam, in most cases, will come out of gear housing by simply pulling outward on propeller shaft. DO NOT FORCE shaft sideways or ATTEMPT TO PULL with a slide hammer or any mechanical puller. 8. Remove propeller shaft, cam follower and shift cam by pulling shaft straight out of gear housing. (DO NOT JERK propeller shaft.) NOTE: Sliding clutch, forward gear assembly, bearing adaptor, thrust washer and thrust bearings will be removed from gearcase with propeller shaft. 51877 9. If propeller shaft will not come out, proceed with Step “a” or “b,” following: a. Push propeller shaft back into place against the reverse gear. Visually inspect location of shift cam by looking down shift shaft hole (illuminated with a flashlight). If splined hole in shift cam is visible, reinstall shift shaft and rotate shift shaft to neutral position. Remove shift shaft, then remove propeller shaft as instructed in Step 8, immediately preceding. b. Push propeller shaft back into place against reverse gear. Slide bearing carrier back into gear housing (to support propeller shaft). Place gear housing on its left side (viewed from rear) and strike upper leading end of gear housing with a rubber mallet. This will dislodge the shift cam from cam follower into a clearance pocket in left side of gear housing. Remove bearing carrier and pull propeller shaft out of gear housing. NOTE: If Step 9-b was used to remove propeller shaft, the shift cam can be retrieved after removal of reverse gear. Shift Shaft CLEANING AND INSPECTION 1. Clean shift shaft and bushing with solvent and dry with compressed air. 2. Check shift shaft splines on both ends for wear and/or corrosion damage. 3. Inspect shift shaft for groove(s) at shift shaft bushing seal surface. 4. Inspect shift shaft bushing for corrosion damage. 5. Inspect shift shaft bushing oil seal for wear and/or cuts. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-19 51878 d e f g a bc 51878 d e f g a bc LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove (and discard) shift shaft bushing oil seal by prying it out or driving it out with a punch and hammer. CLEANING/INSPECTION - BEARING CARRIER IMPORTANT: It is recommended that all seals and O-rings be replaced (as a normal repair procedure) to assure effective repair. CAUTION DO NOT spin bearings dry with compressed air, as this could cause bearing to score. 1. Clean bearing carrier with solvent and dry with compressed air. 2. Bearing carrier propeller shaft needle bearing condition is determined by propeller shaft bearing surface condition. (See “Propeller Shaft Inspection.”) DISASSEMBLY- BEARING CARRIER 1. Remove thrust bearing and thrust washer from bearing carrier. 2. If thrust bearing, thrust washer or thrust bearing surface on propeller shaft shows signs of rust, pitting or blueing from lack of lubricant, component(s) should be discarded. 3. Remove bearing carrier oil seals. 51886 a-Thrust Bearing b-Thrust Washer c-Bearing Carrier d-Pry Bar e-Oil Seals f-Bearing Carrier g-Bearing Carrier Needle Bearing NOTE: Do not remove bearing carrier needle bearing unless replacement is needed. Page 6B-20 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 4. Use bearing removal and replacement tool (91-31229A5) or equivalent to press bearings out of bearing carrier. 51885 a b c a-Needle Bearing b-Push Rod c-Mandrel Propeller Shaft INSPECTION 1. Clean propeller shaft assembly with solvent and dry with compressed air. 2. Inspect bearing carrier oil seal surfaces for grooves. Run fingernail across seal surface to check for groove. Replace shaft if groove is found. 3. Visually check bearing surfaces of propeller shaft for pitting, grooves, scoring, uneven wear or discoloration (bluish color) from overheating. Replace shaft and corresponding needle bearing if any of the above conditions are found. (Bearing carrier needle bearing contacts propeller shaft just in front of oil seal surface. Reverse gear bearing contacts propeller shaft in front of sliding clutch splines.) 4. Inspect propeller shaft splines for wear and/or corrosion damage. 5. Check propeller shaft for straightness. Use either method, following: Balance Wheels Place propeller shaft on balance wheels, as shown. Rotate propeller shaft and observe propeller end of shaft for “wobble.” Replace shaft if any wobble is observed. 51877 b a c a-Balance Wheels b-Bearing Surfaces c-Watch for Wobble 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-21 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING “Vee” Blocks and Dial Indicator Position propeller shaft roller bearing surfaces on vee blocks. Mount a dial indicator at front edge of propeller splines. Rotate propeller shaft. Dial indicator movement of more than 0.006 in. (0.152 mm) (or noticeable wobble) is reason for replacement. DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove shift cam from cam follower. 2. Insert a thin blade screwdriver or awl under first coil of cross pin retainer spring and rotate propeller shaft to unwind spring from sliding clutch. DO NOT overstretch spring. 51875 a a-Cross Pin Retainer Spring CAUTION Detent pin is free and can fall out of sliding clutch. Care MUST BE taken not to lose pin. 3. Detent pin is free and can be removed from sliding clutch at this time. 4. Push cross pin out of sliding clutch and propeller shaft with a punch. 51879 a c b a-Detent Pin b-Cross Pin c-Sliding Clutch d-Cross Pin e-Punch d e Page 6B-22 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 5. Pull sliding clutch off propeller shaft. 6. Inspect sliding clutch. Check reverse gear clutch “jaws” and forward gear clutch “jaws.” Rounded “jaws” indicate one or more of the following: a. Improper shift cable adjustment. b. Improper shift habits of operator(s) (shift from neutral to reverse gear or forward gear too slowly). c. Engine idle speed too high (while shifting). 51875 a b c a-Sliding Clutch b-Reverse Gear Clutch Jaws c-Forward Gear Clutch Jaws 7. Pull cam follower and clutch actuator rod out of propeller shaft. DO NOT force cam follower up-or-down or side-to-side when pulling from propeller shaft. 8. Once cam follower and clutch actuator rod are removed from propeller shaft, lift rod out of cam follower. 9. Check condition of cam follower. If it shows wear (pitting, scoring or rough surface), replace cam follower and shift cam. 10. Remove forward gear and bearing adaptor assembly. 11. Remove 2 thrust races and 2 keepers from prop shaft. a b a-Cam Follower b-Clutch Actuator Rod c-Forward Gear d-Bearing Adaptor Assembly e-Thrust Races (2) f-Keepers (hidden) (2) 55097 c d e f 51884 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-23 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING Clutch Actuator Rod CLEANING AND INSPECTION 1. Clean clutch actuator rod in solvent and dry with compressed air. 2. Inspect actuator components for wear or damage. Replace components as required. Forward Gear and Bearing Adapter DISASSEMBLY/CLEANING/INSPECTION 1. Remove forward gear from bearing adapter. 2. Inspect forward gear clutch teeth for signs of wear. If clutch teeth are worn, sliding clutch should be replaced also. 3. Inspect forward gear teeth for full tooth contact, chips, pits and signs of rust. If forward gear teeth are damaged, pinion gear must be inspected and replaced if necessary. 4. Inspect forward gear hub for signs of pitting, rust, scoring or discoloration (blueing) due to lack of lubricant. 5. Remove thrust bearing and spacer shim. Inspect thrust bearing for pits, rust, or discoloration (blueing) due to lack of lubricant. 51878 ab c d e f g a-Forward Gear b-Forward Gear Clutch Teeth c-Forward Gear Teeth d-Forward Gear Hub e-Thrust Bearing f-Thrust Washer g-Spacer Shim Page 6B-24 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 6. Remove thrust washer and O-ring. The thrust washer acts as a bearing surface for the thrust bearing and it should be inspected for pits, rust, scoring or discoloration due to lack of lubricant. O-ring should be inspected for cuts or abrasions and replaced if necessary. 7. Remove thrust bearing and thrust washer from bearing adaptor. Thrust roller bearing should be inspected for pitting, rust or signs of discoloration (blueing) due to lack of lubricant. If thrust roller bearing must be replaced, the bearing surfaces on the thrust washer and propeller shaft where the thrust roller bearing rides should also be inspected for signs of wear. 55090 c d e 55089 a b a-Thrust Washer b-O-Ring (hidden) c-Thrust Bearing d-Thrust Washer e-Bearing Adaptor 8. The forward gear bearing should be carefully inspected for smoothness of movement, pits, rust, or signs of discoloration (blueing) due to lack of lubricant. If the bearing must be replaced, it is recommended that a hammer and cape chisel be used to break the bearing loose from the bearing adapter. Be careful not to damage bearing adapter when removing roller bearing. 55091 a b a-Forward Gear Bearing b-Bearing Adaptor 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-25 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING Pinion Gear and Driveshaft REMOVAL 1. Remove bearing retainer using Bearing Retainer Tool (91-43506). 51865 a b a-Bearing Retainer b-Bearing Retainer Tool (91-43506) 2. Place Driveshaft Holding Tool (91-34377A1) over driveshaft splines. 3. Use a socket and flex handle to hold pinion nut. (Pad area of gear housing, where flex handle will make contact, to prevent damage to gear housing.) 4. Use a socket and flex handle on Driveshaft Holding Tool to loosen pinion nut. Remove pinion nut and Driveshaft Holding Tool. 5. Remove gear housing from vise and reposition it as shown. Be sure to use soft jaw vise covers and clamp as close as possible to water pump studs. 6. Place a block of wood on gear housing mating surface. Use a mallet and carefully tap gear housing away from driveshaft. CAUTION DO NOT strike gear housing hard with the mallet or allow gear housing to fall. ab a-Wooden Blockb-Soft Jaw Vise Covers 7.Reach into gear housing and remove pinion gear. 51878 Page 6B-26 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 8. After driveshaft is removed from gear case, remove and retain shim(s) that were located under upper tapered driveshaft bearing. 9. If inspection determines that replacement of driveshaft tapered bearing is required, remove bearing from driveshaft as follows: a. Position driveshaft in a vise; DO NOT tighten vise jaws against shaft. b. Strike shaft with a lead hammer; take care not to drop shaft. 51866 10. Remove 18 loose needles from outer race of driveshaft needle bearing. 11. If inspection of driveshaft needle bearing surface determines that replacement of needle bearing is required, the 18 loose needle bearings previously removed must be reinstalled in bearing race to provide surface for mandrel to drive against. NOTE: Reverse gear must be removed first before removing driveshaft needle bearing. IMPORTANT: Discard driveshaft needle bearing after removal. (Bearing cannot be reused.) 51869 a b c a-Mandrel (91-37263) b-Pilot* (91-36571) c-Driver Rod* (91-37323) *From Bearing Removal and Installation Kit (91-31229A5) 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-27 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING CLEANING AND INSPECTION 1. Clean driveshaft, tapered bearing and race, and pinion gear with solvent. Dry with compressed air. DO NOT allow driveshaft bearing to spin while drying. 2. Inspect pinion gear for pitting, grooves, scoring, uneven wear and/or discoloration from overheating. Replace pinion gear, if any of the above conditions are found. 3. Inspect driveshaft needle bearing surface (area just above pinion gear splines) for pitting, grooves, scoring, uneven wear and/or discoloration from overheating. Replace driveshaft and driveshaft needle bearing, if any of the preceding conditions are found. 4. Inspect driveshaft to crankshaft splines for wear. Replace driveshaft if wear is excessive. 5. Inspect tapered bearing race for pitting, grooves, scoring, uneven wear and discoloration from overheating. Replace tapered bearing and race as a set, if any of the preceding conditions are found. 6. Inspect driveshaft for groove(s) where water pump base oil seals contact shaft. Replace driveshaft if groove(s) are found. Reverse Gear REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY NOTE: Reverse gear can be removed from gear housing only after driveshaft and pinion gear have been removed. NOTE: Cautiously applying heat to both sides of gearcase where reverse gear assembly is located will aid in removal of bearing cup adapter. 1. Remove reverse gear by hand. 50884 a a-Reverse Gear IMPORTANT: DO NOT remove needle bearing from reverse gear unless replacement of bearing is required. Bearing cannot be reused after it has been removed. Page 6B-28 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 2. Remove thrust bearing and thrust washer from reverse gear bearing cup. 3. Remove reverse gear bearing adaptor. Remove, measure and make note of the shim thickness and discard (DO NOT reuse) the shims. 50780 50882 d e fg h i a b c a-Thrust Bearing b-Thrust Washer c-Reverse Gear Bearing Adaptor d-Bolt (91-31229) e-Nut (91-11-24156) f-Guide Plate (91-816243) g-Washer (91-34961) h-Puller Head (from Slide Hammer Puller Kit 91-34569A1) i-Jaws (91-816242) CLEANING AND INSPECTION CAUTION DO NOT spin bearings dry with compressed air, as this could cause bearing to score. 1. Clean reverse gear and bearing with solvent and dry with compressed air. DO NOT spin the bearing. 2. Inspect gear teeth for pitting, grooves, scoring, uneven wear and for discoloration (from overheating). Replace gear if any of these conditions are found. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-29 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 3. Check clutch jaws on reverse gear for damage. Replace reverse gear if damage is found. 23351 b a a-Reverse Gear Teeth b-Clutch Jaws NOTE: The needle bearings in the reverse gear should not be removed unless damage has been found. Inspect to ensure that all of the needles are present and in position. Needles that have been dislodged may be snapped back into place as long as no damage has occurred to the bearing cage. 4. Inspect the needle bearings on the inside of the reverse gear and the bearing surface on the propeller shaft. If either the needle bearings or the bearing surface of the propeller shaft is pitted grooved, worn unevenly, discolored from overheating or has embedded particles, replace the propeller shaft and needle bearing in the reverse gear. a a-Reverse Gear Needle Bearing Contact Area 5. If reverse gear needle bearing is found to be damaged, place reverse gear in a press and use mandrel 91-63569 to press bearing out of gear. 50778 a a-Bearing Gear Housing CLEANING AND INSPECTION 1. Clean gear housing with solvent and dry with compressed air. 2. Check gear housing carefully for impact damage. 3. Check for loose fitting bearing adaptors and needle bearings. NOTE: If bearing adaptors have spun in gear case, gear housing must be replaced. 4. Inspect bearing carrier cover nut retainer threads in gear housing for corrosion damage and/or stripped threads. Page 6B-30 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING Reassembly and Installation of Counter Rotation Gear Housing Driveshaft Needle Bearing REASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION CAUTION If driveshaft needle bearing failure has occurred, and original bearing race has turned in the gear housing, gear housing must be replaced. Loose fitting needle bearing will move out of position and cause repeated failures. NOTE: Driveshaft needle bearing must be installed prior to installation of reverse gear. 1. Apply a thin coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Lubricant to driveshaft needle bearing bore in gear housing. 2. By way of propeller shaft cavity, place needle bearing in driveshaft bore with numbered side of bearing facing up driveshaft bore. 3. Install and seat needle bearing with the following tools: Puller Rod* (91-31229), Nut* (91-24156), Pilot* (91-36571), Plate* (91-29310), and Mandrel* (91-92788). Pull bearing up into bore until it bottoms on gear housing shoulder. (DO NOT use excessive force.) *From Bearing Removal and Installation Kit (91-31229A5) 51869 a b c d e f a-Mandrel b-Bearing c-Pilot d-Plate e-Puller Rod f-Hold 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-31 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING Bearing Carrier, Forward Gear and Bearing Adaptor REASSEMBLY 1. Using suitable mandrel, press forward gear bearing into bearing adaptor until bearing is flush with lip of adaptor. a b c a-Suitable Mandrel b-Forward Gear Bearing c-Bearing Adaptor PROPELLER SHAFT NEEDLE ROLLER BEARING AND OIL SEAL INSTALLATION 1. Using mandrel 91-15755, press bearing carrier needle bearing (number side up) into bearing carrier until mandrel shoulder contacts bearing carrier. 51881 a bc d a-Mandrel (91-15755) b-Bearing Carrier Needle Bearing c-Bearing Carrier d-Shoulder 2. Apply Loctite 271 (92-809820) to outside diameter of oil seals. Page 6B-32 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 3. With seal lip facing towards bearing, press inner seal using long end of mandrel (91-31108) into bearing carrier until mandrel shoulder bottoms out on bearing carrier. 51881 a b c d a-Inner Seal b-Mandrel (91-31108) c-Bearing Carrier d-Mandrel Shoulder 4. With seal lip facing towards mandrel, press outer seal using short end of mandrel (91-31108) into bearing carrier until mandrel shoulder bottoms out on bearing carrier. a b c d 51881 a-Outer Seal b-Mandrel (91-31108) c-Bearing Carrier d-Mandrel Shoulder 5. Lubricate both seal lips with 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant (92-90018A12). 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-33 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING REVERSE GEAR AND BEARING CUP ADAPTOR REASSEMBLY 1. With reverse gear teeth facing down, use mandrel (91-86943) to press propeller shaft needle bearing (NUMBERS/LETTERS UP) into reverse gear until short shoulder on mandrel bottoms on reverse gear. NOTE: If gear housing has been replaced or inspection determines that reverse gear bearing adapter must be replaced, assemble and install as follows: 2. Place reverse gear roller bearing (NUMBER/LETTERS UP) in press. Using suitable mandrel, press bearing cup adapter onto reverse gear bearing. e f g 51883 a b c d a-Reverse Gear Teeth b-Mandrel (91-86943) c-Propeller Shaft Needle Bearing d-Shoulder e-Mandrel f-Bearing Cup Adapter g-Reverse Gear Roller Bearing IMPORTANT: The appearance of the forward and reverse gear is almost identical. There are two ways to distinguish between the reverse and forward gears. The reverse gear has a shorter hub and it has a smaller inner diameter needle bearing bore. d 50885a c a-Reverse Gear b-Forward Gear c-Shorter Length Hub d-Smaller Diameter Bearing Bore b Page 6B-34 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING Reverse Gear Bearing Adaptor Assembly INSTALLATION NOTE: If the reverse gear, reverse gear adaptor, large thrust bearing, or bearing race in the gear housing were not replaced, install the same shim(s) (or the same thickness of shim(s)) that were taken out when adaptor was removed. If the reverse gear, reverse gear adaptor, large thrust bearing, bearing race, or gear housing were replaced, install 0.008 in. (0.51 mm) of shims. NOTE: If backlash has already been checked and it has determined that it needs to be adjusted, (see Checking Reverse Gear Backlash), adding 0.001 in. (0.025 mm) shims will reduce the gear backlash by approximately 0.001 in. (0.025 mm). Subtracting 0.001 in. (0.025 mm) shims will increase backlash by approximately the same amount. Example 1 (if backlash is too high) Backlash checks: (subtract) middle of specification: You get: 0.045 in. 0.025 in. 0.020 in. (1.14 mm) (0.64 mm) (0.51 mm) add this quantity of shims: Example 2 (if backlash is too low) Backlash checks: middle of specification: (subtract) You get: subtract this quantity of shims: 0.025 in. 0.009 in. 0.016 in. (0.64 mm) (0.23 mm) (0.41 mm) 1. Lubricate the bore into which the reverse gear bearing adaptor is to be installed with Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant. 2. Place the shim(s) into reverse bore of gear housing. 3. Position the bearing adaptor in the gear housing. 55099 a b a-Bearing Adaptor b-Shims 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-35 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 4. Position the reverse gear (without the thrust race or thrust bearing) into the gear housing and into the adaptor. 5. Install PILOT RING (91-18603) over DRIVER TOOL (91-18605) and seat pilot ring in gearcase against inner ledge. Thread RETAINER (91-18604) into bearing carrier threads. Install SCREW (10-18602) into retainer and gently tighten screw against driver tool while holding retainer securely. Continue to apply pressure against driver rod until reverse gear/bearing cup adaptor JUST SEATS in gearcase. DO NOT OVER-SEAT the adaptor as the reverse gear bearing will be damaged. As bearing adaptor begins to seat, the effort required to turn screw will increase considerably. 55100 a b c d e f a-Reverse Gear b-Pilot Ring (91-18603) c-Driver Tool (91-18605) d-Inner Ledge e-Retainer (91-18604) f-Screw (10-18602) 6. After reverse bearing adaptor is seated, remove screw, retainer, driver tool, pilot ring and reverse gear. Apply Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant to thrust bearing and install thrust race and bearing onto bearing adaptor. 7. Reinstall reverse gear into bearing adaptor. 55102 d ef g55101 a b c a-Thrust Bearing b-Thrust Washer c-Bearing Adaptor d-Reverse Gear e-Thrust Bearing f-Thrust Washer (under thrust bearing) g-Bearing Adaptor Page 6B-36 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING Driveshaft and Pinion Gear REASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION 1. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant on l.D. of driveshaft tapered bearing. 2. Thread a used pinion nut onto end of driveshaft. Leave approximately 1/16 in. (2 mm) of nut threads exposed. Driveshaft threads MUST NOT extend beyond nut or thread damage could result while pressing. 3. Place bearing over driveshaft. 4. Using an old driveshaft bearing inner race or other suitable mandrel (which applies pressing force on center bearing race only), press bearing onto shaft until seated. 50064 a b c d e a-Used Pinion Nut b-Driveshaft c-Tapered Bearing d-Old Bearing Inner Race e-Universal Puller Plate 5. Position pinion gear in gear housing below driveshaft bore with teeth of pinion gear meshed with teeth of reverse gear. 6. Insert driveshaft into driveshaft bore while holding pinion gear. Rotate driveshaft to align and engage driveshaft splines with pinion gear splines. Continue to insert driveshaft into gear housing until driveshaft tapered bearing is against bearing race. 7. Apply Loctite 271 to threads of pinion gear nut and install flat washer and nut on driveshaft with flat side of nut away from pinion gear. 8. Place shim(s) (retained from disassembly) into gear housing. If shim(s) were lost or are not reusable (damaged), start with approximately 0.010 in. (0.254 mm). 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-37 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 9. Install bearing race and bearing retainer. a b c d 51880 a-Shim(s) b-Bearing Race c-Bearing Retainer (Word “OFF” must be visible); Torque to 100 lb. ft. (135.5 Nm) d-Bearing Retainer Tool (91-43506) 10. Use a socket and breaker bar to hold pinion nut (pad area where flex handle will contact gear housing while torquing nut). 11. Place Driveshaft Holding Tool (91-34377A1) over crankshaft end of driveshaft. Torque pinion nut to 75 Ib. ft. (101.5 Nm). a b a c c d a-Driveshaft Holding Tool (91-34377A1) b-Torque Wrench; Torque Nut to 75 lb. ft. (101.5 Nm) c-Socket d-Breaker Bar IMPORTANT: Wipe any excess Loctite from pinion nut and pinion gear. Page 6B-38 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING Pinion Gear Depth DETERMINING PINION GEAR DEPTH NOTE: Read entire procedure before attempting any change in shim thickness. IMPORTANT: Reverse gear assembly must be installed in gear housing when checking pinion gear depth or an inaccurate measurement will be obtained. 1. Clean gear housing bearing carrier shoulder. 2. Install Bearing Preload Tool (91-14311A1) over driveshaft in sequence shown. NOTE: Bearing Preload Tool (91-44307A1) may also be used. Follow instructions provided with tool for proper installation. a b c d e f g h g a-Adaptor b-Bearing c-Washer d-Spring e-Nut; thread nut all the way onto bolt f-Bolt g-Set Screw h-Sleeve; holes in sleeve must align with set screws 3. Align adaptor on driveshaft bearing pocket ledge. 4. With tool installed over driveshaft, tighten both set screws securely, making certain to align sleeve holes to allow set screws to pass thru. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-39 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 5. Measure distance (a) and increase that distance by 1 in. (25.4 mm) by turning bottom nut away from top nut. 1 in. (25.4 mm) 51870 b c a a-Distance b-Adaptor c-Ledge 6. Turn driveshaft clockwise 2 or more turns to seat driveshaft bearings. 7. Insert Pinion Gear Locating Tool* (91-74776) into gear housing until it bottoms out on bearing carrier shoulder. *Pinion Gear Locating Tool (91-12349A2) can be used. Use flat #7 and disc #2. Follow instructions supplied with tool. 8. Determine pinion gear depth by inserting a feeler gauge thru access slot in pinion gear shimming tool. 9. Clearance between shimming tool and pinion gear should be 0.025 in. (0.64 mm). 10. If clearance is correct, leave Bearing Preload Tool on driveshaft for “Determining Forward Gear Backlash,” following. 11. If clearance is not correct, add (or subtract) shims at location shown to raise (or lower) pinion gear. When reinstalling pinion nut, apply Loctite 271 on threads of nut and retorque pinion nut. 24643 a b a c c d a-Pinion Gear Shimming Tool (91-74776 or 91-12349A2) b-Feeler Gauge c-Obtain 0.025 in. (0.64 mm) Clearance between Shimming Tool and Pinion Gear d-Add or Subtract Shim(s) Here Page 6B-40 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING NOTE: Bearing Preload Tool (91-14311A1) should remain installed on driveshaft after setting pinion gear depth as it is required to properly check forward gear and reverse gear backlash. Reverse Gear DETERMINING REVERSE GEAR BACKLASH NOTE: Reverse gear backlash is adjustable using shims; it can be checked as follows: 1. Install Driver Tool (91-18605) into reverse gear assembly. 2. Slide Pilot Ring (91-18603) over driver tool and seat pilot ring against inner ledge in gear case. 3. Thread Retainer (91-18604) into gear case cover nut threads. 4. Torque Screw (91-18602) to 45 Ib. in. (5 Nm) against driver tool. 51884 a b c d e a-Driver Tool (91-18605) b-Pilot Ring (91-18603) c-Inner Ledge d-Retainer (91-18604) e-Screw (91-18602) [Torque to 45 lb. in. (5 Nm)] 5. Thread stud adapter [from Bearing Preload Tool (91-14311A1)] all the way onto stud. 6. Install: Backlash Indicator Tool (91-78473) Dial Indicator Holder (91-89897) Dial Indicator (91-58222A1) 7. Position dial indicator pointer on line marked “1” on Backlash Indicator Tool, if gear ratio is 1.87:1 (15 teeth on pinion gear), or on line marked “2” on Backlash Indicator Tool, if gear ratio is 2:1 (14 teeth on pinion gear). 8. Lightly turn driveshaft back-and-forth (no movement should occur at propeller shaft). 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-41 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 9. Dial Indicator registers amount of backlash, which should be 0.030 in. to 0.050 in. (0.76 mm to 1.27 mm). 51880 a b c d e f a-Stud Adaptor (from 91-14311A1) b-Stud c-Backlash Indicator Tool (91-78473) d-Dial Indicator Holder (91-89897) e-Dial Indicator (91-58222A1) f-Dial Indicator Pointer NOTE: If reverse gear backlash is not within specifications, then gear case is not properly assembled or component(s) within gear case are excessively worn and must be replaced before returning gear case to service. 10. Remove Driver Tool, Pilot Ring, Retainer and Screw from gear case. Forward Gear DETERMINING FORWARD GEAR BACKLASH 1. Install a load washer (12-37429) over a 44-93003 propeller shaft so that it seats against the REAR shoulder of the clutch spline teeth. 55088a b c a-Load Washer (12-37429) b-Shoulder c-Propeller Shaft (44-93003) Page 6B-42 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 2. Assemble BEARING CARRIER, BEARING ADAPTOR, THRUST WASHER, THRUST BEARING, and FORWARD GEAR onto propeller shaft. 3. Position shim against shoulder in gear case. 55104 g h 55103 a b c d e f a-Bearing Carrier b-Bearing Adaptor c-Thrust Washer d-Thrust Bearing e-Forward Gear f-Shim (PLACE IN GEARCASE FIRST) g-Shoulder h-Shim 4. Insert entire propeller assembly into gear case. 5. Install tab washer and cover nut. Torque cover nut to 100 Ib. ft. (135.5 N m) to seat forward gear assembly in gear case. NOTE: Drill a 3/8 in. (22.2 mm) diameter hole through the side (PROPELLER NUT END) of a 5 in. x 2 in. (127 mm x 50.8 mm) long piece of PVC pipe. A screwdriver may be inserted thru pipe into propeller shaft splines to prevent PVC pipe from turning while tightening retaining nut. 6. Install a 5 in. x 2 in. (127 mm x 50.8 mm) long piece of PVC pipe (obtain locally) over propeller shaft and secure it against the bearing carrier with a flat washer and nut. a b c d e f g h i j k a-Prop Nut b-Flat Washer c-PVC Pipe [5 in. x 2 in. (127 mm x 50.8 mm)] d-Cover Nut e-Tab Washer 51882 f-Bearing Carrier g-Prop Shaft h-Bearing Adaptor i-Shim j-Forward Gear k-Load Washer 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-43 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 7. Tighten nut to 45 lb. in. (5 Nm). This will seat the forward gear against the forward thrust bearing and tends to hold the propeller shaft from moving when measuring backlash. NOTE: Bearing Preload Tool (91-44307A1) should still be installed from having previously been used to determine pinion gear depth and reverse gear backlash. If it is not still installed on gear case, refer to “DETERMINING PINION GEAR DEPTH,” previously, for proper installation procedure. 8. With the proper preload applied to the propeller shaft and the driveshaft, rotate the driveshaft clockwise 5 to 10 complete revolutions. This will seat the forward gear and upper driveshaft bearings and thus provide the most accurate backlash readings. 9. If not previously installed: a. Thread stud adaptor [from bearing preload tool (91-44307A1)] all the way onto stud. b. Install: Backlash Indicator Tool (91-78473) Dial Indicator Holder (91-89897) Dial Indicator (91-58222A1) 10. Position dial indicator pointer on line marked “1” on BACKLASH INDICATOR TOOL, if gear ratio is 1.87:1 (15 teeth on pinion gear), or on line marked “2” on BACKLASH INDICATOR TOOL, if gear ratio is 2:1 (14 teeth on pinion gear). 51880 a b c d e f a-Stud Adaptor (from 91-44307A1) b-Stud c-Backlash Indicator Tool (91-78473) d-Dial Indicator Holder (91-89897) e-Dial Indicator (91-58222A1) f-Dial Indicator Pointer 11. Gently rock driveshaft back and forth to determine forward gear backlash. 175 and 200 HP models with 1.87:1 Ratio = 0.018 in. to 0.027 in. (0.46 mm - 0.69 mm) backlash. 135 and 150 HP models with 2.00:1 Ratio = 0.015 in. to 0.022 in. (0.38 mm - 0.56 mm) backlash. Page 6B-44 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 12. If backlash is less than the specifications, then a larger shim should be installed. Conversely, if the backlash indicated is greater than specifications, then a smaller shim should be installed. NOTE: By adding or subtracting 0.002 in. (0.051 mm) shim, the backlash will change approximately 0.002 in. (0.051 mm). 51882 a a-Shim 13. If forward gear backlash is within specifications, then Bearing Preload Tool, Dial Indicator, Backlash Indicator Tool/Dial Indicator Holder, PVC pipe, forward gear assembly, bearing adaptor, bearing carrier and test propeller shaft can all be removed from the gear case. Propeller Shaft/Forward Gear Bearing Adapter/Bearing Carrier REASSEMBLY 1. Position sliding clutch onto propeller shaft. “GROOVED RINGS” are for manufacturing purposes only and may be positioned towards either gear. Cross pin hole and detent hole in sliding clutch must line up with cross pin slot and detent notch in propeller shaft. a b c d e f g 51913 a-Sliding Clutch b-Propeller Shaft c-Grooved Rings d-Cross Pin Hole e-Detent Hole f-Cross Pin Slot g-Detent Notches 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-45 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 2. Place a small amount of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Lubricant on actuator rod and install cam follower. ab a-Actuator Rod b-Cam Follower 3. Slide clutch actuator assembly into propeller shaft. Align cross pin slot in actuator rod with cross pin slot in clutch/propeller shaft. 51875 a b cd e a-Cam Follower b-Clutch Actuator Rod c-Propeller Shaft d-Cross Pin Slot e-Clutch/Propeller Shaft 4. Insert cross pin through sliding clutch, propeller shaft and actuator rod forcing cross pin tool out. 51875 a a-Cross Pin 5. Apply a small amount of 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant (92-90018A12) to the rounded end of detent pin. Position detent pin in detent pin hole of sliding clutch with rounded end of pin toward propeller shaft. 51879 a b c a-Detent Pin b-Detent Pin Hole c-Sliding Clutch Page 6B-46 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 6. Install cross pin retaining spring onto sliding clutch as follows: IMPORTANT: DO NOT over-stretch retaining spring when installing onto sliding clutch. a. Install spring. (1.) Spirally wrap spring into groove on sliding clutch. (2.) Position spring in groove so that straight end of spring is against the side of groove. 7. Place gear housing in a soft jaw vise with the driveshaft in a vertical position. 8. Coat cam pocket of cam follower with 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant (92-90018A12). 9. Place shift cam into cam pocket of cam follower with numbered side of cam facing up. 10. Slide propeller shaft assembly into reverse gear assembly. 5509655095 de ab c a-Cam Pocket b-Cam Follower c-Shift Cam d-Shift Cam (Position as Shown) e-Gear Housing 11. Apply a light coat of 2-4-C w/Teflon to the threads of the shift shaft bushing. 12. Insert shift shaft down shift shaft hole in gear housing and into shift cam. It may be necessary to rotate shift shaft back-and-forth slightly in order for splines of shift shaft to match up with splines of shift cam. Thread bushing into position, but do not tighten down at this time. 51867 a b a-Shift Shaft Bushing b-Shift Shaft 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-47 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING Page 6B-48 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 13. Install appropriate spacer shim into the gear housing. 14. Apply Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant to to thrust bearing and install thrust bearing and thrust race onto forward gear bearing adaptor. b c d a 55220 50782 a - Shim b - Bearing Adaptor c - Thrust Washer d - Thrust Bearing 15. Insert Forward Gear Installation Tool (91-815850) into forward gear/bearing adaptor assembly. 16. Install tool with adaptor assembly over propeller shaft and into gear housing. Applying downward pressure to bearing adaptor, remove installation tool from assembly. 55202 55221 a b c a - Forward Gear Installation Tool (91-815850) b - Forward Gear/Bearing Adaptor Assembly c - Forward Gear Bearing Adaptor LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 17. Install thrust race on top of bearing adaptor. 18. Apply Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant to small thrust bearing and install bearing on thrust race. 5510855107 a b a-Thrust Raceb-Thrust Bearing 19. Install thrust collar with its STEPPED SIDE DOWN toward the small thrust bearing. 20. Pull up slightly on the propeller shaft to gain access to the groove on the shaft for the keepers. Install the 2 keepers into the groove and lower the propeller shaft. 55110 55109 c d ea b a-Thrust Collar b-Thrust Bearing c-Propeller Shaft d-Keepers (2) e-Thrust Collar 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-49 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 21. Install second thrust collar with its stepped side UP. 22. Apply Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant to the second thrust bearing and install it on top of the second thrust collar. 55112 a b c a-Thrust Collar b-Thrust Bearing c-Thrust Collar 23. Apply Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant to to second small thrust bearing race and install race to the surface inside of the bearing carrier. 24. Apply Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant to bearing carrier O-ring. Install O-ring onto bearing adaptor. 50779 a b a-Thrust Race b-Bearing Carrier Race Surface c-O-ring 55113 c Page 6B-50 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 25. Apply Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant to: a. Outer diameter of bearing carrier which contacts gear case. b. Space between carrier oil seals. 26. Apply Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant to bearing carrier needle bearing. 27. Install bearing carrier into gear housing. 28. Verify bearing carrier keyway is aligned with gear housing keyway and install bearing carrier key. 29. Place tab washer against bearing carrier. 51885 55114 a b a-Bearing Carrier b-Tab Washer 30. Apply 2-4-C w/Teflon to threads of cover nut and install cover nut in gear housing. Verify that the word “OFF” and arrow are visible. NOTE: Before torquing bearing carrier cover nut, gear case should either be mounted in a stand specifically designed for holding gear cases or bolted to a driveshaft housing to avoid possible damage to the gear case. 31. Using Cover Nut Tool (91-61069), torque cover nut to 210 Ib. ft. (285 Nm). 51911 a b a-Retainer Nut Tool (91-61069) b-Retainer Nut 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-51 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 32. Bend one lock tab of tab washer into cover nut (only one will align). 33. Bend remaining tabs of tab washer toward front of gear housing. 34. Use Shift Shaft Bushing Tool (91-31107) and torque shift shaft bushing to 50 Ib. ft. (68 Nm). 51882 a b a-Shift Shaft Bushing Tool (91-31107) b-Shift Shaft Bushing Water Pump REASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION 1. Install oil seals into water pump base, as follows: a. Place water pump base on a press. b. Just before installing each seal apply Loctite 271 on outside diameter of oil seal. c. With a suitable mandrel, press the smaller diameter oil seal into pump base with lip of oil seal toward impeller side of base. d. With a suitable mandrel, press the larger diameter oil seal into pump base with lip of oil seal toward gear housing side of base. e. Wipe any excess Loctite from oil seals and water pump base. 2. Install O-ring into O-ring groove of water pump base. Lubricate O-ring and oil seals with 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant (92-90018A12). 51869 a bc a-Mandrel b-Oil Seal (Smaller OD) c-O-Ring Groove Page 6B-52 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 3. Install divider block if removed. Use RTV Sealer to seal seams between divider block and gear housing. 4. Install a new water pump base gasket and install water pump base. 51866 51878 a b c d a-Divider Block b-Water Pump Base c-Gasket d-Hole (MUST be positioned as shown) 5. Install the following in order: Pump base to face plate gasket, face plate to pump cover gasket. Gaskets and face plate are indexed by dowel pin location and must be in- stalled correctly. 51868 a b c a-Gasket (Water Pump Base to Face Plate) b-Face Plate c-Gasket (Face Plate to Water Pump Cover) 6. Place impeller drive key on flat of driveshaft. Hold key on driveshaft with a small amount of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant (92-90018A12). IMPORTANT: When completing gear housing repair that requires removal of water pump impeller, it is recommended that the impeller be replaced. If it is necessary to reuse the impeller, DO NOT install in reverse to original rotation or premature impeller failure will occur. Original rotation is clockwise. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-53 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING CAUTION A visual inspection of impeller drive key MUST BE made to determine that drive key is on flat of driveshaft after impeller is installed. If key has moved off flat of driveshaft, repeat Steps 7 and 8. 7. Slide impeller down driveshaft to impeller drive key. Align drive key with keyway in the center hub of impeller, and slide impeller over drive key. 8. If removed, install new water pump insert into pump cover as follows: a. Apply Quicksilver Perfect Seal to water pump insert area of pump cover. b. Install water pump insert into pump cover, being sure that tab on insert enters recess in pump cover. c. Wipe any excess Quicksilver Perfect Seal from insert and cover. NOTE: If 2 holes were drilled in top of water pump cover to aid in removal of insert, fill holes with RTV Sealer or equivalent. Allow to cure 24 hours prior to operating engine. 9. Install water tube seal into pump cover. Plastic side of seal goes into cover first. 10. Reinstall water tube guide into water pump cover. 11. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant to inside of water pump insert. 12. Position assembled water pump cover over driveshaft and lower over water pump studs. Rotate driveshaft in a clockwise direction (viewed from top), while pushing down on pump cover to ease impeller entry into cover. 13. Install water pump cover retainer washers, nuts and bolt. CAUTION DO NOT over-torque nuts and bolt, as this could cause cover to crack during operation. 14. Torque water pump nuts to 50 Ib. in. (6.0 Nm), and water pump bolt to 35 Ib. in. (4 Nm). 15. Install centrifugal slinger over driveshaft and down against pump cover. a b c a-Water Tube Guide b-Water Tube Seal c-Nuts, Bolts and Washers 51874 Page 6B-54 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING Gear Lubricant Filling Instructions 1. Remove any gasket material from “Fill” and “Vent” screws and gear housing. 2. Install new gaskets on “Fill” and “Vent” screws. IMPORTANT: Never apply lubricant to gear housing without first removing “Vent” screw, or gear housing cannot be filled because of trapped air. Fill gear housing ONLY when housing is in a vertical position. 3. Slowly fill housing thru “Fill” hole with Quicksilver Super Duty Lower Unit Lubricant until lubricant flows out of “Vent” hole and no air bubbles are visible. 4. Install “Vent” screw into “Vent” hole. IMPORTANT: DO NOT lose more than one fluid ounce (30cc) of gear lubricant while reinstalling “Fill” screw. 5. 5. Remove grease tube (or hose) from “Fill” hole and quickly install “Fill” screw into “Fill” hole. Installing Gear Housing to Driveshaft Housing WARNING Disconnect high tension leads from spark plugs and remove spark plugs from engine before installing gear housing onto driveshaft housing. 1. Tilt engine to full up position and engage the tilt lock lever. 2. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant onto driveshaft splines. CAUTION DO NOT allow lubricant on top of driveshaft. Excess lubricant, that is trapped in clearance space, will not allow driveshaft to fully engage with crankshaft. Subsequently, tightening the gear housing nuts (while excess lubricant is on top of driveshaft) will load the driveshaft/crankshaft and damage either or both the powerhead and gear housing. Top of driveshaft is to be wiped free of lubricant. 3. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant onto shift shaft splines. (DO NOT allow lubricant on top of shift shaft.) 4. Apply a thin bead of G.E. Silicone Sealer (92-90113--2) against the top of divider block. 5. Insert trim tab bolt into hole in rear of gear housing to driveshaft housing machined surface. 6. Shift gear housing into forward gear and place guide block anchor pin into forward gear position. 51900 a a-Guide Block Anchor Pin 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-55 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 7. Position gear housing so that the driveshaft is protruding into driveshaft housing. NOTE: If, while performing Step 8, the driveshaft splines will not align with crankshaft splines, place a propeller onto propeller shaft and turn it counterclockwise as the gear housing is being pushed toward driveshaft housing. 8. Move gear housing up toward driveshaft housing while aligning shift shaft splines and water tube with water tube guide (in water pump cover). 9. Place flat washers onto studs (located on either side of driveshaft housing). Start a nut on these studs and tighten finger-tight. 10. Start bolt at rear of gear housing inside trim tab recess. DO NOT tighten bolt at this time. 11. Recheck shift shaft spline engagement and correct if necessary. IMPORTANT: Do not force gear case up into place with attaching nuts. 12. Evenly tighten 2 nuts which were started in Step 9. Torque to listing in “Torque Specifications,” preceding. 13. After 2 nuts (located on either side of driveshaft housing) are tightened, check shift operation as follows: a. Place guide block anchor pin into forward gear position while turning prop shaft. Rotate flywheel clockwise (viewed from top); propeller shaft should rotate clockwise. b. Place guide block anchor pin into NEUTRAL position. Propeller shaft should rotate freely clockwise/counterclockwise. c. Place guide block anchor pin into REVERSE gear position. Rotate flywheel clockwise (viewed from top); propeller shaft should rotate counterclockwise. IMPORTANT: If shifting operation is not as described, preceding, the gear housing must be removed and the cause corrected. 14. Install washers and nuts onto studs (located on bottom center of anti-cavitation plate). Torque to listing in “Torque Specifications,” preceding. 15. Install special flat washer and nut on stud at leading edge of driveshaft housing. Torque to listing in “Torque Specifications,” preceding. 16. Torque bolt (started in Step 10) to listing in “Torque Specifications,” preceding. 17. Install trim tab, adjust to position in which it had previously been installed, and tighten securely. 18. Install plastic cap into trim tab bolt opening at rear edge of driveshaft housing. Propeller Installation WARNING When installing or removing propeller, because of the engine’s ease in starting, VERIFY that the remote control is in NEUTRAL position and that the key switch is “OFF.” Place a block of wood between the anti-cavitation plate and propeller to prevent accidental starting and to protect hands from propeller blades while removing or installing nut. Page 6B-56 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING 1. To aid in future removal of the propeller, liberally coat the propeller shaft splines with one of the following Quicksilver products: -- Anti-Corrosion Grease (92-78376A6) -- Special Lubricant 101 (92-13872A1) -- 2-4-C Marine Lubricant (92-90018A12) -- Perfect Seal (92-34227--1) 2. Place forward thrust hub over propeller shaft with shoulder side toward propeller. 3. Place propeller on propeller shaft and slide it up against thrust hub. a b a-Forward Thrust Hub b-Propeller Shaft 4. Place continuity washer (if equipped) onto shoulder of rear thrust hub. 5. Place rear thrust hub, tab washer and propeller nut on propeller shaft. 6. Thread propeller nut onto propeller shaft until nut is recessed into tab washer. 7. After propeller nut is recessed into tab washer, tighten nut securely [minimum of 55 Ib. ft. (74.5 Nm) torque]. 8. Bend 3 of the tabs of tab washer down in grooves of rear thrust hub to secure propeller nut. (If tab washer tabs do not align with slots, continue to tighten propeller nut to obtain alignment. DO NOT loosen nut to align tabs.) CAUTION DO NOT misinterpret propeller shaft movement with propeller movement. If propeller and propeller shaft together move forward-and-aft, this is normal; however, propeller should not move forward-and-aft on propeller shaft. 9. After first use, retighten propeller nut and again secure with tab washer (Steps 7 and 8, preceding). Propeller should be checked periodically for tightness, particularly if a stainless steel propeller is used. 51916 a c d b a-Continuity Washer (If Equipped) b-Rear Thrust Hub c-Tab Washer d-Propeller Nut 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 6B-57 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE Section 7A Table of Contents Ride Guide Steering Cable/Attaching Kit Installation (92876A1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Single Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Maintenance Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Ride Guide Steering Cable/Attaching Kit Installation (92876A3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Dual Cable - Single Outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Super Ride-Guide Steering Kit Installation . . . . . 7-4 Steering Cable Mounting Tube Installation . . . . . 7-5 Installing Steering Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Coupler Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Installing Link Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Maintenance Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Ride Guide Steering Cable/Attaching Kit Installation (92876A6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Dual Cable - Dual Outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Parallel Routed Steering Cables and Attaching Kit Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Opposite Side Routed Steering Cables and Attaching Kit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Trim Tab Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 Ride Guide Steering Attachment Extension Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 Maintenance Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26 Transom Mounted Ride Guide Attaching Kit Installation (73770A1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 Attaching Kit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 Maintenance Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 Clevis Attaching Kit Installation (A-70599A2) . . . . . 7-32 Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 Maintenance Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 Ride Guide Steering Cable/Attaching Kit Installation (92876A1) Single Cable Refer to “Quicksilver Accessories Guide” to determine correct length of steering cable and remote control cables. IMPORTANT: Steering cable and remote control cables must be the correct length, sharp bends on too-short cables result in “kinks”; too-long cables require unnecessary bends and/or loops. Both conditions place extra stress on the cables and will reduce the performance of the steering system. INSTALLING RIDE GUIDE CABLE TO OUTBOARD TILT TUBE IMPORTANT: Before installing steering cable in tilt tube, lubricate entire cable end with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon. NOTE: Ride Guide steering cable is lubricated at the factory and requires no additional lubrication at initial installation. 1. Lubricate seal (a) inside of outboard tilt tube and entire cable end (b) with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon. 2. Insert steering cable end thru outboard tilt tube and secure steering cable to tilt tube with steering cable attaching nut (c), as shown. Torque nut to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 N·m). 7 28160 a b c 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 7-1 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE STEERING LINK ROD INSTALLATION IMPORTANT: The steering link rod that connects the steering cable to the engine must be fastened using special washer head bolt (“a” - Part Number 10-14000) and self locking nuts (“b” & “c” - Part Number 11-34863). These locknuts must never be replaced with common nuts (non locking) as they will work loose and vibrate off freeing the link rod to disengage. WARNING Disengagement of a steering link rod can result in the boat taking a full, sudden, sharp turn. This potentially violent action can cause occupants to be thrown overboard exposing them to serious injury or death. 1. Assemble steering link rod to steering cable with two flat washers (d) and nylon insert locknut (“b” - Part Number 11-34863). Tighten locknut (b) until it seats, then back nut off 1/4 turn. 2. Production Outboards -Assemble steering link rod to engine with special washer head bolt (“a” - Part Number 10-14000) and nylon insert locknut (“c” - Part Number 11-34863). First torque bolt (a) to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm), then torque locknut (c) to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm). High Performance Outboards -An access hole is provided through the bottom cowl to ease installation of the link rod connecting bolt. Remove the BACK plug for installation and reinstall after installation. a b d c WARNING After installation is complete (and before operating outboard), check that boat will turn right when steering wheel is turned right and that boat will turn left when steering wheel is turned left. Check steering thru full range (left and right) and at all tilt angles to assure interference-free movement. Maintenance Instructions Maintenance inspection is owner’s responsibility and must be performed at intervals specified, following: Normal Service - Every 50 hrs. of operation or 60 days (whichever comes first) *Severe Service -Every 25 hrs. of operation or 30 days (whichever comes first) *Operation in a salt water area is considered “Severe Service.” 1. Carefully check steering system components for wear. Replace worn parts. 2. Check steering system fasteners to be sure that they are torqued to correct specifications. Page 7-2 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE NOTE: Ride-Guide Steering Cables are lubricated at the factory and require no additional lubrication at initial installation. WARNING Core of each steering cable (transom end) must be fully retracted into cable housing before lubricating cable. If cable is lubricated while extended, hydraulic lock of cable could occur. 3. With core of Ride-Guide Steering Cable (transom end) fully retracted, lubricate transom end of steering cables thru grease fittings (a) with 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-825407A12). Lubricate exposed portion of cable end (b) with 2-4-C w/Teflon. 4. Lubricate pivot point (c) of steering link rod and ball joint (d) of link rod with SAE 30 Weight Oil. 5. Inspection and lubrication of steering head assembly (rotary or straight rack) should be performed once each year (by your Authorized Dealer) or whenever steering mount and/or steering head are disassembled, or if steering effort has increased. Lubricate with 2-4-C w/Teflon. Ride Guide Steering Cable/Attaching Kit Installation (92876A3) Dual Cable - Single Outboard 28169 a a cb d WARNING Quicksilver Super Ride-Guide Steering (dual cables) MUST BE USED with this attaching kit. Failure to adhere to this requirement could result in steering system failure. Refer to “Quicksilver Accessories Guide” to determine correct length of steering cables and remote control cables. IMPORTANT: Steering cables and remote control cables MUST BE THE CORRECT LENGTH, sharp bends on too-short cables result in “kinks”; too-long cables require unnecessary bends and/or loops. Both conditions place extra stress on the cables and will reduce the performance of the steering system. CAUTION With this kit installed, the upper (outboard) mounting bolts MUST BE installed so that hex head end of bolts is on the inside of boat transom, as illustrated. Failure to install upper mounting bolts, as shown in illustration, could result in interference between steering cable nut and ends of mounting bolts when outboard is tilted up. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 7-3 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE CAUTION Marine sealer must be used on shanks bolts to make a water-tight installation. IMPORTANT: DO NOT use an impact driver when tightening transom bolts. Apply marine sealer to shanks of mounting bolts (not threads) and secure outboard to transom with 4 bolts, flat washers and locknuts, as shown. Be sure that installation is water-tight. Install upper bolts so that hex head end of bolts is on the inside of boat transom. Super Ride-Guide Steering Kit Installation IMPORTANT: Both gear racks or rotary steering heads must be installed so that both steering cables will be routed together on the same side of the boat and will push-and-pull together. 1. Install Super Ride-Guide Steering Kit in accordance with instructions included with Super Ride-Guide Kit. 2. Make sure that both gear racks or rotary steering heads are installed so that both steering cables are routed together down starboard side of boat and will push-and-pull together. a b cb a-Gear Rack b-Steering Cables c-Rotary Steering Heads Page 7-4 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE Steering Cable Mounting Tube Installation IMPORTANT: Spacers (b) must be installed between outboard swivel bracket and mounting bracket for steering cable mounting tube to provide proper spacing between steering cables. Secure mounting bracket for steering cable mounting tube on to swivel bracket of outboard. 28163 a c c d b a-Mounting Bracket for Steering Cable Mounting Tube b-Spacer (2) c-Locking Retainer (2) d-Bolts (4) - 7/8 in. (22 mm) Long - Torque to 100 lb. in. (11.5 Nm), then Bend Corner Tabs of Locking Retainers Up and Against Flats on Each Bolt WARNING Locking retainer corner tabs, MUST BE bent up and against flats on each bolt that secures mounting bracket for steering cable mounting tube to outboard swivel bracket to prevent bolts from turning out. Install steering cable mounting tube into mounting bracket with 2 adjusting nuts and 2 locking tab washers. Verify longer threaded end of tube is toward starboard side of boat. Temporarily adjust tube so that longer threaded end of tube extends out the same distance as the outboard tilt tube. Do not tighten adjustment nuts at this time. 51891 a b c d a-Steering Cable Mounting Tube (End of Tube with Longer Threads Toward Starboard Side of Boat) b-Mounting Bracket c-Locking Tab Washers (2) d-Adjustment Nuts (Flats of Nuts Facing Toward Locking Tab Washer) 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 7-5 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE Installing Steering Cables IMPORTANT: Lubricate inside of outboard tilt tube, inside of steering cable mounting tube and rubber O-ring seal (located in outboard tilt tube) with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon before installing steering cables. Lubricate inside of outboard tilt tube and inside of steering cable mounting tube with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon. Verify rubber O-ring seal (a) (located in outboard tilt tube) is lubricated. 51890 a Insert steering cable ends (a) thru outboard tilt tube (b) and cable mounting tube (c). Thread steering cable attaching nuts (d) on to tubes hand tight. NOTE: Torque steering cable attaching nuts only after final steering adjustments have been made. 51891 abd c Place a mark (a) on steering cable mounting tube (b) 5/8 in. (16 mm) from end of mounting tube. Slide plastic spacer (c), O-ring (d) and cap (e) over steering cable. 5/8,(16 mm) 51890a b c d e Thread cap (e) onto steering cable mounting tube, up to mark (a). 51890 a e Page 7-6 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE Coupler Installation WARNING Locknuts must be used with bolts to secure steering cables to coupler. Failure to adhere to this requirement could result in steering system failure. Slide coupler (a) onto steering cable ends and secure each steering cable to coupler with bolt (b) and locknut (c) as shown. Tighten to a torque of 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm). 51888 a b c b Installing Link Rod WARNING Steering link rod MUST BE secured between outboard steering arm and steering coupler, using special washer head bolt (10-14000) and two nylon insert locknuts (11-34863), as shown. Both special washer head bolt and nylon insert locknuts MUST BE tightened as specified. Lubricate hole in steering coupler, with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon. Assemble steering link rod to steering coupler, using 2 flat washers (one each side of coupler) and nylon insert locknut. Tighten locknut until it seats [DO NOT exceed 120 Ib. in. (13.5 Nm) of torque], then back nut off 1/4 turn. Lubricate ball joint in steering link rod with SAE 30W Motor Oil. Secure link rod to outboard steering arm, using special washer head bolt (10-14000) provided and nylon insert locknut as shown. Torque special bolt to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm), then torque locknut to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm). 28172a df b c e a-Steering Coupler b-Steering Link Rod c-Flat Washer (2) d-Nylon Insert Locknut - Torque until it seats [DO NOT exceed 120 lb. in. (13.5 Nm) of torque], then back nut off 1/4 turn e-Special Washer Head Bolt (10-14000) - Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm) f-Nylon Insert Locknut - Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm) 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 7-7 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE STEERING SYSTEM TENSION ADJUSTMENT IMPORTANT: After this dual steering cable attachment kit is installed, there must be proper tension in forward mounted steering cable tor this attachment kit to operate properly. Not enough tension will cause slack (or play) in steering system. Too much tension will cause steering cables to bind. Perform the following steps to ad- just for correct tension. Loosen adjustment nuts and pull steering cable mounting tube (by hand) away from end of steering cable (to remove slack in steering system). Tighten adjustment nuts against mounting bracket and check system for slack (play.) If steering system is too tight, readjust tube toward end of steering cable or, if too much slack (play) exists in system, readjust tube away from end of steering cable. Tighten nuts against mounting bracket and readjust, if necessary. 51887 b ac d a-Steering Cable Mounting Tube b-Adjustment Nuts c-Adjust Tube in This Direction to Remove Slack from Steering System d-Adjust Tube in This Direction to Reduce Tension from Steering System After steering system tension is adjusted correctly, tighten adjustment nuts against mounting bracket, to a torque of 35 Ib. ft. (47.5 Nm) and bend a tab lock washer against flat on each adjustment nut. 51887 acc b a-Steering Cable Mounting Tube b-Adjustment Nuts; Torque to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 Nm) c-Tab Lock Washer (Bend Against Flat on Each Adjustment Nut) Tighten steering cable attaching nuts of each steering cable to a torque of 35 Ib. ft. (47.5 Nm). 51889a b a-Cable Attaching Nut b-“V” Groove Page 7-8 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE NOTE: Cable attaching nuts with a “V” groove around the outer circumference of the nut are self locking and do not require locking sleeves. WARNING After installation is complete [and before operating outboard(s)], check that boat will turn right when steering wheel is turned right and that boat will turn left when steering wheel is turned left. Check steering thru full range (left and right) at all tilt angles to assure interference-free movement. Maintenance Instructions Maintenance inspection is owner’s responsibility and must be performed at intervals specified, following: Normal Service -Every 50 hrs. of operation or 60 days (whichever comes first) *Severe Service -Every 25 hrs. of operation or 30 days (whichever comes first) *Operation in a salt water area is considered “Severe Service.” 1. Carefully check steering system components for wear. Replace worn parts. 2. Check steering system fasteners to be sure that they are torqued to correct specifications. NOTE: Ride-Guide Steering Cables are lubricated at the factory and require no additional lubrication at initial installation. WARNING Core of each steering cable (transom end) must be fully retracted into cable housing before lubricating cable. If cable is lubricated while extended, hydraulic lock could occur. 3. With core of Ride-Guide Steering Cable (transom end) fully retracted, lubricate transom end of steering cables thru grease fittings (a) with 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-825407A2). Lubricate exposed portion of cable ends (b) with 2-4-C w/Teflon. 4. Lubricate pivot point (c) of steering link rod and ball joint (d) of link rod/steering coupler with SAE 30W Motor Oil. 5. Inspection and lubrication of steering head assembly (rotary or straight rack) should be performed once each year (by your Authorized Dealer) or whenever steering mount and/or steering head are disassembled, or if steering effort has increased. Lubricate with 2-4-C w/Teflon. 28170aa b c d 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 7-9 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE Ride Guide Steering Cable/Attaching Kit Installation (92876A6) Dual Cable - Dual Outboard WARNING Quicksilver Super Ride-Guide Steering (dual cables) MUST BE USED with this attaching kit. Failure to adhere to this requirement could result in steering system failure. Refer to “Quicksilver Accessories Guide” to determine correct length of steering cable and remote control cables. IMPORTANT: Steering cable and remote control cables MUST BE THE CORRECT LENGTH, sharp bends on too-short cables result in “kinks”; too-long cables require unnecessary bends and/or loops. Both conditions place extra stress on the cables and reduce the performance of the steering system. Installation Requirements IMPORTANT: The distance from each outboard’s centerline to the side of transom opening MUST BE a minimum of 16 in. (406 mm). This kit contains all necessary parts to connect both outboards to Ride-Guide Steering Cables for 23-1/2 in. thru 27-1/2 in. (597 mm thru 699 mm) outboard centerline spacing. If outboard centerline distance is other then specified, refer to end of this instruction manual for optional extension couplers. DETERMINE ROUTING OF STEERING CABLES Use “1” or “2”, following, to route steering cables: 1. Parallel cable routing: Cables routed together down starboard side of boat Refer to “Parallel Routed Steering Cables and Attaching Kit Installation,” immediately following. 2. Opposite side cable routing: One cable routed down starboard side of boat and one cable routed down port side of boat. Refer to “Opposite Side Routed Steering Cables and Attaching Kit Installation,” located on page 20 of this instruction manual. CAUTION With this kit installed, the upper (outboard) mounting bolts MUST BE installed so that hex head end of bolts is on the inside of boat transom, as illustrated. Failure to install upper mounting bolts, as shown in illustration, could result in interference between steering cable nut and ends of mounting bolts when outboard is tilted up. Page 7-10 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE Install upper bolts so that hex head end of bolts is on the inside of boat transom. Parallel Routed Steering Cables and Attaching Kit Installation (Both Steering Cables Routed Together Down Starboard Side of Boat) SUPER RIDE-GUIDE STEERING KIT INSTALLATION IMPORTANT: Steering cable must be installed into tilt tube of port outboard before outboard is mounted on boat transom. Both gear racks or rotary steering heads must be installed so that both steering cables will be routed together on the same side of the boat and will push-and-pull together. 1. Install Super Ride-Guide Steering Kit in accordance with instructions included with Super Ride-Guide Kit. 2. Make sure that both gear racks or rotary steering heads are installed so that both steering cables are routed together and will push-and-pull together. a b b a a-Straight Rack (Left); Rotary Steering (Right) b-Steering Cables (Install so that Both Cables Will Push and Pull Together) STEERING CABLE INSTALLATION STARBOARD OUTBOARD IMPORTANT: Mounting bracket for steering cable mounting tube MUST BE secured to outboard swivel bracket, using 5/8 in. (16 mm) long bolts supplied with this dual cable - dual outboard attaching kit. Secure mounting bracket for steering cable mounting tube, onto swivel bracket of starboard outboard. 28164a b cc a-Mounting Bracket for Steering Cable Mounting Tube b-Locking Retainers (2) c-Bolts (4) - 5/8 in. (16 mm) Long - Torque to 100 lb. in. (11.5 Nm), then Bend Corner Tabs of Locking Retainers Up and Against Flats on Each Bolt 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 7-11 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE WARNING Locking retainer corner tabs, MUST BE bent up and against flats on each bolt that secures mounting bracket for steering cable mounting tube to outboard swivel bracket, to prevent bolts from turning out. Install steering cable mounting tube into mounting bracket with 2 adjusting nuts and 2 locking tab washers. Be sure longer threaded end of tube is toward starboard side of boat. Temporarily adjust tube, so that longer threaded end of tube extends out the same distance as the outboard tilt tube. Do not tighten adjustment nuts at this time. 51891a b c d a-Steering Cable Mounting Tube (End of Tube with Longer Threads Toward Starboard Side of Boat) b-Mounting Bracket c-Locking Tab Washers (2) d-Adjustment Nuts (Flats of Nuts Facing Toward Locking Tab Washer) IMPORTANT: Lubricate inside of steering cable mounting tube with 2-4-C w/Teflon before installing steering cable. Lubricate inside of steering cable mounting tube (starboard outboard) with 2-4-C w/Teflon. Insert steering cable end (a) thru cable mounting tube (b) and thread steering cable attaching nut (c) onto tube hand tight. NOTE: Torque steering cable attaching nut only after final steering adjustments have been made. 51887 a bc Page 7-12 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE Place a mark (a) on steering cable mounting tube (b) 5/8 in. (16 mm) from end of mounting tube. Slide plastic spacer (c), O-ring (d) and cap (e) over steering cable. 51890 5/8” (16 mm) a b c d e Thread cap (e) onto steering cable mounting tube, up to mark (a). 51890a e STEERING CABLE INSTALLATION - PORT OUTBOARD IMPORTANT: Lubricate inside of port outboard’s tilt tube and rubber O-ring seal located inside tilt tube with 2-4-C w/Teflon, before installing steering cable. Lubricate inside of port outboard’s tilt tube and rubber O-ring seal (a) with 2-4-C w/Teflon. 51890 a Insert steering cable end (b) thru tilt tube (c) of port outboard and thread steering cable attaching nut (d) onto tilt tube hand tight. NOTE: Torque steering cable attaching nuts only after final steering adjustments have been made. 51887 b cd 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 7-13 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE STEERING LINK ROD INSTALLATION WARNING Steering link rods MUST BE secured between outboard steering arm and steering cable end, using special washer head bolt (10-14000) and two nylon insert locknuts (11-34863), as shown. Both special washer head bolt and nylon insert locknuts MUST BE tightened as specified. 50061 28166 e a b fd c e a b fd c a b f e a c e d a-Flat Washer (2 Each Link Rod) b-Nylon Insert Locknut - Torque Until it Seats [DO NOT Exceed 120 lb. in. (13.5 Nm) of Torque], Then Back Off 1/4 Turn c-Special Washer Head Bolt (10-14000) - Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm) d-Nylon Insert Locknut - Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm) e-Steering Link Rod f-Steering Cable End Lubricate holes in ends of steering cables, with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant. Assemble steering link rods to steering cable ends of each outboard, using flat washers and nylon insert locknuts. Tighten locknuts until they seat [DO NOT exceed 120 Ib. in. (13.5 Nm) of torque], then back nut off 1/4 turn. Lubricate ball joints in steering link rods with SAE 30W Motor Oil. Secure link rods to outboard steering arms, using special washer head bolts (10-14000) provided and nylon insert locknuts as shown. Torque special bolts to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm) then torque locknuts to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm). Page 7-14 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE STEERING ARM EXTENSION BRACKET INSTALLATION Secure a steering arm extension bracket to each out- board’s steering arm. 51889 a b cc d d a-Steering Arm (Port Outboard Shown) b-Extension Bracket c-Locking Retainer (2 Each Bracket) d-Bolts (2 Each Bracket) 1-1/4 in. (31.8 mm) Long - Torque to 23 lb. ft. (31 Nm), Then Bend Corner Tabs of Locking Retainers Up Against Flats on Each Bolt WARNING Locking retainer corner tabs MUST BE bent up and against flats on each bolt that secures extension bracket to outboard steering arm to prevent bolts from turning out. STEERING COUPLER ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION Position outboards so that they are facing straight forward. (Distance between threaded hole centers of steering arm extensions MUST BE equal to distance between propeller shaft centerlines.) Lubricate inside of rubber sleeves with 2-4-C w/Teflon and slide sleeves on steering coupler. Work rubber bushings onto threaded ends of steering eyes. Thread jam nut on starboard steering eye. Thread steering eyes equally into coupler, so that distance between hole centers of steering eye ball joints is equal to distance between threaded hole centers of steering arm extensions. Exposed threads of steering eyes MUST BE of equal length and threads MUST NOT extend out from coupler more than 2-3/4 in. (70 mm). 50061 c d e b a b d c a-Coupler b-Rubber Sleeve c-Steering Eye d-Rubber Bushing e-Jam Nut WARNING Both steering eyes must be threaded into coupler 3/4 in. (19 mm) minimum. Thread length of steering eye is 3-1/2 in. (89 mm), so exposed thread must not extend out of coupler more than 2-3/4 in. (70 mm). Failure to adhere to this requirement could result in steering system failure. 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 7-15 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE Lubricate ball joint in steering eyes, with SAE 30W Motor Oil. Assemble steering coupler between outboard steering arm extension brackets, using special washer head bolts (10-14000) provided and nylon insert locknuts as shown. IMPORTANT: With assembled steering coupler installed and before tightening special washer head bolts/locknuts, check outboard alignment. Distance between centers of special washer head bolts MUST BE equal to distance between propeller shaft center lines, for proper steering. It adjustment is necessary, temporarily remove special washer head bolt/locknut from one steering eye and turn eye in or out to correct alignment. Torque special washer head bolts to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm), then torque locknuts to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm). WARNING Both steering eyes MUST BE threaded into coupler 3/4 in. (19 mm) minimum, and jam nut must be tightened against coupler to prevent coupler from turning. Torque “jam” nut to 20 Ib. ft. (27 N·m). Tighten “jam” nut against coupler. Torque “jam” nut to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm). Spray Quicksilver Corrosion Guard on exposed threads of steering eyes and position rubber bushings and rubber sleeves to cover exposed threads of steering eyes. 50061 28167 f a f g g f c g h d b h f c e a d c h f a-Coupler b-Rubber Sleeve c-Steering Eye d-Rubber Bushing e-Jam Nut - Torque (Against Coupler) to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm) f-Special Washer Head Bolt (10-14000) - Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm) g-Nylon Insert Locknut - Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm) h-Steering Arm Extension Bracket Page 7-16 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE STEERING SYSTEM TENSION ADJUSTMENT (PARALLEL ROUTED STEERING CABLES) IMPORTANT: For proper operation of this dual cable - dual outboard steering installation, there MUST BE proper tension in the steering system. NOT ENOUGH tension will cause slack (play) in steering system. TOO MUCH tension will cause steering cables to bind. Perform the following steps to correctly adjust tension. Loosen adjustment nuts and pull steering cable mounting tube (by hand) away from end of steering cable (to remove slack in steering system). Tighten adjustment nuts against mounting bracket and check system for slack (play). If steering system is too tight, readjust tube toward end of steering cable or, if too much slack (play) exists in system, readjust tube away from end of steering cable. Tighten nuts against mounting bracket and readjust, if necessary. 51887 ba c d a-Steering Cable Mounting Tube b-Adjustment Nuts c-Adjust Tube in This Direction to Remove Slack from Steering System d-Adjust Tube in This Direction to Reduce Tension from Steering System After steering system tension is adjusted correctly, tighten adjustment nuts against mounting bracket, to a torque of 35 Ib. ft. (47.5 Nm) and bend a tab lock washer against a flat on each nut. 51887 c c a b a-Steering Cable Mounting Tube b-Adjustment Nuts Torque to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 Nm) c-Tab Lock Washer (Bend Against Flat on Each Adjustment Nut) Tighten steering cable attaching nuts of each steering cable to a torque of 35 Ib. ft. (47.5 Nm). 51887 a a-Cable Attaching Nut 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 7-17 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE WARNING After installation is complete [and before operating outboard(s)], check that boat will turn right when steering wheel is turned right and that boat will turn left when steering wheel is turned left. Check steering thru full range (left and right) at all tilt angles to assure interference-free movement. Adjust trim tabs of both outboards, as outlined in “Trim Tab Adjustment”, following. Opposite Side Routed Steering Cables and Attaching Kit Installation (One Cable Routed down Starboard Side of Boat and One Cable Routed down Port Side of Boat) SUPER RIDE-GUIDE STEERING KIT INSTALLATION IMPORTANT: Steering cable must be installed into tilt tube of port outboard before outboard is mounted on boat transom. Install Super Ride-Guide Steering Kit in accordance with instructions included with Super Ride-Guide Kit. STEERING CABLE INSTALLATION - STARBOARD OUTBOARD IMPORTANT: Mounting bracket for steering cable mounting tube MUST BE secured to outboard swivel bracket, using 5/8 in. (16 mm) long bolts supplied with this dual cable - dual outboard attaching kit. Secure mounting bracket for steering cable mounting tube, onto swivel bracket of starboard outboard. 28164 ab c d d a-Mounting Bracket for Steering Cable Mounting Tube b-“J” Clip - Supplied with Outboard c-Locking Retainers (2) d-Bolts (4) - 5/8 in. (16 mm) Long - Torque to 100 lb. in. (11.5 Nm), Then Bend Corner Tabs of Locking Retainers Up and Against Flats on Each Bolt. WARNING Locking retainer corner tabs MUST BE bent up and against flats on each bolt that secures mounting bracket for steering cable mounting tube, to prevent bolts from turning out. Install Steering Cable mounting tube into mounting bracket with 2 adjusting nuts and 2 locking tab washers. Verify longer threaded end of tube is toward center of boat transom. Page 7-18 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE Temporarily adjust tube, so that longer threaded end of tube extends out the same distance as the outboard tilt tube. Do not tighten adjustment nuts at this time. 51891 a b c d a-Steering Cable Mounting Tube (End of Tube with Longer Threads Toward Center of Boat Transom) b-Mounting Bracket c-Locking Tab Washers (2) d-Adjustment Nuts (Flats of Nuts Facing Toward Locking Tab Washer) IMPORTANT: Lubricate inside of steering mounting tube with 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-825407A12) before installing steering cable. Lubricate inside of steering cable mounting tube (starboard outboard) with 2-4-C w/Teflon. Insert steering cable end (a) (steering cable routed down port side of boat) thru cable mounting tube (b) and thread steering cable attaching nut (c) onto tube hand tight. NOTE: Torque steering cable attaching nut only after final steering adjustments have been made. 51887 a cb Place a mark (a) on steering cable mounting tube (b) 5/8 in (16 mm) from end of mounting tube. Slide plastic spacer (c), O-ring (d) and cap (e) over steering cable. 5/8,(16 mm) 51890 a bcde 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 7-19 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE Thread cap (e) onto steering cable mounting tube, up to mark (a). 51888a e STEERING CABLE INSTALLATION - PORT OUTBOARD IMPORTANT: Lubricate inside of port outboard’s tilt tube and rubber O-ring seal located inside tilt tube with 2-4-C w/Teflon, before installing steering cable. Lubricate inside of port outboard’s tilt tube and rubber O-ring seal (a) with 2-4-C w/Teflon. 51890 a Insert steering cable end (b) (steering cable routed down starboard side of boat) thru tilt tube (c) of port outboard and thread steering cable attaching nut (d) onto tilt tube hand tight. NOTE: Torque steering cable attaching nut only after final steering adjustments have been made. 51887 b c d STEERING LINK ROD INSTALLATION WARNING Steering link rods MUST BE secured between outboard steering arm and steering cable end, using special washer head bolt (10-14000) and two nylon insert locknuts (11-34863), as shown. Both special washer head bolt and nylon insert locknuts MUST BE tightened as specified. Lubricate holes in ends of steering cables, with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-825407A12). Assemble steering link rods to steering cable ends of each outboard, using flat washers and nylon insert locknuts. Tighten locknuts until they seat [DO NOT exceed 120 lb. in. (13.5 Nm) of torque], then back nut off 1/4 turn. Page 7-20 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE Lubricate ball joints in steering link rods with SAE 30W Motor Oil. Secure link rods to outboard steering arms, using special washer head bolts (10-14000) provided and nylon insert locknuts as shown. Torque special bolts to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm) then torque locknuts to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm). 50061 28165 a b f e a c e d a a b c d e f bf d c e a-Flat Washer (2 Each Link Rod) b-Nylon Insert Locknut - Torque Until it Seats [DO NOT Exceed 120 lb. in. (13.5 Nm) of Torque], Then Back Off 1/4 Turn c-Special Washer Head Bolt (10-14000) - Torque to 20 lb.ft. (27 Nm) d-Nylon Insert Locknut - Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm) e-Steering Link Rod f-Steering Cable End 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 7-21 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE STEERING ARM EXTENSION BRACKET INSTALLATION Secure a steering arm extension bracket to each out- board’s steering arm. 51889 b a cc d d a-Steering Arm (Port Outboard Shown) b-Extension Bracket c-Locking Retainer (2 Each Bracket) d-Bolts (2 Each Bracket) 1-1/4 in. (31.8 mm) Long - Torque to 23 lb. ft. (31 Nm), Then Bend Corner Tabs of Locking Retainers Up Against Flats on Each Bolt WARNING Locking retainer corner tabs, MUST BE bent up and against flats on each bolt that secures extension bracket to outboard steering arm, to prevent bolts from turning out. STEERING COUPLER ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION Position outboards so that they are facing straight forward. (Distance between threaded hole centers of steering arm extensions MUST BE equal to distance between propeller shaft centerlines.) Lubricate inside of rubber sleeves with 2-4-C w/Teflon and slide sleeves on steering coupler. Work rubber bushings onto threaded ends of steering eyes. Thread jam nut on starboard steering eye. Thread steering eyes equally into coupler, so that distance between hole centers of steering eye ball joints is equal to distance between threaded hole centers of steering arm extensions. Exposed threads of steering eyes MUST BE of equal length and threads MUST NOT extend out from coupler more than 2-3/4 in. (70 mm). 50061 c d e b a b d c a-Coupler b-Rubber Sleeve c-Steering Eye d-Rubber Bushing e-Jam Nut WARNING Both steering eyes must be threaded into coupler 3/4 in. (19 mm) minimum. Thread length of steering eye is 3-1/2 in. (89 mm), so exposed thread must not extend out of coupler more than 2-3/4 in. (70 mm). Failure to adhere to this requirement could result in steering system failure. Page 7-22 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE Lubricate ball joint in steering eyes with SAE 30W Motor Oil. Assemble steering coupler between outboard steering arm extension brackets, using special washer head bolts (10-14000) provided and nylon insert locknuts, as shown. IMPORTANT: With assembled steering coupler installed and before tightening special washer head bolts/locknuts, check outboard alignment. Distance between centers of special washer head bolts MUST BE equal to distance between propeller shaft center lines, for proper steering. If adjustment is necessary, temporarily remove special washer head bolt/locknut from one steering eye and turn eye in or out to correct alignment. Torque special washer head bolts to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm), then torque locknuts to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm). WARNING Both steering eyes MUST BE threaded into coupler 3/4 in. (19 mm) minimum, and jam nut must be tightened against coupler to prevent coupler from turning. Torque “jam” nut to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm). Tighten “jam” nut against coupler. Torque “jam” nut to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm). Spray Quicksilver Corrosion Guard on exposed threads of steering eyes and position rubber bushings and rubber sleeves to cover exposed threads of steering eyes. 50061 50061 28174 a f f g g a bd d c c e f h f h g h c f a-Coupler b-Rubber Sleeve c-Steering Eye d-Rubber Bushing e-Jam Nut - Torque (Against Coupler) to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm) f-Special Washer Head Bolt (10-14000) - Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm) g-Nylon Insert Locknut - Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm) h-Steering Arm Extension Bracket 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 7-23 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE STEERING SYSTEM TENSION ADJUSTMENT (PARALLEL ROUTED STEERING CABLES) IMPORTANT: For proper operation of this dual cable - dual outboard steering installation, there MUST BE proper tension in the steering system. NOT ENOUGH tension will cause slack (play) in steering system. TOO MUCH tension will cause steering cables to bind. Perform the following steps to correctly adjust tension. Loosen adjustment nuts and pull steering cable mounting tube (by hand) away from end of steering cable (to remove slack in steering system). Tighten adjustment nuts against mounting bracket and check system for slack (play). If steering system is too tight, readjust tube toward end of steering cable or, if too much slack (play) exists in system, readjust tube away from end of steering cable. Tighten nuts against mounting bracket and readjust, if necessary. 51887 ab cd a-Steering Cable Mounting Tube b-Adjustment Nuts c-Adjust Tube in This Direction to Remove Slack from Steering System d-Adjust Tube in This Direction to Reduce Tension from Steering System After steering system tension is adjusted correctly, tighten adjustment nuts against mounting bracket to a torque of 35 Ib. ft. (47.5 Nm) and bend a tab lock washer against a flat on each nut. 51887c c a b a-Steering Cable Mounting Tube b-Adjustment Nuts; Torque to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 Nm) c-Tab Lock Washer (Bend Against Flat on Each Adjustment Nut) Tighten steering cable attaching nuts of each steering cable to a torque of 35 Ib. ft. (47.5 Nm). NOTE: Cable attaching nuts with a “V” groove around outer circumference are self locking and do not require locking sleeves. WARNING After installation is complete [and before operating outboard(s)], check that boat will turn right when steering wheel is turned right and that boat will turn left when steering wheel is turned left. Check steering thru full range (left and right) at all tilt angles to assure interference-free movement. Adjust trim tabs of both outboards, as outlined in “Trim Tab Adjustment,” following. Page 7-24 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE Trim Tab Adjustment DUAL OUTBOARD - COUNTER ROTATION INSTALLATION 1. Shift outboard into neutral and make sure ignition key is at “OFF” position. 2. Remove plastic cap from rear of driveshaft housing and loosen bolt and trim tab. 3. Position trim tabs of both outboards straight to rear of outboard, so that tabs are aligned with gear housing centerline. 4. Tighten both trim tab bolts securely and replace plastic caps. No further adjustment will be required. DUAL OUTBOARD - NON COUNTER ROTATION INSTALLATION 1. Check trim tab position as follows: IMPORTANT: Initial trim tab setting for both outboards should be straight to rear of outboard, so that tabs are aligned with gear housing center line. Refer to “If necessary, adjust trim tab as follows,” following. a. Operate boat at normal cruise throttle setting and adjust trim to optimum setting. b. If boat pulls to the right (starboard), trailing edge of trim tab must be moved to the right (when viewing outboard from behind). If boat pulls to the left (port), trailing edge of trim tab must be moved to the left. 2. If necessary, adjust trim tab as follows: a. Shift outboard into NEUTRAL and make sure ignition key is at “OFF” position. b. Remove plastic cap from rear of driveshaft housing and loosen bolt and trim tab. IMPORTANT: Trim tabs MUST BE set in the same position on both outboards. c. If boat pulls to the right, adjust trailing edges of both trim tabs to the right. If boat pulls to the left, adjust trailing edges of both trim tabs to the left. d. Tighten both trim tab bolts securely and replace plastic caps. e. Operate boat per “Check trim tab position as follows,” preceding, to check trim tab setting. Readjust trim tabs, if necessary. Ride Guide Steering Attachment Extension Couplers Listed below are typical couplers available. Refer to the current Quicksilver Accessory Guide for specific coupler lengths and part numbers. Outboard Center Line Distance Required Coupler(s) Between Steering Eyes 22-1/2 in. thru 24-1/2 in. 12, (305 mm) Coupler (572 mm thru 622 mm) 23-1/2 in. thru 27-1/2 in. 15, (381 mm) Coupler (Supplied with this kit) (597 mm thru 699 mm) 26-1/2 in. thru 30-1/2 in. 18, (457 mm) Coupler (673 mm thru 755 mm) 30 in. thru 34 in. 9, (229 mm) Coupler and 12, (305 mm) Coupler (763 mm thru 864 mm) (Connected together with coupler link rod) 33 in. thru 37 in. 12, (305 mm) Coupler and 12, (305 mm) Coupler (838 mm thru 940 mm) (Connected together with coupler link rod) 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 7-25 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE WARNING When 2 couplers are connected together with coupler link rod, a lock washer must be used on each side of coupler link rod, and link rod must be torqued to 20 Ib. ft. (27 N·m) into end of each coupler. 51890 a b a c a-Couplers Connected Together b-Lock washers c-Coupler Link Rod [Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm) into End of Each Coupler] Maintenance Instructions Maintenance inspection is owner’s responsibility and must be performed at intervals specified, following: Normal Service - Every 50 hrs. of operation or 60 days (whichever comes first) *Severe Service - Every 25 hrs. of operation or 30 days (whichever comes first) *Operation in a salt water area is considered “Severe Service.” 1. Carefully check steering system components for wear. Replace worn parts. 2. Check steering system fasteners to be sure that they are torqued to correct specifications. NOTE: Ride-Guide Steering Cables are lubricated at the factory and require no additional lubrication at initial installation. WARNING Core of each steering cable (transom end) must be fully retracted into cable housing before lubricating cable. If cable is lubricated while extended, hydraulic lock of cable could occur. 3. With core of Ride-Guide Steering Cable (transom end) fully retracted, lubricate transom end of steering cables thru grease fittings with 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-825407A12). Lubricate exposed portion of cable ends with 2-4-C w/Teflon. 4. Lubricate pivot points of steering link rods and ball joints of link rods/steering coupler with SAE 30W Motor Oil. Page 7-26 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE 5. Inspection and lubrication of steering head assembly (rotary or straight rack) should be performed once each year (by your Authorized Dealer) or whenever steering mount and/or steering head are disassembled, or if steering effort has increased. Lubricate with 2-4-C w/Teflon. 28168a a b c d a a b c d Lubrication Points for Parallel Cable Routing Installations 28175 a a a a b c d b c d Lubrication Points for Opposite Side Cable Routing Installations a-Grease Fittings b-Cable Ends c-Pivot Points d-Ball Joints 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 7-27 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE Transom Mounted Ride Guide Attaching Kit Installation (73770A1) Attaching Kit Installation 1. Lubricate both holes in pivot block (Figure 1) with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon. 2. Place pivot block on pivot spacer and secure to transom bracket with 3/8 in. x 2-1/2 in. (9.5 mm x 63.5 mm) bolt, flat washer and locknut, as shown in Figure 1. Torque locknut to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm). a b cd e f g hi j k l Figure 1 a-Ride-Guide Cable b-Ride-Guide Yoke c-Pivot Block d-Pivot Spacer e-15 in. (381 mm) (Centerline of Attaching Kit Pivot to Centerline of Outboard) f-Pivot Attaching Locknut [Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)] g-Outboard Steering Arm h-“Clevis Kit” i-Ride-Guide Cable Attaching Locknut [Torque to 10 lb. ft. (13.5 Nm)] j-Bolt [3/8 in. x 2-1/2 in. (9.5 mm x 63.5 mm)] k-Flat Washer l-Transom Bracket Page 7-28 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE 3. Place Ride-Guide yoke on pivot block and secure with 7/16 in. x 1-3/4 in. (11.1 mm x 44.5 mm) bolt and locknut, as shown in Figures 1 and 2. Torque locknut to 10 Ib. ft. (13.5 Nm), then back off 1/4-turn. a b c d e fg Figure 2 a-Transom Backing Plate b-Bolt [5/16 in. x 3-1/4 in. (7.9 mm x 82.5 mm)] c-Locknut [Torque to 10 lb. ft. (13.5 Nm)] d-Ride-Guide Yoke Attaching Locknut [Torque to 10 lb. ft. (13.5 Nm)] Then Back Off 1/4-Turn e-2-3/8 in. (60.3 mm) Maximum Transom Thickness f-Bolt [7/16 in. x 1-3/4 in. (11.1 mm x 44.5 mm)] g-Ride-Guide Yoke 4. Install one cable tube jam nut onto steering cable tube. Place tab washer over Ride-Guide yoke, then insert cable tube thru tab washer and yoke. Install second cable tube jam nut onto cable tube but do not tighten at this time. (Figure 3) 5. Position transom attaching kit on transom as shown: a. Determine centerline of outboard, then measure 15 in. (38.1 cm) over from this centerline and draw a vertical line on transom. (Figure 1) 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 7-29 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE b. Position attaching kit on transom so that transom bracket is centered on the 15 in. (38.1 mm) (Figure 1) at a height where the center of Ride-Guide yoke is even with, or not more than 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) above top edge of transom. (Figure 3) a b c d e f f e g h i j k Figure 3 a-Ride-Guide Yoke b-0 in. to 1/2 in. (0 mm to 12.8 mm) (Center of Ride-Guide Yoke to Top of Transom) c-Top of Transom d-Transom Bracket e-Cable Tube Jam Nuts [Torque to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 Nm)] f-Tab Washer g-After Jam Nuts Are Torqued to Specification, Bend Locking Tabs against Nuts h-Cable Guide Tube i-Ride-Guide Cable Attaching Nut [Torque to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 Nm)] j-“Clevis Kit” k-Clevis Attaching Locknut [Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)] NOTE: When drilling thru transom, be sure that holes are drilled perpendicular to transom. 6. With attaching kit positioned as outlined preceding, use 3 holes in transom bracket as a guide and drill three 11/32 in. (8.7 mm) holes thru transom. 7. Use a marine-type sealer on three 5/16 in. x 3-1/4in. (7.9mm x 82.6mm) bolts. Secure attaching kit to transom, using transom backing plate, 3 bolts (with sealer) and 3 locknuts, installed as shown in Figure 2. Torque lock nuts to 10 Ib. ft. (13.5 Nm). STEERING CABLE INSTALLATION 1. Lubricate steering cable end with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-825407A12). 2. Install steering cable thru steering cable tube and secure to cable tube with cable attaching nut. (Figure 3) Do not tighten cable attaching nut at this time. 3. Attach Ride-Guide cable to outboard steering arm, using the proper “Clevis Kit.” In- stallation instructions for clevis are with “Clevis Kit.” 4. Adjust 2 large jam nuts on cable tube of attaching kit, so that steering wheel is in normal straight-driving position with outboard in straight-running position. Torque each jam nut to 35 Ib. ft. (47.5 Nm), then bend a side of tab washer against flat of each jam nut. (Figure 3) 5. Torque Ride-Guide cable attaching nut (which secures cable to guide tube) to 35 Ib. ft. (47.5 Nm). (Figure 3) Page 7-30 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE WARNING After installation is completed (and before operating outboard), check that boat will turn right when steering wheel is turned right and that boat will turn left when steering wheel is turned left. Check steering thru full range (left and right) at all tilt angles to assure interference-free movement. Maintenance Instructions Lubrication and maintenance inspection is owner’s responsibility and must be performed at intervals specified, following: Normal Service -Every 50 hrs. of operation or 60 days (whichever comes first) *Severe Service -Every 25 hrs. of operation or 30 days (whichever comes first) *Operation in a salt water area is considered “Severe Service.” CAUTION Core of steering cable must be fully retracted into cable housing when lubricating cable. If cable is lubricated while extended, hydraulic lock of cable could occur. 1. Lubricate outboard end of Ride-Guide steering cable (thru grease fitting - if equipped - next to cable attaching nut) with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon. NOTE: Ride-Guide steering cable is lubricated at the factory and requires no additional lubrication at initial installation. 2. Lubricate all steering system pivot points (and exposed portion of steering cable core) with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon. Lubricate at intervals specified preceding. 3. Carefully check steering system components for wear (at intervals specified, preceding). Replace worn parts. 4. Check steering system fasteners (at intervals specified, preceding) to be sure that they are torqued to correct specifications. (Figures 1, 2 and 3) 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999 Page 7-31 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE Clevis Attaching Kit Installation (A-70599A5) NOTE: This kit is used to attach Ride-Guide cable to outboard steering arm ONLY when “Transom Mounted Ride-Guide Attaching Kit” is being used. If Ride-Guide cable is installed thru outboard tilt tube, then “Steering Link Rod” must be used. Installation Instructions 1. Install clevis to steering cable as shown. 2. Lubricate 3/8 in. x 1-3/8 in. (9.5 mm x 34.9 mm) bolt (area without threads) with 2-4-C w/Teflon, then secure clevis to steering cable with this bolt and a locknut. Torque locknut (item “d”) to 10 Ib. ft. (13.5 Nm). a b c d e f g h i j a-Clevis b-Steering Cable c-Bolt [3/8 in. x 1-3/8 in. (9.5 mm x 34.9 mm)] d-Clevis to Steering Cable Locknut [Torque to 10 lb. ft. (13.5 Nm)] e-Bolt [3/8 in. x 1-1/4 in. (9.5 mm x 31.8 mm)] [Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)] f-Thin Washer [1/16 in. (1.6 mm) Thick] g-Spacer h-Thick Washer [1/8 in. (3.2 mm) Thick] i-Engine Steering Arm j-Clevis to Engine Locknut [Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)] 3. Lubricate spacer (supplied with this kit) with 2-4-C w/Teflon. 4. Attach clevis to top of outboard steering arm with a 3/8 in. x 1-1/4 in. (9.5 mm x 31.8 mm) bolt, thin washer, spacer, thick washer (thick washer must be installed between clevis and steering arm) and locknut, as shown. Torque bolt (item “e”) to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm), then torque locknut (item “j”) to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm). Maintenance Instructions Lubrication and maintenance inspection is owner’s responsibility and must be performed at intervals specified, following: Normal Service -Every 50 hrs. of operation or 60 days (whichever comes first) *Severe Service -Every 25 hrs. of operation or 30 days (whichever comes first) *Operation in a salt water area is considered “Severe Service.” 1. Carefully check steering system components (at intervals specified, preceding) for wear. Replace worn parts. 2. Check steering system fasteners (at intervals specified, preceding) to be sure that they are torqued to correct specifications. 3. Lubricate clevis pivot points with a drop of light oil. Lubricate at intervals specified, preceding. Page 7-32 90-855347R1 JANUARY 1999